MA2 BPP Study Text

MA2 - BPP Study Text - 2017
Managing Costs and Finances

Managing Costs and Finances (Association of Chartered Certified Accountants)
www.ACCAGlobalBox.com
Downloaded From "http://www.ACCAGlobalBox.com"
ACCA APPROVED
CONTENT PROVIDER
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
ACCA Approved L
Interactive Text B
O
Foundations in Accountancy
X
MA2 .
Managing Costs and Finances C
O
For exams from 1 September 2016
M
to 31 August 2017
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
Foundations in I
N
Accountancy T
E
R
A
C A
MA2 T
C
C
I A
MANAGING COSTS AND FINANCES
V
G
E L
O
T B
BPP Learning Media is an ACCA Approved Content Provider for the Foundations in E A
Accountancy qualification. This means we work closely with ACCA to ensure this
L
Interactive Text contains the information you need to pass your exam.
X
In this Interactive Text, which has been reviewed by the ACCA examination team,
we:
T B
 Highlight the most important elements in the syllabus and the key skills you O
need
X
 Signpost how each chapter links to the syllabus and the study guide
 Provide lots of exam focus points demonstrating what the examination team
.
will want you to do C
 Emphasise key points in regular fast forward summaries O
 Test your knowledge in quick quizzes
M
 Examine your understanding in our practice question bank
 Reference all the important topics in our full index
BPP’s Practice & Revision Kit also supports this paper.
FOR EXAMS FROM 1 SEPTEMBER 2016 TO 31 AUGUST 2017
MA2 MANAGING COSTS AND FINANCES
First edition November 2011 A note about copyright

Fifth edition March 2016
Dear Customer
ISBN 9781 4727 4613 9
(Previous ISBN 9781 4727 3523 2) What does the little © mean and why does it matter?
e-ISBN 9781 4727 4629 0 Your market-leading BPP books, course materials and e-
learning materials do not write and update themselves. People
write them on their own behalf or as employees of an
British Library Cataloguing-in-Publication Data
organisation that invests in this activity. Copyright law protects
A catalogue record for this book
is available from the British Library their livelihoods. It does so by creating rights over the use of
the content.
Published by Breach of copyright is a form of theft – as well as being a
criminal offence in some jurisdictions, it is potentially a
BPP Learning Media Ltd
serious breach of professional ethics.
BPP House, Aldine Place
London W12 8AA With current technology, things might seem a bit hazy but,
A www.bpp.com/learningmedia
basically, without the express permission of BPP Learning
Media:
C  Photocopying our materials is a breach of copyright
Printed in the United Kingdom by
C  Scanning, ripcasting or conversion of our digital
materials into different file formats, uploading them to
A
RICOH UK Limited
Unit 2 facebook or e-mailing them to your friends is a breach
Wells Place of copyright
Merstham You can, of course, sell your books, in the form in which you
G
RH1 3LG have bought them – once you have finished with them. (Is this
fair to your fellow students? We update for a reason.) Please
L Your learning materials, published by BPP Learning
Media Ltd, are printed on paper obtained from
note the e-products are sold on a single user licence basis: we
do not supply 'unlock' codes to people who have bought them
O traceable sustainable sources. secondhand.
And what about outside the UK? BPP Learning Media strives
B All our rights reserved. No part of this publication may to make our materials available at prices students can afford
by local printing arrangements, pricing policies and
A be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or
transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, partnerships which are clearly listed on our website. A tiny
minority ignore this and indulge in criminal activity by illegally
L mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of BPP Learning photocopying our material or supporting organisations that do.
Media. If they act illegally and unethically in one area, can you really
trust them?
We are grateful to the Association of Chartered Certified
B Accountants for permission to reproduce past Copyright © IFRS Foundation
examination questions. The suggested solutions in the
O practice answer bank have been prepared by BPP
Learning Media Ltd, except where otherwise stated.
All rights reserved. Reproduction and use rights are strictly
limited. No part of this publication may be translated,
X BPP Learning Media is grateful to the IASB for
reprinted or reproduced or utilised in any form either in whole
or in part or by any electronic, mechanical or other means,
. permission to reproduce extracts from the International
Financial Reporting Standards including all
now known or hereafter invented, including photocopying and
recording, or in any information storage and retrieval system,
C International Accounting Standards, SIC and IFRIC
Interpretations (the Standards). The Standards together
without prior permission in writing from the IFRS Foundation.
Contact the IFRS Foundation for further details.
O with their accompanying documents are issued by:
The IFRS Foundation logo, the IASB logo, the IFRS for SMEs
The International Accounting Standards Board (IASB)
M
logo, the “Hexagon Device”, “IFRS Foundation”, “eIFRS”,
30 Cannon Street, London, EC4M 6XH, United “IAS”, “IASB”, “IFRS for SMEs”, “IASs”, “IFRS”, “IFRSs”,
Kingdom. Email: info@ifrs.org Web: www.ifrs.org “International Accounting Standards” and “International
Disclaimer: The IASB, the International Financial Financial Reporting Standards”, “IFRIC” “SIC” and “IFRS
Reporting Standards (IFRS) Foundation, the authors Taxonomy” are Trade Marks of the IFRS Foundation.
and the publishers do not accept responsibility for any
Further details of the Trade Marks including details of
loss caused by acting or refraining from acting in
countries where the Trade Marks are registered or applied for
reliance on the material in this publication, whether
are available from the Licensor on request.
such loss is caused by negligence or otherwise to the
maximum extent permitted by law.
©
BPP Learning Media Ltd
2016
ii www.ACCAGlobalBox.com
CONTENTS
Contents
Page
Introduction
Helping you to pass ....................................................................................................................... v
Chapter features ........................................................................................................................... vi
Studying MA2 ............................................................................................................................. vii
The Computer Based Examination ................................................................................................xvii
Tackling Multiple Choice Questions.............................................................................................. xviii
Part A Management information

1 Management information ....................................................................................................... 3
2
3
The role of information technology ........................................................................................ 27
Cost classification ............................................................................................................... 37
A
4
5
Cost behaviour ................................................................................................................... 47
Information for comparison .................................................................................................. 63
C
6 Reporting management information ...................................................................................... 85 C
Part B Cost recording
7 Materials ......................................................................................................................... 103
A
8 Labour............................................................................................................................. 135
9 Expenses ......................................................................................................................... 155
Part C Costing techniques

G
10 Overheads and absorption costing....................................................................................... 171 L
11 Marginal costing and absorption costing .............................................................................. 197
12 Cost bookkeeping.............................................................................................................. 213 O
B
13 Job, batch and service costing ........................................................................................... 233
14 Process costing................................................................................................................. 249
Part D Decision making A

15
16
Cost-volume-profit (CVP) analysis ....................................................................................... 269
Short-term decisions ......................................................................................................... 287 L
17 Capital investment appraisal .............................................................................................. 301
Part E Cash management

18 Cash and cash flows ......................................................................................................... 327 B
19
20
Cash and treasury management.......................................................................................... 341
Forecasting cash flows ...................................................................................................... 349
O
21
22
Investing surplus funds ...................................................................................................... 381
Raising finance from a bank............................................................................................... 395
X
.
C
Appendix: Mathematical tables ............................................................................................................ 413
Practice question bank ......................................................................................................................... 417
O
Practice answer bank ........................................................................................................................... 441
M
Index ..................................................................................................................................................... 457
Review form
www.ACCAGlobalBox.com iii
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
iv www.ACCAGlobalBox.com
INTRODUCTION
Helping you to pass
BPP Learning Media – ACCA Approved Content Provider

As an ACCA Approved Content Provider, BPP Learning Media gives you the opportunity to use study
materials reviewed by the ACCA examination team. By incorporating the examination team's comments
and suggestions regarding the depth and breadth of syllabus coverage, the BPP Learning Media
Interactive Text provides excellent, ACCA-approved support for your studies.
The PER alert!

To become a Certified Accounting Technician or qualify as an ACCA member, you not only have to pass
all your exams but also fulfil a practical experience requirement (PER).To help you to recognise areas of
the syllabus that you might be able to apply in the workplace to achieve different performance
objectives, we have introduced the ‘PER alert’ feature. You will find this feature throughout the A
Interactive Text to remind you that what you are learning in order to pass your Foundations in
Accountancy and ACCA exams is equally useful to the fulfilment of the PER requirement. C
Your achievement of the PER should be recorded in your online My Experience record. C
Tackling studying
A
Studying can be a daunting prospect, particularly when you have lots of other commitments. The
different features of the Interactive Text, the purposes of which are explained fully on the Chapter G
features page, will help you whilst studying and improve your chances of exam success.
L
Developing exam awareness O
Our Interactive Texts are completely focused on helping you pass your exam. B
Our advice on Studying MA2 outlines the content of the paper, the recommended approach to studying
and any brought forward knowledge you are expected to have.
A
Exam focus points are included within the chapters to highlight when and how specific topics might be L
examined.
Using the Syllabus and Study Guide B

You can find the syllabus and study guide on page ix of this Interactive Text. O
X
Testing what you can do
Testing yourself helps you develop the skills you need to pass the exam and also confirms that you can
.
recall what you have learnt. C
We include Questions – lots of them – both within chapters and in the Practice Question Bank, as well
as Quick Quizzes at the end of each chapter to test your knowledge of the chapter content.
O
M
www.ACCAGlobalBox.com v
Chapter features
Each chapter contains a number of helpful features to guide you through each topic.
Topic list Tells you what you will be studying in this chapter and the
relevant section numbers, together with the ACCA syllabus
references.
Introduction Puts the chapter content in the context of the syllabus as a
whole.
Study Guide Links the chapter content with ACCA guidance.
A Fast Forward Summarises the content of main chapter headings,

allowing you to preview and review each section easily.
C
C EXAMPLE Demonstrates how to apply key knowledge and techniques.
A Key Term Definitions of important concepts that can often earn you
easy marks in exams.
G
L Exam Focus
Point
Tell you how specific topics may be examined.
O
B Formula Formulae which have to be learnt.
A
L PER Alert This feature gives you a useful indication of syllabus areas
that closely relate to performance objectives in your
Practical Experience Requirement (PER).
B Question Gives you essential practice of techniques covered in the

chapter.
O
X Chapter Roundup A full list of the Fast Forwards included in the chapter,
. providing an easy source of review.
C A quick test of your knowledge of the main topics in the

Quick Quiz
O chapter.
M Found at the back of the Interactive Text with more exam-

Exam Question Bank
style chapter questions. Cross referenced for easy
navigation.
vi www.ACCAGlobalBox.com
INTRODUCTION
Studying MA2
How to Use this Interactive Text

Aim of this Interactive Text
To provide the knowledge and practice to help you succeed in the examination for Paper MA2
Managing Costs and Finances.
To pass the examination you need a thorough understanding in all areas covered by the syllabus and
teaching guide.
A
Recommended approach
C
(a) To pass you need to be able to answer questions on everything specified by the syllabus and
teaching guide. Read the Text very carefully and do not skip any of it. C
(b) Learning is an active process. Do all the questions as you work through the Text so you can be A
sure you really understand what you have read.
(c) After you have covered the material in the Interactive Text, work through the Exam Question
Bank, checking your answers carefully against the Exam Answer Bank. G
(d) Before you take the exam, check that you still remember the material using the following quick L
revision plan.
(i) Read through the chapter topic list at the beginning of each chapter. Are there any gaps
O
in your knowledge? If so, study the section again. B
(ii) Read and learn the key terms. A
(iii) Look at the exam focus points. These show the ways in which topics might be examined.
L
(iv) Read the chapter roundups, which are a summary of the fast forwards in each chapter.
(v) Do the quick quizzes again. If you know what you're doing, they shouldn't take long.
B
This approach is only a suggestion. You or your college may well adapt it to suit your needs.
Remember this is a practical course.
O
(a) Try to relate the material to your experience in the workplace or any other work experience you X
may have had.
.
(b) Try to make as many links as you can to other papers at the Introductory and Intermediate levels.
C
For practice and revision use BPP Learning Media’s Practice & Revision Kit and Passcards. O
M
www.ACCAGlobalBox.com vii
What MA2 is about

The aim of this syllabus is to develop a knowledge and understanding of the principles and techniques
used in recording, analysing and reporting costs and revenues for internal management purposes. It
covers management information, cost recording, costing techniques, decision making and cash
management.
Brought forward knowledge

You will need to have a good knowledge of basic management accounting from Paper MA1
Management Information. Brought forward knowledge is identified throughout the Interactive Text. The
examiner will assume you know this material and it may form part of an exam question.
Approach to examining the syllabus

A Paper MA2 is a two-hour paper. It can be taken as a written paper or a computer based examination.
The questions in the computer based examination are objective test questions – multiple choice, number
C entry and multiple response. (See page xvii for frequently asked questions about computer based
examinations.)
C The written examination is structured as follows:
A Number of marks
50 compulsory multiple choice questions of two marks each 100
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
viii www.ACCAGlobalBox.com
INTRODUCTION
Syllabus and Study guide
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
www.ACCAGlobalBox.com ix
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
x www.ACCAGlobalBox.com
INTRODUCTION
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
www.ACCAGlobalBox.com xi
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
xii www.ACCAGlobalBox.com
INTRODUCTION
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
www.ACCAGlobalBox.com xiii
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
xiv www.ACCAGlobalBox.com
INTRODUCTION
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
www.ACCAGlobalBox.com xv
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
xvi www.ACCAGlobalBox.com
INTRODUCTION
The Computer Based Examination

Computer based examinations (CBEs) are available for the first seven Foundations in Accountancy
papers (not papers FAU, FTX or FFM), in addition to the conventional paper based examination.
Computer based examinations must be taken at an ACCA CBE Licensed Centre.
How does CBE work?

 Questions are displayed on a monitor
 Candidates enter their answer directly onto the computer
 Candidates have two hours to complete the examination
 When the candidate has completed their examination, the final percentage score is calculated
and displayed on screen
A
 Candidates are provided with a Provisional Result Notification showing their results before leaving
the examination room C
 The CBE Licensed Centre uploads the results to the ACCA (as proof of the candidate's C
performance) within 72 hours
A
 Candidates can check their exam status on the ACCA website by logging into myACCA
Benefits G
 Flexibility as a CBE can be sat at any time L
 Resits can also be taken at any time and there is no restriction on the number of times a
candidate can sit a CBE
O
 Instant feedback as the computer displays the results at the end of the CBE B
 Results are notified to ACCA within 72 hours A
L
CBE question types
 Multiple choice – choose one answer from four options
 Multiple response – select more than one response by clicking the appropriate tick boxes
B
 Multiple response matching – select a response to a number of related statements by choosing O
one option from a number of drop down menus
X
 Number entry – key in a numerical response to a question
.
 Multiple task questions – a series of short questions related to one scenario. Question formats
could include number entry, drop-down lists, multiple choice, multiple response and hotspot. C
O
For more information on computer-based exams, visit the ACCA website. M
www.accaglobal.com/en/student/Exams/Computer-based-exams.html
www.ACCAGlobalBox.com xvii
Tackling Multiple Choice Questions

MCQ's are part of all Foundations in Accountancy exams.
The MCQs in your exam contain four possible answers. You have to choose the option that best
answers the question. The three incorrect options are called distracters. There is a skill in answering
MCQs quickly and correctly. By practising MCQs you can develop this skill, giving you a better chance of
passing the exam.
You may wish to follow the approach outlined below, or you may prefer to adapt it.
Step 1 Skim read all the MCQs and identify what appear to be the easier questions.
Step 2 Attempt each question – starting with the easier questions identified in Step 1. Read
A the question thoroughly. You may prefer to work out the answer before looking at the
options, or you may prefer to look at the options at the beginning. Adopt the method
C that works best for you.
C
Step 3 Read the four options and see if one matches your own answer. Be careful with
A numerical questions as the distracters are designed to match answers that incorporate
common errors. Check that your calculation is correct. Have you followed the
requirement exactly? Have you included every stage of the calculation?
G
L Step 4 You may find that none of the options matches your answer.
 Re-read the question to ensure that you understand it and are answering the
O requirement
B  Eliminate any obviously wrong answers
A  Consider which of the remaining answers is the most likely to be correct and
select the option
L
Step 5 If you are still unsure make a note and continue to the next question
B Step 6 Revisit unanswered questions. When you come back to a question after a break you
O often find you are able to answer it correctly straight away. If you are still unsure have
a guess. You are not penalised for incorrect answers, so never leave a question
X unanswered!
.
C After extensive practice and revision of MCQs, you may find that you recognise a question when you sit
the exam. Be aware that the detail and/or requirement may be different. If the question seems familiar
O read the requirement and options carefully – do not assume that it is identical.
M Tempting though it might be, don’t try to predict where the correct answers might fall based on any kind
of pattern you think you might perceive in this section. The distribution of the correct answers do not
follow any predictable pattern in this exam!
xviii www.ACCAGlobalBox.com
A
C
part C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
Management information .
C
O
M
www.ACCAGlobalBox.com 1
PART A: MANAGEMENT INFORMATION
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
2 www.ACCAGlobalBox.com
C H A P T E R
A
Cost and management accounting systems provide
information to managers to help them make decisions Management C
about their business. This introductory chapter explains C
the purpose of management information, the nature of
the decision-making process and the qualities that
information A
management information should have to be of value.
Management information may come from sources within
the organisation or from external sources, and it may be G
financial or non-financial in nature. Accountants
specialise in providing financial information. This chapter L
O
explains the role of the trainee accountant in providing
management information and the main elements of
information about costs. These will be described in more
detail in later chapters.
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
TOPIC LIST REFERENCE
1 Management information A1 (a), (b)

2 Sources of management information A1 (c)
3 Recording management information A2 (a)
4 The role of the trainee accountant A1 (f)
5 Costs in outline A2 (c)
6 Costs in detail A1 (d), A2 (c), (e)
7 Product costing A2 (f)
8 Cost codes A2 (d)
Study Guide Intellectual level

A Management Information
1 Management information requirements
(a) Describe the purpose of management information: planning, K

control and decision-making
(b) Describe the features of useful management information K
(c) Describe the nature, source and importance of both financial K

and non-financial information for managers
(d) Describe management responsibilities for cost, profit and K
investment and their effect on management information and
performance measurement
(f) Explain the role of the trainee accountant K
A 2 Cost accounting systems
C (a) Explain the relationship between the cost/management K
C accounting system and the financial accounting/management
information systems (including integrated and interlocking
A bookkeeping systems)
(c) Identify the documentation required, and the flow of S
documentation, for different cost accounting transactions
G (d) Explain and illustrate the use of codes in categorising and
processing transactions (including sequential, hierarchical,
K
L block, faceted and mnemonic coding methods)

(e) Explain and illustrate the concept of cost units S
O
(f) Describe the different methods of costing final outputs and S
B their appropriateness to different types of business
A organisation
B 1 Management information
O
X The purpose of management information is to help managers to manage resources efficiently and
effectively, by planning and controlling operations and by allowing informed decision-making.
.
C 1.1 Purpose of management information
O The successful management of any organisation depends on information. For example, consider the
following problems and what management information would be useful in solving these problems.
M
CHAPTER 1 // MANAGEMENT INFORMATION
Problem 1 A company wishes to launch a new product. The company's pricing policy is
to set the price at total cost + 20%. What should the price of the product
be?
In order to make the pricing decision, management need information about

the cost of the product.
Problem 2 A company's bottle making machine has a fault and the company has to
decide whether to repair the machine, to buy a new machine or to hire a
machine. If the company aims to minimise costs, which decision should
management take?
In order to decide which decision to make, management need cost

information about for each alternative. A
C
Problem 3 A company is trying to plan its production schedule for the next year with the C
aim of holding as little inventory as possible but still meeting sales demand.
How many products should the company plan to make each month? A
In order to plan production, management need information about: G

 Sales volume per month L
 Trends in sales volumes for the past few years
 Maximum production output per month
O
B
Problem 4 Budgeted production costs for January were as follows: A
$ L
Raw materials 100,000
Labour 50,000
Overheads 15,000 B
Total 165,000
Budgeted production volume 700,000 units
O
In order to meet profit targets, the actual production costs cannot be more X
than 5% more than the budgeted cost. How can management control .
production costs to make sure they are in line with budget?
C
In order to control production costs, management need information about:
O
 Actual production volume M
 Actual costs for raw materials, labour and overheads
In solving these and a wide variety of other problems, management need information.
Management require information to help them to plan and control operations and to make informed
decisions.
1.1.1 Planning
Planning involves establishing an objective or identifying a problem and then choosing a strategy to
achieve the objective or alleviate the problem.
In a most basic sense, planning means formulating ways of proceeding.

There are four steps in the planning process.
Step 1 Establish an objective or identify a problem.
Step 2 Develop solutions or strategies which might contribute towards achieving the objective
or alleviating the problem.
Step 3 Collect and analyse relevant date about each alternative solution or strategy.
A
C Step 4 Make a decision about which strategy or solution to take. State the expected outcome of
the decision and then check that the expected outcome meets the objective or alleviates
C the problem in STEP 1.
A  An objective is the aim or goal of an organisation.

 A strategy is a possible course of action that might enable an organisation to achieve its
G objectives.
L
Management have to plan for both the short term and the long term. A long-range plan is necessary in
O order to anticipate any future needs or opportunities that require action to be taken either now or in the
B future. For example, management may need to consider building a new factory to meet anticipated
increased demand for a product. Management should constantly be thinking ahead. They should never
A be surprised by any gradual developments. Planning therefore involves converting the organisation's
long-term objectives into a succession of short-term plans. One such short-term plan is the annual
L budget.
1.1.2 Control
B Control is the action of monitoring something in order to keep it on course.
O
Control is the action of monitoring something in order to keep it on course. Most companies will set out
X a plan for a future period (for example, a budget) and then compare the actual results during the period
. with the budget. Any deviations from the budget can then be identified and corrected as necessary. Such
deviations are known as variances.
C
1.1.3 Decision-making
O Decision-making means choosing between various alternatives. Decision-making and planning are
M linked: you decide to plan in the first place and the plan you make is a collection of decisions.
Managers at all levels within an organisation take decisions. Decision-making always involves a choice
between alternatives and it is the role of the trainee accountant to provide information so that
management can reach an informed decision. It is therefore useful if trainee accountants understand the
decision-making process so that they can supply the appropriate type of management information.
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
QUESTION Planning and control
X
Mr and Mrs Average need to go to the supermarket to buy food and other household items. They make a
.
list beforehand which sets out all the things they need. As they go round the supermarket they tick off C
the items on the list. If any particular item is not available they choose an alternative from the range on
the shelves. They also buy a bottle of wine and two bars of chocolate. These were not on their original O
list.
M
(a) What part or parts of this activity would you describe as planning?
(b) There are several examples of decision making in this story. Identify three of them.
(c) What part or parts of this activity would you describe as control?
ANSWER
We would describe making the list as planning, but making the list is also an example of decision
making, since Mr and Mrs Average have to decide what items will go on the list. Ticking off the items is
control and choosing alternatives is 'control action' involving further decision making.
You should be able to answer the various parts of this question without further help.
1.2 The qualities of good management information

Good management information should be:
Accurate
Complete
Cost-beneficial
User-targeted
Relevant
Authoritative
Timely
Easy to use
Good management information helps managers make informed decisions. The qualities of good
information are outlined below – in the form of a mnemonic 'accurate'.
A Quality Example
C Accurate
A Figures should add up, the degree of rounding should be appropriate, there
C should be no mistakes.
A C Complete Information should include all relevant information – information that is correct
but excludes something important is likely to be of little value. For example
external data or comparative information may be required.
G C Cost-beneficial It should not cost more to obtain the information than the benefit derived from
L having it.
User-targeted
O U The needs of the user should be borne in mind, for instance senior managers
may require summaries.
B Relevant Information that is not relevant should be omitted.
R
A
L A Authoritative The source of the information should be reputable and reliable.
Timely The information should be available when it is needed.

B T
O E Easy to use Information should be clearly presented, not excessively long, and sent using the
right communication channel (email, telephone, intranet, hard-copy report etc).
X
.
2 Sources of management information
C
O There are many sources of management information. Management information can come from sources
M internal or external to the organisation and can be both financial and non-financial.
2.1 Internal sources of management information

The main internal sources of management information within an organisation include the following.
 Accounting records – including the cost and management accounts
 Personnel records
 Production department records
 Detailed time records (especially in service organisations)
The accounting records include receivables ledgers, payables ledgers, general ledgers, cash books and
so on. These records provide a detailed history of an organisation's monetary transactions.
Some of this information is of great value outside the accounts department, for example sales
information for the marketing function.
To maintain the integrity of its financial accounting records, an organisation of any size will have
systems for and controls over transactions. These also give rise to valuable information. An inventory
control system is the classic example. Besides actually recording the monetary value of purchases and
inventory in hand for external financial reporting purposes, the system will include purchase orders,
goods received notes, goods returned notes and so on, and these can be analysed to provide
management information about speed of delivery, say, or the quality of supplies.
Organisations also record information to allow them to carry out operations and administrative functions,
such as the following.
(a) Information relating to personnel will be held, probably linked to the payroll system. Additional
information may be obtained from this source if, say, a project is being costed and it is necessary
to ascertain the availability and rate of pay of different levels of staff, or the need for and cost of
recruiting staff from outside the organisation.
A
(b) Much information will be generated by the production department about machine capacity, fuel
consumption, movement of people, materials, and work in progress, set up times, maintenance C
requirements and so on. A large part of the traditional work of cost accounting involves ascribing
costs to the physical information produced by this source. C
(c) Many service businesses – notably accountants and solicitors – need to keep detailed records of A
the time spent on various activities, both to justify fees to clients and to assess the efficiency of
operations.
G
2.2 External sources of management information
L
An organisation's files are full of invoices, letters, advertisements and so on received from customers and
suppliers. These documents provide information from an external source. There are many occasions O
when an active search outside the organisation is necessary.
B
(a) A primary source of information is, as the term implies, as close as you can get to the origin of
an item of information: the eyewitness to an event, the place in question, the document under A
scrutiny.
L
(b) A secondary source, again logically enough, provides 'second-hand' information: books, articles,
verbal or written reports by someone else.
B
2.3 Financial and non-financial information for management
Most organisations require the following types of information for management:
O
 Financial
X
 Non-financial .
 A combination of financial and non-financial information
Suppose that the management of ABC Co have decided to provide a canteen for their employees.
C
(a) The financial information required by management might include the following:
O
 Canteen staff costs  Capital costs M
 Costs of subsidising meals  Costs of heat and light
(b) The non-financial information might include the following:
 Management comment on the effect on employee morale of the provision of canteen
facilities
 Details of the number of meals served each day
 Meter readings for gas and electricity
 Attendance records for canteen employees
ABC Co could now combine financial and non-financial information to calculate the average cost to the
company of each meal served, thereby enabling them to predict total costs depending on the number of
employees in the work force.
Management accounting is concerned with non-financial as well as financial information. For example,
managers of business organisations need to know whether employee morale has increased due to
introducing a canteen, whether the bread from particular suppliers is fresh and the reason why the
canteen staff are demanding a new dishwasher. This type of non-financial information will play its part
in planning, controlling and decision-making and is therefore just as important to management as
financial information is.
Non-financial information must therefore be monitored as carefully, recorded as accurately and taken
into account as fully as financial information. There is little point in a careful and accurate recording of
total canteen costs if the recording of the information on the number of meals eaten in the canteen is
uncontrolled and therefore produces inaccurate information.
While management accounting is mainly concerned with the provision of financial information to aid
A planning, control and decision-making, the trainee accountant cannot ignore any non-financial
C influences which might be present.
C
3 Recording management information
A
 Financial accounts are prepared for individuals external to an organisation whereas management
G accounts are prepared for internal managers of an organisation. There are a number of
differences between financial accounts and management accounts.
L  Cost accounting produces information that is used for both financial accounting and management
O accounting.
B 3.1 Financial accounts and management accounts

A Management information provides a common source from which is drawn information for two groups of
L people.
(a) Financial accounts are prepared for individuals external to an organisation.
 Shareholders  Suppliers
B  Customers  Tax authorities
O (b) Management accounts are prepared for internal managers of an organisation.
X The information used to prepare financial accounts and management accounts is the same. The
differences between the financial accounts and the management accounts arise because the information
. is analysed in different ways.
C Financial accounts Management accounts
O Financial accounts are prepared primarily for external Management accounts can be generated for
M use and detail the performance of an organisation over

a defined period and the state of affairs at the end of
any period of time, (eg hourly, daily, weekly)
and are used to aid management plan and
that period. control the organisation's activities and to help
the decision-making process.
Limited companies must, by law, prepare financial There is no legal requirement to prepare
accounts. management accounts.
Financial accounts Management accounts
The format of published financial accounts is The format of management accounts is

determined by law and by accounting standards. In entirely at management discretion: no strict
principle the accounts of different organisations can rules govern the way they are prepared or
therefore be easily compared. presented. Each organisation can devise its
own management accounting system and
format of reports.
Financial accounts concentrate on the business as a Management accounts can focus on specific
whole, aggregating revenues and costs from different areas of an organisation's activities.
operations, and are an end in themselves. Information may be produced to aid a decision
rather than to be an end product of a
decision.
Most financial accounting information is of a monetary Management accounts incorporate non- A

nature. monetary measures. Management may need
to know, for example, tons of aluminium C
produced, monthly machine hours, or miles C
travelled by salesmen.
Financial accounts present an essentially historic Management accounts are both an historical
A
picture of past operations. record and a future planning tool.
G
3.2 Cost accounts
L
Cost accounting and management accounting are terms which are often used interchangeably. It is not
correct to do so. O
Cost accounting aims to capture an organisation’s costs of operations, departments or products, and B
then classify and analyse this information to produce cost reports. Cost accounting produces information
that is used for both financial accounting and management accounting. A
The purpose of management accounting is to provide managers with whatever information they need to L
assist them in planning and controlling operations and in decision-making.
Cost accounting is part of management accounting. Cost accounting provides a bank of data for the
management accountant to use. Cost accounts aim to establish the following. B
(a) The cost of goods produced or services provided. O
(b) The cost of a department or work section. X
(c) What revenues have been. .
(d) The profitability of a product, a service, a department, or the organisation in total.
C
(e) Selling prices with some regard for the costs of sale.
O
(f) The value of inventories of goods (raw materials, work in progress, finished goods) that are still
held in store at the end of a period, thereby aiding the preparation of a statement of financial M
position of the company's assets and liabilities.
(g) Future costs of goods and services (costing is an integral part of budgeting (planning) for the
future).
It would be wrong to suppose that cost accounting systems are restricted to manufacturing operations,
although they are probably more fully developed in this area of work. Service industries, government
departments and welfare activities can all make use of cost accounting information. Within a
manufacturing organisation, the cost accounting system should be applied not only to manufacturing
but also to administration, selling and distribution, research and development and all other
departments.
Performance Objective 2 requires you to make appropriate use of IT applications to communicate

clearly, concisely and persuasively. The knowledge you will gain in this chapter (along with that you
will gain from Chapter 2) will help you demonstrate your competence in this area.
4 The role of the trainee accountant

You have now had a brief introduction to management information, cost accounting and management
accounting. Let us now consider the role of the trainee accountant in a cost accounting system.
Remember that the trainee accountant will have access to a large amount of information which is all
recorded in the cost accounting records. With so much information, it is inevitable that many people are
going to want to ask the trainee accountant lots of questions!
A
So, what sort of questions is the trainee accountant going to provide answers for? Well, here are a few
C examples:
C (a) What has the cost of goods produced or services provided been?
(b) What has the cost of operating a department been?
A (c) What have revenues been?
All of these questions may relate to different periods. For example, if someone wants to know what
revenues have been for the past ten years, the trainee accountant will need to extract this information
G from the cost accounting records. It is important therefore that the cost accounting system is capable of
L analysing such information.
O If the trainee accountant knows all about the costs incurred or revenues earned, he may also be asked to
do the following types of task:
B (a) To assess how profitable certain products or departments are.
A (b) To review the costs of products.
L (c) To put a value to inventories of goods (such as raw materials) which are unsold at the end of a
period. The valuation of inventory is a very important part of cost accounting.
In order for the trainee accountant to provide all of this information, the organisation must have a cost
B accounting system which is capable of analysing cost information quickly and easily.
O The trainee accountant may also need to provide information on future costs of goods and services. This
is an integral part of the planning or budgeting process.
X By comparing current costs with budgeted costs, the trainee accountant should be able to highlight
. areas which show significant variances. These variances should then be investigated.
C Most cost accounting systems should be capable of producing regular performance statements, though
the trainee accountant himself is likely to be the person producing them, and distributing them to the
O relevant personnel.
M The role of a trainee accountant in a cost accounting system is therefore fairly varied. The role is likely to
include spending much time providing answers to the many questions which may be directed at the trainee
accountant (such as those that we have considered here).
5 Costs in outline
Let us suppose that in your hand you have a red pen which you bought in the shop for 50c. Why does
the shop charge 50c for it? In other words what does that 50c represent?
From the shop's point of view the cost can be split into two.
Price paid by shop to wholesaler Z
Shop's 'mark-up' Y
50c
If the shop did not charge more for the pen than he paid for it (Z) there would be no point in him selling
it. The mark-up itself can be split into further categories.
Pure profit X
Amount paid to shop assistants
Expenses of owning and operating a shop (rent, electricity, cleaning and so on)
X
X
A
Y C
The shop's profit is the amount he personally needs to live: it is like your salary. Different shops have C
different ideas about this: this is why you might pay 60c for an identical pen if you went into another
shop. The shop’s expenses are amounts that have to be paid, whether or not the shop sells you a pen, A
simply to keep the shop going. Again, if other shops have to pay higher rent than our shop, this might
be reflected in the price of pens.
The amount paid to the wholesaler can be split in a similar way: there will be a profit element and G
amounts to cover the costs of running a wholesaling business. There might also be a cost for getting the
pen from the wholesaler's premises to the shop and, of course, there will be the amount paid to the
L
manufacturer. O
The majority of the remainder of this Text takes the point of view of the manufacturer of products since
his costs are the most diverse. If you understand the costing that a manufacturer has to do, you will
B
understand the costing performed by any other sort of business. Let us go on to have a look at costs in A
detail.
L
6 Costs in detail
B
 A cost unit is a unit of product or service which has costs attached to it. The cost unit is the O
basic control unit for costing purposes.
X
 Direct costs can be traced directly to cost units.
 Overheads (indirect costs) cannot be identified directly with any one product because they are
.
incurred for the benefit of all products rather than for any one specific product. C
 Cost centres are the essential building blocks of a costing system. They act as a collecting place O
for overheads before they are analysed further.
M
6.1 Production costs
Look at your pen and consider what it consists of. There is probably a red plastic cap and a little red
thing that fits into the end, and perhaps a yellow plastic sheath. There is an opaque plastic ink holder
with red ink inside it. At the tip there is a gold plastic part holding a metal nib with a roller ball.
Let us suppose that the manufacturer sells pens to wholesalers for 20c each. How much does the little
ball cost? What share of the 20c is taken up by the little red thing in the end of the pen? How much did
somebody earn for putting it there?
To elaborate still further, the manufacturer probably has machines to mould the plastic and do some of
the assembly. How much does it cost, per pen, to run the machines: to set them up so that they
produce the right shape of moulded plastic? How much are the production line workers' wages per pen?
How much does the plastic cost?
These costs of materials or wages, known as direct costs because they can be traced directly to specific
units of production, could be calculated and recorded on a unit cost card which records how the total
cost of a unit (in this instance, a pen) is arrived at.
PEN - UNIT COST CARD

Direct materials $ $
Yellow plastic X
Red plastic X
Opaque plastic X
Gold plastic X
Ink X
A Metal X
X
C Direct labour
C Machine operators' wages
Manual assembly staff wages
X
X
A X
X
Direct expenses
Machinery – depreciation X
G – power and fuel costs X
X
L Total direct cost (or prime cost) X
O Overheads (production)
Manufacturing cost (or factory cost)
X
X
B Overheads (administration, distribution and selling)
Total cost
X
X
A Don't worry if you are a bit unsure of the meaning of some of the terms in the unit cost card above as we
L will be looking at them in detail as we work through the Text.
6.2 Cost units

B A cost unit is a unit of product or service which has costs attached to it. The cost unit is the basic
O control unit for costing purposes.
X
The only difficult thing about this is that a cost unit is not always a single item. It might be a batch of
. 1,000 if that is how the individual items are made. In fact, a cost per 1,000 is often more meaningful
C information, especially if calculating a cost for a single item gives a very small amount such as 0.003c.
Examples of cost units are a construction contract, a batch of 1,000 pairs of shoes, a passenger
O kilometre (in other words, the transportation of a passenger for a kilometre).
M QUESTION Cost units

Suggest suitable cost units which could be used to aid control within the following organisations.
(a) A hotel with 50 double rooms and 10 single rooms
(b) A hospital
(c) A road haulage business
ANSWER
(a)  Guest/night
 Bed occupied/night
 Meal supplied
(b)  Patient/night
 Operation
 Outpatient visit
(c)  Tonne/kilometre
 Kilometre
6.3 Cost centres

Cost centres are the essential 'building blocks' of a costing system. They are a production or service
location, function, activity or item of equipment. They act as a collecting place for overheads before they
are analysed further.
A cost centre might be a place such as a regional office, a function such as human resources, a person A
or an item of equipment such as a printing machine which incurs costs. Cost centres are whatever is
most useful for a business in order to control costs and apportion them to cost units.
C
Cost centres may vary in nature, but what they have in common is that they incur costs. It is therefore
C
logical to collect costs initially under the headings of the various different cost centres that there may be
in an organisation. Then, when we want to know how much our products cost, we simply find out how
A
many cost units have been produced and share out the costs incurred by that cost centre amongst the
cost units.
G
EXAM FOCUS POINT L
Many students confuse cost units and cost centres – don’t make that mistake! Remember – a cost O
centre is something that incurs costs as it operates (for example a factory). A cost unit is the ultimate
product or service to which the cost centre costs are allocated.
B
A
Taking the factory cost centre example, cost units are the products that are manufactured in the factory
L
and therefore have the factory costs allocated to them.
A cost centre is also known as a responsibility centre. A responsibility centre is a department or
organisational function whose performance is the direct responsibility of a specific manager. Other
B
responsibility centres found in an organisation are as follows. O
(a) A profit centre is accountable for costs and revenues. Profit centre managers should normally X
have control over how revenue is raised and how costs are incurred. Often, several cost centres
will comprise one profit centre. .
(b) A revenue centre is accountable for revenues only. Revenue centre managers should normally C
have control over how revenues are raised.
(c) An investment centre is a profit centre with additional responsibilities for capital investment and
O
possibly for financing, and whose performance is measured by its return on investment. M
6.4 Overheads
Overheads (or indirect costs) include costs that go into the making of the pen that you do not see when
you dismantle it. You can touch the materials and you can appreciate that a combination of man and
machine put them together. It is not so obvious that the manufacturer has had to lubricate machines
and employ foremen to supervise the assembly staff. He also has to pay rent for his factory and for
somewhere to house his inventory of materials, and he has to pay someone to buy materials, recruit
labour and run the payroll. Other people are paid to deliver the finished pens to the wholesalers; still
others are out and about persuading wholesalers to buy pens, and they are supported at head office by
staff taking orders and collecting payments.
In addition certain costs that could be identified with a specific product are classified as overheads and
not direct costs. Nails used in the production of a cupboard can be identified specifically with the
cupboard. However, because the cost is likely to be relatively insignificant, the expense of tracing such
costs does not justify the possible benefits from calculating more accurate direct costs. Instead of
keeping complex and time consuming records which might enable us to trace such costs directly to
specific units of production, we try to apportion them and other overheads (indirect costs) to each cost
unit in as fair a way as possible.
Overheads are the biggest problem for cost accountants because it is not easy to tell by either looking at
or measuring the product, what overheads went into getting it into the hands of the buyer. Overheads, or
indirect costs, unlike direct costs, will not be identified with any one product because they are incurred
for the benefit of all products rather than for any one specific product.
Make sure that you understand the distinction between direct and indirect costs, as it is a very important
part of your studies.
A 6.5 Direct and indirect costs

C To summarise so far, the cost of an item can be divided into the following cost elements.
C (a)
(b)
Materials
Labour
A (c) Expenses
Each element can be split into two, as follows.
Materials = Direct materials + Indirect materials
G + + +
L Labour = Direct labour + Indirect labour
O + + +
B Expenses = Direct expenses + Indirect expenses
A Total cost = Direct cost Overhead
L QUESTION Costs
List all of the different types of cost that a large supermarket might incur. Arrange them under headings
B of labour, materials used and other expenses.
O ANSWER
X Labour Materials Expenses
. Petrol station staff
Car park attendant
Saleable inventories
Carrier bags
Heating
Lighting
C Check-out staff
Supervisors
Other packaging
Cleaning materials
Telephone
Post
O Delicatessen staff Bakery ingredients Stationery
Bakery staff Rent
M Shelf fillers Business rates
Warehouse staff Water rates
Cleaners Vehicle running costs
Security staff Advertising
Administrative staff Discounts
Managers Bank charges
Delivery staff Waste disposal
Maintenance staff
6.6 Fixed costs and variable costs

Costs are either variable or fixed, depending upon whether they change when the volume of production
changes.
One other important distinction is that between fixed costs and variable costs.
(a) If you produce two identical pens you will use twice as many direct materials as you would if you
only produced one pen. Direct materials are in this case a variable cost. They vary according to
the volume of production.
(b) If you oil your machines after every 1,000 pens have been produced, the cost of oil is also a
variable cost. It is an indirect material cost that varies according to the volume of production.
(c) If you rent the factory that houses your pen-making machines you will pay the same amount of
rent per annum whether you produce one pen or 10,000 pens. Factory rental is an indirect
expense and it is fixed no matter what the volume of activity is.
A
The examples in (b) and (c) are both indirect costs, or overheads, but (b) is a variable overhead and (c)
is a fixed overhead. The example in (a) is a variable direct cost. Direct costs usually are variable C
although they do not have to be.
C
Students often get confused about this point. Variable cost is not just another name for a direct cost.
The distinctions that can be made are as follows. A
(a) Costs are either variable or fixed, depending upon whether they change when the volume of
production changes.
G
(b) Costs are either direct or indirect, depending upon how easily they can be traced to a specific
unit of production. L
O
QUESTION Fixed and variable costs
Are the following likely to be fixed or variable costs?
B
(a) Charges for telephone calls made
A
(b) Charges for rental of telephone L
(c) Annual salary of the chief accountant
(d) Managing director's subscription to the Institute of Directors
(e) Cost of materials used to pack 20 units of product X into a box
B
ANSWER O
(a) Variable X
(b) Fixed
(c) Fixed .
(d)
(e)
Fixed
Variable
C
O
M
7 Product costing
Job, batch and process costing are methods used to cost end products.
7.1 Job costing

There are several different ways of arriving at a value for the different cost elements (material, labour
and expenses) which make up a unit cost of production. The most straightforward case is where the
thing to be costed is a one-off item. For example, a furniture maker may make a table, say, to a
customer's specific requirements. From start to finish the costs incurred to make that table are
identifiable. It will cost so much for the table top, so much for the legs, and so on. This form of costing
is known as job costing.
7.2 Batch costing

An item like a pen, however, will be produced as one of a batch of identical items, because it would
clearly be uneconomical to set up the machinery, employ labour and incur overheads to produce each
pen individually. There might be a production run of, say, 5,000 pens. The cost of producing 5,000
pens would be calculated and if we wanted to know the cost of one pen we would divide this total by
5,000. The answer would however be a fraction of a cent and this is not very meaningful information.
This method of costing is called batch costing and it applies to many everyday items. So far as costing
techniques are concerned, job and batch costing are much the same.
7.3 Process costing

A Another approach can be used when the product results from a series of continuous or repetitive
operations or processes, and is not distinguishable as a separate unit of product until the final stage. For
C example oil refining, brewing, sugar refining or chemical processing.
C The output of one process becomes the input to the next until the finished product is made in the final
process. It is not possible to build up cost records of the cost per unit of output because production in
A progress is an indistinguishable homogenous mass.
There is often a loss in process due to spoilage, wastage, evaporation and so on.
G 7.4 Service costing

L Service organisations do not make or sell tangible goods. Service costing is used by organisations
O operating in a service industry (for example electricians, hotels, rail companies) or by organisations
wishing to establish the cost of services carried out by some of their departments (for example the staff
B canteen, computer department or distribution).
A 7.5 Accounting for overheads

L Whether job costing, batch costing or process costing is used, there is still a problem in attributing to
units of product the overhead costs like factory rental, canteen costs and head office lighting. The pros
and cons of trying to work out an amount per unit for such costs are open to debate. Most businesses
B actually do try to do this in practice, and one very good reason for doing so is to make sure that all costs
O are covered when prices are set. Apportionment of production overheads is required for inventory
valuation.
X This practice of working out an amount per unit for overheads is known as absorption costing.
. Absorption costing is a technique that is used in conjunction with the product costing methods described
above.
C
O QUESTION Costing methods
For each of the items listed below decide which type of costing method would be used. Mark an X in the
M appropriate column.
Job Batch Process
Suit (off the peg)
Suit (tailored)
Soap
Yoghurt
House decoration
Car alarm
Paper
Poster
Audit
ANSWER
Job Batch Process
Suit (off the peg) X
Suit (tailored) X
Soap X
Yoghurt X
House decoration X
Car alarm X
Paper X
Poster X
Audit X
Tutor note. It is assumed that soap, yoghurt and paper runs are continuous. However, there could be a
case for batch costing for different scents, flavours or sizes respectively.
In addition, one off specialised posters for a specific customer could be job costing.
A
C
C
8 Cost codes
A
A cost code is a brief reference designed to help with the classification of items by assisting with entry,
collection and analysis.
G
Once costs have been classified, a coding system can be applied to make it easier to manage the cost
data, both in manual systems and in computerised systems.
L
A cost code is a brief reference designed to help with the classification of items by assisting with entry,
O
collection and analysis. B
Coding systems can take many forms, but an efficient and effective coding system should incorporate
the following features.
A
(a) The code must be easy to use and communicate. L
(b) Each item should have a unique code.
(c) The coding system must allow for expansion. B
(d) The code should be flexible so that small changes in a cost's classification can be incorporated
without major changes to the coding system itself.
O
(e) The coding system should provide a comprehensive system, whereby every recorded item can be
X
suitably coded. .
(f) The coding system should be brief, to save clerical time in writing out codes and to save storage
space in computer memory and on computer files. At the same time codes must be long enough
C
to allow for the suitable coding of all items. O
(g) The likelihood of errors going undetected should be minimised. M
(h) Code numbers should be issued from a single central point. Different people should not be
allowed to add new codes to the existing list independently.
(i) Codes should be uniform (that is, have the same length and the same structure) to assist in the
detection of missing characters and to facilitate processing.
(j) The coding system should avoid problems such as confusion between I and 1, O and 0 (zero), S
and 5 and so on.
(k) The coding system should, if possible, be significant (in other words, the actual code should
signify something about the item being coded).
(l) If the code consists of alphabetic characters, it should be derived from the item's description or
name (that is, mnemonics should be used).
8.1 Types of code

There are many different types of code that can be used.
(a) Sequential (or progressive) codes
Numbers are given to items in ordinary numerical sequence, so that there is no obvious
connection between an item and its code. For example:
000042 4cm nails
000043 Office stapler
000044 Hand wrench
A (b) Block (group classification) codes
C These are an improvement on simple sequences codes, in that a digit (often the first one)
indicates the classification of an item. For example:
C 4NNNNN Nails
A 5NNNNN Screws
6NNNNN Bolts
G (Note. 'N' stands for another digit; 'NNNNN' indicates there are five further digits in the code.)
L (c) Mnemonic codes
O Meaning of mnemonic is a learning technique to aid the memory. Under this type of coding the
code means something, it may be an abbreviation of the object being coded. A well-known
B example of this type of code is the three letter coding used for airports. For example:
LAX Los Angeles SIN Singapore
A CAI Cairo LHR London Heathrow
L
(d) Hierarchical codes
In a hierarchical coding system each digit represents a classification, and each digit further to the
B right represents a smaller subset than those to the left. For example:
O 3 = Screws 32 = Round headed screws
X 31 = Flat headed screws 322 = Steel (round headed) screws
. (e) Faceted codes

C These are a refinement of group classification codes, in that each digit of the code gives
O information about an item. For example:

(i) The first digit: 1 Nails
M 2 Screws
3 Bolts
etc…
(ii) The second digit: 1 Steel
2 Brass
3 Copper
etc…
(iii) The third digit: 1 50mm
2 60mm
3 75mm
etc…
A 60mm steel screw would have a code of 212.

Unlike a simple hierarchical system, faceted classification gives users the ability to find items
based on more than one criteria. For example, users shopping for building materials may be
most interested in browsing by a particular type of item (screws, nails) while others are more
interested in browsing by a particular material (steel, brass, copper).
A coding system does not have to be structured entirely on any one of the above systems. It can mix the
various features according to the items which need to be coded.
8.2 Simple example

An illustration of the use of a four digit code to apply code numbers to consumable stores might be as
follows.
Department 2
Cost centre 1 2 3 4
Consumable stores 2109 2209 2309 2409 A
The four-digit codes above indicate the following.
C


The first digit, 2, refers to department 2
The second digit, 1, 2, 3 or 4, refers to the cost centre which incurred the cost C
 The last two digits, 09, refer to 'materials costs, consumable stores'
A
QUESTION Codes
Using the above code, describe the expenditure that is represented by the code number 6209. G
L
ANSWER
 The first digit, 6, refers to department 6
O
 The second digit, 2, refers to cost centre 2 B
 The last two digits, 09, refer to 'material costs, consumable stores'
Therefore the code number 6209 depicts the use of consumable stores which are to be charged to cost
A
centre 2 within department 6. L
8.3 Example: numerical coding account system B

Each account in use needs to be classified by the use of coding. A suggested computer-based four-digit O
numerical coding account system is set out as follows. X
Basic structure Code number Allocation .
(a) First division 1000 – 4999 This range provides for cost accounts and is divided into C
four main departmental sections with ten cost centre
subsections in each department, allowing for a maximum O
of 99 accounts in each cost centre
M
Second division 1000 – 1999 Department 1
2000 – 2999 Department 2
Third division 000 – 099 Facility for ten cost centres in each department
100 – 199
200 – 299
Basic structure Code number Allocation
and so on
Fourth division Breakdown of costs in each cost centre
01 – 39 Direct costs
40 – 79 Indirect costs
80 – 99 Spare capacity
(b) 5000 – 5999 This range provides for the following.
(i) Revenue accounts
(ii) Work in progress accounts
A (iii) Finished goods accounts
C (iv) Cost of sales accounts
C (v) General expenses accounts
A (vi) Statement of profit or loss (Income statement)
(c) 6000 – 6999 This range provides for individual stores items
(d) 7000 – 7999 This range provides for individual receivable accounts
G
(e) 8000 – 8999 This range provides for individual payable accounts
L
(f) 9000 – 9999 This range is used for statement of financial position
O accounts including the following.
B (i) Stores control account
A (ii) Receivables' control account
L (iii) Payables' control account
An illustration of the coding of direct labour (grade T) might be as follows.

B Department 2
Cost centre 1 2 3 4
O Direct labour (grade T) 2109 2209 2309 2409
X The four digit code is explained as follows.
. (a) The first digit, 2, refers to department 2.

(b) The second digit 1, 2, 3 or 4 refers to the cost centre which incurred the cost.
C (c) The last two digits, 09, refer to 'direct labour costs, grade T'.
O Obviously systems that you come across in practice will exhibit different features. The above describes
only broad characteristics that are likely to be typical of all such systems.
M
8.4 The advantages of a coding system
(a) A code is usually briefer than a description, thereby saving clerical time in a manual system and
storage space in a computerised system.
(b) A code is more precise than a description and therefore reduces ambiguity.
(c) Coding facilitates data processing.
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 The purpose of management information is to help managers to manage resources efficiently and
effectively, by planning and controlling operations and by allowing informed decision-making.
 Planning involves establishing an objective or identifying a problem and then choosing a strategy to
achieve the objective or alleviate the problem.
 Control is the action of monitoring something in order to keep it on course.
 Good management information should be Accurate, Complete, Cost-beneficial, User-targeted, Relevant,

Authoritative, Timely, Easy to use.
 There are many sources of management information. Management information can come from sources
internal or external to the organisation and can be both financial and non-financial.
 Financial accounts are prepared for individuals external to an organisation whereas management
accounts are prepared for internal managers of an organisation. There are a number of differences
A
between financial accounts and management accounts. C
 Cost accounting produces information that is used for both financial accounting and management C
accounting.
 A cost unit is a unit of product or service which has costs attached to it. The cost unit is the basic
A
control unit for costing purposes.
 Direct costs can be traced directly to specific units of production. G
 Overheads (indirect costs) cannot be identified with any one product because they are incurred for the L
benefit of all products rather than for any one specific product.
 Cost centres are the essential building blocks of a costing system. They act as a collecting place for
O
overheads before they are analysed further. B
 Costs are either variable or fixed, depending upon whether they change when the volume of production A
changes.
L
 Job, batch and process costing are methods used to cost end products.
 A cost code is a brief reference designed to help with the classification of items by assisting with entry,
collection and analysis. B
O
1 Define the terms data and information. X
QUICK QUIZ
2 The eight main qualities of good information are:

 ……………………….
.
 ………………………. C


……………………….
……………………….
O
 ………………………. M
 ……………………….
 ……………………….
 ……………………….
3 Secondary sources of information include documents or reports written for a specific purpose.
True
False
4 In terms of cost accounting, information is most likely to be used for (1) ……………………….,
(2) ………………………. or (3) ………………………. .
5 What is a cost unit?
6 Which cost elements make up overheads?

7 When preparing reports, what are the five key points to remember.
(1) ……………………….
(2) ……………………….
(3) ……………………….
(4) ……………………….
(5) ……………………….
8 Sources of useful data may be:
1 External
2 Internal
3 Financial
4 Non-financial
Which of the above sources may be used by a trainee accountant?
A A
B
1, 2 and 3 only
2, 3 and 4 only
C C 2 and 3 only
D all four sources
C 9 Which of the following statements about cost and management accounting are true?
A 1 Cost accounting cannot be used to provide inventory valuations for external financial reporting
2 There is a legal requirement to prepare management accounts
3 The format of management accounts may vary from one business to another
G 4 Management accounting provides information to help management make business decisions
A 1 and 2
L B 1 and 4
O C
D
2 and 3
3 and 4
B 10 Which of the following are features of an efficient and effective cost coding system?
A 1
2
Codes need to be complex to include all items
Each code must have a combination of alphabetic and numeric characters
L 3 Codes for a particular type of item should be consistent in length and structure
A 1 only
B 3 only
B C
D
1 and 2
2 and 3
O
X
.
C
O
M
1 Data is the raw material for data processing. Information is data that has been processed in such a way
ANSWERS TO QUICK QUIZ
as to be meaningful to the person who receives it. Information is anything that is communicated.
2  Accurate
 Complete
 Cost-beneficial
 User-targeted
 Relevant
 Authoritative
 Timely
 Easy to use.
3 False. Secondary information sources would include items that have not been prepared for a specific
purpose (these would be primary information sources).
A
4 (1) Planning
(2) Control C
(3) Decision-making
C
5 A unit of product which has costs attached to it. The cost unit is the basic control unit for costing
purposes. A
6  Indirect materials


Indirect labour
Indirect expenses
G
7 (1) Title L
(2)
(3)
Who is the report to
Who is the report from
O
(4) Date B
(5) Subject
8 D
A
9 D
L
10 B
B
Now try ... O
Attempt the questions below from the Exam Question Bank X
Number .
Q1 C
Q2 O
Q3 M
Q4
Q5
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
C H A P T E R
A
Information technology (IT) is used extensively for
collecting, analysing and communicating data and The role of information C
management information. This chapter explains the role C
of IT and the main IT elements in a management
information system. Much of the content of this chapter
technology A
may well be familiar to you already.
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
1 Role of information technology A1 (e)

2 Capturing and processing cost and management accounting data A2 (g)
3 Storing cost and management accounting data A2 (g)
4 Outputting cost and management accounting data A2 (g)
5 Management information systems A2 (a)

A Management Information
1 Management information requirements
(e) Explain the role of information technology in management K

information
2 Cost accounting systems
(a) Explain the relationship between the cost/management K

accounting system and the financial accounting/management
information systems (including interlocking and integrated
bookkeeping systems)
(g) Describe methods of capturing, processing, storing and K
outputting cost and management accounting data by
A computer
C
C
A
1 Role of information technology
G Computers are widely used for data processing because they have certain advantages over humans.
L 

Speed
Accuracy
O  Volume and complexity
 Access to information
B
A Here is a very simple example of a data processing model.
B
O
X
. The processing of business data can be illustrated by a person working at their desk dealing with
matters from their in-tray.
C (a) A person receives input from the in-tray, which must be dealt with.
O (b) The person may have a procedures manual or have learned a set of rules which are applied to do
M the work. Tools such as a calculator or a PC may also be used.
(c) To process data from the in-tray, it may be necessary to refer to other information held on file
(either paper or computer-based files).
(d) As a result of doing the work, the person may:
(i) Produce output, perhaps a report or a completed routine task.
(ii) Add to the information held on file, or change the information to bring it up to date.
Data processing is essentially the same, no matter whether it is done manually or by computer. The
input, process, output, storage steps apply to manual and computerised processing.
CHAPTER 2 // THE ROLE OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
1.1 Advantages of computers

Computers are widely used for data processing because they have certain advantages over humans.
(a) Speed. Computers can process data much more quickly than a human. This means that using a
computer to process large volumes of data should be cheaper than doing the work manually. As
computer costs have fallen, this cost advantage of the computer has increased.
The ability to process data more quickly means that a computer can produce more timely
information, when information is needed as soon as possible.
(b) Accuracy. If set-up and programmed correctly, computers are generally accurate, whereas
humans are prone to error. Errors in computer processing occur if the people involved inputting
data or programming software have made errors, or if faults are present in the computer
hardware.
(c) Volume and complexity. As businesses grow and become more complex, their data processing
requirements increase in volume and complexity too. More managers need better quality
information. More transactions have to be processed. The volume of processing required is A
beyond the capability of even the largest clerical workforce to do manually. Clearing banks, for
example, would be unable to function without electronic data processing to ease the demands on
C
their workforce. C
(d) Access to information. The use of databases and the ability to link a number of users via some
form of network improves the distribution of information within and beyond the organisation.
A
However, the 'manual' or 'human' method of data processing is more suitable when human judgement is
involved in the work. For example, the human brain stores a lifetime of experiences and emotions that G
influence decisions and it is capable of drawing on them and making connections between them when
making decisions. L
O
2 Capturing and processing cost and management accounting data B
Stages of data input A
 Origination of data L
 Transcription of data
 Data input
The collection of data and its subsequent input to the computer can be a time-consuming and costly
B
task. The computer will only accept data which is in machine-sensible form, data held on a source O
document must be manually input to produce a computer file.
The stages of data input are as follows.
X
(a) Origination of data (transactions giving rise to data which needs to be recorded and processed).
.
(b) Transcription of data onto a paper document suitable for operators to refer to while keying in C
data.
O
(c) Data input.
M
The ideal methods of data collection and input are those which minimise the following.
 The time needed to record the original data, and transmit, prepare and input the data to the
computer
 Costs
 Errors
2.1 Direct data entry with a keyboard

The principal method of direct data entry is by means of a keyboard.
2.1.1 Keyboard layout and functions

A basic keyboard includes the following.
 Ordinary typing keys used to enter data or text
 A numeric key pad for use with the built-in calculator
 Cursor control keys (basically up/down/left/right keys to move the cursor)
 A number of function keys for use by the system and application software
In addition to the function keys, there are special keys that are used to communicate with the operating
programs, to let the computer know that you have finished entering a command, that you wish to
correct a command and so on. Nothing appears at the cursor point when these keys are used, but they
A affect operations on screen.
C 2.2 The VDU

C A VDU (or monitor) displays text and graphics and serves a number of purposes.
A 

It allows the operator to carry out a visual check on what he or she has keyed in
It helps the operator to input data by providing 'forms' on the screen for filling in
 It displays output such as answers to file enquiries
 It gives messages to the operator
G Graphical user interfaces have become the principal means by which humans communicate with
L machines. Features include the following:
O (a) Windows. This basically means that the screen can be divided into sections or 'windows' of
flexible size which can be opened and closed. This enables two or more documents to be viewed
B and edited together, and sections of one to be inserted into another. This is particularly useful for
A word processed documents and spreadsheets, which are too large for the VDU screen.
(b) Icons. An icon is an image of an object used to represent an abstract idea or process. In software
L design, icons may be used instead of numbers, letters or words to identify and describe the
various functions available for selection, or files to access. A common icon is a waste paper bin to
indicate the deletion of a document.
B (c) Mouse. This is a device used with on-screen graphics and sometimes as an alternative to using
O the keyboard to input instructions. It can be used to pick out the appropriate icon (or other
option), to mark out the area of a new window, mark the beginning and end of a block for
X deletion/insertion and so on. It also has a button to execute the current command.
. (d) Pull-down menu. An initial menu (or 'menu-bar') will be shown across the top of the VDU screen.
Using the mouse to move the pointer to the required item in the menu, the pointer 'pulls down' a
C subsidiary menu, somewhat similar to pulling down a window blind in a room of a house. The
pointer and mouse can then be used to select the required item on the pulled-down menu.
O (e) Many GUIs (such as Microsoft Windows) also display dialogue boxes, buttons, sliders, check
M boxes, and a plethora of other graphical widgets that let you tell the computer what to do and
how to do it.
2.3 Automatic input devices

In the following paragraphs we explain some of the most common document reading methods.
Document reading methods reduce the manual work involved in data input. This saves time and money
and also reduces errors.
(a) Magnetic ink character recognition (MICR) involves the recognition by a machine of special
formatted characters printed in magnetic ink. The characters are read using a specialised reading
device.
The main advantage of MICR is its speed and accuracy, but MICR documents are expensive to
produce. The main commercial application of MICR is in the banking industry – on cheques and
deposit slips.
(b) Optical mark reading involves the marking of a pre-printed form with a ballpoint pen or typed
line or cross in an appropriate box. The card is then read by an OMR device which senses the
mark in each box using an electric current and translates it into machine code. Applications in
which OMR is used include Lotto entry forms, and answer sheets for multiple choice questions.
(c) A scanner is device that can read text or illustrations printed on paper and translate the
information into a form the computer can use. A scanner works by digitising an image, the
resulting matrix of bits is called a bit map.
To edit text read by an optical scanner, you need optical character recognition (OCR) software to
translate the image into text. Most optical scanners sold today come with OCR packages.
Businesses may use a scanner and OCR to obtain 'digital' versions of documents they have only
paper copies of. For good results the copy must be of good quality.
A
(d) Bar codes are groups of marks which, by their spacing and thickness, indicate specific codes or
values. C
Large retail stores have Electronic Point of Sale (EPOS) devices, which include bar code readers. C
This enables the provision of immediate sales and stock level information.
(e) Most retailers have EFTPOS systems (Electronic Funds Transfer at the Point of Sale). An
A
EFTPOS terminal is used with a customer’s credit card or debit card to pay for goods or services.
The customer's credit card account or bank account will be debited automatically. EFTPOS
systems combine point of sale systems with electronic funds transfer. G
L
2.4 Card reading devices
(a) The standard magnetic stripe card contains machine-sensible data on a thin strip of magnetic
O
recording tape stuck to the back of the card. The magnetic card reader converts this information B
into directly computer-sensible form. The widest application of magnetic stripe cards is as bank
credit or service cards. A
(b) A smart card is a plastic card in which is embedded a microprocessor chip. A smart card would L
typically contain a memory and a processing capability. The information held on smart cards can
therefore be updated (eg using a PC and a special device).
B
2.5 Touch screens
A touch screen is a display screen that enables users to make selections by touching areas of the
O
screen. Sensors, built into the screen surround, detect which area has been touched. These devices are X
widely used in vending situations, such as the selling of train tickets.
.
2.6 Voice recognition C
Computer software has been developed that can convert speech into computer-sensible form via a
microphone. Users are required to speak clearly and reasonably slowly.
O
M
3 Storing cost and management accounting data
Data can be stored on hard disks, CD-ROMs, DVDs or memory sticks.
3.1 Hard disks

Disks offer direct access to data. Almost all PCs have an internal hard disk to store software and data.
3.2 CD-ROM (Compact Disc – Read Only Memory)

The speed of a CD-ROM drive is relevant to how fast data can be retrieved: an eight speed drive is
quicker than a four speed drive.
CD recorders are now available for general business use with blank CDs (CD-R) and rewritable disks
(CD-RW) are now available.
3.3 DVD (Digital Versatile Disc)

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) technology was encouraged by the advent of multimedia files with video
graphics and sound – requiring greater disk capacity.
3.4 Memory stick or 'Pen drive'

A memory stick or pen drive is a physically small external storage device usually connected via a USB
A port.
C
4 Outputting cost and management accounting data
C
A Data is usually output via printers or a VDU.
4.1 Printers
G Laser printers print a whole page at a time, rather than line by line. The quality of output is very high.
L Laser printers are relatively expensive to purchase, but compared with inkjet printers, running costs are
relatively low.
O Inkjet printers are small and reasonably cheap. They work by sending a jet of ink on to the paper to
B produce the required characters.
A 4.2 The VDU or monitor

L Screens are generally used together with computer keyboards for input. It should also be clear that they
can be used as an output medium, primarily where the output volume is low (for example a single
enquiry) and no permanent output is required (for example the current balance on an account).
B
O 4.3 The choice of output medium
X As with choosing an input medium, choosing a suitable output medium depends on a number of factors,
which you should bear in mind when we go on to consider each type of output in turn. These factors are
. as follows.
C (a) Is a 'hard' copy of the output required; in other words, is a printed version of the output needed?
If so, what quality must the output be?
O (i) If the output includes documents that are going to be used as OCR turnround documents,
the quality of printing must be good.
M (ii) If the information will be used as a working document with a short life or limited use (eg a
copy of text for type-checking) then a low quality output on a printer might be sufficient.
(b) The volume of information produced. For example, a VDU screen can hold a certain amount of
data, but it becomes more difficult to read when information goes 'off-screen' and can only be
read a bit at a time.
(c) The speed at which output is required. For example, to print a large volume of data, a high
speed printer might be most suitable to finish the work more quickly (and release the CPU for
other jobs).
(d) The suitability of the output medium to the application – ie the purpose for which the output is
needed.
(i) A VDU is well-suited to interactive processing with a computer.

(ii) A graph plotter would be well-suited to output in the form of graphs.
(iii) Output on to a magnetic disk would be well-suited if the data is for further processing.
(iv) Large volumes of reference data for human users to hold in a library might be held on
microfilm or microfiche, and so output in these forms would be appropriate.
(e) Cost: some output devices would not be worth having because their advantages would not justify
their cost, and so another output medium should be chosen as 'second best'.
5 Management information systems

A management information system is the hardware and software used to drive a database system which
provides useful information for management.
5.1 Introduction A
A management information system (MIS) is defined as a collective term for the hardware and software C
used to drive a database system with the outputs, both to screen and print, being designed to provide
easily assimilated information for management.
C
A
Management information is by no means confined to accounting information, but until relatively recently
accounting information systems have been the most formally-constructed and well-developed part of the
overall information system of a business enterprise. G
An alternative definition of a management information system is 'an information system making use of L
available resources to provide managers at all levels in all functions with the information from all
relevant sources to enable them to make timely and effective decisions for planning, directing and O
controlling the activities for which they are responsible.'
B
A management information system is therefore a system of disseminating information which will enable
managers to do their job. Since managers must have information, there will always be a management A
information system in any organisation.
L
Most management information systems are not designed, but grow up informally, with each manager
making sure that he or she gets all the information considered necessary to do the job. It is virtually
taken for granted that the necessary information flows to the job, and to a certain extent this is so. Much
accounting information, for example, is easily obtained, and managers can often get along with frequent
B
face-to-face contact and co-operation with each other. Such an informal system works best in small O
organisations.
However, some information systems are specially designed, often because the introduction of computers
X
has forced management to consider its information needs in detail. This is especially the case in large .
companies.
C
5.2 The need for formal planning O
Management should try to develop/implement a management information system for their enterprise
with care. If they allow the MIS to develop without any formal planning, it will almost certainly be
M
inefficient because data will be obtained and processed in a random and disorganised way and the
communication of information will also be random and hit-and-miss.
(a) Some managers will prefer to keep data in their heads and will not commit information to paper.
When the manager is absent from work, or is moved to another job, his stand-in or successor will
not know as much as he could and should about the work because no information has been
recorded to help him.
(b) The organisation will not collect and process all the information that it should, and so valuable
information that ought to be available to management will be missing from neglect.
(c) Information may be available but not disseminated to the managers who are in a position of
authority and so ought to be given it. The information would go to waste because it would not be
used. In other words, the wrong people would have the information.
(d) Information is communicated late because the need to communicate it earlier is not understood
and appreciated by the data processors.
The consequences of a poor MIS might be dissatisfaction amongst employees who believe they should
be told more, a lack of understanding about what the targets for achievement are and a lack of
information about how well the work is being done.
5.3 Essential characteristics

Whether a management information system is formally or informally constructed, it should therefore
have certain essential characteristics.
(a) The functions of individuals and their areas of responsibility in achieving company objectives
A should be defined.
(b) Areas of control within the company (eg cost centres, investment centres) should also be clearly
C defined.
C (c) Information required for an area of control should flow to the manager who is responsible for it.
A An organisation's cost accounting system will be part of the overall management information system.
It will both provide information to assist management with planning, control and decision making as
well as accumulating historical costs to establish inventory valuations, profits and statement of financial
position items.
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 Computers are widely used for data processing because they have certain advantages over humans.
– Speed
– Accuracy
– Volume and complexity
– Access to information
 Stages of data input
– Origination of data
– Transcription of data
– Data input
 Data can be stored on hard disks, CD-ROMS, DVDs or memory sticks.
 Data is usually output via printers or a VDU. A
 A management information system is the hardware and software used to drive a database system which
provides useful information for management.
C
C
A
QUICK QUIZ
1 List four advantages that computers have over humans.

2 List four things that a basic keyboard includes. G
3 What is the main function of a graphical user interface? L
4 What sort of automatic input device is issued on Lotto entry forms? O
5 Which of the following are characteristics of management accounting information?
B
(i) Non-financial as well as financial
(ii) Used by all stakeholders A
(iii)
(iv)
Concerned with cost control only
Not legally required
L
A (i) and (iv)
B
C
(ii) and (iii)
(i), (ii) and (iii)
B
D (ii), (iii) and (iv) O
X
.
C
O
M
1  Speed
 Accuracy
 Volume and complexity
 Access to information
2  Ordinary typing keys
 Numeric key pad
 Cursor control keys
 A number of function keys
3 To enable humans to communicate with machines
4 OMR (Optimal Mark Reading) which involves the marking of a pre-printed form with a ball point pen or
typed line or cross in an appropriate box. The card is then read by an OMR device which senses the
A mark in each box using an electronic current and translates it into machine code.
C 5 A
C
Now try ...
A
Attempt the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
Number
G
Q6
L
Q7
O Q8
B Q9
A Q10
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
C H A P T E R
A
In this chapter, we begin to look at cost accounting
systems and the ways in which costs may be classified. Cost classification C
Costs are classified in a variety of different ways,
according to purpose for which the management
C
information is required. A
The chapter also introduces two basic building blocks of
costing systems: cost centres and cost units.
Knowledge of the various classifications of cost, as well G
L
as cost centres and cost units, are important for an
understanding of cost and management accounting
methods and techniques, which will be described in
subsequent chapters.
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
1 Cost classifications in a cost accounting system A3 (a)

2 Direct costs and indirect costs A3 (a), B2 (c)
3 Classification by function A3 (a)
4 Classification by behaviour A3 (a)
5 Classification by responsibility A3 (a)

A Management information
3 Cost classification
(a) Describe the variety of cost classifications used for different K

purposes in a cost accounting system, including by
responsibility, function, direct/indirect, behaviour.
B Cost recording
2 Accounting for labour
(c) Distinguish between direct and indirect labour costs K
A
C
C 1 Cost classifications in a cost accounting system
A The total cost of making a product or providing a service consists of material costs, labour costs and
other expenses such as rent and rates.
G The total cost of making a product or providing a service consists of the following.
L (a) Cost of materials
O (b) Cost of the wages and salaries (labour costs)
B (c) Cost of other expenses

 Rent and rates
A  Electricity and gas bills
L  Depreciation
2 Direct costs and indirect costs

B
O  A direct cost is a cost that can be traced in full to the product or service being costed.
X  An indirect cost (or overhead) is a cost that is incurred in the course of making a product or
providing a service, but which cannot be traced directly and in full to the product or service.
.
 Prime cost = direct material cost + direct labour cost + direct expenses
C
O
M Performance Objective 12 requires you to apply appropriate costing techniques to products and
services. The knowledge you gain in this chapter (along with that you will gain from Chapter 12 on
cost bookkeeping) will help you demonstrate your competence in this area.
CHAPTER 3 // COST CLASSIFICATION
Materials, labour costs and other expenses can be classified as either direct costs or indirect costs.
As we saw in Chapter 1, total expenditure may therefore be analysed as follows.
Materials cost = Direct materials cost + Indirect materials cost

+ + +
Labour cost = Direct labour cost + Indirect labour cost
+ + +
Expenses = Direct expenses + Indirect expenses
Total cost = Direct cost/prime cost + Overhead cost
2.1 Direct costs

A direct cost is a cost that can be traced in full to saleable cost units (products or services) that are
being costed. The sum of the direct costs is known as the prime cost. A
C
Direct costs are therefore directly attributable to cost units.
(a) Direct material costs are the costs of materials that are known to have been used in making and
C
selling a product (or providing a service). A
(b) Direct labour costs are the specific costs of the workforce used to make a product or provide a
service. Direct labour costs are established by measuring the time taken for a job, or the time
taken in 'direct production work'. G
(c) Direct expenses are those expenses that have been incurred in full as a direct consequence of
making a product, or providing a service.
L
2.1.1 Direct material O
Direct material is all material becoming part of the product (unless used in negligible amounts and/or B
having negligible cost).
A
L
Direct material costs are charged to the product as part of the prime cost. Examples of direct material
are as follows.
(a) Raw materials that go in to the product. B
(b) Component parts, specially purchased for a particular job, order or process.
O
(c) Part-finished work which is transferred from department 1 to department 2 becomes finished
work of department 1 and a direct material cost in department 2. X
(d) Primary packing materials like cartons and boxes. .
Materials used in negligible amounts and/or having negligible cost can be grouped under indirect
materials as part of overhead.
C
2.1.2 Direct labour
O
Direct labour costs are the specific costs of the workforce used to make a unit of product or provide a M
service. Direct labour costs are calculated by quantifying the cost of the time taken for a job, or the time
taken in ‘direct production work’.
Direct wages costs are charged to the product as part of the prime cost.
Examples of groups of labour receiving payment as direct wages are as follows.
(a) Workers engaged in altering the condition, conformation or composition of the product.
(b) Inspectors, analysts and testers specifically required for such production.
Two trends may be identified in direct labour costs.

(a) The ratio of direct labour costs to total product cost is falling as the use of machinery increases,
and hence depreciation charges increase.
(b) Skilled labour costs and sub-contractors' costs are increasing as direct labour costs decrease.
2.1.3 Direct expenses

Direct expenses are any expenses which are incurred on a specific product other than direct material
cost and direct wages.
Direct expenses are charged to the product as part of the prime cost. Examples of direct expenses are as
follows.
 The cost of special designs, drawings or layouts
 The hire of tools or equipment for a particular job
Direct expenses are also referred to as chargeable expenses.
A
C 2.2 Indirect costs/overhead
C An indirect cost or overhead is a cost that is incurred in the course of making a product or providing a
service, but which cannot be traced directly and in full to the product or service.
A
Indirect costs are therefore not directly attributable to the product or service.
G Examples of indirect costs might be the cost of supervisors' wages on a production line, cleaning
L
materials and buildings insurance for a factory.
O QUESTION Prime costs
B Which one or more of the following costs would be charged to the product as a prime cost?
A A
B
Component parts
Part-finished work
L C Primary packing materials
D Supervisor wages
B ANSWER
O A, B and C
X A, B and C are all examples of direct material costs. The prime cost includes direct material, direct
labour and direct expenses. D is an indirect labour cost.
.
C
2.2.1 Production overhead
O Production (or factory) overhead includes all indirect material cost, indirect wages and indirect expenses
M incurred in the factory from receipt of an order for a product until the product’s completion, including:
(a) Indirect materials which cannot be traced in the finished product.
Consumable stores, eg material used in negligible amounts
(b) Indirect wages, meaning all wages not charged directly to a product.
Salaries of non-productive personnel in the production department, eg supervisor
(c) Indirect expenses (other than material and labour) not charged directly to production
(i) Rent, rates and insurance of a factory
(ii) Depreciation, fuel, power and maintenance of plant and buildings
2.2.2 Administration overhead

Administration overhead is all indirect material costs, wages and expenses incurred in the
administration of an undertaking, including:
 Depreciation of office equipment
 Office salaries, including the salaries of secretaries and accountants
 Rent, rates, insurance, telephone, heat and light cost of general offices
2.2.3 Selling overhead

Selling overhead is all indirect materials costs, wages and expenses incurred in promoting sales and
retaining customers, including:
 Printing and stationery, such as catalogues and price lists
 Salaries and commission of sales representatives
 Advertising and sales promotion, market research A
 Rent, rates and insurance for sales offices and showrooms
C
2.2.4 Distribution overhead C
Distribution overhead is all indirect material costs, wages and expenses incurred in making the packed A
product ready for despatch and delivering it to the customer, including:
 Cost of packing cases
 Wages of packers, drivers and despatch clerks G
 Depreciation and running expenses of delivery vehicles
L
3 Classification by function
O
B
Classification by function involves classifying costs as production/manufacturing costs, administration A
costs or marketing/selling and distribution costs.
L
In a 'traditional' costing system for a manufacturing organisation, costs are classified as follows.
(a) Production or manufacturing costs. These are costs associated with the factory.
(b) Administration costs. These are costs associated with general office departments.
B
(c) Marketing, or selling and distribution costs. These are costs associated with sales, marketing,
O
warehousing and transport departments. X
Classification in this way is known as classification by function. Expenses that do not fall fully into one
of these classifications might be categorised as general overheads or even listed as a classification on
.
their own (for example research and development costs). C
In costing a small product made by a manufacturing organisation, direct costs are usually restricted to
some of the production costs. A commonly found build-up of costs is therefore as follows.
O
$ M
Production costs
Direct materials A
Direct wages B
Direct expenses C
Prime cost A+B+C
Production overheads D
Full production cost A+B+C+D
Administration costs E
Selling and distribution costs F
Full cost of sales A+B+C+D+E+F
Functional costs include the following.

(a) Production costs are the costs which are incurred by the sequence of operations beginning with
the supply of raw materials, and ending with the completion of the product ready for warehousing
as a finished goods item. Packaging costs are production costs where they relate to 'primary'
packing (boxes, wrappers and so on).
(b) Administration costs are the costs of managing an organisation, that is, planning and controlling
its operations, but only insofar as such administration costs are not related to the production,
sales, distribution or research and development functions.
(c) Selling costs sometimes known as marketing costs, are the costs of creating demand for products
and securing firm orders from customers.
(d) Distribution costs are the costs of the sequence of operations with the receipt of finished goods
from the production department and making them ready for despatch and ending with the
reconditioning for reuse of empty containers.
A
(e) Research costs are the costs of searching for new or improved products, whereas development
C costs are the costs incurred between the decision to produce a new or improved product and the
C commencement of full manufacture of the product.

(f) Financing costs are costs incurred to finance the business such as loan interest.
A
QUESTION Cost classification
G Within the costing system of a manufacturing company the following types of expense are incurred.
L Reference number
1 Cost of oils used to lubricate production machinery
O 2
3
Motor vehicle licences for lorries
Depreciation of factory plant and equipment
B 4 Cost of chemicals used in the laboratory
5 Commission paid to sales representatives
A 6 Salary of the secretary to the finance director
L 7
8
Trade discount given to customers
Holiday pay of machine operatives
9 Salary of security guard in raw material warehouse
10 Fees to advertising agency
B 11 Rent of finished goods warehouse
O 12
13
Salary of scientist in laboratory
Insurance of the company's premises
X 14
15
Salary of supervisor working in the factory
Cost of typewriter ribbons in the general office
. 16 Protective clothing for machine operatives
C Required
O Complete the following table by placing each expense in the correct cost classification.
M Cost classification Reference number
Production costs
Selling and distribution costs
Administration costs
Research and development costs
Each type of expense should appear only once in your answer. You may use the reference numbers in
your answer.
ANSWER
Cost classification Reference number
Production costs 1 3 8 9 14 16
Selling and distribution costs 2 5 7 10 11
Administration costs 6 13 15
Research and development costs 4 12
4 Classification by behaviour
A
A different way of analysing and classifying costs is into fixed costs and variable costs. Many items of
expenditure are part-fixed and part-variable and hence are termed semi-fixed or semi-variable. This is
C
also known as classification by behaviour. C
Costs can be classified according to how they vary in relation to the level of activity. This is known as A
classification by behaviour.
 A fixed cost is a cost which is incurred for a particular period of time and which, within certain G
activity levels, is unaffected by changes in the level of activity.
 A variable cost is a cost which tends to vary with the level of activity.
L
O
Examples of fixed and variable costs are as follows. B
(a) Direct material costs are variable costs because they rise as more units of a product are A
manufactured.
L
(b) Sales commission is often a fixed percentage of sales turnover, and so is a variable cost that
varies with the level of sales.
(c) Telephone call charges are likely to increase if the volume of business expands, and so they are a B
variable overhead cost.
O
(d) The rental cost of business premises is a constant amount, at least within a stated time period,
and so it is a fixed cost. X
Some items of expenditure are part-fixed and part-variable. In cost accounting, semi-fixed or semi- .
variable costs may be divided into their fixed and variable elements.
C
5 Classification by responsibility
O
M
Costs and revenues must be traced to the individuals who are responsible for incurring them. This is
known as responsibility accounting.
The three common responsibility centres are cost centres, profit centres and investment centres. We
looked at each of these centres in Chapter 1.
Costs and revenues allocated to responsibility centres should be classified according to whether they are
controllable or non-controllable by the manager of the respective responsibility centre.
From a motivational point of view this is important because it can be very demoralising for managers
who feel that their performance is being judged on the basis of something over which they have no
influence.
It is also important from a control point of view in that control reports should ensure that information on
costs is reported to the manager who is able to take action to control them...
A controllable cost is a cost which can be controlled, typically by a cost, profit or investment centre
manager.
5.1 The controllability of variable costs

Most variable costs within a department are thought to be controllable in the short term because
managers can influence the efficiency with which resources are used, even if they cannot do anything to
raise or lower price levels.
A cost which is not controllable by a junior manager might be controllable by a senior manager. For
example, there may be high direct labour costs in a department caused by excessive overtime working.
The junior manager may feel obliged to continue with the overtime to meet production schedules, but
A his/her senior may be able to reduce costs by hiring extra full-time staff, thereby reducing the
requirements for overtime.
C A cost which is not controllable by a manager in one department may be controllable by a manager in
C another department. For example, an increase in material costs may be caused by buying at higher
prices than expected (controllable by the purchasing department) or by excessive wastage (controllable
A by the production department) or by a faulty machine producing rejects (controllable by the maintenance
department).
G Some costs are non-controllable, such as increases in expenditure items due to inflation. Other costs are
controllable, but in the long term rather than the short term. For example, production costs might be
L reduced by the introduction of new machinery and technology, but in the short term, management must
attempt to do the best they can with the resources and machinery at their disposal.
O
5.2 The controllability of fixed costs
B
It is often assumed that all fixed costs are non-controllable in the short run. This is not so.
A (a) Committed fixed costs are those costs arising from the possession of plant, equipment, buildings
L and an administration department to support the long-term needs of the business. These costs
(depreciation, rent, administration salaries) are largely non-controllable in the short term because
they have been committed by longer-term decisions affecting longer-term needs. When a
B company decides to cut production drastically, the long-term committed fixed costs will be
reduced, but only after redundancy terms have been settled and assets sold.
O (b) A discretionary cost is a cost whose amount, within a particular time period, is determined by,
and can be altered by, the budget holder. Discretionary fixed costs, such as advertising and
X research and development costs, are incurred as a result of a top management decision, but
. could be raised or lowered at fairly short notice (irrespective of the actual volume of production
and sales).
C
O
M EXAM FOCUS POINT
This chapter has introduced a number of new terms and definitions. The topics covered in this chapter
are very important and are likely to be tested in the MA2 Managing Costs and Finances examination
that you will be facing.
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 The total cost of making a product or providing a service consists of material costs, labour costs and
other expenses such as rent and rates.
 A direct cost is a cost that can be traced in full to the product or service being costed.
 An indirect cost (or overhead) is a cost that is incurred in the course of making a product or providing a
service, but which cannot be traced directly and in full to the product or service.
 Prime cost = direct material cost + direct labour cost + direct expenses.
 Classification by function involves classifying costs as production/manufacturing costs, administration
costs or marketing/selling and distribution costs.
 A different way of analysing and classifying costs is into fixed costs and variable costs. Many items of
expenditure are part-fixed and part-variable and hence are termed semi-fixed or semi-variable. This is
also known as classification by behaviour.
A
 Costs and revenues must be traced to the individuals who are responsible for incurring them. This is
C
known as responsibility accounting. C
A
QUICK QUIZ
1 Give two examples of direct expenses.

G
2 Give an example of an administration overhead, a selling overhead and a distribution overhead.
L
3 What are functional costs?
4 What is the distinction between fixed and variable costs?
O
5 Which of the following would be classified as a fixed cost in the operation of a motor vehicle?
B
A Oil change every 10,000 kilometres A
B
C
Petrol
Insurance
L
D Tyre replacement
6 What is a controllable cost? B
O
X
.
C
O
M
1  The hire of tools or equipment for a particular job

 Maintenance costs of tools, fixtures and so on

2  Administration overhead = Depreciation of office administration overhead, buildings and machinery
 Selling overhead = Printing and stationery (catalogues, price lists)
 Distribution overhead = Wages of packers, drivers and despatch clerks
3 Functional costs are classified as follows.
 Production or manufacturing costs
 Administration costs
 Marketing or selling and distribution costs
4 A fixed cost is a cost which is incurred for a particular period of time and which, within certain activity
levels, is unaffected by changes in the level of activity.
A A variable cost is a cost which tends to vary with the level of activity.
C 5 C
C 6 A controllable cost is a cost which can be controlled, typically by a cost, profit or investment centre
manager.
A .
G Now try ...

L Attempt the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
O Number
B Q11
A Q12
L Q13
Q14
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
C H A P T E R
A
This chapter describes the way that the cost of items of
expense varies with changes in the volume of activity, Cost behaviour C
such as the level of production or sales. It describes the
cost behaviour of individual items of expense, but goes on
C
to explain that it is often reasonable to assume that costs A
in total are either fixed, variable or a combination of fixed
and variable.
Costs that are semi-fixed and semi-variable can be G
divided into fixed and variable elements using a simple
technique called the high-low method. L
The analysis of cost behaviour provides an essential basis
for the application of several cost and management
O
accounting techniques, such as marginal costing, CVP B
analysis and relevant costing, which are the subject of
later chapters. A
L
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
1 Cost behaviour A3 (d)

2 Cost behaviour patterns A3 (b), (e)
3 The high-low method A3 (c)

(b) Explain and illustrate the nature of variable, fixed and mixed S
(semi-variable, stepped-fixed) costs
(c) Use the high-low method to separate semi-variable costs S
(d) Use variable, fixed and semi-variable costs in cost analysis S
(e) Analyse the effect of changing activity levels on unit costs S
A
C 1 Cost behaviour
C
A Cost behaviour is the way in which costs are affected by changes in the volume of output and is
important for planning, control and decision-making.
G Cost behaviour is the way in which costs are affected by changes in the volume of output.
L
O 1.1 Cost behaviour and levels of activity
B There are many factors which may influence costs. The major influence is volume of output, or the level
of activity. The level of activity may refer to one of the following.
A
 Value of items sold  Number of invoices issued
L  Number of items sold  Number of units produced
 Number of units of electricity consumed
B 1.2 Basic principles of cost behaviour

O The basic principle of cost behaviour is that as the level of activity rises, costs will usually rise. It will
cost more to produce 2,000 units of output than it will cost to produce 1,000 units.
X This principle is common sense. The problem for the accountant, however, is to determine, for each
. item of cost, the way in which costs rise and by how much as the level of activity increases. For our
purposes here, the level of activity for measuring cost will generally be taken to be the volume of
C production.
O
1.3 Example: Cost behaviour and activity level
M Hans Bratch Co has a fleet of company cars for sales representatives. Running costs have been
estimated as follows.
(a) Cars cost $12,000 when new, and have a guaranteed trade-in value of $6,000 at the end of two
years. Depreciation is charged on a straight-line basis.
(b) Petrol and oil cost 15 cents per kilometre.
(c) Tyres cost $300 per set to replace; replacement occurs after 30,000 kilometres.
(d) Hans Bratch has an agreement with a local garage to perform routine maintenance on each car
each year. Routine maintenance costs $200 per car in the first year and $450 in the second
year.
CHAPTER 4 // COST BEHAVIOUR
(e) Repairs average $400 per car over two years and are thought to vary with the number of
kilometres travelled. The average car travels 25,000 kilometres per annum.
(f) Tax, insurance, membership of motoring organisations and so on cost $400 per annum per car.
Required
Calculate the average cost per annum of cars which travel 10,000 kilometres per annum and 40,000
kilometres per annum.
Solution
Costs may be analysed into fixed, variable and stepped cost items, a stepped cost being a cost which is
fixed in nature but only within certain levels of activity.
(a) Fixed costs
$ per annum
Depreciation $(12,000  6,000) ÷ 2 3,000
Routine maintenance $(200 + 450) ÷ 2 325 A
Tax, insurance etc 400
3,725 C
(b) Variable costs C
Petrol and oil
Cents per km
15.0 A
Repairs ($400 ÷ 50,000 kilometres) 0.8
15.8
(c) Stepped-fixed costs are tyre replacement costs, which are $300 at the end of every 30,000
G
kilometres. L
(i) If the car travels less than or exactly 30,000 kilometres in two years, the tyres will not be
changed. Average cost of tyres per annum = $0.
O
(ii) If a car travels more than 30,000 kilometres and up to (and including) 60,000 kilometres B
in two years, there will be one change of tyres in the period. Average cost of tyres per
annum = $150 ($300  2).
A
(iii) If a car exceeds 60,000 kilometres in two years (up to 90,000 kilometres) there will be
L
two tyre changes. Average cost of tyres per annum = $300. ($600 ÷ 2).
The estimated costs per annum of cars travelling 10,000 kilometres per annum and 40,000 kilometres
per annum would therefore be as follows.
B
10,000 40,000 O
kilometres kilometres
per annum per annum X
$ $
Fixed costs 3,725 3,725 .
Variable costs (15.8c per km) 1,580 6,320
Tyres  150 C
Cost per annum 5,305 10,195
O
M
2 Cost behaviour patterns
 Costs which, in total, are not affected by the level of activity are fixed costs or period costs.
 Stepped-fixed costs are fixed within a certain range of activity.
 Variable costs increase or decrease in total with the level of activity. It is usually assumed that
there is a linear relationship between cost and activity.
 Semi-variable, semi-fixed or mixed costs are costs which are part fixed and part variable.
2.1 Fixed costs

A fixed cost is a cost which tends to be unaffected in total by increases or decreases in the volume of
output.
A Fixed costs are a period charge, in that they relate to a span of time; as the time span increases, so too
C will the fixed costs. A graph of a total fixed cost would look like this.
C Graph of total fixed cost
A $
Total cost
G
L
O Fixed cost
B
A
L Level of activity
B Examples of a fixed cost are as follows.
O  The salary of the managing director (per month or per annum)

 The rent of a single factory building (per month or per annum)
X  Straight line depreciation of a single machine (per month or per annum)
. Because the total fixed costs remain the same for all levels of activity, the fixed cost per unit decreases
C as more units are produced.

Graph of fixed cost per unit
O
M $
Cost per unit
Level of activity
2.2 Stepped-fixed costs

A stepped-fixed cost is a cost which is fixed in nature but only within certain levels of activity.
Consider the depreciation of a machine which may be fixed if production remains below 1,000 units per
month. If production exceeds 1,000 units, a second machine may be required, and the cost of
depreciation (on two machines) would go up a step. A graph of a total stepped-fixed cost could look like
this.
Graph of total stepped-fixed cost
$
Total cost
A
C
C
A
Level of activity G
Graph of stepped-fixed cost per unit
L
O
$
Cost per unit B
A
L
B
O
X
Level of activity
.
C
Other examples of stepped-fixed costs are as follows.
O
(a) Rent, where accommodation requirements increase as output levels get higher.
M
(b) Supervisor salaries. One supervisor may be able to supervise a maximum of 10 employees.
When the number of employees increases above a multiple of 10 an extra supervisor will be
required.
2.3 Variable costs

A variable cost is a cost which tends to vary in total directly with the volume of output. The variable cost
per unit is the same amount for each unit produced.
Total variable costs will increase or decrease in proportion to any change in activity. This can be shown
in a graph like this.
Graph of total variable cost
Total
cost $
$ cost
Total
A
C Level of activity
The cost will be the same for each unit produced giving the following graph for variable cost per unit.
C
Graph of variable cost per unit
A Cost per
unit $
$ unit
Cost per
G
L
O
B
A
L Level of activity
B A constant variable cost per unit implies that the price per unit of say, material purchased is constant,
O and that the rate of material usage is also constant.

Examples of a variable cost are as follows.
X (a) The cost of raw materials is variable in relation to the level of production.
. (b) Sales commission is variable in relation to the volume or value of sales.
C (c) Bonus payments for productivity to employees might be variable once a certain level of output is
O achieved, as the following diagram illustrates.
Graph of total variable cost (2)
Total
Cost $
$ cost
Total
Bonus
A Level of activity A
Up to output A, no bonus is earned.
C
2.4 Semi-variable costs C
A semi-variable/semi-fixed/mixed cost is a cost which contains both fixed and variable components A
and so is partly affected by changes in the level of activity.
Examples of these costs include the following. G

(a) Electricity and gas bills L


Fixed cost = standing charge
Variable cost = charge per unit of electricity used
O
(b) Salesman's salary B
 Fixed cost = basic salary A
 Variable cost = commission on sales made
(c) Costs of running a car
L
 Fixed cost = road tax, insurance
 Variable costs = petrol, oil, repairs (which vary with kilometres travelled)
B
A graph of a total semi-variable cost would look like this.
O
Graph of total semi-variable cost
X
$
.
Total cost C
O
Variable part
M
Fixed part
Level of activity
Graph of semi-variable cost per unit
$
Cost per unit
Level of activity
A Examples of these costs can include utility bills, if there is a standing basic charge plus a variable charge
C per unit of consumption.
C QUESTION Cost behaviour

A Are the following likely to be fixed, variable or semi-variable costs?
(a) Telephone bill
G (b)
(c)
Annual salary of the chief accountant
The management accountant's annual membership fee to CIMA (paid by the company)
L (d)
(e)
Cost of materials used to pack 20 units of product X into a box
Wages of warehouse workers
O
B ANSWER
A (a)
(b)
Semi-variable
Fixed
L (c) Fixed
(d) Variable
(e) Variable
B
O 2.5 Other cost behaviour patterns
X Other cost behaviour patterns may be appropriate to certain cost items. Examples of two other cost
. behaviour patterns are shown below.
C (a) Cost behaviour pattern (1) (b) Cost behaviour pattern (2)
O $
Total
$
Total
M cost cost
Maximum
cost Minimum
charge
Volume of activity Volume of activity
 Graph (a) represents an item of cost which is variable with output up to a certain
maximum level of cost. This kind of cost behaviour could occur, for example, when an
engineer is called to fix a photocopier. The company may have an agreement with the
engineer that each visit to fix the photocopier is fixed at $75, up to a maximum total
charge of $225 per month, the equivalent of three visits per month. If the engineer were
to visit once in a month, the cost would be $75, twice in a month and the cost would be
$150. However if he were to visit three or more times in a month the cost would be fixed
at $225.
 Graph (b) represents a cost which is variable with output, subject to a minimum (fixed)
charge. Again thinking about the photocopier engineer, the engineer may have a different
agreement with a different company to fix the photocopiers. In this agreement, he charges
$20 per hour, subject to a minimum total charge of $40, for each visit to fix the
photocopier. If the engineer takes an hour or two hours to fix the photocopier, the charge
will be $40, however if the engineer takes more than two hours, the charge increases
depending on the time taken. A
(c) Cost behaviour pattern (3) (d) Cost behaviour pattern (4)
C
$ $ C
Total
cost
Total
cost A
G
L
Level of activity Level of activity
O
 Graphs (c) and (d) represent direct costs that are not proportionately variable. Graph (c)
B
shows a scenario in which, up to a given level of activity, the purchase price of raw A
material per unit is constant. After that point, a quantity discount is given so the price per
unit is lower for further purchases and also retrospectively to all units already purchased. L
 Graph (d) represents a scenario in which, up to a given level of activity, the cost of labour
per unit is constant. After that level of output, employees may be entitled to overtime (if
worked at the specific request of a customer to complete an order or if overtime is worked
B
regularly in the normal course of operations). This means that any further production O
incurs higher labour costs per unit.
X
2.6 Cost behaviour and cost analysis .
Management decisions will often be based on how costs and revenues vary at different activity levels. C
Knowledge of cost behaviour is obviously essential for the tasks of budgeting, decision making and
control accounting. O
Management decisions will often be based on how costs and revenues vary at different activity levels.
M
Examples of such decisions are as follows.
 What should the planned activity level be for the next period?
 Should the selling price be reduced in order to sell more units?
 Should a particular component be manufactured internally or bought in?
 Should a contract be undertaken?
control accounting.
An important task in budgeting is to estimate what costs will be in the budgeted period. Reliable
estimates of expected costs require some knowledge of cost behaviour, and what the costs will be at the
expected volume of activity, output or sales.
 In a company where employees are paid fixed wages or salaries, it may be necessary to identify
whether additional employees will be required for the budgeted level of activity, and if so what
the extra (stepped) costs will be.
 Similarly, if it is expected that some overtime working may be required, it will be necessary to
estimate the level of activity above which overtime hours will be needed, and what the overtime
payments will be.
 For organisations that incur large costs for energy or water consumption, reliable budget
estimates of cost will require an understanding of the fixed and variable elements of these
expense items.
When management are trying to decide whether it will be profitable to undertake a particular task or job,
A they need to know what the extra costs will be and whether the benefits will exceed these costs.
Understanding cost behaviour is essential for making reliable estimates of the additional costs.
C Control accounting involves the comparison of actual costs with what costs should have been. This too
C calls for knowledge of cost behaviour, in order to assess the expected costs.
A In practice it is often much too difficult and time-consuming to estimate the expected costs for each item
of expenditure, and simplifying assumptions are made. In particular, it may be assumed that at normal
levels of activity, all costs are either fixed, variable or a combination of fixed and variable (semi-fixed,
semi-variable).
G
L 3 The high-low method
O
B The fixed and variable elements of semi-variable costs can be determined by the high-low method.
A
3.1 Assumptions about cost behaviour
L Assumptions about cost behaviour include the following.
(a) Within the normal or relevant range of output, costs are often assumed to be either fixed,
B variable or semi-variable (mixed).
O (b) Within the normal or relevant range of output, costs often rise in a straight line as the volume of
activity increases. Such costs are said to be linear.
X The high-low method of determining fixed and variable elements of mixed costs relies on the assumption
. that mixed costs are linear. We shall now go on to look at this method of cost determination.
C 3.2 High-low method

O Follow the steps below to estimate the fixed and variable elements of semi-variable costs.
M
Step 1 Review records of activity and costs in previous periods.
 Select the period with the highest activity level
 Select the period with the lowest activity level
Step 2 Determine the following.

 Total cost at highest activity level
 Total costs at lowest activity level
 Total units at highest activity level
 Total units at lowest activity level
Step 3 Calculate the following.

Total cost at highest activity level _ total cost at lowest activity level
_
Total units at highest activity level total units at lowest activity level
= variable cost per unit (v)
Step 4 The fixed costs can be determined as follows. (Total cost at highest activity level ) –
(total units at highest activity level × variable cost per unit) A
The following graph demonstrates the high-low method. C
Demonstration of high-low
method C
$
Total cost
A
ost
total c
Assum
ed a
Variable costs G
L
Fixed costs (same at all
O
levels of output) B
Lowest Highest Level of activity
A
L
3.2.1 Example: The high-low method
DG Co has recorded the following total costs during the last five years. B
Year Output volume
Units
Total cost
$ O
20X0
20X1
65,000
80,000
145,000
165,000
X
20X2 90,000 170,000 .
20X3 60,000 140,000
20X4 75,000 155,000 C
Required O
Calculate the total cost that should be expected in 20X5 if output is 85,000 units.
M
Solution
Step 1  Period with highest activity = 20X2

 Period with lowest activity = 20X3
Step 2  Total cost at highest activity level = 170,000

 Total cost at lowest activity level = 140,000
 Total units at highest activity level = 90,000
 Total units at lowest activity level = 60,000
Step 3 Variable cost per unit

_
Total cost at highest activity level total cost at lowest activity level
= _
Total units at highest activity level total units at lowest activity level
170,000 _ 140,000 30,000

= _ = = $1 per unit
90,000 60,000 30,000
Step 4 Fixed costs = (total cost at highest activity level) – (total units at highest activity level ×
variable cost per unit)
= 170,000 – (90,000 × 1) = 170,000 – 90,000 = $80,000
Therefore the costs in 20X5 for output of 85,000 units are as follows.
$
A Variable costs (85,000 × $1) 85,000
C Fixed costs 80,000
165,000
C
A QUESTION High-low method
The Valuation Department of a large firm of surveyors wishes to develop a method of predicting its total
G costs in a period. The following past costs have been recorded at two activity levels.
Number of valuations Total cost
L (V) (TC)
O Period 1
Period 2
420
515
82,200
90,275
B The total cost model for a period could be represented as follows.
A A
B
TC = $46,500 + 85V
TC = $42,000 + 95V
L C
D
TC = $46,500 – 85V
TC = $51,500 – 95V
B ANSWER
O Although we only have two activity levels in this question we can still apply the high-low method.
Valuations Total cost
X V $
Period 2 515 90,275
. Period 1 420 82,200
C Change due to variable cost 95 8,075
O  Variable cost per valuation = $8,075/95 = $85.

Period 2: fixed cost = $90,275 – (515  $85)
M = $46,500
Using good MCQ technique, you should have managed to eliminate C and D as incorrect options
straightaway. The variable cost must be added to the fixed cost, rather than subtracted from it. Once
you had calculated the variable cost as $85 per valuation (as shown above), you should have been able
to select option A without going on to calculate the fixed cost (we have shown this calculation above for
completeness).
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 Cost behaviour is the way in which costs are affected by changes in the volume of output and is
important for planning, control and decision-making.
 Costs which, in total, are not affected by the level of activity are fixed costs or period costs.
 Stepped-fixed costs are fixed within a certain range of activity.
 Variable costs increase or decrease in total with the level of activity. It is usually assumed that there is a
linear relationship between cost and activity.
 Semi-variable, semi-fixed or mixed costs are costs which are part fixed and part variable.
 Management decisions will often be based on how costs and revenues vary at different activity levels.
control accounting. A
 The fixed and variable elements of semi-variable costs can be determined by the high-low method.
C
C
A
QUICK QUIZ
1 Cost behaviour is ………………………………………………………………………………………. .

2 The basic principle of cost behaviour is that as the level of activity rises, costs will usually ………...
3 Fill in the gaps for each of the graph titles below.
G
L
(a)
Graph of a ………………………..…..cost
O
B
$
Total Example:
A
cost
Activity
B
(b)
O
Graph of a ………………………..…..cost
$
Total Example:
X
cost
.
C
O
Activity M
(c)
$ Graph of a ………………………..…..cost
Total Example:
cost
Activity
(d)
$ Graph of a ………………………..…..cost
Total Example:
cost
Activity
4 Costs are assumed to be either fixed, variable or semi-variable within the normal or relevant range of
output.
A True
C False
C 5 The costs of operating the canteen at 'Eat a lot Company' for the past three months is as follows.
Month Cost Employees
A $
1 72,500 1,250
2 75,000 1,300
G 3 68,750 1,175
Variable cost (per employee per month) =
L Fixed cost per month =
O 6 The following shows the cost per unit of an item of expense at different levels of activity:
B Activity (units) Cost per unit ($)
A 50
1 10,000
200
L 100
150
120
80
What is the correct behavioural classification for the expense item?
B A Fixed cost
B Semi-variable cost
O C Stepped-fixed cost
X D Variable cost
7 A particular cost is classified as being semi-variable.
. What is the effect on the cost per unit if activity increases by 10%?
C A Decrease by 10%
B Decrease by less than 10%
O C Increase by less than 10%
M D Remain constant
8 Production costs have been estimated at two levels of output:
50,000 units 55,000 units
Prime costs $430,000 $473,000
Overheads $330,000 $339,000
What are the estimated production costs per unit at an output level of 54,000 units?
A $14.76
B $14.84
C $15.20
D $17.00
1 The variability of input costs with activity undertaken.

2 Rise
3 (a) Stepped-fixed cost. Example: rent, supervisors' salaries
(b) Variable cost. Example: raw materials, direct labour
(c) Semi-variable cost. Example: electricity and telephone
(d) Fixed. Example: rent, depreciation (straight-line)
4 True
5 Variable cost = $50 per employee per month
Fixed costs = $10,000 per month
Activity Cost $
High
Low
1,300
1,175
75,000
68,750
A
125 6,250 C
Variable cost per employee = $6,250/125 = $50 C
For 1,175 employees, total cost = $68,750
Total cost = variable cost + fixed cost
A
$68,750 = (1,175  $50) + fixed cost
Fixed cost = $68,750 – $58,750
= $10,000
G
6 C
L
7 B O
8 B B
Activity
55,000
Cost $
812,000
A
50,000 760,000 L
5,000 52,000
Variable cost per unit = $52,000/5,000 = $10.40

B
For 50,000 units, total cost = $760,000
O
Total cost = variable cost + fixed cost
$760,000 = (50,000  $10.40) + fixed cost
X
Fixed cost = $760,000 – $520,000 = $240,000
.
Cost at an output of 54,000 units = $240,000 + (54,000  $10.40) C
= $801,600 O
Cost per unit = $801,600/54,000 = $14.84 M
Now try ...

Number
Q15
Q16
Q17
Q18
Q19
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
C H A P T E R
A
In this chapter we discuss how managers make
comparisons between actual data and other data. In Information for C
doing so they can assess the significance of the actual C
data for the period. Comparing current results with other
data can make the information more useful. Comparisons
comparison A
may also help to show up any errors that have occurred.
Differences between actual figures and the budget are
called variances. Variance reporting is the reporting of
differences between budgeted and actual performance.
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
1 Types of comparison A4 (a), (b), (e)

2 Identifying differences A4 (d)
3 Calculating variances A4 (f), (g)
4 Sales revenue variance calculations A4 (f), (g)
5 Cost variance calculations A4 (f), (g)
6 The reasons for cost variances A4 (h)
7 Exception reporting and investigating variances A4 (c), (i), (j)

4 Information for comparison
(a) Explain the purpose of making comparisons. K

(b) Identify relevant bases for comparison: previous period
S
data, corresponding period data, forecast/budget data.
(c) Explain the forecasting/budgeting process and the
K
concept of feed forward and feedback control.
(d) Explain and illustrate the concept of flexible budgets. S
(e) Use appropriate income and expenditure data for
S
comparison.
A (f) Calculate variances between actual and

historical/forecast data which may or may not be
S
C adjusted for volume change (note: standard costing is
excluded).
C (g) Identify whether variances are favourable or adverse. S
A (h) Identify possible causes of variances. S
(i) Explain the concept of exception reporting. K
G (j) Explain factors affecting the decision whether to

investigate variances.
K
L
O
B
A Performance Objective 13 requires you to use appropriate techniques to assess and to evaluate actual
performance against plans. You can apply the knowledge you obtain from this chapter of the text to
L help to demonstrate this competence.
B
1 Types of comparison
O
X Comparing actual results with other information helps to put them in context.
.
C
O
M
Comparisons may be financial or non-financial.
CHAPTER 5 // INFORMATION FOR COMPARISON
Common comparisons include the following.
1.1 Comparisons with previous periods

The most common comparison of a previous period is when one year's final figures are compared with
the previous year's. A business's statutory financial accounts contain comparative figures for the
previous year as well as the figures for the actual year. As financial accounts are sent to shareholders,
this comparison is obviously of great interest to them.
For management accounting purposes, however, year-on-year comparisons are insufficient by
themselves. Management will wish to pick up problems a lot sooner than the end of the financial year.
Hence comparisons are often made for management accounting purposes month-by-month or quarter-
by-quarter. This can either be a comparison with the previous period (eg comparing June 20X2 with
May 20X2), or with the corresponding period (eg comparing June 20X2 with June 20X1).
Making comparisons month-by-month or quarter-by-quarter is most useful when you expect figures to be
reasonably even over time. However demand for many products fluctuates season-by-season.
A
1.2 Example: seasonal fluctuations
A company making Christmas decorations had sales for the quarter ended 31 December that were
C
considerably greater than sales for the previous quarter ended 30 September. For the quarter ended the C
following 31 March its sales decreased significantly again. Should its managers be concerned?
Based on the information given, we cannot tell. All the information tells us is that most people buy
A
Christmas decorations in the three months leading up to Christmas. Comparing the December quarter's
sales with the quarters either side is not very useful, because we are not comparing like with like.
People are far more likely to buy Christmas decorations in the December quarter. G
A far more meaningful comparison would therefore be to compare the December quarter's sales with L
those of the December quarter of the previous year, since the demand conditions would be similar.
This example demonstrates where comparisons with corresponding periods can be very useful, in
O
businesses where the trade is seasonal (you would expect significant variations between adjacent periods). B
Another example is heating bills. If the heating bill for the summer quarter is less than that for the winter
quarter, the difference does not tell you anything about organisational performance, only about the weather.
A
L
1.3 Comparisons with forecasts
Businesses make forecasts for a number of purposes. A very common type of forecast is a cash flow
forecast. B
1.4 Example: cash flow forecast
O
GEORGE LIMITED: CASH FLOW FORECAST FOR FIRST QUARTER X
Jan
$
Feb
$
Mar
$
.
Estimated cash receipts C
From credit customers 14,000 16,500 17,000
From cash sales 3,000 4,000 4,500 O
Proceeds on disposal of non-current assets – 2,200 –
Total cash receipts 17,000 22,700 21,500 M
Estimated cash payments
To suppliers of goods 8,000 7,800 10,500
To employees (wages) 3,000 3,500 3,500
Purchase of non-current assets – 12,500 –
Rent and rates – – 1,000
Other overheads 1,200 1,200 1,200
Repayment of loan 2,500 – –
14,700 25,000 16,200
Net surplus/(deficit) for month 2,300 (2,300) 5,300
Opening cash balance 1,200 3,500 1,200
Closing cash balance 3,500 1,200 6,500
The purpose of making this forecast is for the business to be able to see how likely it is to have problems
maintaining a positive cash balance. If the cash balance becomes negative, the business will have to
obtain a loan or overdraft and have to pay interest costs.
At the end of the period management will compare the actual figures with the forecast figures, and try
to assess why they differ. Differences are likely to be a sign that some of the assumptions made when
drawing up the original forecast were incorrect. Hence management, when making forecasts for future
periods, may wish to change the assumptions that are made.
1.5 Non-financial comparisons

As well as being made in financial terms (costs and revenues), you may make comparisons in other
ways. For example you may compare units produced or sold. Other possible comparisons include
measures of quality/customer satisfaction, time taken for various processes etc.
1.6 Example: a hospital casualty department

A
A hospital casualty department will aim to deal with incoming patients quickly, efficiently and effectively
C but numbers and types of patients are hard to predict. Comparing waiting times or cases dealt with per
C day will be misleading if one day includes the victims of a serious train crash and another covers only
minor injuries. Long term comparisons might give a clearer picture and help to identify usage patterns
A (for example busy Saturday nights). Comparisons with other casualty departments might be even more
revealing.
G
EXAM FOCUS POINT
L
O You must be able to compare sets of data for the exam and be able to draw conclusions such as the
fact that there were greater profits or higher levels of efficiency in one period versus the other.
B
A
1.7 Comparison with budgets
L Most organisations have long-term goals which can be divided into:
 Objectives (measurable steps towards achieving their goals)
B  Action plans (detailed steps for achieving their objectives)
O The action plans are often expressed in money and provide:
X 

An overall view for management
Assurance that different departments' plans co-ordinate with each other
. The financial plan is usually called a budget.
C A budget is an organisation's plan for a forthcoming period, expressed in monetary terms.
O
M
Budget comparisons are popular because they show whether budget holders are achieving their targets.
Budget reports may be combined with other information such as non-financial information, ratios etc.
Budgets, like forecasts, represent a view of the future. However the two are not identical. Forecasts
represent a prediction of what is likely to happen, the most likely scenario. Budgets may be a target
rather than a prediction. The target may be a very stiff one and it may be far more likely that the
business fails to reach the target than that it does achieve the target. However management may feel
that setting a stiff target may keep staff 'on their toes'.
You can use budgets to check that the organisation's financial plan is working by comparing the
budgeted results for the day, week, month or year to date with the actual results. Differences between
these are known as variances.
The ways in which managers use budgets is a part of a continuous process of planning, monitoring
performance and taking action on variances. This is sometimes called the control cycle and can be
illustrated as follows.
1.8 The control cycle
A
C
C
A
Stages of the control cycle is what we are looking at here.
2 Identifying differences G
L
2.1 Variances and flexed budgets O
Variances can be calculated by comparing the budget with the actual results (total variance) or
B
comparing the flexed budget with the actual results (efficiency of usage and price variance). A
You should report differences in such a way that managers can understand them and pick out vital
information easily. Comparisons should not be cluttered with irrelevant information or too much detail.
L
There are two ways of looking at variances. The first way is to compare the budget figures to the actual
figures achieved and this is called a total cost variance (or total sales variance). B
For example, XYZ Ltd produces a product M. The following information is available for June. O
Material Cost
Budget
$5,000
Actual
$7,000
Variance
$2,000 (adverse)
X
The total cost variance comparing budget to actual cost is $2,000 adverse. .
The problem with this type of variance calculation is that the volume of production may be different from C
the budgeted volume. This means that variance may not be very helpful for management making
decisions on the product M.
O
In the example above, more was spent on materials than were budgeted for so there is an adverse M
variance. At first sight this may seem like a bad thing and management may decide product M is costing
too much. However, it turns out that there was such a large demand for product M in June that twice as
many units of M were produced and sold. The materials were bought from an alternative supplier and
cost only 35c per unit instead of 50c per unit. This means that XYZ Ltd produced and sold more units
and paid less per unit for the materials than budgeted. This is a good thing!
To make a useful comparison between the actual and budgeted figures for direct/variable costs we can
use the second type of variance calculation. We can adjust or flex the budget to reflect the same
production levels as was actually achieved. The new budget, flexed to the actual production level is
known as the flexed budget. The differences between the actual figures and the new flexed budged give
us variances which we will study later on.
Flexed budgets take out the effects of volume changes between actual and budget, and focus instead on
the variances resulting from changes in the efficiency with which resources are used, and from the price
of the resources.
Flexed budgets should be used for comparison of direct/variable costs if the actual level of production is
different from the original budget.
A flexed budget is a budget which recognises different cost behaviour patterns and is designed to
change as volume of activity changes
2.2 Example: flexed budget

Here is a production cost report for week 32 for the department making cartons.
A Actual Budget Variance
C Production (units) 5,000
$
4,800
$ $
C Direct materials
Direct labour
1,874
825
1,850
810
24
15
Adverse
Adverse
A Prime cost 2,699 2,660 39 Adverse
Fixed overheads 826 840 14 Favourable
TOTAL COST 3,525 3,500 25 Adverse
G Required
L Prepare a flexed budget for week 32 for the department making cartons.
O Solution
B The figures above illustrate how easy it is to gain a misleading picture of performance if like is not
A compared with like. At first glance, it would seem that the results are generally worse than expected. An
adverse difference, or variance, indicates that the actual cost was more than expected, and this was the
L case for direct costs, and the overall cost.
But if you were reminded that the budget was for a production level of 4,800 units, whilst 5,000 units
were actually produced, this would change the picture. We might now suspect that the performance was
B better than expected, but to quantify and confirm that suspicion, we need to flex the original budget and
make a new comparison.
O All variable costs, such as direct materials and direct labour, will change in line with the change in
X production level, but fixed costs will remain the same.
. Actual
Flexed
budget Variance
C Production (units) 5,000 5,000
$ $ $
O  1,850  5,000 
Direct materials 1,874 1,927   53 Favourable
M  4,800 
 810  5,000 
Direct labour 825 844   19 Favourable
 4,800 
Prime cost 2,699 2,771 72 Favourable
Fixed overheads 826 840 14 Favourable
Total cost 3,525 3,611 86 Favourable
Comparisons with budget are an extremely important aspect of management accounting, and need to be
considered in more detail.
QUESTION Flexed budgets

Here is a production cost report for MWR Ltd for the three month period January-March 20X2.
Actual Budget
Production and sales (units) 3,000 2,000
$ $
Sales revenue 30,000 20,000
Direct materials 8,500 6,000
Direct labour 4,500 4,000
Fixed overheads
– Depreciation 2,200 2,000
– Rent and rates 1,600 1,500
Total cost 16,800 13,500
Profit 13,200 6,500
Required A
Prepare a flexed budget for MWR Ltd for the three month period January-March 20X2.
C
ANSWER C
FLEXED BUDGET MWR LTD JANUARY-MARCH 20X2 A
Actual Flexed budget Variance
Production and sales (units) 3,000 3,000
$ $ $ G
Sales revenue 30,000 30,000
Direct materials (W1) 8,500 9,000 500 Favourable L
Direct labour (W2) 4,500 6,000 1,500
Fixed overheads (W3)
Favourable
O
– Depreciation
– Rent and rates
2,200
1,600
2,000
1,500
200
100
Adverse
Adverse
B
Total cost
Profit
16,800
13,200
18,500
11,500
1,700
1,700
Favourable A
Favourable
Workings
L
(1) Direct materials
Cost per unit =

$6,000
= $3 per unit B
O
2,000 units
Therefore 3,000 units = 3,000 × $3 = 9,000
(2) Direct labour
X
$4,000
.
Cost per unit = = $2 per unit
2,000 units C
Therefore 3,000 units = 3,000 × $2 = $6,000 O
(3) Fixed overheads M
The flexed budget for fixed overheads will be the same as the original budget as overheads are
fixed costs.
QUESTION Flexible budgets

Which of the following best describes a flexible budget?
A A budget which is designed to be easily updated to reflect recent changes in unit costs or selling
prices
B A budget which can be flexed when actual costs are known, to provide a realistic forecast for the
forthcoming period
C A budget which, by recognising different cost behaviour patterns, is designed to change as the
volume of activity changes
D A budget which is prepared on a spreadsheet, with the flexibility to add new cost items to
prepare new forecasts as circumstances change during the year
ANSWER
A C A flexible budget identifies fixed costs separately from variable costs. The allowance for variable
C costs can be flexed to derive a realistic target in the light of the actual activity level achieved.
C
2.3 Other uses of comparisons with budgets
A
Businesses obviously need to be co-ordinated. For example you cannot increase sales if you do not have
the goods available, or increase inventories if you don't have the money to pay for them. Variance
G reporting is important in alerting management to unplanned changes in one area of the business which
may affect another. For example an unplanned decrease in production will affect future sales unless it
L can be made up.
O
B 3 Calculating variances
A Variance reports help budget holders to perform their function of control. The reports are especially
L useful if they separate controllable from non-controllable variances.
Variances are:
B  Favourable if the business has more money as a result

 Adverse if the business has less money as a result
O Favourable variances are not always good for the organisation. For example failure to recruit necessary
X staff will result in a favourable variance (less wages). It may, however, mean that business does not
reach its production targets.
.
Reporting variances to the appropriate person draws attention to areas which are not running according
C to plan.
O 3.1 Example: Calculation of variances as a percentage

M Here is an extract from a monthly cost report for a residential care home.
Budgeted Actual Variance Variance
$ $ $ %
Laundry 1,000 1,045 45 (A) 4.5
Heat and light 1,500 1,420 80 (F) 5.3
Catering 8,500 8,895 395 (A) 4.6
Nursing staff 7,000 6,400 600 (F) 8.6
Ancillary staff 10,600 10,950 350 (A) 3.3
Actual costs  Budgeted costs
Variance % =  100%
Budgeted costs
The difference between the actual figures and the flexed budget give us variances. The flexed budget
enables the total cost variance to be divided into two sub variances called the activity variance and the
price/efficiency variance.
4 Sales revenue variance calculations
There are three types of sales revenue variance. These are the total sales revenue variance, the activity
(or volume) variance and the selling price variance.
4.1 Introduction
Total sales revenue variance = activity variance + selling price variance.
Now we will look at the variance calculations using fixed and flexed budgets.
A
4.2 Total sales revenue variance C
The total sales revenue variance measures the combined effect of the following. C


The actual selling price being different to standard selling price
The actual sales volume being different to budgeted sales volume
A
The following example will illustrate how the total sales revenue variance is calculated.
G
4.3 Example
The following budgeted cost and selling price data relate to SM Limited's single product.
L
$ per unit $ per unit O
Selling price
Direct cost 12.25
21.00
B
Overhead cost 1.75
14.00
A
Budgeted profit 7.00 L
Data for last period were as follows.
Budgeted sales units 740 B

Actual sales units
Actual sales revenue
795
$16,200
O
X
Solution
$ .
Sales revenue should have been (740  $21)
Sales revenue actually was
15,540
16,200
C
660 (F) O
QUESTION Total sales revenue variance
M
Jasper Ltd has the following budget and actual figures for 20X4.
Budget Actual
Sales units 600 620
Selling price per unit $30 $29
Budgeted full cost of production = $28 per unit.
Calculate the total sales revenue variance.
ANSWER
$
Sales revenue should have been (600  $30) 18,000
Sales revenue actually was (620  $29) 17,980
Total sales revenue variance 20 (A)
4.4 Activity (or volume) variance

As mentioned in 4.2, the total sales revenue variance measures the combined effect of a difference in
selling price and a difference in quantity sold. The activity (or volume) variance looks at the difference in
quantity sold.
Remember that when we looked at flexed budgets, it was to take into account that the activity level was
different from budgeted. In effect we were removing the variance which arose because of a difference in
A the quantity sold. This means that a comparison between actual figures and flexed budget figures gives
C us the price variance only.
C 4.5 Example
A The budgeted sales of SM Ltd were 740 units at a selling price of $21. The actual sales were 795 units
at a total sales revenue of $16,200. What is the activity variance?
G Solution
Units
L Budgeted sales volume
Actual sales volume
740
795
O Activity variance in units 55 (F)
 Budgeted sales price per unit  $21
B Activity variance $1,155 (F)
A
QUESTION Activity variance
L Jasper Ltd has the following budget and actual figures for 20X4.
Budget Actual
Sales units 600 620
B Selling price per unit $30 $29
O Calculate the activity (or volume) variance.
X ANSWER
. Budgeted sales volume
Units
600
C Actual sales volume 620
Activity variance in units 20 (F)
O  Budgeted sales price per unit  $30
M Activity variance $600 (F)
4.6 Selling price variance

The selling price variance is shown in the example below. Note that the total sales revenue variance is
the activity variance added to the selling price variance.
4.7 Example
The budgeted sales of SM Ltd were 740 units at a selling price of $21 per unit. The actual sales were
795 units at a total sales revenue of $16,200.
What was the selling price variance?
Solution
$
Sales revenue from 795 units should have been ( $21) 16,695
But was 16,200
Selling price variance 495 (A)
The total sales revenue variance calculated in example 4.3 was $660 favourable. The activity (quantity)
variance calculated in example 4.5 was $1,155 favourable. The selling price variance calculated in
example 4.7 was $495 adverse.
Note that $660 (F) =$1,155 (F) + $495 (A)
QUESTION Selling price variance

Jasper Ltd has the following budget and actual figures for 20X4.
Budget Actual
Sales units
Selling price per unit
600
$30
620
$29
A
Calculate the selling price variance. C
C
ANSWER
$ A
Sales revenue from 620 units should have been ( $30) 18,600
But was 17,980
Selling price variance 620 (A) G
L
O
5 Cost variance calculations B
A
5.1 Total direct cost variance
L
There are three types of cost variance. These are the total direct cost variance, the activity variance and
the purchase price/efficiency of usage variance.
Total direct cost variance = activity variance + purchase price/efficiency of usage variance
B
The total direct cost variance measures the combined effect of the following: O
 The actual quantity produced being different to budgeted production volume X


The actual cost price being different to budgeted cost price
The actual efficiency in which resources are used being different to budgeted efficiency
.
C
5.2 Example
O
The budgeted materials for CTF Ltd were 800 units at a cost of $20 each. Actual material costs for the
month were $17,600. M
Solution
$
Materials should have cost (800  $20) 16,000
But did cost 17,600
Total direct cost variance 1,600 (A)
QUESTION Total cost variance

The budgeted materials for HMF Ltd were 500 units at a cost of $15 each. Actual material costs for the
month were $5,000.
Calculate the total direct cost variance.
ANSWER
$
Materials should have cost (500  $15) 7,500
But did cost 5,000
Total direct cost variance 2,500 (F)
5.3 Activity (or volume) variance

A
The activity (or volume) variance looks at the difference in the quantity produced.
C It is worth mentioning again that when we looked at flexed budgets, it was to take into account that the
C activity level was different from budgeted. In effect we were removing the variance which arose because
of a difference in quantity produced. This means that a comparison between actual figures and flexed
A budget figures give us the price/efficiency variance only.
5.4 Example
G The budgeted materials for CTF were 800 units at a cost of $20 each. Actual materials costs for the
L month were $17,600 and 820 units were produced.
O Solution
B Budgeted production volume
Units
800
A Actual production volume 820
Activity variance in units 20 (A)
L  Budgeted cost per unit  $20
Activity variance $400 (A)
B QUESTION Volume variance
O The budgeted materials for HMF Ltd were 500 units at a cost of $15 each. Actual material costs for the
month were $5,000 and 550 units were produced.
X
Calculate the activity variance.
.
C ANSWER
Unit
O Budgeted production volume 500
Actual production volume 550
M Activity variance in units 50 (A)
 Budgeted cost per unit  $15
5.5 Purchase price/efficiency of usage variance

This variance is shown in the example below. Note that the total cost variance is the activity variance
added to the purchase price variance efficiency of usage variance (for direct materials) or the rate of
pay/efficiency variance (for direct labour).
5.6 Example – Materials

The budgeted materials for CTF Ltd were 800 units at a cost of $20 each. Actual materials costs for the
month were $17,600 and 820 units were produced. Calculate the price/efficiency variance.
Solution
$
Production of 820 units should have cost ( $20) 16,400
But did cost 17,600
Price/efficiency variance 1,200 (A)
QUESTION Purchase price variance

The budgeted materials for HMF Ltd were 500 units at a cost of $15 each. Actual material costs for the
month were $5,000 and 550 units were produced.
Calculate the price/usage variance. A
ANSWER
C
$ C
Production of 550 units should have cost ( $15) 8,250
But did cost 5,000 A
Price/efficiency variance 3,250 (F)
Note that:
G
Total direct cost variance = Activity variance + purchase price/usage variance.
Using examples 5.2, 5.4 and 5.6, the variances are $1,600 adverse, $400 adverse and $1,200
L
adverse. O
$1600(A) = $400(A) + $1200(A) B
A
5.7 Example – Labour L
The budgeted labour cost for Blob Co was $10.20 per unit for 20,000 units. Actual labour costs were
$10.50 per unit for 22,000 units. Calculate the rate/efficiency variance and the activity variance.
B
Solution O
$
Production of 22,000 units should have cost (× $10.20) 224,400 X
231,000
But did cost
Rate/efficiency variance 6,600 (A) .
Units
C
Budgeted production volume 20,000
22,000
O
Actual production volume
Activity variance in units 2,000 (A) M
× budgeted cost per unit × $10.20
Activity variance $20,400 (A)
Note again that:

Total direct cost variance = Activity variance + rate/efficiency variance
= $20,400 (A) + $6,600 (A)
= $27,000 (A)
You can check this by calculating the total direct cost variance as follows:
Should have cost ($10.20 × 20,000 units) 204,000

But did cost ($10.50 × 22,000 units) 231,000
27,000 (A)
6 The reasons for cost variances
There are a wide range of reasons for the occurrence of adverse and favourable cost variances.
The following is not an exhaustive list and an exam question might suggest other possible causes. You
should review the information provided and select any causes that are consistent with the reported
variances.
A Variance Favourable Adverse
C (a) Material Unforeseen discounts received Price increase
C price More care taken in purchasing Careless purchasing
A (b) Material Material used of higher quality than Defective material
usage standard Excessive waste
More effective use made of material Theft
G Errors in allocating material to jobs Stricter quality control
L Errors in allocating material to jobs
O (c) Labour rate Use of apprentices or other workers Wage rate increase
at a rate of pay lower than standard
B Use of higher grade labour
A (d) Labour
efficiency
Output produced more quickly than
expected because of work motivation,
Lost time in excess of standard allowed
Output lower than standard set because of
L better quality of equipment or deliberate restriction, lack of training, or
materials, or better methods. sub-standard material used
Errors in allocating time to jobs
B Errors in allocating time to jobs
O
X 7 Exception reporting and investigating variances
. Exception reporting highlights variances which might need investigating.
C
O 7.1 Exception reporting
M Budgets are also used to allocate financial responsibility to individual managers. For example, the
training manager will be responsible for expenditure on training. These responsible people are called
budget holders and will have to decide what action to take if costs are higher or revenues lower than
forecast. Reporting to them is sometimes called responsibility accounting.
Budget holders need to be informed of any variances that require investigation. They need not be
pestered with immaterial variances, but they will need to look at larger variances. They should also
investigate variances which are showing a worrying trend. For this reason, many businesses operate a
system of exception reporting.
Exception reporting is the reporting only of those variances which exceed a certain amount or %.
7.2 Investigating variances

The decision to investigate a variance can also depend on whether it is controllable or non-controllable.
 Controllable: can be rectified by managers
 Non-controllable: are due to external factors beyond the managers' control
Budget holders may be required to explain why either type of variance has occurred and should take
whatever action is needed. If the variance is controllable, management can take action to rectify
problems. If the variance is non-controllable, management may wish to revise their plan. Either way
budget holders are not necessarily to blame for the variance.
Finally, a variance will only be investigated if the cost of the investigation is to be outweighed by the
benefits.
EXAM FOCUS POINT

A
You may need to be able to distinguish between controllable and non-controllable variances. C
C
7.3 Example: investigation of variances A
A manufacturer of copper pipes has budgeted for expenditure of $25,000 on copper in month 6 but
actual expenditure is $28,000. Possible reasons for this $3,000 adverse variance include:
G
(a) Price increase by supplier. This may be controllable. The purchasing officer should try alternative
suppliers. L
(b) World price rise for copper. This is non-controllable. The budget may need revising for the rest of O
the year.
(c) Higher factory rejection rate of finished pipes. This is probably controllable but needs
B
investigation. Is the raw material quality satisfactory? (if not, is this due to supplier, purchasing, A
warehousing?) Is the factory process at fault? (if so why? Poor supervision? Inadequate training?
Machinery wearing out? – find out from the factory supervisors/managers). L
You can see that reporting variances puts managers on the alert but only gives clues as to where the real
problems lie.
B
Variances can be interdependent. O
It is important to understand that variances can be interdependent, with a single factor affecting more X
than one variance. Two examples are given below. .
 Buying a better quality of material may increase the cost of materials due to its higher price, but
usage of the material may be improved as there is less wastage. It could also decrease the labour
C
cost for a given level of production as fewer hours may be needed to process the material if it is O
easier to work with, or fewer rejects are produced.
 Using unskilled labour rather than skilled labour for a particular task may cut the cost of labour in
M
terms of rate of pay, but they may take longer to complete the job which will increase the labour
cost again. Unskilled workers may also use more material than skilled labour, causing an adverse
material variance.
To summarise, significant variances will be reported to the manager responsible who will then
investigate the cause of the variance and act by either correcting an operational problem if the variance
is controllable, or adjusting the budget if it is non-controllable and expected to continue. This system is
known as feedback control.
Sometimes, if a variance is foreseen, the manager might take corrective action in advance of the
problem in order to avoid a variance. This is known as feedforward control.
QUESTION Favourable variances

A hospital decides to cut costs by reducing the number of cleaners employed by 10%. This results in a
favourable variance in the budget reports. Is it good for the hospital?
Helping hand. Think of any other impacts a drop in a number of cleaners might have.
ANSWER
Helping hand. This illustrates not only the importance of non-financial objectives, but also how failure to
meet non-financial objectives may impact upon financial objectives.
This is only good if the necessary standards of cleanliness can be maintained. If they can be, then there
were probably too many cleaners before. If standards fall, there will be other effects (like more patient
infections) which will cost more in the long term and damage the chief goal of improving health.
A
C QUESTION Controllable and non-controllable variances
C Here is an extract from a sales report for Region 3 in month 4 of the budget year.
A Salesperson Green
$ actual
8,500
$ budgeted
8,000
Brown 7,600 8,000
G Brown is more junior than Green, and has attended fewer training courses. The more ‘difficult’
customers are shared between the two salespeople.
L Brown’s variance for month 4 is
O A Favourable and controllable
B B
C
Adverse and controllable
Favourable and non-controllable
A D Adverse and non-controllable
L ANSWER
Answer B
B Brown’s actual sales were $400 less than the budget which is an adverse variance. The information in
O the question leads us to the conclusion that the variance is controllable as he has been given the same
target as the more experienced salesperson. Brown could be sent on more training courses.
X
.
QUESTION Controllable costs
C
A ward sister in a private hospital has the following changes in ward costs reported as exceptional.
O Actual Budget Variance
M $ $ $
Nursing salaries 4,500 4,750 250 Favourable
Drugs and dressings 237 370 133 Favourable
Which of these costs do you think the sister can control?
A Nursing salaries
B Drugs
C Dressings
D None of the costs
ANSWER
Helping hand. The key to this activity is determining who makes the decisions about which costs.
(a) Nursing salaries would probably be centrally controlled by the hospital and therefore not under
the control of the sister. Drugs would be determined by a doctor and administered by a nurse.
Dressings are probably the only item the ward sister has any control over.
(b) The $300 drugs cost for March looks quite different from the normal pattern of cost. You should
look at the ledger account and purchase documents to see if it is correct.
(c) Combining drugs and dressings costs does not seem helpful in a ward report since only one is
likely to be a controllable cost for the ward sister.
QUESTION Performance reports

A
A company produces the following performance report.
C
PERFORMANCE REPORT
C
PRODUCTION COST CENTRES
TOTAL COSTS – APRIL 20X1
A
YEAR TO DATE 30.04.X1
Actual Budget (flexed)
G
$ $ L
Materials 39,038 35,000 O
Labour 89,022 85,000 B
Expenses 18,781 15,000 A
Which cost variances would be brought to the attention of the production managers responsible, if the L
company reports by exception any variances that vary by more than 10% from budget?
A Materials only
B Materials and labour B
C Expenses only
D Expenses and materials O
X
.
C
O
M
ANSWER
D.
VARIANCE REPORT
PRODUCTION COST CENTRES
APRIL 20X1
Year to 30 April 20X1
$
Materials 4,038 (A)
Labour 4,022 (A)
A Expenses 3,781 (A)

Comment
C
The significant variances which are more than 10% from budget are:
C
 4,038 
A  Materials $4,038 (A) = 11.5%  
 35,000 
 3,781 
 Expenses $3,781 (A) = 25.2%  
G  15,000 
L The labour variance is not more than 10% from budget.
O 
 4,022 
Labour $4,022 (A) = 4.7%  
B  85,000 
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 Comparing actual results with other information helps to put them in context and may show up errors.
A
C
 Comparisons may be financial or non-financial.
C
 Budget comparisons are popular because they show whether budget holders are achieving their targets.
A
 Budget reports may be combined with other information such as non-financial information, ratios etc.
 Variances can be calculated by comparing the fixed budget with the actual results (total variance) or
comparing the flexed budget with the actual results (usage or price variance). G
 You should report differences in such a way that managers can understand them and pick out vital L
information easily. Comparisons should not be cluttered with irrelevant information or too much detail.
 Flexed budgets should be used for comparison if the actual level of production is different from the
O
original budget. B
 Variance reports help budget holders to perform their function of control. The reports are especially A
useful if they separate controllable from non-controllable variances.
L
 There are three types of sales revenue variance. These are the total sales revenue variance, the activity
variance and the selling price variance.
 There are three types of cost variance. These are the total direct cost variance, the activity variance and B
the purchase price/efficiency of usage variance.
O
 There are a wide range of reasons for the occurrence of adverse and favourable cost variances.
X
 Exception reporting highlights variances which might need investigating.
 Variances can be interdependent.

.
C
O
1 Which one of the following options is a financial comparison?
M
QUICK QUIZ
A Number of units produced compared to last year

B Number of units sold compared to last year
C Profit compared to last month
D Customer satisfaction compared to last month
2 A budget is expressed in monetary terms. Is this true or false?
3 When are flexed budgets used?
A When the actual level of production is different from the original budget
B When the actual level of production is the same as the original budget
C Neither of the above.
4 List possible non-financial comparisons that could be made by a manufacturing company.
5 A company selling Christmas trees has its sales figures for December. Which sales figures would provide
the most meaningful comparison?
6 A difference between planned and actual results which results in the organisation having less money
than forecast is called:
A A favourable variance
B An adverse variance
C A loss
D A profit
7 Statement 1 An adverse variance is always good for the business.
Statement 2 An adverse variance is always bad for the business.
A Both statements are false
B Both statements are true
C Statement 1 is true but statement 2 is false
A D Statement 1 is false but statement 2 is true
C 8 Which of the following statements about exception reporting is false?
C A
B
It avoids information overload
It makes it easier for managers to spot important variances
A C
D
It reports variances which exceed a certain amount or %
All variances highlighted should be investigated
9 What is the name given when a variance is foreseen and the manager takes corrective action in advance
G of the problem to avoid a variance?
L A
B
Feedforward control
Feedback control
O C Neither of the above
B 10 Which of the following options describes an activity variance?
A A
B
The actual efficiency in which resources are used being different to budgeted efficiency
The actual quantity produced being different to budgeted production volume
L C The actual cost pricing being different to budgeted cost price
D The budgeted efficiency in which resources are used being different to actual efficiency.
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
1 C Comparisons made in financial terms (costs and revenues) are financial comparisons. Options A,
B and D are non-financial comparisons. Sometimes these are more difficult to compare, for
example customer satisfaction may be hard to measure.
2 True A budget is an organisation's plan, expressed in monetary terms.
3 A Flexed budgets should be used for comparison if the actual level of production is different from
the original budget.
4 Your list may include: customer satisfaction measures, quality reports (eg number of defective units),
units produced, units sold, time taken per production run, wastage.
5 December sales from the previous year are likely to provide the most meaningful comparison, since
December will be the busiest month in terms of sales for this company.
6 B This is an adverse variance.
7 A An adverse variance is not always good or not always bad. Whether it is good or bad depends on
the reasons for the variance. For example, recruiting extra staff may result in an adverse labour A
variance but may mean that increased demand required higher levels of production (and higher
revenue).
C
8 D Not all variances should necessarily be investigated. For example a variance should only be C
investigated if the cost of the investigation is to be outweighed by the benefits. A
9 A Feedforward control (feedback control involves acting after the cause of the variance has been
investigated)
10 B The activity (or volume) variance looks at the difference in the quantity produced. G
L
Now try ... O
Attempt the questions below from the Exam Question Bank B
Number A
L
Q20
Q21 B
Q22
O
Q23
X
Q24
.
C
O
M
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
C H A P T E R
A
This chapter looks at the different ways of
communicating and presenting information. We also Reporting management C
discuss when you should not communicate information – C
when you should keep it confidential.
information A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
1 Deciding who needs what N/A

2 Types of communication A5 (a), (b), (c), (d)
3 Confidentiality A5 (d)

5 Reporting management information
(a) Identify suitable formats for the presentation of

S
management information according to purpose
(b) Describe methods of analysing, presenting and
K
communicating information
(c) Identify suitable formats for communicating management
S
information according to purpose and organisational
guidelines including: informal business reports, letter and
email or memo.
(d) Identify the general principles of distributing reports (eg
K
procedures, timing, recipients) including the reporting of
A confidential information
C (e) Interpret information presented in management reports

S
C
A
Performance Objective 2 requires you to engage stakeholders effectively and communicate relevant
information to them when they need it . You can apply the knowledge you obtain from this chapter of
G the text to help to demonstrate this competence.
L
O
B 1 Deciding who needs what
A Management information should be relevant to and understood by the individual who receives it.
L Management information should be relevant to the organisation and the individual.
The person receiving management information should be able to understand it. Understandability can
B be helped by:
O 

Avoiding unexplained technical terms
Cutting out unnecessary detail
X  Using charts, diagrams, tables and good report layouts

. Asking the users' views on required information and presentation
In many organisations standard reports are issued regularly. The information system may produce the
C reports directly. Alternatively the reports may need special preparation. They will tell the managers
O responsible for various activities how they are performing. They may be used as a basis for extra rewards
such as bonuses, promotions etc.
M Ideally the reports should distinguish between controllable and non-controllable factors. This is not
always easy in practice however.
Managers may also need ad hoc reports to help them with particular problems. For example they may
want more detail than is given by the regular reports on a particular aspect of the business. If you have
to provide this type of information you must understand exactly what is required, including the format
required for presenting it.
CHAPTER 6 // REPORTING MANAGEMENT INFORMATION
2 Types of communication
Types of communication include:

– Letters
– Memos
– Emails
– Formal reports
It is important to choose the right one for a given purpose.
Most information is likely to be presented to managers in the form of a report. In small organisations it is
possible, however, that management information will be communicated less formally (orally or using
informal reports/memos). We consider the different options for presenting management information
below.
Choosing the right method of communication is important. Many organisations have standard sets of A
regular reports in prescribed formats. Many also have a standard house style for other documents, that
is, a particular way of setting things out. The aim of this is to:
C
 Make it easier for employees to read, locate and produce information
C
 Present a consistent image to people outside the organisation A
Charts, graphs and tables can also be used to communicate management information.
Different situations suit different methods of communication. Some relevant considerations are outlined G
in the following table.
L
Choosing a communication method
O
Factor Considerations
B
Time How long will be needed to prepare the message, and how long will it take to
transmit it in the chosen form? This must be weighed against the urgency with A
which the message must be sent. L
Complexity The method used for relaying a complex piece of information must be chosen
carefully. A written document may make it easier for the reader to take their time
over digesting the information. On the other hand, a conversation would allow for B
instant clarification where necessary.
O
Distance How far is the message required to travel? Must it be transmitted to an office on a
different floor of the building, or across town, or to the other end of the country?
X
Written record A written record may be needed as proof, confirming a transaction, or for legal .
purposes, or as an aid to memory. It can be duplicated and sent to many recipients. C
It can be stored and later retrieved for reference and analysis as required.
O
Feedback/ How quickly is the feedback required? If an instant response is needed then a
interaction conversation may be appropriate. How many responses are required? If there are M
many responses needed then talking to each individual may take too long.
Confidentiality Telephone calls may be overheard; faxed messages can be read by whoever is
standing by the fax machine; internal memos may be read by colleagues or by
internal mail staff; highly personal letters may be read by the recipient's secretary.
On the other hand a message may need to be spread widely and quickly to all staff:
the notice-board, or a public announcement or the company newsletter may be more
appropriate.
Choosing a communication method
Factor Considerations
Recipient It may be necessary to be reserved and tactful, warm and friendly, or impersonal,
depending upon the desired effect on the recipient. If you are trying to impress him,
a high quality document may be needed.
Cost Cost must be considered in relation to all of the above factors. The aim is to achieve
the best possible result at the least possible expense.
2.1 Letters
You are most likely to use a letter when communicating with someone outside your organisation.
Letters should be polite, accurate, clear, logical and concise; and should give appropriate references.
A Spelling and punctuation should, of course, be impeccable! Also, if your company has a house-style,
C your letter should conform to that.
C 2.2 Example: A letter

A Brown Bros
24 Croxley Road
G Coulton
L Surrey
O RH3 9BZ
B Required so that letter

Tel: 0192 730 1933
A Fax: 0192 730 1934
can be filed and retrieved
L
Date: 11 May 20X1
Always use this if you have it
B Our ref: ACF/pj from previous correspondence
O
X Your ref: LRS/NP
If possible, address to a
. specific individual
The Invoice Clerk
C Pebble and Sons
O 16 Rowe Street
M Lambourn
Berks
MA6 3AJ
Body of letter
Dear Sir
Re: ………………(subject of letter)………………………………
Yours faithfully goes with 'Dear Sir'. 'Yours sincerely'

when writing to a named person (Mr Smith)
Yours faithfully
C Ford Type name and title under signature
Carol Ford, Accounts Supervisor
QUESTION Letters
If you begin a letter ‘Dear Sir’, you should sign the letter
A Yours sincerely A
B
C
Yours faithfully
Yours truly
C
D Yours gratefully C
ANSWER A
B ‘Yours faithfully’ is the formal ending if the recipient’s name is not used. A would be used if the
recipients name had been referred to, eg ‘Dear Mr Jackson’. C and D are not generally used in
business letters.
G
L
O
2.3 Memos B
The memorandum or memo performs internally the same function as a letter does in communication
externally. It can be used for any kind of communication that is best conveyed in writing such as reports, A
brief messages or notes. L
Memos need less detail than a formal letter.
B
2.4 Example: a memo O
X
Forrest Fire Extinguishers Ltd
.
MEMORANDUM C
To: All Staff Ref: PANC/mp
O
From: D B Gavaskar, Managing Director Date: 13 January 20X0
Main theme M
Subject: Overtime arrangements for January/February
I would like to remind you that thanks to Pancake Day on and around 12 February, we can expect the
usual increased demand for small extinguishers. I am afraid this will involve substantial overtime hours
for everyone. Reason for writing
In order to make this as easy as possible, the works canteen will be open all evening for snacks and hot
drinks. The works van will also be available in case of transport difficulties late at night.
I realise that this period puts pressure on production and administrative staff alike, but I would
appreciate your co-operation in working as many hours of overtime as you feel able.
Copies to: All staff No need to Finish by stating clearly what is
sign off required of recipient in response
QUESTION Memorandums
A memorandum is
A Signed by the person sending it
B Generally used for the communication of short messages between different organisations
C Not used if important information is to be communicated
D For any written communication within an organisation
ANSWER
D A memo can be used for internal communication of information that is presented in writing, so B
and C are incorrect. A is incorrect as it does not have to be signed.
A 2.5 Emails
C If available, you can use emails in the same way as a memo, or for external communications. It is
possible for emails to be used for documents to be signed electronically, or else for documents to be
C scanned, signed and then sent as email attachments.
A 2.5.1 Advantages of email
Email has the following advantages;
G (a) Speed (transmission, being electronic, is almost instantaneous). Email is far faster than post. It is
L a particular time-saver when communicating with people overseas.
(b) Economy (no need for stamps etc). Email is reckoned to be 20 times cheaper than fax.
O
(c) Efficiency (a message is prepared once but can be sent to thousands of employees at the touch
B of a button).
A (d) Security (access can be restricted by the use of passwords).
L (e) Documents can be attached from word-processing and other packages.

(f) Electronic delivery and read receipts can be requested.
B 2.5.2 Dangers of email

O Email has the following dangers:
X 

Confidentiality – passwords must be safeguarded
Used to replace other communications that may be more appropriate (eg conversation)
.  Too much going to people who don't need it as it is so easy to send to many recipients
C 2.6 Reports
O
M Standard reports are a regular part of the management information system.
Ad hoc reports deal with a one-off issue or problem.
A formal report may be needed where a comprehensive investigation has taken place.
ELEMENTS OF A FORMAL REPORT
Title Subject of report
Terms of reference Clarify what has been requested
Introduction Who the report is from and to

How the information was obtained
ELEMENTS OF A FORMAL REPORT
Main body Divided into sections with sub-headings to aid reader

Logical order
Conclusions Summarises findings
Recommendations Based on information and evidence

May be combined with conclusion
Signature Of writer
Executive summary Saves time for managers receiving a long report

No more than one page
One example of a short formal report is shown below.

A
2.7 Example: short formal report C
REPORT ON PROPOSED UPDATING OF COMPANY POLICY MANUAL
C
To: Board of Directors, BCD Ltd A
From: J Thurber, Opus Management Consultants
Status: Confidential
Date: 3 October 20X8 G
I INTRODUCTION AND TERMS OF REFERENCE L
This report details the results of an investigation commissioned by the Board on 7 September
20X8. We were asked to consider the current applicability of the company's policy manual
O
and to propose changes needed to bring it into line with current practice. B
II METHOD
A
The following investigatory procedures were adopted:
L
1 Interview all senior staff regarding use of the policy manual in their departments
2 Observe working practices in each department
III FINDINGS B
The manual was last updated 10 years ago. From our observations, the following amendments are
now needed:
O
1 The policy section on computer use should be amended. It deals with safe storage of
X
disks, which is no longer applicable as data is now stored on a server. Also, it does not .
set out the company's email policy.
2 The company's equal opportunities policy needs to be included.
C
3 The coding list in the manual is now very out of date. A number of new cost centres O
and profit centres have been set up in the last 10 years and the codes for these are not
noted in the manual.
M
4 There is no mention of the provisions of the Data Protection Act as they relate to the
company.
IV CONCLUSIONS
We discovered upon interviewing staff that very little use is made of the policy manual. When
it has been amended as above, it can be brought back into use, and we recommend that this
should be done as soon as possible.
Signed J Thurber, Opus Management Consultants
A formal report like this will of course be word-processed.
2.8 Tables, charts and graphs

If you are preparing a report (or perhaps preparing slides for a presentation), you may need to use visual
aids of some kind. Diagrams are useful in conveying large amounts of data more accessibly and in
adding interest and appeal to a document.
In addition to the numerical competences required to organise your data, there are some key principles
of effective ‘graphic’ communication.
 Give each diagram or chart a concise and meaningful title.
 Cite the source of the data, where relevant.
 Clearly label all elements of the diagram, either on the diagram itself, or in a separate ‘key’ to the
colours or symbols used.
 Keep textual elements (labels, explanatory notes) brief.
A  Keep the presentation as simple as possible: cut down on unnecessary lines and elements, to
avoid overcrowding, clutter and confusion.
C  Make the diagram large enough so that it is easy to read.
C Let’s look briefly at some examples of visual elements you might use in an informal report.
A
2.8.1 Tables
Tables are a good way of organising information. The use of columns and rows allows the data to be
G classified under appropriate headings, clearly organised and labelled, totalled up in various ways (across
rows or down columns) and so on.
L You might use a table format to organise data about a list of trainees, say, as follows.
O
Staff member Training Training Duration of Cost of training
B undertaken provider training (days)
A John
L Amy
Fred
B Total:
O
2.8.2 Column and bar charts
X
Column and bar charts are useful for showing or comparing magnitudes or sizes of items: for example,
. sales revenue or expenditure on a month-by-month basis, or training costs per department.
C  The diagram needs to be labelled to indicate what it shows.
O  The positions of the bars are labelled to show what they represent (eg months or departments).
M  The height/length of the bars, drawn against a specified scale, indicate the magnitudes of the
different items (monetary value or number).
 The bars can be subdivided to show components of the total magnitudes (eg breakdown of
monthly expenditure by department or category).
The main difference between column and bar charts is that bar charts present the information in a
horizontal bar and column charts present the information vertically (like a column). The example below
is a column chart.
Sales Revenue 20X0
1,000 Customer A
Customer B
Customer C
800
600
400
200
0
Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
2.8.3 Pie charts A

Pie charts are useful for showing the relative sizes of component elements of a total value or amount, C
represented by the 360 of the circle or ‘pie’. An example might be showing the breakdown of the time
you spend on different tasks during a day, or the breakdown of monthly sales revenue by product or C
customer. Below are the steps involved in providing a pie chart in relation to this.
A
Step 1 Calculate each item as a fraction and/or percentage of the whole. (If handling emails
takes you five hours out of your 40-hour week, say, that’s 5/40 or 1/8 or 12.5%.)
G
Step 2 Translate each fraction/percentage into fractions of a circle. (The ‘slice’ occupied by
handling emails would be 1/8 of the pie.) If you want to draw very accurately, using
L
geometric instruments, you would calculate the exact number of degrees of the circle O
occupied by each slice, as a fraction or percentage of 360° (1/8 × 360= 45).
B
Step 3 Draw a circle, and divide it up using the fractions (or, to be more accurate, degrees) A
calculated for each slice.
L
Step 4 Label each slice with what it represents, and its percentage of the total. Check that it
adds up to 100%!
B
EMAILS:
O
5 hours X
(12.5%)
.
LEDGER
PAYROLL
TASKS:
C
TASKS:
15 hours
20 hours
(50%)
O
(37.5%) M
2.8.4 Line graphs

Line graphs are useful for showing the relationship between two variables (represented by the
horizontal and vertical axes of the graph), by plotting points and joining them up with straight or curved
lines. These are particularly useful for demonstrating trends, such as the increase in departmental
output as more time/money is invested in training and development – or fluctuations in revenue or
expenditure (or other values) over time.
Here’s a very simple example.
Average waiting time for processing of
petty cash claims on different days of the week
120
Waiting time (minutes) 100
A 80
C 60
C 40
A
20
Mon Tues Wed Thurs Fri
G
Day of the week
Such a graph could be used to highlight variations in work throughput.

L
2.8.5 Scatter diagrams
O
Scatter diagrams take information, often presented in a table, and use it to plot points on a chart. The
B chart has two axis, just like a line graph, but the points are not joined up. If enough points are plotted it
A will be possible to draw deductions about the relationship between the two series of data. For example,
the following data is available regarding a factory.
L The output at a factory each week for the last ten weeks, and the cost of that output, were as follows.
Week 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
B
Output (units) 10 12 10 8 9 11 7 12 9 14
Cost ($) 42 44 38 34 38 43 30 47 37 50
O The data could be shown on a scatter diagram as follows.
X
.
C
O
M
The cost depends on the volume of output: volume is the independent variable and is shown on the x
axis. You will notice from the graph that the plotted data, although scattered, lie approximately on a
rising trend line, with higher total costs at higher output volumes. (The lower part of the axes have been
omitted, so as not to waste space. The break in the axes is indicated by the jagged lines.)
QUESTION Communication methods

In each of the cases below, select the form of communication which will generally be the most
appropriate.
1 A complaint to a supplier about the quality of goods supplied.
A Letter
B Memo
C Formal report
D Email
2 A query to a supervisor about the coding of an invoice.
A Email
B Memo
C Face-to-face
D All of the above are equally suitable if available A
3 An investigation into the purchasing costs of your company.
C
A Letter
B Memo C
C
D
Formal report
Email
A
4 Notification to customers of a change of the company’s telephone number.
A Letter G
B
C
Memo
Email
L
D All of the above are equally suitable if available O
5 Reply to an email.
B
A
B
Letter
Memo A
C
D
Email
Face-to-face
L
6 Query to the sales department about an expenses claim.
A Memo B
B
C
Email
Telephone
O
D All of the above are equally suitable if available X
ANSWER .
1 A C
2
3
D
C
O
4 A M
5 C
6 D
EXAM FOCUS POINT
There is a technical article for MA2 on the ACCA website titled, ‘Effective Presentation And
Communication Of Information Using Charts’. It is recommended that you study it as part of your wider
reading on the subject.
3 Confidentiality
Some information will be confidential, maybe because of the Data Protection Act or because of company
policy. Access to it will be restricted.
A
Keeping some information confidential is an important legal requirement. It may also be part of your
C organisation's policy.
C Some requirements are pure common sense. For example most of us would expect details of our wages,
salaries, health etc to be kept confidential. Others are less obvious. For example some information about
A your organisation may be valuable to competitors. This is known as commercially sensitive information.
The Data Protection Act 1998 aims to protect the rights of individuals in relation to information
G organisations hold about them.
L 3.1 Why is privacy an important issue?

O In recent years, there has been a growing popular fear that information about individuals which was
B stored on computer files and processed by computer could be misused. In the UK the current legislation
is the Data Protection Act 1998.
A
L Privacy is the right of a person to be free of unwanted intrusion by others into their lives or activities.
B 3.2 The Data Protection Act 1998

O The Data Protection Act 1998 is an attempt to protect the individual. The Act covers manual and
computer systems.
X
3.2.1 Definitions of terms used in the Act
.
In order to understand the Act it is necessary to know some of the technical terms used in it.
C (a) Personal data is information about a living individual, including expressions of opinion about him
O or her. The 'living individual' could come from within the organisation or from outside eg job
applicant, person who works for a supplier, person who works for a customer etc.
M
(b) Data users are organisations or individuals who control personal data and the use of personal
data.
(c) A data subject is an individual who is the subject of personal data.
3.2.2 The rights of data subjects

The Act includes the following rights for data subjects.
(a) A data subject may seek compensation through the courts for damage and any associated
distress caused by the loss, destruction or unauthorised disclosure of data about himself or
herself or by inaccurate data about himself or herself.
(b) A data subject may apply to the courts for inaccurate data to be put right or even wiped off the
data user's files altogether. Such applications may also be made to the Registrar.
(c) A data subject may obtain access to personal data of which he is the subject. (This is known as
the 'subject access' provision.) In other words, a data subject can ask to see his or her personal
data that the data user is holding.
(d) A data subject can sue a data user for any damage or distress caused to him by personal data
about him which is incorrect or misleading as to matter of fact (rather than opinion).
EXAM FOCUS POINT
The Data Protection Act is important and a question on it is possible.
The Act applies to information held in any form. Therefore it does not matter whether the information is
held on paper, in computer files or in another form – it is all covered by the Act.
A
The strictest requirements of the Act apply to 'sensitive data' such as racial origin, health, sexual
C
orientation or political or religious beliefs. The processing of sensitive data is generally forbidden without C
the consent of the subject.
Data users are organisations or individuals which use personal data covered by the Act.
A
The most obvious use is actually processing the data. However use also includes controlling the G
contents of personal data files.
Data users must apply to the Data Protection Registrar to be registered for holding personal data for a
L
particular purpose. Registered users are only allowed to hold and use personal data for the registered O
purposes.
Data subjects are individuals on whom personal data is held.
B
A
Data subjects can sue data users for damage or distress caused by inaccurate data, loss of data or L
unauthorised disclosure. They also have a legal right to see their own personal data.
3.3 Internal requirements B

Within an organisation, the policy manual will often lay down other confidentiality rules. For example O
some organisations forbid employees to talk to the press without authorisation, or to publish their
research results. You can imagine that businesses planning large redundancies or the launch of a new X
product will not want the information to become public prematurely.
.
Paper files with restricted access should be
 Listed
C
 Stored securely O
 Only accessible by specific people
M
Computer systems often use passwords to restrict access to information that is held on computer. You
should never divulge your password to an unauthorised person or keep it in view on your desk. Think of
your password as needing as much secrecy as your bank PIN number.
Use of the Internet can pose particular problems in maintaining confidentiality. Many companies have a
policy on the purposes for which the Internet should and should not be used. The law surrounding
Internet information and its protection is still developing.
If you have access to restricted information in any form, you are responsible for protecting it to comply
with company policy and the law. You should lock confidential papers or computer disks away when you
are not using them. You should not leave them lying around on your desk (or in the photocopier!).
You should also not provide confidential information to others outside your department without
checking with a supervisor.
QUESTION Confidential information

Your company's planning department asks for a copy of the monthly research cost reports for the last six
months. Your computer password does not give you access to this information. What should you do?
A Refer the query to your supervisor
B Ask someone what the password is that will access the information
C Ask for your password to be changed so that it will access the information
D Try and find a hard copy of the information
ANSWER
A Access to this information is restricted. B, C and D are therefore not appropriate.
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 Management information should be relevant to and understood by the individual who receives it.
 Types of communication include:
– Letters
– Memos
– Emails
– Formal reports
It is important to choose the right one for a given purpose.
 Standard reports are a regular part of the management information system.

 Ad hoc reports deal with a one-off issue or problem.
 Some information will be confidential, maybe because of the Data Protection Act or because of company A
policy. Access to it will be restricted.
C
 The Data Protection Act 1998 aims to protect the rights of individuals in relation to information
organisations hold about them. C
A
QUICK QUIZ
1 Which one of the following options would not help management information to be understood?
G
A Avoiding unexplained technical terms
B Using charts, diagrams and tables L
C
D
Asking the users' view on required information and presentation
Lots of detail
O
2 Which one of the following is not an aim of house style for documents? B
A To make it easier to read the documents A
B
C
To make it easier to locate information
To control costs
L
D To present a consistent image to people outside the organisation
3 Information about an organisation which may be valuable to competitors is known as:
B
A
B
Cost sensitive information
Commercially sensitive information O
C
D
Commercially secure information
Cost secure information
X
4 Data users are individuals on whom personal data is held. Is this true or false?
.
5 List five considerations when choosing a communication method. C
6 Which one of the following is a possible disadvantage/danger of email? O
A Economy M
B Speed
C Delivery and read receipts
D Large volumes of information
7 What would be the most appropriate method of communication in each of the following circumstances?
(a) Explaining to a customer that a cash discount that has been deducted was not valid, as the
invoice was not paid within the discount period.
(b) Requesting customer balances from a colleague in the sales ledger department.
(c) Arranging your holiday period with the HR manager.
(d) A complaint to a supplier regarding the delivery times of goods, which are not as agreed.
(e) Information to be provided to the sales director regarding the breakdown of sales geographically
for the last two years.
1 D Cutting out unnecessary detail can greatly benefit understandability

2 C Controlling costs is not one of the aims of house style

3 B This is known as commercially sensitive information
4 False Data subjects are individuals on whom personal data is held. Data users are organisations or
individuals which use personal data.
5 Answers could include: time, complexity, distance, written record, feedback/interaction, confidentiality,
recipient, and cost
6 D The danger with email is that too much information will go to people who don't need it because it
is so easy to send to many recipients.
7 (a) Telephone, followed-up in writing if required.
A (b) Note or email.
C (c) Email to request dates, perhaps followed-up by face-to-face discussion or phone call if
C negotiation is required.
A (d) Letter.
(e) Email or possibly a more formal report.
G
Now try ...
L
O Attempt the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
B Number
A Q25
Q26
L
Q27
Q28
B Q29
O
X
.
C
O
M
A
C
part C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
Cost recording .
C
O
M
PART B: COST RECORDING
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
C H A P T E R
A
In many organisations, particularly manufacturing
businesses, materials are a significant part of the total Materials C
costs of operations. In a manufacturing company, most
materials can be classified as raw materials and bought-
C
in components, as work in progress (part-finished A
production) or as finished goods (completed items of
production not yet sold).
This chapter explains the procedures and documentation G
that are used for purchasing and using materials, and the
way that materials are accounted for within a cost L
O
accounting system. Materials costs, including wastage,
need to be controlled. There must also be a method for
giving a value to materials held in inventory at the end of
an accounting period. This chapter goes into some detail
B
about the system for costing materials and controlling A
materials costs.
L
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
1 Types of material B1 (a)

2 Buying materials A2 (c), B1 (b), (e)
3 Valuing materials issues and inventories B1 (c)
4 Inventory control B1 (f), (g)
5 Inventory control levels B1 (h), (i)
6 Computers and inventory control B1 (j)


B Cost recording
1 Accounting for materials
(a) Describe the main types of material classification K
(b) Describe the procedures and documentation required to K

ensure the correct authorisation, coding, analysis and
recording of direct and indirect material costs
A (c) Explain, illustrate and evaluate the FIFO, LIFO and periodic S
and cumulative weighted average methods used to price
C materials issued from inventory
C (e) Calculate material input requirements, and control measures,
where wastage occurs
S
A (f) Describe the procedures required to monitor inventory and to K

minimise discrepancies and losses
(g) Explain and illustrate the costs of holding inventory and of S
G being without inventory
(h) Explain, illustrate and evaluate inventory control levels S
L (minimum, maximum, reorder)
(i) Calculate and interpret optimal order quantities S
O
(j) Explain the relationship between the materials costing K
B system and the inventory control system
A
L
B 1 Types of material
O Materials can be classified according to the substances that make them up, how they are measured, or
X their physical properties.
.
1.1 Classifying materials
C
There are a number of different ways in which materials can be classified. The three main ways of
O classifying materials are as follows.
M  They can be classified according to the substances that make them up

 They can be classified according to how they are measured
 They can be classified according to their physical properties
Materials may be made of one or more substances. For example, when classifying materials according to
the substances that make them up, they may be classified as either wood, plastic, metal, wool and so
on. Many items may be made up of a combination of substances.
CHAPTER 7 // MATERIALS
You may also classify materials according to how they are measured. Accounting text books could make
it easy for you to believe that all materials come by the litre, metre or kilogram. In practice however, you
will find that materials really come in bags, packets or by the thousand.
Finally, materials may also be classified by one or more of their physical properties. The same basic
piece of material may be distinguished by one or more of the following features:
 Colour
 Shape
 Fire resistance
 Water resistance
 Abrasiveness
 Flexibility
 Quality
Performance Objective 10 requires you to manage working capital requirements (which include A
inventories) effectively. The knowledge you will gain in this chapter will help you to demonstrate your
competence in this area.
C
C
1.2 Raw materials A
Raw materials are goods purchased for incorporation into products for sale. Raw materials are a direct
cost.
G
L
Raw materials is a term which you are likely to come across often, both in your studies and your
workplace. But what are raw materials? O
Examples of raw materials are as follows: B
 Clay for making terracotta garden pots A
 Timber for making dining room tables
 Paper for making books L
Raw materials are a direct cost of production as they are easily identifiable with a unit of production.
QUESTION Raw materials

B
Without getting too technical, what are the main raw materials used in the manufacture of the following O
items? X
(a)
(b)
A car
A box of breakfast cereal
.
(c) A house (just the basic structure) C
(d) Your own organisation's products
O
ANSWER M
(a) Metal, rubber, plastic, glass, fabric, oil, paint, glue
(b) Cereals, plastic, cardboard, glue. You might have included sugar and preservatives and so on,
depending upon what you eat for breakfast
(c) Sand, gravel, cement, bricks, plaster, wood, metal, plastic, glass, slate
(d) You will have to mark your own answer. If you work for a service organisation like a firm of
accountants, you could view the paper of sets of accounts sent out to clients as raw materials,
although in practice such materials are likely to be regarded as indirect costs.
1.3 Work in progress

Work in progress is a term used to represent an intermediate stage between the manufacturer
purchasing the materials that go to make up the finished product and the finished product.
Work in progress is another term which you are likely to come across often, and valuing work in progress
is one of the most difficult tasks in costing.
Work in progress means that some work has been done on the materials purchased as part of the
process of producing the finished product, but the production process is not complete. Examples of
work in progress are as follows.
(a) Terracotta pots which have been shaped, but which have not been fired, and are therefore
unfinished.
(b) Dining room tables which have been assembled, but have not been polished, and are therefore
A not ready for sale.
C (c) Paper which has been used to print books, but which has not yet been bound. The books are
therefore not yet assembled, and not yet ready for sale.
C
A 1.4 Finished goods
A finished good is a product ready for sale or despatch.
G
Did you notice how all of the examples of work in progress were items which were not ready for sale? It
L therefore follows that examples of finished goods are as follows.
O  Terracotta pots ready for sale or despatch
B 

Dining room tables ready for sale or despatch
Books ready for sale or despatch
A The examples in the previous paragraph show terracotta pots which have now been fired, dining room
L tables which have now been polished, and books which have now been bound. These final processes
have transformed our work in progress into finished goods.
B 1.5 Direct and indirect materials costs

Materials are either a direct or indirect cost, depending upon how easily they can be traced to a specific
O unit of production.
X  Direct materials are materials that are easily identifiable with a specific unit of production, such
. as raw materials.
 Indirect materials are materials that are not easily identifiable with a specific unit of production.
C
In general, indirect materials do not form part of the final product, but do make the manufacture of that
O product possible. There are some exceptions to this, for example, nails used in the production of a
M cupboard can be identified specifically with the cupboard and form part of the final product. However,
because the cost is likely to be relatively insignificant, the expense of tracing such costs does not justify
the possible benefits from calculating more accurate direct costs.
Indirect materials are often referred to as ‘consumables’ and include such things as cleaning products,
oil and grease for machines, protective clothing, disposable tools and stationary supplies. Indirect
material costs are an overhead cost.
QUESTION Materials
(a) Distinguish between raw materials, work in progress and finished goods.
(b) Give three examples of indirect materials costs.
ANSWER
(a) Raw materials are goods purchased for incorporation into products for sale, but not yet issued to
production. Work in progress is the name given to the materials while they are in the course of
being converted to the final product. Finished goods are the end products when they are ready to
be sold.
(b) Some examples of indirect materials costs are as follows.
(i) Oil for machine maintenance
(ii) Cleaning fluids and substances
(iii) Rags, dusters and the like
(iv) Glue if used in small quantities
(v) Secondary packaging, for example the sort of boxes you can pick up at the check-out in
supermarkets A
C
C
2 Buying materials
A
Procedures and documentation are required for material purchases.
G
2.1 Purchasing procedures L
All businesses have to buy materials of some sort, and this means that decisions have to be made and
somebody has to be responsible for doing the buying.
O
Large businesses have specialist buying departments managed by people who are very skilled at the job. B
One of the reasons for the success of companies like Tesco is that they are expert at buying good quality
goods at the best prices.
A
In spite of this, the essence of a buying transaction is simple and, in fact, familiar because you buy L
things every day and (mainly subconsciously) go through the following process.


You need something
You find out where you can buy it
B
 Identify the most suitable item (take into account cost, quality, and so on) O
 You order the item, or perhaps several if you will need more in the future
 You receive the item X
 You pay for the item
.
In a business this process will be more involved, but only because those spending the money are likely
to be different from those looking after the goods and those using them, and because none of those C
people will actually own the money spent. The following diagram illustrates who will be involved. O
M
A
C 2.2 Purchasing documentation
C Clearly there needs to be some means by which different departments can let each other know what
A they want and what is being done about it, and even the smallest business will need to keep records of
some sort. We shall describe a manual system that might be used in a fairly large organisation. In reality
it is likely that much of the procedure would be computerised, but this does not alter the basic principles
or information flows.
G
2.2.1 Purchase requisition form
L
The first stage will be that the department requiring the goods will complete a purchase requisition form
O asking the purchasing department to carry out the necessary transaction. An example is shown below.
B Note that the purchase requisition will usually need some form of authorisation, probably that of a
senior person in the department requiring the goods and possibly also that of a senior person in the
A finance department if substantial expense is involved.
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
2.2.2 Order form

Often the business will use a regular source of supply. The purchasing department may, however, be
aware of special offers or have details of new suppliers: part of its job is to keep up to date with what is
on the market. Thus once a purchase requisition is received in the purchasing department, the first task
is to identify the most suitable supplier.
Often the requisitioning department will specify the goods they require but the buying department may
have a choice (for example in deciding what quality paper will be ordered for stationery). Whatever the
decision made, an order form is then completed by the purchasing department (again, it may have to be
authorised by the finance department to ensure that budgets are not being over-stepped) and this is sent
to the supplier. The order form, an example of which is shown below, will contain the following details.
(a) The name and address of the ordering organisation.
(b) The date of order, and reference numbers for both ordering department and supplier.
(c) The address and date(s) for delivery (by road, rail, air and so on) or collection.
(d) Details of goods/services: quantity, code (if any), specification, unit costs and so on.
An order form should be sent even if goods are initially ordered by telephone, to confirm that the order is
a legitimate one and to make sure that the supplier does not overlook it.
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
The purchase order is important because it provides a means by which the business can later check
that the goods received are the same as those ordered. Copies can be sent to the person who
requisitioned the goods so that he knows they are on their way and also to the stores so that they can
arrange to accommodate the goods. Either now or later a copy can be sent to the accounts department
so that they can see that goods invoiced were genuinely required and that the purchase was properly
authorised.
2.2.3 Despatch note

Certain other documents may arise before the goods are actually received. The supplier may
acknowledge the order and perhaps indicate how long it is likely to take to be fulfilled. A despatch note
may be sent to warn that the goods are on their way.
2.2.4 Delivery note

We now move to the stores department. When the goods are delivered, goods inwards will be presented
with a delivery note or advice note (although bear in mind that smaller suppliers may not go to these
lengths). This is the supplier's document (a copy is signed by the person receiving the goods and
returned to the supplier) and, as such, there is no guarantee that its details are correct. If the actual
goods cannot be inspected immediately, the delivery note should be signed 'subject to inspection'.
2.2.5 Goods received note
A Once the goods have been delivered they should be inspected as soon as possible. A goods received
note (GRN) will be completed by goods inwards on the basis of a physical check, which involves
C counting the items received and seeing that they are not damaged.
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
. A copy of the GRN can be sent to the purchasing department so that it can be matched with the
C purchase order. This is to make sure that the correct number and specification of items have been
received. Any discrepancies would be taken up with the supplier.
O A copy of the GRN would also be sent to the accounts department so that it can be matched with the
M purchase invoice when it is received. The payment of the invoice is the end of the transaction (unless
there is a mistake on the invoice or there was some problem with the delivery, in which case a credit
note may later be received from the supplier).
2.3 Buying and costing

Clearly the buying department needs to retain cost information for the purpose of identifying suitable
suppliers. This is likely to be in the form of catalogues and price lists.
The costing department is chiefly interested in the actual cost of materials as shown on the invoice and
included in the accounting records as cash and credit transactions.
2.3.1 Example: Buying and costing

It is Amy Alexander's first day in the costing department and she has been told to calculate the materials
cost of job 1234 which has just been completed. No invoice has yet been received for the main material
used, which is known as LW32. Amy uses her initiative and pops down to the purchasing department to
see if they can help. They are rather busy but someone hands her a very well-thumbed catalogue and a
thick file of purchase orders, all relating to the supplier of LW32. There are many orders for LW32, one
of which has today's date. How should Amy go about costing the LW32 used for job 1234?
Solution
The quickest thing to do would be to phone up the supplier and ask what price will be charged for the
order in question, but there might be good reasons for not doing this (for example not wishing to prompt
an earlier invoice than usual!) It seems likely that, in the absence of the actual information, the best way
of ascertaining a price for LW32 is to consult the catalogue (assuming it is up to date) and to find the
most recent purchase order that has been invoiced. If there is a discrepancy, previous invoices could be
looked at to see if they show a price rise since the date of the catalogue. If the price fluctuates widely it A
might be better to calculate an average.
C
As Amy gets to know her way around the system she will learn which are the most reliable sources of
information. Possibly some suppliers make frequent errors on invoices but quote correct unit prices on C
delivery notes. The moral is to always be on your guard for errors.
A
QUESTION Materials purchase
Draw a flow diagram illustrating the main documents involved in a materials purchase, from its initiation G
up until the time of delivery.
L
ANSWER O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
2.4 Material input requirements
C
Some organisations might need to buy 'extra' materials because wastage may occur as a matter of
O
course in some production processes. M
2.4.1 Example: Material input requirements
1 kg of Product A is manufactured from 1 kg of Material X in a process where wastage is equivalent to
3% of material input.
How many kg of Material X are needed in order to produce 100 kg of Product A?
100 kg of Material X will only produce 97 kg of Product A (and there will be 3 kg of Material X wasted).
100 kg of Material X = (100 – 0.03)  100 kg Product A
= 0.97  100 kg of Product A
= 97 kg Product A
Therefore, in order to produce 100 kg of Product A, the company needs to buy 103.09 kg of Material X.
100 kg Material X
= 103.09 kg Material X
0.97
Kg
Material X input 103.09
Wastage (3%  103.09 kg) (3.09)
Product A output 100.00
QUESTION Wastage
If JH Co produces 1 unit of Product L from 2 kg of Material W, and wastage equates to 5% of material
input, how many kg of Material W should JH Co buy in order to produce 4,000 units of Product L? State
your answer to the nearest kg.
A ANSWER
C 4,000 units of Product L are produced from
8,000 kg *
0.95 * *
= 8,421 kg Material W
C * Each unit of Product L is made from 2 kg of Material W.

A **(100% – 5% wastage)
Summary
G Material W input
Kg
8,421
L 5% wastage (5%  8,421 kg)
Material W processed
(421)
8,000
O If 8,000 kg of Material W are processed, they will produce 4,000 units of Product L (8,000 kg  2 kg
B = 4,000 units).
A
L It is important, therefore, that any wastage is taken into account when calculating material input
requirements and hence quantities of materials to be purchased.
B 2.5 Wastage and wastage control measures
O When wastage levels are high they are an avoidable expense.
X In the previous example, wastage of materials in production was an expected part of the production
process. In some production systems, some wastage cannot be avoided.
.
On the other hand, wastage is an expense, and when wastage levels are unnecessarily high, they are an
C avoidable expense, reducing profit below what it should be. So what may be the causes of avoidable
O wastage? The most common causes of avoidable wastage are probably:

 Inefficiency, carelessness or other mistakes by workers, resulting in rejected items or wasteful
M usage of materials.
 Badly-maintained machinery or other equipment, causing unnecessary waste
 Poor quality of materials.
 Failure to identify mistakes at an early stage in production and put them right before the wastage
becomes excessive.
 Holding materials in poor storage conditions, so that wastage occurs due to damage or
deterioration.
Improved materials usage might be achieved by reducing levels of wastage, where wastage is currently
high.
2.5.1 Wastage control measures

Wastage can be measured in a number of ways. Typical measures include:
 Input wastage. Quantity of materials wasted as a percentage of the quantity of material used
 Output wastage. Number of quality rejects as a percentage of total output
 Rework. Rework costs as a percentage of production costs.
QUESTION Reducing wastage

How can wastage be reduced?
ANSWER
A
Here are some suggestions.
(a) Changing the specifications for cutting solid materials.
C
(b) Introducing new equipment that reduces wastage in processing or handling materials. C
(c) Identifying poor quality output at an earlier stage in the operational processes. A
(d) Using better quality materials. Even though more expensive, better quality materials might save
costs because they are less likely to tear or might last longer.
G
(e) Better training and supervision of workers, to reduce the frequency of mistakes and inefficiencies
in materials handling L
(f) Where possible, re-working rejected items of output. O
B
A
3 Valuing materials issues and inventories L
Materials issued from inventory can be valued using FIFO, LIFO and weighted average methods.
B
3.1 Just-in-time inventory policy O
The implicit assumption in the Amy Alexander example above was that materials were bought
specifically for individual jobs and therefore that each order could be identified with a particular job. This
X
is possible in practice. Certainly, keeping large quantities of inventory is something to be avoided in the .
business environment of the new millennium. Holding inventory means that you have to have
somewhere to put it and so it takes up space that could be used for other purposes. Often it means C
employing somebody to look after it, perhaps 24 hours a day if it is very valuable.
O
Ideally, you should receive an order for so many items of the product in question, buy exactly the right
quantity of materials to make that many items and be left with no inventories of finished goods, work in M
progress or raw materials. This is known as the just-in-time (JIT) approach, that is, the just-in-time
purchasing of inventories to meet just-in-time production of goods ordered. From the point of view of costing,
there is very little difficulty with the JIT approach. The materials costs of each production run are known
because the materials used were bought specially for that run. There was no inventory to start with and there
is none left over.
3.2 Buffer inventory

However the approach more common in practice is to keep a certain amount of inventory in reserve to
cope with fluctuations in demand and with suppliers who cannot be relied upon to deliver the right
quality and quantity of materials at the right time. This reserve of inventory is known as buffer inventory
(or safety inventory Buffer inventory may also be held when it is more economical to purchase inventory
in greater quantities than required (in order to obtain bulk purchase discounts). The valuation of buffer
inventory is one of the most important elements of your studies at this level.
3.3 Inventory valuation

3.3.1 The inventory valuation problem
Suppose, for example, that you have 50 litres of a chemical in inventory. You buy 2,000 litres to allow
for the next batch of production. Both the opening inventory and the newly-purchased inventory cost $2
per litre.
Litres $
Opening inventory 50 100
Purchases 2,000 4,000
2,050 4,100
A You actually use 1,600 litres, leaving you with 450 litres. You know that each of the 1,600 litres used
cost $2, as did each of the 450 litres remaining. There is no costing problem here.
C Now suppose that in the following month you decide to buy 1,300 litres, but have to pay $2.10 per litre
C because you lose a 10c discount if buying under 1,500 litres.
Cost Total
A Litres
per litre
$
cost
$
Opening inventory 450 2.00 900
Purchases 1,300 2.10 2,730
G 1,750 3,630
L For the next batch of production you use 1,600 litres, as before. What did the 1,600 litres used cost,
and what value should you give to the 150 litres remaining in inventory?
O We need to know the cost of the litres that we have used so that we know how much to charge for the
B final product and so that we can compare this cost with the equivalent cost in earlier or future periods.
We also need to know the cost of closing inventory both because it will form part of the usage figure in
A the next period and for financial accounting purposes. Closing inventory is often a significant figure in
L the financial statements and it appears in both the statement of profit or loss (income statement) and
the statement of financial position.
We therefore have to use a consistent method of pricing the litres which provides a reasonable
B approximation of the costs of the inventory.
O 3.3.2 Inventory valuation methods
X There are a number of different methods of valuing inventory.
. (a) FIFO – First in, first out

This method values issues at the prices of the oldest items in inventory at the time the issues
C were made. The remaining inventory will thus be valued at the price of the most recent
O purchases. Say, for example, ABC Co's inventory consisted of four deliveries of raw material in the
last month:
M Units
1 September 1,000 at $2.00
8 September 500 at $2.50
15 September 500 at $3.00
22 September 1,000 at $3.50
If on 23 September 1,500 units were issued to production, 1,000 of these units would be priced
at $2 (the cost of the 1,000 oldest units in inventory), and 500 at $2.50 (the cost of the next
oldest 500). 1,000 units of closing inventory would be valued at $3.50 (the cost of the 1,000
most recent units received) and 500 units at $3.00 (the cost of the next most recent 500).
(b) LIFO – Last in, first out
This method is the opposite of FIFO. Issues will be valued at the prices of the most recent
purchases; hence inventory remaining will be valued at the cost of the oldest items. In the
example above it will be 1,000 units of issues which will be valued at $3.50, and the other 500
units issued will be valued at $3.00. 1,000 units of closing inventory will be valued at $2.00,
and 500 at $2.50.
(c) Weighted average pricing methods
There are two main weighted average pricing methods: cumulative and periodic.
(i) Cumulative weighted average pricing
With this method we calculate an average cost of all the litres in inventory whenever a
new delivery is received.
(ii) Periodic weighted average pricing
The periodic weighted average pricing method involves calculating a new inventory value
at the end of a given period (rather than whenever new inventory is purchased, as with the
cumulative weighted average pricing method). The periodic weighted average pricing
method is easier to calculate than the cumulative weighted average method, and therefore A
requires less effort, but it must be applied retrospectively since the costs of materials used
cannot be calculated until the end of the period. C
(d) Standard cost C
Under the standard costing method, all issues are at a predetermined standard price. You will
study standard costing in more detail in Paper 7, Planning, Control and Performance
A
Management.
3.3.3 Example: FIFO, LIFO and weighted average pricing methods G

The following transactions should be considered in order to demonstrate FIFO, LIFO and weighted L
average pricing methods.
O
TRANSACTIONS DURING MAY 20X3
Market value per unit B
Quantity
Units
Unit cost
$
Total cost
$
on date of transaction
$ A
Opening balance, 1 May
Receipts, 3 May
100
400
2.00
2.10
200
840 2.11
L
Issues, 4 May 200 2.11
Receipts, 9 May 300 2.12 636 2.15
Issues, 11 May 400 2.20 B
Receipts, 18 May 100 2.40 240 2.35
Issues, 20 May 100 2.35 O
Closing balance, 31 May 200
1,916
2.38
X
(a) FIFO .
FIFO assumes that materials are issued out of inventory in the order in which they were delivered C
into inventory: issues are priced at the cost of the earliest delivery remaining in inventory.
O
Using FIFO, the cost of issues and the closing inventory value in the example would be as
follows. M
Date of issue Quantity issued Value

Units $ $
4 May 200 100 o/s at $2 200
100 at $2.10 210
410
11 May 400 300 at $2.10 630
100 at $2.12 212
842
20 May 100 100 at $2.12 212
Cost of issues 1,464
Closing inventory value 200 100 at $2.12 212
100 at $2.40 240
452
1,916 *
* The cost of materials issued plus the value of closing inventory equals the cost of purchases
A plus the value of opening inventory ($1,916).
C The market price of purchased materials is rising dramatically. In a period of inflation, there is a
tendency with FIFO for materials to be issued at a cost lower than the current market value,
C although closing inventories tend to be valued at a cost approximating to current market value.
A (b) LIFO
LIFO assumes that materials are issued out of inventory in the reverse order to which they were
delivered: the most recent deliveries are issued before earlier ones, and are priced accordingly.
G Using LIFO, the cost of issues and the closing inventory value in the example above would be as
L follows.
Date of issue Quantity Valuation
O issued
Units $ $
B 4 May 200 200 at $2.10 420
A 11 May 400 300 at $2.12
100 at $2.10
636
210
L 20 May 100 100 at $2.40
846
240
Closing inventory value 200 100 at $2.10 210
B 100 at $2.00 200
410
O 1,916
X Notes
. (a) The cost of materials issued plus the value of closing inventory equals the cost of
purchases plus the value of opening inventory ($1,916).
C (b) In a period of inflation there is a tendency with LIFO for the following to occur.
O (i) Materials are issued at a price which approximates to current market value.
M (ii) Closing inventories become undervalued when compared to market value.
(c) Cumulative weighted average pricing
The cumulative weighted average pricing method calculates a weighted average price for all units
in inventory. Issues are priced at this average cost, and the balance of inventory remaining would
have the same unit valuation. The average price is determined by dividing the total cost by the
total number of units.
A new weighted average price is calculated whenever a new delivery of materials into store is
received. This is the key feature of cumulative weighted average pricing.
In our example, issue costs and closing inventory values would be as follows.
Total inventory Unit
Date Received Issued Balance value cost
Units Units Units $ $ $
Opening inventory 100 200 2.00
3 May 400 840 2.10
* 500 1,040 2.08
4 May 200 (416) 2.08 416
300 624 2.08
9 May 300 636 2.12
* 600 1,260 2.10
11 May 400 (840) 2.10 840
200 420 2.10
18 May 100 240 2.40
* 300 660 2.20
20 May 100 (220) 2.20 220
1,476 A
Closing inventory value 200 440 2.20 440
1,916 C
* A new inventory value per unit is calculated whenever a new receipt of materials occurs. C
Notes A
(a) The cost of materials issued plus the value of closing inventory equals the cost of
purchases plus the value of opening inventory ($1,916).
(b) In a period of inflation, using the cumulative weighted average pricing system, the value of
G
material issues will rise gradually, but will tend to lag a little behind the current market L
value at the date of issue. Closing inventory values will also be a little below current
market value. O
(d) Periodic weighted average pricing B
Under the periodic weighted average pricing method, a retrospective average price is calculated A
for all materials issued during the period. The average issue price is calculated for our example as
follows. L
Cost of all receipts in the period  Cost of opening inventory
Number of units received in the period  Number of units of opening inventory
B
=
$1,716  $200
800  100
O
Issue price = $2.129 per unit X
Closing inventory values are a balancing figure. .
The issue costs and closing inventory values are calculated as follows. C
Date of issue Quantity issued
Units
Valuation
$
O
4 May 200  $2.129 426 M
11 May 400  $2.129 852
20 May 100  $2.129 213
Value of opening inventory plus purchases 1,916
Value of 200 units of closing inventory (at $2.129) 425
EXAM FOCUS POINT
Getting to grips with these inventory valuation methods is a very important part of your studies at this
stage.
3.3.4 Which method is correct?

This is a trick question, because there is no one correct method. Each method has advantages and
disadvantages.
The advantages and disadvantages of the FIFO method are as follows.
(a) Advantages
(i) It is a logical pricing method which probably represents what is physically happening: in
A practice the oldest inventory is likely to be used first.
C (ii) It is easy to understand and explain to managers.
C (iii) The closing inventory value can be near to a valuation based on the cost of replacing the
inventory.
A (b) Disadvantages
(i) FIFO can be cumbersome to operate because of the need to identify each batch of material
G separately.
(ii) Managers may find it difficult to compare costs and make decisions when they are
L charged with varying prices for the same materials.
O The advantages and disadvantages of the LIFO method are as follows.
B (a) Advantages
A (i) Inventories are issued at a price which is close to current market value. This is not the
case with FIFO when there is a high rate of inflation.
L
(ii) Managers are continually aware of recent costs when making decisions, because the costs
being charged to their department or products will be current costs.
B (b) Disadvantages
O (i) The method can be cumbersome to operate because it sometimes results in several
batches being only part-used in the inventory records before another batch is received.
X (ii) LIFO is often the opposite of what is physically happening and can therefore be difficult to
. explain to managers.
C (iii) As with FIFO, decision making can be difficult because of the variations in prices.
O The advantages and disadvantages of weighted average pricing are as follows.
M (a) Advantages
(i) Fluctuations in prices are smoothed out, making it easier to use the data for decision
making.
(ii) It is easier to administer than FIFO and LIFO, because there is no need to identify each
batch separately.
(b) Disadvantages
(i) The resulting issue price is rarely an actual price that has been paid, and can run to
several decimal places.
(ii) Prices tend to lag a little behind current market values when there is gradual inflation.
4 Inventory control
Inventory control is the regulation of inventory levels, which includes putting a value to the amounts of
inventory issued and remaining. Inventory control also includes ordering, purchasing, receiving and
storing goods.
The cost of materials are usually one of the largest costs faced by an organisation and, once obtained,
inventory has to be carefully controlled and checked.
4.1 Locating inventory

You can probably picture a warehouse – a large room with rows and rows of high shelving, perhaps
moveable ladders and maybe barrows or fork-lift trucks. Very modern 'highbay' warehouses have
automatic guided vehicles (AGVs), stacker cranes and conveyors, all controlled by computer. All of this
implies organisation: when they are brought into the warehouse inventories are not simply dumped in A
the nearest available space. There is a place for everything and everything is in its place. There is no
point in keeping inventory at all if you don't know where to find it when it is needed. C
Suppose, for example, that a warehouse were arranged as shown below, A to F representing rows of C
shelving and 1 to 7 the access bays between them. Suppose the shelves were 4m high, 10m long and
1m wide and you needed to locate five 10 mm washers in stainless steel. (To put it another way, A
suppose you had a haystack and you were looking for a needle!) How would you go about organising the
warehouse so that you could always find what you were looking for?
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
The solution is fairly obvious. You need to divide up the shelf-racks and give each section a code. A
typical warehouse might organise its shelving as shown below. X
.
C
O
M
A
C
C
A
G If you are reminded of a library, this is intentional: it is helpful to think of a warehouse as a library of
materials.
L You also need to keep a record which shows the whereabouts in the warehouse of all the different types
O of inventory, including the 10mm washers in stainless steel. Suppose that the washers are listed as
being kept in location A234.
B The reference A234 would take you to Row A, bay 2, bin 3, shelf 4. Shelf 4 might contain a series of
A drawers containing washers of various sizes, each drawer being labelled with a precise part number
(A234/1279, say) and a description of the item.
L The term bin as it is used above may be new to you, but you need to get used to it meaning something
other than the receptacle by your desk full of screwed up paper and apple cores! Bin simply means a
receptacle. In warehouse terms it normally means a division of shelving (or simply one shelf) or some
B other container which can be located by a code letter or number. The term is in general usage but it
O does not have a precise meaning.
X In the light of this you should understand what a bin card is. In a manual inventory control system the bin
card is kept with the actual inventory and is updated whenever items are removed or added to provide an
. accurate record of the quantity in inventory for each stores item.
C
O
M
Note that the bin card does not need to show any information about the cost of materials.
Organisations will also maintain what are known as stores ledger accounts, an example of an account
being shown below.
A
C
C
A
Details from GRNs and materials requisition notes (see later) are used to update stores ledger accounts, G
which then provide a record of the quantity and value of each line of inventory in the stores. The stores
ledger accounts are normally kept in the cost department or in the stores office whereas the bin cards
L
are written up and actually kept in the stores. There are two advantages to this procedure. O
(a) The accounting records can be maintained more accurately and in a better condition by a cost
clerk or an experienced stores clerk than by a stores assistant.
B
(b) A control check is provided. The balances on the bin cards in the stores can be compared with
A
the balances on the stores ledger accounts. L
The use of bin cards and stores ledger accounts ensures that every issue and receipt of inventory is
recorded as it occurs so that there is a continuous clerical record of the balance of each item of
inventory. This is known as a perpetual inventory system. B
You may be thinking that the system we have described is rather over-complicated. Why not, for
example, start at one end of the room and end at the other numbering each separate location in
O
sequence and numbering each inventory item accordingly? The reasons are for practicality and flexibility. X
If item 1 is a 10mm washer and item 2 is an exhaust pipe they are hardly going to fit into the same size
drawer. If item 1 is a 10mm washer and item 2 is a 15mm washer, what happens when a new product .
needs 12mm washers? If item 1 is used twice a year and item 10,001 is used every day the
storekeeper will be collapsing with exhaustion by the end of the day if item 1 is the one nearest the
C
issue point. If item 1 is a large heavy item and item 10,001 is also a large heavy item the storeman will O
be driving the fork-lift from one end of the warehouse to the other all day. It is therefore far better to
have large heavy items in close proximity and to have frequently used items near to the issue point. M
The last point is worth developing a little. Storekeeping involves a good deal of commonsense and a
considerable knowledge of the types of inventory held, and an effective storekeeping system should take
the following points into account.
(a) Heavy items should not be stored on high shelves (in case the shelves collapse and to make
handling as safe and unstrenuous as possible).
(b) Dangerous items (for example items with sharp edges) should not be stored above eye level.
(c) Items liable to be damaged by flood (for example paper inventory) should not be stored on low
shelves.
(d) Special arrangements should be made for the storage and handling of chemicals and flammable
materials.
(e) Some inventories are sensitive to temperature or light and should be stored accordingly.
(f) Other inventories may have special hygiene or 'clean air' requirements.
4.2 Coding of materials

Each item held in stores must be unambiguously identified and this can best be done by numbering
them with inventory codes. The advantages of this are as follows:
(a) Ambiguity is avoided. Different people may use different descriptions for materials. This is
avoided if numbers are used.
(b) Time is saved. Descriptions can be lengthy and time-consuming, particularly when completing
written forms.
A (c) Production efficiency is improved. If the correct material can be accurately identified from a code
C number, production hold-ups caused by the issue of incorrect material can be avoided.
(d) Computerised processing is made easier.
C (e) Numbered code systems can be designed to be flexible, and can be expanded to include more
A inventory items as necessary.
The digits in a code can stand for the type of inventory, supplier, location and so forth. For example
inventory item A234/1279 might refer to the item of inventory kept in row A, bay 2, bin 3, shelf 4. The
G item might be identified by the digits 12 and its supplier might be identified by the digits 79.
L 4.3 Issuing materials

O The sole point of holding inventories is so that they can be used to make products. This means that they
B have to be issued from stores to production. This transaction will be initiated by production who will
complete a materials requisition note and pass it to the warehouse.
A
L
B
O $
X
.
C
O
M
The stores department will locate the inventory, withdraw the amount required and update the bin card
as appropriate. The stores ledger account will also be updated.
If the amount of materials required is overestimated the excess should be put back into store
accompanied by a materials returned note. The form in our illustration is almost identical to a
requisition note. In practice it would be wise to colour code the two documents (one white, one yellow,
say) to prevent confusion.
A
C
There may be occasions when materials already issued but not required for one job can be used for C
another job in progress. In this case there is no point in returning the materials to the warehouse.
Instead a materials transfer note can be raised. This prevents one job being charged with too many A
materials and another with too little.
You will note that all of the forms shown above have spaces for cost information (that is, monetary
values). This will be inserted either by the stores department or in costing, depending upon how the G
system is organised. We have already described the various bases which may be used to put a value on
inventory – FIFO, LIFO or an average figure.
L
O
4.4 Stocktaking
B
Stocktaking involves counting the physical inventory on hand at a certain date and then checking this
against the balance shown in the clerical records. There are two methods of carrying out this process. A
 Periodic stocktaking. This is usually carried out annually and the objective is to count all items L
of inventory on a specific date.
 Continuous stocktaking This involves counting and checking a number of inventory items on a
regular basis so that each item is checked at least once a year, and valuable items can be B
checked more frequently. This has a number of advantages over periodic stocktaking. It is less
disruptive, less prone to error, and achieves greater control.
O
X
.
4.5 Inventory discrepancies
There will be occasions when inventory checks disclose discrepancies between the physical amount of
C
an item in inventory and the amount shown in the inventory records. When this occurs, the cause of O
the discrepancy should be investigated, and appropriate action taken to ensure that it does not happen
again. Possible causes of discrepancies are as follows. M
(a) Suppliers deliver a different quantity of goods than is shown on the goods received note. Since
this note is used to update inventory records, a discrepancy will arise. This can be avoided by
ensuring that all inventory is counted as it is received, and a responsible person should sign the
document to verify the quantity.
(b) The quantity of inventory issued to production is different from that shown on the materials
requisition note. Careful counting of all issues will prevent this.
(c) Excess inventory is returned from production without documentation. This can be avoided by
ensuring that all movements of inventory are accurately documented - in this case, a materials
returned note should be raised.
(d) Clerical errors may occur in the inventory records. Regular checks by independent staff should
detect and correct mistakes.
(e) Inventory items may be wasted because, for example, they get broken. All wastage should be
noted on the inventory records immediately so that physical inventory equals the inventory
balance on records. (The cost of the wastage is then written off to the statement of profit or loss.)
(f) Employees may steal inventory. Regular checks or continuous stocktaking will help to prevent
this, and only authorised personnel should be allowed into the stores.
If the inventory discrepancy is found to be caused by clerical error, then the records should be rectified
immediately. If the discrepancy occurs because units of inventory appear to be missing, the lost
inventory must be written off. If actual inventory is greater than recorded inventory, extra units of
inventory are added to the inventory records. The accounting transaction will be recorded by a stores
credit note, where items of inventory have been lost, or a stores debit note, when there is more actual
inventory than recorded.
A A stores credit note may have the following format.
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
4.6 Inventory costs
L Inventory costs include purchase costs, ordering costs, holding costs and costs of running out of
inventory. The purchase cost is the cost of the inventory itself.
B 4.6.1 Ordering costs
O Ordering costs are the costs incurred when inventories are ordered. They include the following.
X (a)
(b)
Clerical and administrative costs associated with purchasing, accounting for and receiving goods.
Transport costs.
. (c) Production run costs, if an organisation manufactures its own components.
C The more orders are placed, the higher the total ordering costs will be. So if a business chooses to place
frequent orders for small amounts of inventory, the ordering costs will be higher than if it made less
O frequent orders for larger amounts of inventory. However, if larger amounts of inventories are ordered,
the business will incur higher holding costs as the inventories will have to be stored until they are used.
M
4.6.2 Holding costs
Holding costs are the costs of storing inventories until they are used. Holding costs include the following.
(a) Costs of storage and stores operations. Holding inventories requires storage space and staff and
equipment to control and handle them while they are being stored. The larger the level of
inventories, the higher the costs associated with storing and managing them will be.
(b) Interest charges. Holding inventories involves the tying up of capital (cash) on which interest
must be paid.
(c) Insurance costs. The larger the value of inventories held, the greater insurance premiums are
likely to be.
(d) Obsolescence. When materials or components become out-of-date and are no longer required,
existing inventories must be thrown away and their cost must be written off to the statement or
profit or loss (income statement).
(e) Deterioration. When materials in store deteriorate to the extent that they are unusable, they must
be thrown away (with the likelihood that disposal costs would be incurred) and again, the value
written off inventory plus the disposal costs will be a charge to the statement of profit or loss
(income statement).
4.6.3 Stockout costs (costs of running out of inventory)

If too much inventory is held, holding costs will be incurred unnecessarily. But if too little inventory is
held, the business may run out of inventory and incur stockout costs.
Stockout costs include:
 Lost contribution from lost sales


Loss of future sales due to disgruntled customers
Loss of customer goodwill as the product they require is not available
A
 Cost of production stoppages C
 Labour inefficiency costs due to frustration over stoppages
 Extra ordering costs for urgent, small quantity orders C
A business has to decide the optimum amount of inventory to hold so that the overall cost of inventory A
(purchase, ordering, holding and stockout costs) is minimised.
4.6.4 Other reasons for holding inventories G

Businesses hold inventories to ensure sufficient goods are available to meet expected production
requirements. Other reasons for holding inventories are as follows.
L
 To provide a buffer between processes O


To meet any future shortages
To take advantage of bulk purchasing discounts
B
 To absorb seasonal fluctuations and any variations in usage and demand A


To allow production processes to flow smoothly and efficiently
As a necessary part of the production process (such as when maturing cheese) L
 As a deliberate investment policy, especially in times of inflation or possible shortages
B
5 Inventory control levels O
Inventory control levels can be calculated in order to maintain inventories at the optimum level. The X
three critical control levels are reorder level, minimum level and maximum level. .
Based on an analysis of past inventory usage and delivery times, inventory control levels can be C
calculated and used to maintain inventory at their optimum level (in other words, a level which
minimises costs). These levels will determine 'when to order' and 'how many to order'. O
M
5.1 Reorder level
When inventories reach the reorder level, an order should be placed to replenish inventories. The reorder
level is determined by considering:
 The maximum rate of consumption  The maximum lead time
The maximum lead time is the time between placing an order with a supplier, and the inventory
becoming available for use.
FORMULA TO LEARN
Reorder level = maximum usage  maximum lead time
5.2 Minimum level

The minimum level is a warning level to draw management attention to the fact that inventories are
approaching a dangerously low level and that stockouts are possible.
FORMULA TO LEARN
Minimum level = reorder level – (average usage  average lead time)
5.3 Maximum level

The maximum level also acts as a warning level to signal to management that inventories are reaching a
potentially wasteful level.
FORMULA TO LEARN
A
C Maximum level = reorder level + reorder quantity – (minimum usage  minimum lead time)
C
A QUESTION Maximum inventory level
A large retailer with multiple outlets maintains a central warehouse from which the outlets are supplied.
The following information is available for Part Number SF525.
G Average usage 350 per day
L Minimum usage 180 per day
Maximum usage 420 per day
O Lead time for replenishment 11-15 days
B Re-order quantity
Re-order level
6,500 units
6,300 units
A (a) Based on the data above, what is the maximum level of inventory?
L A 5,250 B 6,500 C 10,820 D 12,800
(b) Based on the data above, what is the approximate number of Part Number SF525 carried as
buffer inventory?
B A 200 B 720 C 1,680 D 1,750
O
X ANSWER
. (a) Maximum inventory level = reorder level + reorder quantity – (min usage  min lead time)
= 6,300 + 6,500 – (180  11)
C = 10,820
O The correct answer is C.
M You should have eliminated option A immediately because the maximum inventory level cannot
be less than the reorder quantity.
(b) Buffer inventory = minimum level
Minimum level = reorder level – (average usage  average lead time)
= 6,300 – (350  13) = 1,750.
The correct answer is D.
Option A could again be easily eliminated. With minimum usage of 180 per day, a buffer
inventory of only 200 would not be much of a buffer!
5.4 Reorder quantity

This is the quantity of inventory which is to be ordered when inventory reaches the reorder level. If it is
set so as to minimise the total costs associated with holding and ordering inventory, then it is known as
the economic order quantity.
5.5 Average inventory

The formula for the average inventory level assumes that inventory levels fluctuate evenly between the
minimum (or safety) inventory level and the highest possible inventory level (the amount of inventory
immediately after an order is received, ie safety inventory + reorder quantity).
FORMULA TO LEARN
Average inventory = safety inventory + ½ reorder quantity
A
QUESTION Average inventory C
A component has a safety inventory of 500, a re-order quantity of 3,000 and a rate of demand which C
varies between 200 and 700 per week. What is the approximate average inventory?
A
A 2,000 B 2,300 C 2,500 D 3,500
ANSWER G
Average inventory = safety inventory + ½ reorder quantity
= 500 + (0.5  3,000)
L
= 2,000 O
The correct answer is A. B
A
5.6 Economic order quantity (EOQ) L
The economic order quantity (EOQ) is the order quantity which minimises inventory costs. The EOQ can
be calculated using a table, graph or formula. B
Economic order theory assumes that the average inventory held is equal to one half of the reorder O
quantity (although, if an organisation maintains some sort of buffer or safety inventory then average
inventory = buffer inventory + half of the reorder quantity). We have seen that there are certain costs X
associated with holding inventory. These costs tend to increase with the level of inventories, and so
could be reduced by ordering smaller amounts from suppliers each time.
.
On the other hand, as we have seen, there are costs associated with ordering from suppliers:
C
documentation, telephone calls, payment of invoices, receiving goods into stores and so on. These costs O
tend to increase if small orders are placed, because a larger number of orders would then be needed for
a given annual demand. M
5.6.1 Example: Economic order quantity

Suppose a company purchases raw material at a cost of $16 per unit. The annual demand for the raw
material is 25,000 units. The holding cost per unit is $6.40 and the cost of placing an order is $32.
We can tabulate the annual relevant costs for various order quantities as follows.
Order quantity (units) 100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1,000
Average inventory (units) (a) 50 100 150 200 250 300 400 500
Number of orders (b) 250 125 83 63 50 42 31 25
$ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
Annual holding cost (c) 320 640 960 1,280 1,600 1,920 2,560 3,200
Annual order cost (d) 8,000 4,000 2,656 2,016 1,600 1,344 992 800
Total relevant cost 8,320 4,640 3,616 3,296 3,200 3,264 3,552 4,000
Notes
A (a)
(b)
Average inventory = Order quantity  2 (ie assuming no safety inventory)
Number of orders = annual demand  order quantity
C (c) Annual holding cost = Average inventory  $6.40
(d) Annual order cost = Number of orders  $32
C
You will see that the economic order quantity is 500 units. At this point the total annual relevant costs
A are at a minimum.
5.6.2 Example: Economic order quantity graph

G We can present the information in the table above in graphical form. The vertical axis represents the
L relevant annual costs for the investment in inventories, and the horizontal axis can be used to represent
either the various order quantities or the average inventory levels; two scales are actually shown on the
O horizontal axis so that both items can be incorporated. The graph shows that, as the average inventory
level and order quantity increase, the holding cost increases. On the other hand, the ordering costs
B decline as inventory levels and order quantities increase. The total cost line represents the sum of both
A the holding and the ordering costs.
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
Note that the total cost line is at a minimum for an order quantity of 500 units and occurs at the point
where the ordering cost curve and holding cost curve intersect. The EOQ is therefore found at the point
where holding costs equal ordering costs.
5.6.3 EOQ formula

The EOQ formula is as follows.
FORMULA TO LEARN
2C D
EOQ = 0
CH
where CH = cost of holding one unit of inventory for one time period
C0 = cost of ordering a consignment from a supplier
D = demand during the time period
QUESTION EOQ
A
Use the formula to calculate the EOQ in the example in paragraph 5.6.1 above.
C
ANSWER C
EOQ =
2  $32  25,000 A
$6.40
= 250,000 G
= 500 units L
O
QUESTION EOQ and holding costs
B
A manufacturing company uses 25,000 components at an even rate during a year. Each order placed
with the supplier of the components is for 2,000 components, which is the economic order quantity. A
The company holds a buffer inventory of 500 components. The annual cost of holding one component in
inventory is $2.
L
What is the total annual cost of holding inventory of the component?
A $2,000 B $2,500 C $3,000 D $4,000 B
O
ANSWER
The correct answer is C.
X
[Buffer inventory + (EOQ/2)] × Annual holding cost per component
.
= [500 + (2,000/2)] × $2 C
= $3,000 O
M
6 Computers and inventory control

Although the basic principles of inventory control are not difficult in themselves, you will appreciate by
now that an effective system requires a good deal of administrative effort, even if only a few items of
inventory are involved. There is therefore a good deal to be gained from computerisation of this function.
6.1 Computerised inventory files

A typical computerised inventory file would contain a record for each item, each record having fields
(individual pieces of data) as follows.
(a) Inventory code: a unique inventory code to identify each item. This could be in bar code form for
large organisations.
(b) Description: a brief description is helpful when perusing inventory records and probably essential
when printing out lists of inventory for stocktaking purposes. Ideally the system will generate
purchase orders which also require brief narrative details.
(c) Supplier code: this would match the code for the supplier in the purchase ledger.
(d) Supplier's reference number: again this information would be needed for purchase orders.
(e) Quantity per unit: this would specify how many individual items there were per 'unit'. This is
sometimes called the 'factor'.
A (f) Cost price per item.
C (g) Control levels: there would be a field for each of the four control levels (minimum and maximum
C inventory, reorder level and reorder quantity).
A (h) Location: a location code could be included if it were not part of the inventory code itself.
(i) Movements history: there could be fields for issues per day, per week, during the last month, in
the last year and so on.
G (j) Job code: there might be a field allowing costs to be linked to specific jobs. Inventories could be
L 'reserved' for jobs due to be started in the next week, say.
O 6.2 Inventory reports

B A system with fields such as those above might be able to generate the following reports.
A (a) Daily listing: a daily list of all items ordered, received, issued or placed on reserve. This might
have 'exception reports' for unusual movements of inventory and for items that had reached the
L reorder level.
(b) Inventory lists: lists could be produced for stocktaking purposes, with inventory codes,
descriptions and locations. This could be restricted to certain types of inventory, such as high
B value items or inventories with high turnover.
O (c) Inventory movements: a report of inventory movements over time would help in setting control
levels and in identifying 'slow-moving inventory' that is not really required.
X (d) Inventory valuations: this would show current balances and place a value on inventories
. according to which calculation method (FIFO, LIFO, and so on) was in use.
(e) Supplier analysis: this would list all the items of inventory purchased from the same supplier,
C and might be useful for placing orders (several items could be ordered at the same time, cutting
O delivery costs).
M 6.3 Bill of materials

Many computerised inventory control systems have a bill of materials facility. This allows assembly
records (sometimes called explosion records) to be compiled, containing details of the various
assemblies that make up the final product. A CD player, for example may have three main assemblies –
the motor mechanism, the electronics and the outer casing.
Each individual assembly could be further broken down into its constituent materials and components.
6.4 A common fallacy

It is sometimes assumed that computerising inventory records will guarantee they are 100% accurate. In
fact discrepancies are just as likely to occur in a computerised as a non-computerised system.
Stocktaking is thus equally important in a computerised inventory system as it is in a manual system.
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 Materials can be classified according to the substances that make them up, how they are measured, or
their physical properties.
 Procedures and documentation are required for material purchases.
 When wastage levels are high, they are an avoidable expense.
 Materials issued from inventory can be valued using FIFO, LIFO and weighted average methods.
 Inventory control is the regulation of inventory levels, which includes putting a value to the amounts of
inventory issued and remaining. Inventory control also includes ordering, purchasing, receiving and storing
goods.
 Inventory control levels can be calculated in order to maintain inventories at the optimum level. The
three critical control levels are reorder level, minimum level and maximum level. A
 The economic order quantity (EOQ) is the order quantity which minimises inventory costs. The EOQ can
be calculated using a table, graph or formula.
C
C
A
QUICK QUIZ
1 What are the three main ways of classifying materials?

2 What are raw materials? G
3 What is work in progress? L
4 List the five documents which you are likely to use when buying materials. O
5 The goods received note is matched with two other documents in the buying process. What are they?
B
6 What are the advantages of FIFO?
A
7 What is a bin in warehouse terms?
8 Which documents are used to update the stores ledger account?
L
9 What are the two methods of stocktaking that are commonly used?
10 What are the main reasons for a company setting control levels with regard to inventory? B
11 How would you calculate the minimum and maximum inventory control levels? O
12 The raw materials issued to a job were overestimated and the excess is being sent back to the materials X
store.
What document is required?
.
A Stores credit note C
B
C
Stores debit note
Materials returned note
O
D Materials transfer note M
13 The inventory record of a raw material has the following details for a week:
Day Cost ($ per unit) Receipts (units) Issues (units)
2 260 18
3 270 12
4 10
6 14
The first-in first-out (FIFO) method is used for pricing issues. There was no raw material at the start of
Day 1.
Which was the value of the inventory on Day 5?
A $5,200
B $5,220
C $5,320
D $5,400
A 14 Average usage of a raw material is 200 kg per day, the average ordering lead time is five days, the
C reorder level is 1,600 kg and the reorder quantity is 2,800 kg.

What is the average raw material inventory?
C A 800 kg
A B 1,400 kg
C 1,700 kg
D 2,000 kg
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
1 According to the substances that make them up, how they are measured and their physical properties.
2 Goods purchased for incorporation into products for sale.

3 A term used to represent an intermediate stage between the purchase of raw materials and the
completion of the finished product.
4  Purchase requisition form
 Order form
 Despatch note
 Delivery note
 Goods received note (GRN)
5 The purchase order and the supplier's invoice.
6  It is a logical pricing method
 It is easy to understand
 The closing inventory can be near to a valuation based on the cost of replacing the inventory A
7 A division of shelving or some other container which can be located by a code letter or number.
C
8 Goods received notes and materials requisition notes.
C
9 Periodic stocktaking and continuous stocktaking.
10 To ensure it doesn't run out of inventory, and to ensure that it does not carry too much inventory.
A
11 Minimum inventory control level = reorder level – (average usage  average lead time)
Maximum inventory control level = reorder level + reorder quantity – (minimum usage  minimum lead time) G
12 C L
13 C (8 units × $260/unit) + (12 units × $270/unit) O
14 D Minimum inventory control level = 1,600 + (200 × 5) = 600kg B
Maximum inventory control level = 1,600 + 2,800 – (200 × 5)
= 3,400 kg A
Average inventory level = (600 + 3,400)/2 = 2,000kg
L
Now try ...
Attempt the questions below from the Exam Question Bank B
Number O
Q30 X
Q31 .
Q32
C
Q33
O
Q34
M
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
C H A P T E R
A
The previous chapter explained how materials costs are
recorded and accounted for, and some methods for Labour C
controlling materials costs. C
A
Labour costs are another major cost for many
organisations, and this chapter explains how labour costs
are accounted for and how labour performance might be
measured. The chapter also explains how, in a system of
absorption costing, labour costs are analysed into direct G
labour costs and indirect labour costs (which are a part
of overhead costs). L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
1 Labour costs B2 (a)

2 The payroll accounting system A2 (c), B2 (b), (d), (e), (f)
3 Direct and indirect labour B2 (e)
4 Labour turnover B2 (g)
5 Measuring labour efficiency and utilisation B2 (h)


B Cost recording
2 Accounting for labour
(a) Explain, illustrate and evaluate labour remuneration methods S
(b) Describe the operation of a payroll accounting system K
(c) Distinguish between direct and indirect labour costs K

A (d) Describe the procedures and documentation required to K
C ensure the correct coding, analysis and recording of direct
and indirect labour
C (e) Describe and illustrate the accounting for labour costs S
A (f) Explain the relationship between the labour costing system K
and the payroll accounting system
(g) Explain the causes and costs of, and calculate, labour S
G turnover
(h) Describe and illustrate measures of labour efficiency and S
L utilisation (efficiency, capacity utilisation, production volume
O and idle time ratios)
B
A
L 1 Labour costs
B Labour costs can be determined according to some prior agreement, the amount of time worked or the
quantity or quality of work done.
O
X 1.1 What are labour costs?
. Labour costs could be said to include any or all of the following items:
C 

The gross amount due to an employee
Employer benefit contributions (payments made by an employer towards employees’ pensions
O and other benefits)
 Amounts paid to recruit labour
M  Amounts paid for staff welfare
 Training costs
 The costs of benefits like company cars
Labour costs are the amounts paid to any employee, including supervisors, office staff, managers and
tea ladies. We shall distinguish between direct labour and indirect labour, but even then you must not
assume that this is necessarily a manual/clerical distinction (hopefully you are beginning to realise that
direct costs and indirect costs differ in that they are accounted for differently).
CHAPTER 8 // LABOUR
1.2 Determining labour costs

There are three ways in which labour costs can be determined.
(a) According to some prior agreement.
(b) According to the amount of time worked.
(c) According to the amount and/or quality of work done (‘piecework’ or performance based
remuneration).
Payment for most occupations is by a combination of methods (a) and (b). There will be a basic wage or
salary which is agreed when the appointment is made. There will be a set number of hours per week
during which the employee is expected to be available for work. There will be extra payments for time
worked over and above the set hours, or deductions for time when the employee is not available beyond
an agreed limit.
A
2 The payroll accounting system
C
Labour attendance time is recorded on an attendance record or a clockcard. Job time may be recorded C
on daily time sheets, weekly time sheets, jobcards or route cards depending on the circumstances.
A
Records of labour costs fall into three categories.


Records of agreed basic wages and salaries
Records of time spent working
G
 Records of work done L
There are a number of ways in which this can be organised, but basically the information flow will be as
follows.
O
B
Human Resources
A
Timekeeping Production L
department department
B
Hours
Basic pay
Work O
X
worked performed
.
Amount
C
O
Amount
due to Payroll Costing chargeable
employee
M
department department to
PAYE, NI product
etc
In practice, timekeeping would probably be a sub-function of production or of Human Resources.

Alternatively, Human Resources may keep records of hours spent on the premises and available for
work, while the production department keeps records of time spent doing different tasks. The system
used will depend upon the nature of the job and the bases chosen for paying employees on the one
hand and for costing products on the other.
All the information may, in practice, be given first to payroll, who would then pass it on for costing
analysis, or vice versa. (Remember that in some organisations payroll administration is contracted out to
a third party.) The main point is that both payroll and costing need the same information, but they
analyse it differently: payroll asks who, and costing asks what.
2.1 Basic pay

Levels of basic pay are ultimately decided by senior management who will take into account what other
employers are paying for similar work, what they consider the work to be worth, how easy it is to recruit
labour and any agreements with trade unions.
The basic pay due to an individual worker will be mentioned in his or her letter of appointment and
included in his or her contract of employment. The main on-going record, however, will probably be
kept on an employee record card held in the personnel department. This will also show subsequent
increases in the wage rate or salary level and much other information. An example of an employee
record card is shown below.
Example: Employee record card
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
CHAPTER 8 // LABOUR
Much of the information on the employee record card is confidential and there is no need for staff in the
payroll department or the costing department to know about it.
Ideally, therefore, details of basic pay for all employees are compiled on separate lists which are given to
payroll and costing. A fresh list should be issued whenever the pay rates are revised.
In a computerised wage system, the basic rates are usually part of a database, and payroll and costing
are only able to access information that is relevant to their tasks. Costing, for example, does not need to
know the names of individual employees: in fact it is more efficient for workers to be coded according to
the department they work in and the type of work that they do.
2.2 Attendance time

The bare minimum record of employees' time is a simple attendance record showing days absent
because of holiday, sickness or other reason. Such a system is usually used when it is assumed that all
of the employees' time is taken up doing one job and no further analysis is required. A typical record of
attendance is shown below.
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
It is also necessary to have a record of the following.
O


Time of arrival
Time of breaks
 Time of departure
X
These may be recorded as follows. .
 In a signing-in book C


By using a time recording clock which stamps the time on a clock card
By using swipe cards (which make a computer record)
O
An example of a clock card is shown as follows. M
A
C
C
A If an employee is paid on the basis of the amount of time spent working, as opposed to the amount of
work done or the quality of that work, the attendance time information will be used by the payroll
department to work out how much to pay the employee.
G
L 2.3 Job time
O The costing department needs more information than just attendance time in order to work out costs.
The hours spent at work need to be analysed according to what was done during those hours. The
B method adopted depends upon the size of the organisation and the nature of the work. Additionally, if
employees are paid on the basis of the amount of work done or the quality of work done, the payroll
A department will also require an analysis of the work done in order to work out how much to pay the
employee.
L
2.3.1 Continuous production
B Where routine, repetitive work is carried out it might not be practical to record the precise details. For
example if a worker stands at a conveyor belt for seven hours his work can be measured by keeping a
O note of the number of units that pass through his part of the process during that time. If a group of
employees all contribute to the same process, the total units processed per day (or week or whatever)
X can be divided by the number of employees. How the work is measured will also be influenced by how
. the employees are remunerated for their work. If they are paid on the basis of how much each individual
employee produces, then the output of each individual employee will need to be accurately measured.
C
2.3.2 Job costing
O When the work is not of a repetitive nature, a more detailed record of what work was done is required
M by the costing department, and by the payroll department if employees are paid on the basis of quantity
or quality of work done. The following could be used to record the work done.
(a) Daily time sheets. The time sheet will be filled in by the employee, for hours worked on each job
(job code) or area of work (cost code). The total time on the time sheet should correspond with
the time shown on the attendance record. Times are recorded daily and so there is less risk that
they will be forgotten. This system does produce considerable paperwork. The cost of the hours
worked will be entered at a later stage in the accounting department.
(b) Weekly time sheets. These are similar to daily time sheets but are passed to the cost office at the
end of the week. Paperwork is reduced and weekly time sheets are particularly suitable where
there are few job changes in a week. An example of a weekly time sheet is shown below.
CHAPTER 8 // LABOUR
(c) Job cards. Cards are prepared for each job or batch. When an employee works on a job he or she
records on the job card the time spent on that job. Job cards are therefore likely to contain
entries relating to numerous employees. On completion of the job it will contain a full record of
the times and quantities involved in the job or batch. A typical job card is shown as follows.
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
A job card will be given to the employee, showing the work to be done and the expected time it
should take. The employee will record the time started and time finished for each job. Breaks for
X
tea and lunch may be noted on the card, as standard times, by the production planning .
department. The hours actually worked on each job and the cost of those hours will be calculated
by the accounting department. C
(d) Piecework ticket/operation card. The wages of pieceworkers and the labour cost of work done by O
them is determined from what is known as a piecework ticket or an operation card. The card
records the total number of items (or 'pieces') produced and the number of rejects. Because M
workers are only paid for each item of ‘good’ production, independent of the number of hours
they have worked, it is crucial that they complete an operations card in order to get paid.
A
C
C
A
G
L The attendance record of a pieceworker is required for calculations of holidays, sick pay and so
O on.
B (e) Route cards. These are similar to job cards, except that they follow the product through the
works and carry details of all operations to be carried out. They thus carry the cost of all
A operations involved in a job and are very useful for control purposes.
L The manual recording of times on time sheets or job cards is, however, liable to error or even deliberate
deception, and may be unreliable. A time clock or automated time recording system is more accurate.
Time sheets and job or route cards can take many different forms, some of which involve computerised
B systems of time recording.
O 2.3.3 Salaried labour

X Salaried staff are paid a set amount per month. The amount of the salary is usually set out in a contract
. of employment, along with the expected working hours. This is in contrast to receiving a wage, where
the employee is paid on the basis of an hourly rate or a rate per item produced. Even though salaried
C staff are paid a set amount per month, they may be required to prepare time sheets. The reasons are as
follows.
O (a) Time sheets provide management with information (eg product costs).
M (b) Time sheet information may provide a basis for billing for services provided (eg service firms
where clients are billed based on the number of hours work done).
(c) Time sheets are used to record hours spent and so support claims for overtime payments by
salaried staff.
An example of a time sheet (as used in the service sector) is shown as follows.
CHAPTER 8 // LABOUR
A
C
C
A
Service firms are chiefly in the business of selling the time and expertise of their employees to clients.
This means that if an employee spends an hour working for a particular client, the client will be billed
for one hour of the employee's time. A time sheet is necessary so that clients will be charged for the G
correct amount of time that has been spent doing their work.
L
2.3.4 Idle time O
In many jobs there are times when, through no fault of their own, employees cannot get on with their B
work. A machine may break down or there may simply be a temporary shortage of work.
Idle time has a cost because employees will still be paid their basic wage or salary for these
A
unproductive hours and so there should be a record of idle time. This may simply comprise an entry on L
time sheets coded to 'idle time' generally, or separate idle time cards may be prepared. A supervisor
might enter the time of a stoppage, its cause, its duration and the employees made idle on an idle time
record card. Each stoppage should have a separate reference number which can be entered on time
sheets or job cards as appropriate.
B
O
2.4 Coding of job costs
X
By now you will appreciate that to analyse labour costs effectively it is necessary to be able to link up
different pieces of information in various ways. Most organisations therefore develop a series of codes to .
facilitate analysis for each of the following.
C
(a) Employee number and perhaps a team number
O
(b) Pay rate, for example 'A' for $5 per hour, 'B' for $6 per hour and so on
(c) Department and/or location if the organisation has different branches or offices
M
(d) Job or batch type, for example different codes for audit, accounts preparation and tax in a firm of
accountants, or for bodywork and mechanical repairs in a garage
(e) Job or batch number to enable each successive example of the same type of work to be allocated
the next number in sequence
(f) Client number so that all work done for the same client or customer can be coded to the same
number
You might like to think of different ways in which different pieces of information could be grouped
together. For example, combining (b), (c) and (d) would show you whether the workers in one location
could do a certain type of work more cheaply than the workers in another location.
QUESTION Labour costs of jobs

Below are shown some extracts from the files of Penny Lane Co. You are required to calculate the labour
cost of jobs 249 and 250.
Personnel files
George Paul Ringo John
Grade A B C D
Payroll - Master file
Grade Basic rate per hour
A $8.20
B $7.40
C $6.50
D $5.30
Production report - labour
A Job Employee Hours
C 249
249
George
Paul
14
49
C
250 George 2
A 250 John 107
250 Ringo 74
G ANSWER
L Job 249
Employee Rate Total
O Hours $ $
George 14 8.20 114.80
B Paul 49 7.40 362.60
A 477.40
L Job 250
Employee Rate Total
Hours $ $
George 2 8.20 16.40
B John 107 5.30 567.10
Ringo 74 6.50 481.00
O 1,064.50
X
.
2.5 Overtime
C If an employee works for more hours than the basic daily requirement many organisations pay an extra
O amount.
M The overtime payment may simply be at the basic rate. If an employee earns $5 an hour he will get an
extra $5 for every hour worked in addition to the basic hours. If he earns $10,000 a year an hourly rate
can be calculated by multiplying the basic hours per day by the normal number of days worked per
week by the 52 weeks in the year. For example 7 hours  5 days  52 weeks = 1,820 hours and the
hourly rate is approximately $5.49.
Usually, however, overtime is paid at a premium rate. You will hear expressions like 'time and a third',
'time and a half' and so on. This means that the hourly rate for overtime hours is (1 + 1/3)  basic rate
or (1 + 1/2)  basic rate.
CHAPTER 8 // LABOUR
2.5.1 Example: Overtime premium

Pootings Co pays overtime at time and a quarter. Jo's basic hours are 9 to 5 with an hour for lunch, but
one particular Friday she worked until six o'clock. She is paid a basic wage of $5 per hour. How much
did she earn on the Friday in question, and how much of this is overtime premium?
Solution
The most obvious way of calculating the amount earned is as follows.
$
Basic time (7  $5) 35.00
Overtime (11/4  $5) 6.25
Total pay 41.25
It is wrong, however, to say that the overtime premium is $6.25. For costing purposes all of the hours
worked, whether in basic time or outside it, are costed at the basic rate. The premium is the extra
amount paid on top of the basic rate for the hours worked over and above the basic hours.
$ A
Basic pay (8  $5)
Overtime premium (1/4  $5)
40.00
1.25
C
41.25 C
The overtime premium is thus $1.25. This is an important point because overtime premium is usually
treated as an indirect cost. This is quite reasonable if you think about it. If you and your colleague use
A
identical calculators it is reasonable to suppose that they cost the same amount to produce. It might be
that one was assembled at 10 o'clock in the morning and the other at 10 o'clock at night but this
doesn't make the calculators different from each other. They should therefore have the same cost and so G
most organisations treat overtime premium as an overhead and do not allocate it to the products
manufactured outside basic hours.
L
There are two exceptions to this rule: O
(a) If overtime is worked at the specific request of a customer to get his order completed, the B
premium is a direct cost of the order.
A
(b) If overtime is worked regularly by a production department in the normal course of operations,
the overtime paid to direct workers could be incorporated into an average direct labour hourly L
rate (though it does not need to be).
B
EXAM FOCUS POINT
O
If you have trouble remembering how to deal with overtime premiums, think how you would feel if you X
had to pay more for your new car radio than all of the others in the shop, simply because it was made
after 5.30 pm. .
C
2.6 Incentives and bonuses
O
There are five main types of incentive scheme, piecework, time-saved bonus, discretionary bonus, group
bonus scheme and profit-sharing scheme.
M
Overtime premiums are paid to encourage staff to work longer hours than normal (or at least to
recognise and reward the personal sacrifice of doing so). Incentives and bonuses are paid to encourage
staff to work harder whatever the time of day.
Incentive schemes include the following:
 Piecework
 Time-saved bonus
 Discretionary bonus
 Group bonus scheme
 Profit-sharing scheme
2.6.1 Piecework
Pieceworking can be seen as an incentive scheme since the more output you produce the more you are
paid. If you are paid 5c per unit produced and you want to earn $300 gross a week you know you have
to produce 6,000 units that week.
The system can be further refined by paying a different rate for different levels of production (differential
piecework). For example the employer could pay 3c per unit for output of up to 3,500 a week, 5c per
unit for every unit over 3,500.
In practice, persons working on such schemes normally receive a guaranteed minimum wage because
they may not be able to work because of problems outside their control.
2.6.2 Example: Piecework

An employee is paid $5 per piecework hour produced. In a 35 hour week he produces the following
output.
A Piecework time allowed
C 3 units of product A
per unit
2.5 hours
C 5 units of product B 8.0 hours
A Required
Calculate the employee's pay for the week.
G Solution
Piecework hours produced are as follows.
L
Product A 3  2.5 hours 7.5 hours
O Product B 5  8 hours 40.0 hours
B Total piecework hours 47.5 hours
A Therefore employee's pay = 47.5  $5 = $237.50 for the week.
L 2.6.3 Time-saved bonus

Suppose that a garage has calculated that it takes an average of 45 minutes for an engineer to perform
an MOT test, but the job could be done competently in 30 minutes. It could encourage its engineers to
B do such work at the faster rate by paying a bonus for every minute saved on the job up to a maximum
of 15 minutes.
O There are problems with this approach. In the first place it is necessary to establish a standard time for
X all types of work, and this may not be easy. In the second place a less than competent engineer may
rush the job and not do it properly.
.
C 2.6.4 Example: time-saved bonus
O In the garage example above, the bonus is 50c for every minute saved. During one afternoon the
engineer completes three MOTs in 48 minutes, 35 minutes, and 40 minutes respectively.
M Required
Calculate the engineer's time-saved bonus.
Solution
Bonus = (10 + 5)  50c
= $7.50
2.6.5 Discretionary bonuses

It is not uncommon, especially in smaller businesses, for employers to give their employees bonuses
simply because they think they deserve one. This is a possible approach if it is difficult to measure an
employee's output. Many office workers fall into this category. If, however, there is no obvious
CHAPTER 8 // LABOUR
connection between what a person does and whether or not a bonus is paid, the scheme is likely to be
perceived as unfair.
2.6.6 Group bonus schemes

Sometimes it is not possible to measure individual effort because overall performance is not within any
one person's control (for example railway workers). In such cases, however, it is possible to measure
overall performance and a bonus can therefore be paid to all those who contributed.
2.6.7 Profit-sharing schemes

In a profit-sharing scheme employees receive a certain proportion of their company's year-end profits
(the size of their bonus might also be related to level of responsibility and length of service).
2.7 Absence from work

An employee may be absent from work for a variety of reasons, the most usual being as follows. A


Holidays
Sickness
C
 Maternity/paternity/adoption leave C
 Training
A
The costs relating to absence through sickness, maternity/paternity/adoption leave and training are
usually treated as an overhead rather than a direct cost of production. Although some organisations treat
holiday pay as an overhead, the normal treatment is to regard it as a direct cost by charging an inflated
hourly rate. Suppose an employee is normally paid $4 an hour for a 35 hour week and is entitled to four
G
weeks annual holiday. He will therefore receive $560 ($4  35  4) holiday pay. Assuming that the L
employee works the remaining 48 weeks, his attendance time will total 1,680 (48  35) hours.
Dividing $560 by 1,680 hours gives an addition of approximately 33c per hour to the employee's hourly O
rate to ensure that holiday pay is recovered.
B
Time absent because of holidays is paid at the normal basic rate, as is absence on training courses as a
rule. There are statutory minimum levels for maternity pay and sickness pay, but above these employers A
can be as generous (or otherwise) as they wish.
L
3 Direct and indirect labour
B
Direct labour costs are the specific costs of the workforce used to make a unit of product or provide a O
service. Indirect labour costs are all other labour costs: these are not directly attributable to the product
or service.
X
Remember that direct labour costs are the specific costs of the workforce used to make a unit of product
.
or provide a service. Indirect labour costs are all other labour costs that are not directly attributable to C
the product or service.
O
For example, suppose a business makes and sells tables. The wages of the employees involved in
physically making the tables are a direct labour cost. However, there are many other people employed in M
the business, performing all kinds of other necessary functions other than making physically making the
tables. The wages and salaries of these employees are indirect labour costs or overheads of the
business, and could include the following.
 Wages and salaries of non-productive personnel in the production department, eg a supervisor,
stores manager, cleaner, maintenance staff
 Wages of packers, drivers and despatch clerks in the distribution department
 Office salaries, including the salaries of secretaries and accountants
 Salaries and commission of sales representatives
Have a go at the following questions about the classification of labour costs.
QUESTION Labour costs

Classify the following labour costs as either direct or indirect.
(a) The basic pay of direct workers (cash paid, tax and other deductions)
(b) The basic pay of indirect workers
(c) Overtime premium
(d) Bonus payments
(e) Employer benefit contributions
(f) Idle time of direct workers
(g) Work on installation of equipment
ANSWER
(a) The basic pay of direct workers is a direct cost to the unit, job or process.
A (b) The basic pay of indirect workers is an indirect cost, unless a customer asks for an order to be
carried out which involves the dedicated use of indirect workers' time, when the cost of this time
C would be a direct labour cost of the order.
C (c) Overtime premium paid to both direct and indirect workers is an indirect cost, except in two
particular circumstances.
A (i) If overtime is worked at the specific request of a customer to get his order completed, the
overtime premium paid is a direct cost of the order.
G (ii) If overtime is worked regularly by a production department in the normal course of

operations, the overtime premium paid to direct workers could be incorporated into the
L (average) direct labour hourly rate.
O (d) Bonus payments are generally an indirect cost. If a bonus system accumulates the total standard
time and hours worked for a particular period and then calculates a bonus based on these totals,
B the bonus cannot be traced to a specific job and will be treated as an indirect cost.
A Bonuses paid on an individual task basis can be clearly attributed to a particular task and so
would be treated as a direct labour cost of the respective task.
L (e) Employer benefit contributions (which are payments made by the employer as a contribution
towards employees’ benefits) are normally treated as an indirect labour cost as they cannot be
traced to a specific job.
B (f) Idle time caused by machine breakdowns and scheduling mix-ups is an indirect labour cost as it
O cannot be traced to a specific job. Machine breakdowns occur randomly and therefore it would be
unfair to charge them to particular jobs.
X (g) The cost of work on capital equipment is incorporated into the capital cost of the equipment.
.
C
O QUESTION Direct and indirect costs
M A direct labour employee's wage in week 5 consists of the following.

$
(a) Basic pay for normal hours worked, 36 hours at $4 per hour = 144
(b) Pay at the basic rate for overtime, 6 hours at $4 per hour = 24
(c) Overtime shift premium, with overtime paid at time-and-a-quarter
¼  6 hours  $4 per hour = 6
(d) A bonus payment under a group bonus (or 'incentive') scheme –
bonus for the month = 30
Total gross wages in week 5 for 42 hours of work 204
CHAPTER 8 // LABOUR
Required
Establish which costs are direct costs and which are indirect costs.
ANSWER
Items (a) and (b) are direct labour costs of the items produced in the 42 hours worked in week 5.
Overtime premium, item (c), is usually regarded as an overhead expense, because it is 'unfair' to charge
the items produced in overtime hours with the premium. Why should an item made in overtime be more
costly just because, by chance, it was made after the employee normally clocks off for the day?
Group bonus scheme payments, item (d), are usually overhead costs, because they cannot normally be
traced directly to individual products or jobs.
In this example, the direct labour employee costs were $168 in direct costs and $36 in indirect costs.
A
QUESTION Overtime C
Jaffa Co employs two types of labour: skilled workers, considered to be direct workers, and semi-skilled C
workers considered to be indirect workers. Skilled workers are paid $10 per hour and semi-skilled $5
per hour. A
The skilled workers have worked 20 hours overtime this week, 12 hours on specific orders and 8 hours
on general overtime. Overtime is paid at a rate of time and a quarter.
G
The semi-skilled workers have worked 30 hours overtime, 20 hours for a specific order at a customer's
request and the rest for general purposes. Overtime again is paid at time and a quarter. L
What would be the total overtime pay considered to be a direct cost for this week? O
A
B
$275
$355
C
D
$375
$437.50
B
A
ANSWER L
Direct cost Indirect cost
$ $
Skilled workers
Specific overtime (12 hours  $10  1.25) 150
B
General overtime (8 hours  $10  1) 80 O
(8 hours  $10  0.25) 20
Semi-skilled workers X
Specific overtime
General overtime
(20 hours  $5  1.25)
(10 hours  $5  1.25)
125
62.50 .
355 82.50
C
The correct answer is therefore B.
O
If you selected option A, you forgot to include the direct cost of the general overtime of $80 for the
skilled workers. M
If you selected option C, you included the overtime premium for skilled workers' general overtime of
$20.
If you selected option D, you calculated the total of direct cost + indirect cost instead of the direct cost.
4 Labour turnover
Labour turnover is the rate at which employees leave a company and this rate should be kept as low as
possible. The cost of labour turnover can be divided into preventative and replacement costs.
4.1 The reasons for labour turnover

There are many reasons why employees will leave their job. It may be because they wish to go to work
for another company or organisation. Alternatively it may be for one of the following unavoidable
reasons.
 Illness or accidents
 A family move away from the locality
 Marriage, pregnancy or difficulties with child care provision
A  Retirement or death
In addition to the above examples, other causes of labour turnover are as follows.
C  Paying a lower wage rate than is available elsewhere
C  Requiring employees to work in unsafe or highly stressful conditions
 Requiring employees to work unsociable hours
A  Poor relationships between management and staff
 Lack of opportunity for career enhancement
 Requiring employees to work in inaccessible places
G  Discharging employees for misconduct, bad timekeeping or unsuitability
L 4.2 Measuring labour turnover

O  Labour turnover is a measure of the number of employees leaving/being recruited in a period of
B time (say one year) expressed as a percentage of the total labour force.
A  Labour turnover rate =

Replacements
 100%
Average number of employees inperiod
L
B 4.2.1 Example: Labour turnover

(a) Florence Co had a staff numbering 800 at the beginning of 20X1 and 1,200 at the end of that
O year. Four hundred employees resigned on 30 June, and were immediately replaced by 400 new
X employees on 1 July. 400 extra employees were also recruited at that time.
. What is the labour turnover rate?

400
C Rate =
(800  1,200)  2
 100% = 40%
O (b) Rome Co had a staff of 2,000 at the beginning of 20X1 and, owing to a series of redundancies
M caused by the recession, 1,000 at the end of the year. Voluntary redundancy was taken by
1,500 staff at the end of June, 500 more than the company had anticipated, and these excess
redundancies were immediately replaced by new joiners.
The labour turnover rate is calculated as follows.
500
Rate =  100% = 33%
(2,000  1,000)  2
4.3 The costs of labour turnover

The costs of labour turnover can be large and management should attempt to keep labour turnover as
low as possible so as to minimise these costs.
CHAPTER 8 // LABOUR
The cost of labour turnover may be divided into the following.

 Preventative costs
 Replacement costs
4.3.1 Replacement costs

These are the costs incurred as a result of hiring new employees and they include the following.
(a) Cost of selection and placement.
(b) Inefficiency of new labour; productivity will be lower.
(c) Costs of training; training costs will include formal training courses plus the costs of on-the-job
instructors diverted from their own work to teach new recruits.
(d) Loss of output due to delay in new labour becoming available.
(e) Increased wastage and spoilage due to lack of expertise among new staff.
(f) The possibility of more frequent accidents at work. A
(g) Cost of tool and machine breakages.
C
4.3.2 Preventative costs C
These are costs incurred in order to prevent employees leaving and they include the following. A
(a) Cost of personnel administration incurred in maintaining good relationships.
(b) Cost of medical services including check-ups, nursing staff and so on.
(c)
(d)
Cost of welfare services, including sports facilities, laundry services and canteen meals.
Pension schemes providing security to employees.
G
(e) Cost of providing training and offering career progression. L
4.4 The prevention of high labour turnover
O
Labour turnover will be reduced by the following actions. B
 Paying satisfactory wages A


Offering satisfactory hours and conditions of work
Creating good relations between fellow workers, supervisors and subordinates
L
 Offering good training schemes and a well-understood career or promotion ladder
 Improving the content of jobs to create job satisfaction
 Proper planning so as to avoid redundancies B
 Investigating the cause of high labour turnover rates
O
5 Measuring labour efficiency and utilisation X
.
Labour efficiency and utilisation can be measured using ratios. C
5.1 Labour efficiency and utilisation O
Labour costs are often a large proportion of the total costs incurred by many organisations. It is M
important therefore that the performance of the labour force is continually measured.
Labour performance is generally measured by comparing actual results for an organisation with budgets
(for now you can think of a budget as a plan for the future (in money terms) and is therefore the result
that we expect to get).
5.1.1 Efficiency, capacity utilisation and production volume ratios

The ways of measuring labour performance are:
 Efficiency ratio
 Capacity utilisation ratio
 Production volume ratio
Expectedhours to make actual output

 Efficiency ratio = × 100%
Actualhours taken
Actualhours worked
 Capacity utilisation ratio = × 100%
Hours budgeted
Expectedhours to make actual output

 Production volume ratio = × 100%
Hours budgeted
These ratios are based on direct labour hours and are usually expressed as percentages.
Efficiency ratio  Capacity utilisation ratio = Production volume ratio
5.1.2 Example: Ratios

A Barney Rubble Co budgets to make 25,000 units of output (in four direct labour hours each) during a
budget period of 100,000 direct labour hours.
C Actual output during the period was 27,000 units which took 120,000 direct labour hours to make.
C Required
A Calculate the efficiency, capacity utilisation and production volume ratios.
Solution
G (27,000  4) hours
L (a) Efficiency ratio
120,000
 100% = 90%
O (b) Capacity utilisation ratio

120,000 hours
 100% = 120%
B 100,000 hours
A (c) Production volume ratio

(27,000  4) hours
100,000
 100% = 108%
L These ratios may be used, therefore, to measure the performance of the labour force. At a later stage in
your studies you will come across variances, in particular labour variances which are another means of
measuring labour efficiency.
B
O
X EXAM FOCUS POINT
. Few candidates are able to correctly apply these ratios, don’t be one of them!
C
O 5.1.3 Idle time
M We considered idle time earlier. A useful ratio for the control of idle time is the idle time ratio.
Idle hours
Idle time ratio =  100%
Total hours
This ratio is useful because it shows the proportion of available hours which were lost as a result of idle
time.
CHAPTER 8 // LABOUR
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 Labour costs can be determined according to some prior agreement, the amount of time worked or the
quality of work done.
 Labour attendance time is recorded on an attendance record or a clockcard. Job time may be recorded
on daily time sheets, weekly time sheets, jobcards or route cards depending on the circumstances.
 There are five main types of incentive scheme, piecework, time-saved bonus, discretionary bonus, group
bonus scheme and profit-sharing scheme.
 Direct labour costs are the specific costs of the workforce used to make a unit of product or provide a
service. Indirect labour costs are all other labour costs: these are not directly attributable to the product
or service.
 Labour turnover is the rate at which employees leave a company and this rate should be kept as low as
possible. The cost of labour turnover can be divided into preventative and replacement costs. A
 Labour efficiency and utilisation can be measured using ratios. C
C
A
QUICK QUIZ
1 Name three ways in which labour costs can be determined.

2 Give three reasons why salaried staff may be required to fill in detailed timesheets.
3 What is idle time, and why may it occur? G
4 List five types of incentive scheme.
L
5 What is the formula used to calculate the labour turnover rate?
6 List five methods used to reduce labour turnover.
O
7 Analysis of the gross wages in a factory reveals: B
Direct operatives ($) Indirect operatives ($) A
Productive hours at basic rate 41,200 17,600
Overtime premium 1,100 450 L
Idle time 760
Group bonuses 2,780
Total gross pay 45,840 18,050
B
What amount would NORMALLY be accounted for as production overhead?
A $18,050
O
B $18,810 X
C $21,590
D $22,690 .
8 Which of the following are aspects of payroll systems? C
(i)
(ii)
Attendance records
Calculation of bonuses O
(iii)
(iv)
Employee tax codes
Apportionment of wages to cost centres
M
A (i), (ii) and (iii) only
B (ii), (iii) and (iv) only
C (i), (ii) and (iv) only
D All four items
9 The direct labour capacity utilisation ratio for a period was 104%.
What could have caused this?
A Actual hours worked being greater than budgeted hours
B Actual hours worked being less than budgeted hours
C Standard time for actual output being greater than budgeted hours
D Standard time for actual output being less than budgeted hours
1 Agreed basic wages and salaries, time spent, work done.

2  Time sheets assist in the creation of management information about product costs and
profitability
 Time sheet information may have a direct impact on the revenue an organisation receives (eg
solicitors, accountants)
 Time sheet information may support overtime claims made by salaried staff
3 Time during which employees cannot get on with their work (though it is not their fault). It occurs when
a machine breaks down or when there is a temporary shortage of work.
4 Piecework, time-saved bonus, discretionary bonus, group bonus scheme, profit-sharing scheme.
Replacements
A 5 Labour turnover rate =
Average number of employees in period
 100%
C 6  Paying satisfactory wages

C  Offering satisfactory hours and conditions of work
 Offering good training schemes
A  Improving job content to create job satisfaction
 Proper staff planning so as to avoid redundancies
7 D (17,600 + 450 + 760 + 2,780 + 1,100)
G
8 A
L 9 A
O
B Now try ...
A Attempt the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
L Number
Q35
B Q36
O Q37
X Q38
. Q39
C
O
M
C H A P T E R
A
The previous two chapters explained how materials and
labour costs are analysed and recorded. Organisations Expenses C
also incur other expenses, such as depreciation on its
non-current assets.
C
This chapter describes the nature of these expenses, and A
how they may be analysed into direct and indirect
expenses, or fixed and variable costs. This chapter and
the two preceding chapters on materials and labour costs, G
taken together, explain the basic features of the costs
within a business organisation. L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
1 Expense distinctions B3 (c)

2 Types of expense B3 (a)
3 Depreciation B3 (d)
4 Recording expenses A2 (c), B3 (b), (e)


B Cost recording
3 Accounting for other expenses
(a) Describe the nature of expenses by function K
(b) Describe the procedures and documentation required to K

ensure the correct authorisation, coding, analysis and
recording of direct and indirect expenses
A (c) Describe and calculate capital and revenue expenditure and K
the relevant accounting treatment
C (d) Calculate and explain depreciation charges using straight-line, S
C (e)
reducing balance, machine hour and product units methods
Explain the relationship between the expenses costing K
A system and the expense accounting system
G
L 1 Expense distinctions
O
B  Capital expenditure is expenditure which results in the acquisition of non-current assets. Non-
current assets are assets acquired to provide benefits in more than one accounting period. Capital
A expenditure is charged to the statement of profit or loss (income statement) via a depreciation
L charge over a period of time.
 Revenue expenditure is expenditure which is incurred for the purpose of the trade of the
business, or in order to maintain the existing earning capacity of non-current assets. It is charged
B to the statement or profit or loss (income statement) in the period to which it relates.
O We have now looked at materials costs and labour costs in some detail. Any other costs that might be
incurred by an organisation are generally known as expenses.
X Like materials and labour costs, expenses can be also divided up into different categories. You should
. not find too much difficulty in distinguishing between the following.
 Direct expense costs
C  Indirect expense costs
O 

Fixed expense costs
Variable expense costs
M
1.1 Revenue and capital expenditure
Expenses may also be classified as either revenue expenditure or as capital expenditure.
 Capital expenditure is expenditure which results in the acquisition of non-current assets.
 Non-current assets are assets which are acquired to provide benefits in more than one
accounting period and are not intended to be resold in the normal course of trade.
CHAPTER 9 // EXPENSES
Capital expenditure is not charged to the statement of profit or loss (income statement) as an expense. A
depreciation charge is instead charged to the statement of profit or loss in order to write the capital
expenditure off over a period of time. The depreciation charge is therefore an expense in the statement of
profit or loss..
For example, if an asset is bought for $20,000 and it is expected to last for 5 years, then for five years,
$4,000 ($20,000  5 years) will be charged to the statement of profit or loss.
The costs incurred in purchasing non-current assets result in the non-current assets appearing in the
statement of financial position.
Revenue expenditure is expenditure which is incurred for one of the following reasons.
 For the purpose of the trade of the business, including administration expenses, selling and
distribution expenses and finance charges.
 In order to maintain the existing earning capacity of non-current assets.
A
Revenue expenditure is charged to the statement of profit or loss in the period to which it relates. C
1.1.1 Example: Revenue and capital expenditure compared
C
Let us look at an example which should help you to distinguish between revenue items and capital
A
items.
Suppose that Bevan Co purchases a building for $30,000. A few years later it adds an extension to the
building at a cost of $10,000. The building needs to have a few broken windows mended, its floors
G
polished, and some missing roof tiles replaced. These cleaning and maintenance jobs cost $900. L
Which items of expenditure are revenue expenditure and which are capital expenditure? O
Solution B
The original purchase ($30,000) and the cost of the extension ($10,000) are capital expenditure A
because they are incurred to acquire and then improve a non-current asset. The other costs of $900 are
revenue expenditure because they are maintaining the existing earning capacity of the building. L
Revenue and capital items are therefore distinguished by the ways they are accounted for in the
statement of profit or loss and the statement of financial position.
B
1.2 Revenue and capital expenditure and costing O
Revenue expenditure is of more relevance to the costing of products than capital expenditure. Capital
expenditure is only of relevance when it is turned into revenue expenditure in the form of depreciation.
X
.
EXAM FOCUS POINT
C
O
It is important that you have a clear understanding of the differences between revenue and capital
items of expenditure. In an examination, you may be asked to distinguish between these terms and to M
decide whether certain items are capital or revenue items.
QUESTION Capital and revenue expenditure

Distinguish between capital expenditure and revenue expenditure and give an example of each.
ANSWER
Capital expenditure is expenditure which results in the acquisition of non-current assets or an
improvement in their ability to earn income. Revenue expenditure is expenditure which is incurred
either for the purpose of the trade or to maintain the existing earning capacity of non-current assets.
For example:
Expense Cost Capital/revenue
Ford Transit van $8,000 Capital
Sign-painting of company name, logo and telephone number on van $500 Capital
Petrol for van $500 Revenue
New engine, replacing old one which blew up $1,000 Revenue
1.3 Direct expenses and indirect expenses

A
 A direct cost is a cost that can be traced in full to the product or service that is being costed.
C
 Direct expenses are any expenses which are incurred on a specific product other than direct
C material cost and direct wages. Direct expenses are rare.
A
Direct expenses are charged to the product as part of the prime cost. Examples of direct expenses are as
follows.
G  The cost of special designs, drawings or layouts
L  The hire of tools or equipment for a particular job
O Direct expenses are also referred to as chargeable expenses.
B Indirect expenses are also known as overheads.
A
2 Types of expense
L
Revenue expenditure other than materials and labour costs can arise for a number of different reasons.
B (a)
(b)
Buildings costs. The main types are rent, business rates and buildings insurance.
The costs of making buildings habitable. Gas and electricity bills and water rates, repairs and
O maintenance costs and cleaning costs.
X (c) People-related costs. These include expenditure on health and safety, the cost of uniforms, and
the cost of staff welfare provisions like tea and coffee, canteen costs and staff training.
. (d) Machine operating costs. Machines need fuel or power and they need to be kept clean and
properly maintained. Machines also need to be insured. A proportion of the capital cost of the
C machines becomes revenue expenditure in the form of depreciation. Some machines are hired.
O (e) Information processing costs. Associated with information processing are the costs of telephone,
postage, fax, computer disks and stationery, as well as subscriptions to information sources, like
M trade journals.
(f) Finance costs. If there is a bank loan there will be interest and bank charges to pay, and if
equipment is leased there will be lease interest. Dividends paid to shareholders, however, are not
a cost, they are an appropriation of some of the income earned in excess of all costs.
(g) Selling and distribution costs. Selling expenses include advertising and the costs of providing
customer service and after sales service. The organisation's finished product also has to be stored
and then delivered to customers. Distribution expenses would therefore include warehouse
charges, upkeep and running of delivery vehicles and carriage outwards.
(h) Finally there are the costs of dealing with the outside world. Fees paid to professionals like
external auditors, surveyors or solicitors and the costs of marketing (such as market research)
would all be collected under this heading.
A typical detailed statement of profit or loss (income statement) might, therefore, have the following
headings.
$ $
Sales X
Less cost of sales:
Opening inventory X
Materials X
Labour X
Depreciation X
Power and fuel X
X
Less closing inventory (X)
Cost of sales (X)
Gross profit X
Less costs of administration, distribution and selling:
Wages and salaries
Rent
X
X A
Insurance
Heat and light
X
X
C
Depreciation of office equipment X C
Repairs and maintenance X
Cleaning X A
Telecommunications X
Printing, postage and stationery X
Hire of computer equipment
Advertising
X
X
G
Warehouse charges
Carriage outwards
X
X
L
Audit and accountancy fees X O
Bank charges X
Interest X B
Profit before tax
(X)
X A
The following paragraphs describe some of these expenses in more detail. L
2.1 Rent
Rent is usually an annual charge payable quarterly in advance.
B
Rent is normally subject to a tenancy agreement and it may be fixed for a period of so many years, or
O
reviewable annually, or there may be some other agreement. X
2.2 Insurance costs .
These comprise premiums paid to an insurance company to cover the risk, say, of damage to buildings C
or their contents by fire, flood, explosions, theft and so on. Buildings insurance is usually based on the
cost of rebuilding the property with adjustments to take account of the property's particular location. It is
O
an annual sum, payable either whenever the renewal date occurs or in instalments. M
Other types of insurance are charged on a similar basis. Examples include employer's liability insurance
(against the risk of harming employees), and vehicle insurance.
2.3 Electricity, gas and telecommunications

Electricity, gas and telecommunications charges normally have two elements, a fixed amount called a
standing charge, generally payable quarterly, and a variable amount based on consumption. There are a
number of rates depending on the status of the user (domestic/commercial/industrial) and the time of
day the power is consumed or the calls are made.
2.4 Subscriptions
Subscriptions are generally paid annually, though not necessarily by calendar year. This category
includes both subscriptions to publications like trade journals or information services and subscriptions
for membership of Chambers of Commerce or professional or trade bodies and the like.
2.5 Professional fees

Such charges are usually made on the basis of time spent attending to the client's business.
2.6 Hire charges

Hire charges are sometimes payable on a time basis. For example a cement mixer may be hired for, say,
$10 a day. Sometimes an additional charge is made for usage. A photocopier, for example, might have
a meter on it showing how many copies had been made. The meter would be read periodically by the
hire company and the invoice would include a charge for the number of copies made in the period.
A
C 2.7 Discretionary costs
C Discretionary costs are, as you might expect, costs that are incurred at somebody's discretion. Whereas
an organisation has to pay a certain amount for, say, electricity simply so that the business can function,
A other costs are not crucial to the short-term continuance of operations. The main examples are research
and development costs, staff training and advertising.
Before we go on to consider the way in which expenses are recorded for cost accounting purposes, we
G are going to look at one further type of expense.
L
O 3 Depreciation
B Depreciation is a method of writing off capital expenditure. There are four methods used, straight-line,
A reducing balance, machine hour and product units.
L
3.1 The objectives of depreciation accounting
If an asset is purchased for $8,000 at the beginning of the year and sold for $6,000 at the end of the
B year then it is reasonable to conclude that the cost of owning the asset for a year is $2,000. This
O $2,000 is a real cost and it is in addition to the costs of using the asset, like fuel and repairs costs.
If the business had not owned the asset it would not have been able to make its product. It is therefore
X reasonable that the $2,000 cost should be charged as a cost of the product (although we won't say how
. to do this, for now).
One of the objectives of depreciation accounting is therefore to find some way of calculating this cost of
C ownership.
O Consider, however, the use of a machine that is constructed to do a specific job for a specific firm. It
M may last 20 years and yet be of no use to anybody else at any time in which case its resale value would
be nil on the same day that it was bought. It is, however, hardly fair to charge the whole cost of the
machine to the first product that it makes, or even to the first year's production. Very probably the
products it is making in year 19 will be just as well made as the products made in year 1.
Thus a second objective of depreciation accounting is to spread out the capital cost of the asset over as
long a period as the asset is used. In the example given there is a good case for spreading this cost in
equal proportions over the whole 20 years.
3.2 Depreciation methods

There are four principal methods of depreciating an asset: the straight line method, the reducing
balance method, the machine hour method and product units.
(a) The straight line method charges an equal amount of depreciation each period.
(b) The reducing balance method charges the largest amount of depreciation at the beginning of an
asset's life. As the asset grows older the amount charged each period gets steadily smaller.
(c) The machine hour method charges depreciation in proportion of hours used to expected usage.
(d) In the product units method the useful life of the asset is expressed in terms of the total number
of units expected to be produced.
These methods of depreciation are simply different ways of systematically writing off the cost of an asset
over its useful life. An asset’s useful life is either the period over which an asset is expected to be
available for use by an entity or the number of production units expected to be obtained from the asset
by an entity, depending on the depreciation method used. A
3.2.1 Example: Straight line and reducing balance methods
C
Two assets are purchased for $8,000 each. Asset A is depreciated over four years using the straight line C
method and Asset B is depreciated at the rate of 25% per annum on the reducing balance. What is the
value of each asset after four years and how much per year is charged to the statement of profit or loss?
A
Solution
Asset A (straight line) Asset B (reducing balance)
G
Statement of Statement of Statement of Statement of L
financial profit or loss financial profit or loss
position charge position charge O
balance
$ $
balance
$ $ B
Capital cost
Year 1 charge
8,000
(2,000) 2,000
8,000
(2,000) 2,000
A
c/f
Year 2 charge
6,000
(2,000) 2,000
6,000
1,500 1,500
L
c/f 4,000 4,500
Year 3 charge (2,000) 2,000 (1,125) 1,125
c/f 2,000 3,375 B
Year 4 charge
Value after four years
(2,000)
-
2,000 (844)
2,531
844
O
The statement of profit or loss charge for Asset A is calculated by splitting the $8,000 capital cost into X
four. For Asset B it is calculated by taking 25% of the opening balance each year. In theory Asset B
could continue to be depreciated for evermore.
.
C
3.2.2 Example: machine hour method
O
A lorry bought for a business cost $17,000. It is expected to last for five years and then be sold for
scrap for $2,000. Usage over the five years is expected to be: M
Year 1 200 days
Year 2 100 days
Year 3 100 days
Year 4 150 days
Year 5 40 days
Required
Work out the depreciation to be charged each year under the machine hour method.
Solution
Under the machine hour method, depreciation for each of the five years is calculated as follows.
Total usage (days) = 200 + 100 + 100 + 150 + 40 = 590 days
$(17,000  2,000)
Depreciation per day = = $25.42
590
Usage Depreciation ($)
Year (days) (days × $25.42)
1 200 5,084.00
2 100 2,542.00
3 100 2,542.00
4 150 3,813.00
5 40 1,016.80
14,997.80
A Note. The answer does not come to exactly $15,000 because of the rounding carried out at the
C 'depreciation per day' stage of the calculation.
In order to decide which method is most appropriate we need to think a little more about why we are
C depreciating the asset at all.
A 3.2.3 Example: product units method
Under the product units method, the useful life of the asset is expressed in terms of the total number of
G units expected to be produced.
L
cost of fixed asset - residual value
O Annual depreciation expense =
estimated total production
× actual production
B Suppose, an asset has original cost $70,000, a residual value of $10,000, and is expected to produce
A 6,000 units.
Depreciation per unit = ($70,000−$10,000) / 6,000 = $10
L
$10 x actual production will give you the depreciation cost of the current year.
The table below illustrates the production units depreciation schedule of the asset.
B
Book value at Units of Depreciation Depreciation Accumulated Book value at end of
O beginning of year production cost per unit expense depreciation year
X ($) ($) ($) ($) ($)
. 70,000
60,000
1,000
1,100
10
10
10,000
11,000
10,000
21,000
60,000
49,000
C 49,000 1,200 10 12,000 33,000 37,000
37,000 1,300 10 13,000 46,000 24,000
O 24,000 1,400 10 14,000 60,000 10,000 (scrap value)
M Depreciation stops when book value is equal to the residual of the asset. In the end the sum of
accumulated depreciation and scrap value equals to the original cost.
3.3 Depreciation in practice

In practice you may find that the depreciation method most often used is the straight line method
because it is simple and gives a reasonable approximation (given that depreciation is at best an
estimate).
Typical depreciation rates under the straight line method are as follows.
Freehold land Not depreciated
Freehold buildings 2% per annum (50 years)
Leasehold buildings Over the period of the lease
Plant and machinery 10% per annum (10 years)
Fixtures and fittings 10% per annum (10 years)
Motor vehicles 25% per annum (4 years)
Note that these are not rules. Businesses can choose whatever method or rate they think is most
appropriate. Motor vehicles, for example, are often depreciated using the reducing balance method since
it is well known that in reality they lose the largest proportion of their value in their first few years.
4 Recording expenses
 Direct expenses are recorded by coding them to the appropriate job or client.
A
 Indirect expenses are initially allocated to cost centres and apportioned or absorbed to reflect C
areas of the business (other cost centres, different products) that have utilised the resource. C
In this chapter we are only going to deal with the initial stages of recording expenses. Much more detail A
will be found later on which explains how overhead costs are further analysed and attributed to cost
units.
G
4.1 Direct expenses
Direct expenses (such as plant hire for a specific job or solicitor's fees for drawing up a contract to
L
provide a service) can simply be coded to the appropriate job or client when the bill arrives and recorded O
together with other direct costs.
B
4.2 Indirect expenses A
Allocation is the process by which whole cost items are charged to a cost centre. L
Indirect expenses are initially allocated to the appropriate cost centres. A cost centre is a collecting
place for costs which cannot be directly attributed to cost units – ie a collecting place for overheads. B
Cost are further analysed into cost units once they have been traced to cost centres.
O
When costs are incurred, they are generally allocated to a cost centre. Cost centres may include the
following. X
 A department .
 A machine, or group of machines C
 A project (eg the installation of a new computer system) O
Cost centres are an essential 'building block' of a costing system. M
The decision as to which cost centre is the appropriate one for an expense depends upon the type of
expense. Some expenses will be solely related to a particular cost centre and so can easily be allocated
to that cost centre. For example, if the cost centre is a group of specialised machines, the costs of
purchasing specialised cleaning materials to clean those machines is an overhead that can be easily
allocated to that cost centre.
Other expenses, however, will be shared between the various cost centres and so cannot be allocated
directly to one particular cost centre. Other cost centres therefore have to be established for the initial
allocation of such shared overhead costs. Examples of shared expenses include: rent, rates, heating and
lighting, building maintenance and so on.
The shared general overhead expenses are then apportioned to the cost centre representing
departments, projects and so on.
4.2.1 Example: Overhead allocation

The coding, analysis and recording of indirect expenses and other overheads at the initial stage may be
demonstrated by the following example.
The weekly costs of Medlycott Co include the following.
Wages of foreman of Department A $1,000
Wages of foreman of Department B $1,200
Indirect materials consumed in Department A $400
Rent of premises shared by Departments A and B $1,500
Medlycott Co's cost accounting system includes the following cost centres.
Code
A 101 Department A
C 102
201
Department B
Rent
C Show how the costs will be initially coded.
A Solution
(a) $ Code
G Wages of foreman of Department A
Wages of foreman of Department B
1,000
1,200
101
102
L Indirect materials consumed in Department A
Rent of premises shared by Departments A and B
400
1,500
101
201
O (b) You may think that this is so obvious as not to be worth explaining. You will certainly not be
B surprised to be told that the next stage is to share the rent paid between the two departments.
Why, you might ask, do we not split the cost of rent straightaway and not bother with cost centre
A 201?
L (c) To answer this question consider the following extract from the cost accounts of Medlycott Co,
several months after the previous example. Cost centre 201 is no longer used because nobody
could see the point of it.
B Cost centre
101 102
O $ $
X Wages
Materials
1,172.36
73.92
1,415.00
169.75
. Rent 638.25 1,086.75
C You have just received a memo telling you that starting from this month (to which the above
figures relate), Department A is to pay 25% of the total rent for the premises shared with
O Department B and Department B is to be split into 2 departments, with the new department (C)
paying 37% of the remaining rent charge. The manager of Department B is standing over you
M asking you how much his department's new monthly rent charge will be.
(d) The answer is $815.06. More importantly the first thing you have to do to calculate the answer
is to recreate the total cost information that used to be allocated to cost centre 201. This is not
very difficult in the present example, but imagine that there were 10 cost centres sharing
premises and the cost information was recorded in a bulky ledger. Do you think it would have
been easy to spot that the monthly rent had increased to $1,725?
4.3 Documentation
There are several ways in which this initial allocation could be documented. A common method is to put
a stamp on the invoice itself with boxes to fill in, as appropriate.
% A/C $ P
25.00% 101 431 25
47.25% 102 815 06
27.75% 103 478 69
A
TOTAL 201 1,725 00 C
Approved Date
C
Authorised Date A
Posted Date
G
4.4 Apportionment and responsibility accounting
L
The last point raises another important question. It is unlikely that the managers of departments A, B
O
and C have any control over the amount of rent that is paid for the building. They need to be made B
aware that their part of the building is not free but they are not responsible for the cost. The person
responsible for controlling the amount of a cost such as this is more likely to be a separate manager, A
who looks after the interests of all of the company's buildings.
L
If cost centre 201 is maintained it can therefore be used to collect all the costs that are the
responsibility of the premises manager. This approach is known as responsibility accounting and such
cost centres can be called responsibility centres.
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 Capital expenditure is expenditure which results in the acquisition of non-current assets. Non-current
assets are assets acquired to provide benefits in more than one accounting period. Capital expenditure is
charged to the statement of profit or loss (income statement) via a depreciation charge over a period of
time.
 Revenue expenditure is expenditure which is incurred for the purpose of the trade of the business, or in
order to maintain the existing earning capacity of non-current assets. It is charged to the statement of
profit or loss (income statement) in the period to which it relates.
 Depreciation is a method of writing off capital expenditure. There are four methods used, straight-line
reducing balance, machine hour and product units.
 Direct expenses are recorded by coding them to the appropriate job or client.
A  Indirect expenses are initially allocated to appropriate cost centres and apportioned or absorbed to
C reflect areas of the business (other cost centres, different products) that have utilised the resource.
C
A
QUICK QUIZ
1 What is capital expenditure?

2 What is revenue expenditure?
G 3 What is the main distinguishing feature of capital and revenue expenditure?
L 4 What are the two main methods of depreciating an asset?
O 5 What are the two main objectives of depreciation accounting?
B 6 What is responsibility accounting?
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
1 Expenditure resulting in the acquisition of non-current assets. It is not charged to the statement of profit
or loss (income statement) as an expense. Instead a depreciation charge is made to the statement of
profit or loss (income statement) which writes off the capital expenditure over a period of time.
2 Revenue expenditure is expenditure incurred for the purpose of the trade of the business, or in order to
maintain the existing earning capacity of non-current assets. It is charged to the statement of profit or
loss (income statement) in the period to which it relates.
3 The way that they are accounted for in the statement of profit or loss (income statement) (see answers 1
and 2).
4 Straight-line method and reducing balance method.
5 To find a way of calculating the cost of ownership of non-current assets and to spread out the capital
cost of the asset over its lifetime.
6 When cost centre managers have responsibility for controlling the amount of the cost collected within
certain cost centres, such cost centres are called responsibility centres. A
C
Now try ...
C
A
Number
Q40
G
Q41
L
Q42
O
Q43
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
A
C
part C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
Costing techniques .
C
O
M
PART C: COSTING TECHNIQUES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
C H A P T E R
A
Costing systems are used to measure the cost of output
(goods or services) and profitability, and to put a value to Overheads and C
closing inventories of work in progress and finished C
goods. Traditionally, the techniques used to measure cost
have applied mainly to manufacturing businesses, but
absorption costing A
similar techniques are used in service industries too.
For the purpose of the MA2 syllabus, you need to know
about two costing techniques for measuring the cost of G
output: absorption costing and marginal costing.
This chapter explains the processes used in absorption L
costing. Absorption costing can seem quite complicated,
because there is a three-stage process for dealing with
O
overhead costs: allocation, apportionment and B
absorption. It is important to study this chapter carefully.
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
1 What are overheads? C1 (a)

2 What is absorption costing? C1 (a)
3 Overhead apportionment – Stage 1 C1 (b), (c), (d)
4 Overhead apportionment – Stage 2 C1 (e)
5 Absorption of overheads C1 (f), (g), (j)
6 Predetermined overhead absorption rates C1 (g)
7 Over and under absorption C1 (h), (g)
8 Non-production overheads C1 (i), (j)

C Costing techniques
1 Absorption costing
(a) Explain the rationale for absorption costing K
(b) Describe the nature of production and service cost centres K

and their significance for production overhead allocation,
apportionment and absorption
(c) Describe the process of allocating, apportioning and K
absorbing production overheads to establish product costs
(d) Apportion overheads to cost centres using appropriate bases S
(e) Re-apportion service cost centre overheads to production S

cost centres using direct and step-down methods
A (f) Justify, calculate and apply production cost centre overhead S
C absorption rates using labour hour and machine hour
methods
C (g) Explain the relative merits of actual and pre-determined K
absorption rates
A (h) Describe and illustrate the accounting for production S
overhead costs, including the analysis and interpretation of
over/under absorption
G (i) Describe and apply methods of attributing non-production S
overheads to cost units
L (j) Calculate product costs using the absorption costing method S
O
B
A
L 1 What are overheads?
Overheads are the total of the indirect costs incurred in the course of making a product or providing a
B service. Overheads cannot be traced directly and in full to the product or service.
O Now that we have completed our detailed study of direct materials, direct labour and direct expenses,
we can move on to look in more depth at indirect costs, or overheads. Overheads may be dealt with in a
X number of different ways. In this chapter we will be looking at traditional absorption costing. The only
. other method that you need to have knowledge of is marginal costing which we will look at later on.
C 1.1 Overheads
O An indirect cost or overhead is the cost incurred in the course of making a product or providing a
service which cannot be traced directly and in full to the product or service.
M
Overheads are the total of the following:
 Indirect materials
 Indirect labour
 Indirect expenses
One common way of categorising overheads is as follows:
 Production overhead
 Administration overhead
 Selling overhead
 Distribution overhead
CHAPTER 10 // OVERHEADS AND ABSORPTION COSTING
2 What is absorption costing?
Absorption costing is a method of sharing overheads between a number of different products or services
on a fair basis. It involves allocation, apportionment and absorption.
2.1 The objective of absorption costing

The objective of absorption costing is to include in the total cost of a product or service an appropriate
share of the organisation's total overhead. By an appropriate share we mean an amount that reflects the
amount of time and effort that has gone into producing a unit or completing a service.
If an organisation only produced one identical unit then the total overheads would be divided among the
total number of units produced. Life is, of course, never that simple. Absorption costing is a method of
sharing overheads between a number of different products or services on a fair basis.
A
2.2 Practical reasons for using absorption costing
C
The main reasons for using absorption costing are for inventory valuations and establishing the
profitability of different products.
C
A
There are two main reasons for using absorption costing.
(a) Inventory valuations. Production overheads are added to the cost of production to give the
'factory cost' or 'full cost of production'. Full cost of production = prime cost + production G
overheads.
The full cost of production is used to value inventories of finished goods. Inventories of finished
L
goods must be valued for two reasons. O
(i) For the closing inventory figure in the statement of financial position B
(ii) For the cost of sales figure in the statement of comprehensive income
A
The valuation of inventory will affect profitability during a period because of the way in
which the cost of sales is calculated. L
The cost of goods produced
+
–
the value of opening inventories
the value of closing inventories
B
= the cost of goods sold. O
(b) Establishing the profitability of different products or services. If a company sells more than one
product, it will be difficult to judge how profitable each individual product is unless the total unit
X
cost of each product or service is known. To calculate the total unit cost, all overhead costs, .
including those relating to administration, sales and so on, as well as production overheads, are
absorbed on a fair basis into the products. C
O
2.3 Absorption costing procedures
In overview, the absorption costing process is to share out all of the production overheads amongst the
M
cost centres that incur them and then to share their overheads amongst the products made in the cost
centre.
However we have to recognise that not all of these cost centres are production cost centres, ie cost
centres that actually produce goods. Some of the cost centres which incur overheads are service cost
centres. These are areas of the business that provide necessary services to the production cost centres
such as stores, maintenance and canteen.
The overheads incurred by the service cost centres must in turn be shared amongst the production cost
centres until all of the overheads are within the production cost centres. Then finally the total overhead
can be shared amongst the units which are made in each of the production cost centres.
The three steps involved in calculating the costs of overheads to be charged to cost units are
 Allocation
 Apportionment
 Absorption
QUESTION Absorption costing

(a) What is absorption costing?
(b) What are the three stages in accounting for overheads in absorption costing?
ANSWER
(a) Absorption costing is a method of determining a product cost that includes a proportion of all
production overheads incurred in the making of the product and possibly a proportion of other
overheads such as administration and selling overheads.
A
(b)  Allocation of costs to cost centres
C  Apportionment of shared costs between cost centres
C  Absorption of costs into cost units
A
EXAM FOCUS POINT
G
Candidates often demonstrate a lack of basic knowledge and understanding of the overhead absorption
L process. You need to make sure you fully understand the process of overhead allocation, apportionment
O and absorption (especially the last stage of the process).
B
A 2.4 Allocation of overhead costs
L Allocation is the process of assigning whole items of cost to cost centres. It is the first stage in the
absorption costing process.
B Allocation is the process of assigning whole items of cost to cost centres. It is the first stage in the
O It helps to think of a hierarchy of cost centres. At the top are cost centres for items of cost that are
X shared by all departments within the organisation, so that they cannot be allocated in full to production,
administration or sales and distribution overheads. Examples are the costs of building occupancy, such
. as rent and heating costs, where all departments operate from the same premises. These shared costs
(common costs) are allocated initially to a cost centre at the top level of the hierarchy.
C We can think of the next stage in the hierarchy as costs centres for production, administration and sales
O and distribution. Some costs can be allocated directly to these cost centres. An example is the salary
M cost of the production manager, which can be allocated directly as a production overhead, or the salary
of the sales and marketing manager, which can be allocated directly as a sales and marketing overhead
cost.
Traditionally, absorption costing has been a costing system for manufacturing businesses. The next level
in the hierarchy for production overhead costs are production departments that are engaged directly in
production work (such as machining and product assembly) and production departments that provide
support and assistance but are not directly engaged in production work – such as the production stores
department, production planning department, repairs and maintenance department, and so on. These
support departments are ‘service cost centres’.
Some costs can be allocated directly to specific production cost centres or service cost centres. For
example, the labour costs of employees in the repairs and maintenance section (all indirect labour) can
be allocated directly to the repairs and maintenance service centre. Similarly, depreciation costs of
machinery can be allocated directly to the cost centre where the machinery is located and used.
3 Overhead apportionment – Stage 1
In the first stage of overhead apportionment, costs that cannot be allocated directly to a production cost
centre or a service cost centre (or to administration overheads or sales and distribution overheads) must
be shared on a fair basis between these cost centres.
We shall now look at the first stage of overhead apportionment. Costs that cannot be allocated directly
to a production cost centre or a service cost centre (or to administration overheads or sales and
distribution overheads) must be apportioned, or shared on a fair basis between the cost centres that are A
lower down in the hierarchy.
C
Apportionment is a procedure whereby indirect costs (overheads) are spread between cost centres on a
fair basis C
A
3.1 Sharing out common costs
Overhead apportionment follows on from overhead allocation. The first stage of overhead apportionment G
is to identify all overhead costs as production, administration, selling and distribution overhead. The
common costs for heat and light, rent and rates, the canteen and so on (ie cost allocated to general
L
overhead cost centres at the top of the cost centre hierarchy) must be shared out between the other cost O
centres.
B
3.2 Bases of apportionment A
It is important that overhead costs are shared out on a fair basis using appropriate bases of
apportionment. The bases of apportionment for the most usual cases are given below.
L
Shared overhead cost item Basis of apportionment
Rent, rates, heating and light, repairs and Floor area occupied by each cost centre
B
depreciation of buildings O
Insurance of equipment, where the same Cost or book value of equipment X
insurance policy covers equipment in different cost
centres .
Heating, lighting (see above) Volume of space occupied by each cost centre C
O
M
3.2.1 Example: Bases of apportionment

Bravo Co incurred the following overhead costs.
$
Depreciation of factory 1,000
Factory repairs and maintenance 600
Insurance of equipment 200
Heating 390
Lighting 100
2,290
Information relating to the production and service cost centres in the factory is as follows.
Production cost centres Service cost centres
Production Production Service Service
A B X Y
Floor space (m2) 1,200 1,600 800 400
A Volume (m3) 3,000 6,000 2,400 1,600
Book value of equipment $30,000 $20,000 $10,000 $20,000
C
On what bases should the overhead costs be apportioned between the four cost centres? How much
C overhead would be apportioned to each cost centre?
A Solution
Basis of Total To cost centre
G Item of cost apportionment cost
$
A
$
B
$
X
$
Y
$
L Factory depreciation
Factory repairs
floor area
floor area
1,000
600
300
180
400
240
200
120
100
60
O Equipment insurance book value 200 75 50 25 50
Heating volume 390 90 180 72 48
B Lighting floor area 100 30 40 20 10
A Total 2,290 675 910 437 268
Workings
L
Factory depreciation
Total floor space = (1,200 + 1,600 + 800 + 400)m2
B = 4,000 m2
O Factory depreciation is apportioned to the different cost centres as follows.
X Production cost centre A =

1,200
 $1,000 = $300
4,000
.
1,600
C Production cost centre B =
4,000
 $1,000 = $400
O 800
Service cost centre X =  $1,000 = $200
M 4,000
400
Service cost centre Y =  $1,000 = $100
4,000
The same method can be applied in order to calculate the apportionments of the other overheads.
QUESTION Apportionment (1)

Baldwin Co is preparing its production overhead budgets. Cost centre expenses and related information
have been budgeted as follows.
Machine Machine Mainten-
Total shop A shop B Assembly Canteen ance
$ $ $ $ $ $
Indirect wages 78,560 8,586 9,190 15,674 29,650 15,460
Consumable materials
(inc. maintenance) 16,900 6,400 8,700 1,200 600 –
Rent and rates 16,700
Buildings insurance 2,400
Power 8,600
Heat and light 3,400
Depreciation of
machinery 40,200
A
Machine Machine Mainten-
Total shop A shop B Assembly Canteen ance C
Other information:
Value of machinery ($) 402,000 201,000 179,000 22,000 – – C
Power usage – technical
estimates (%) 100 55 40 3 – 2
A
Direct labour (hours) 35,000 8,000 6,200 20,800 – –
Machine usage (hours) 25,200 7,200 18,000 – – –
Area (square metres) 45,000 10,000 12,000 15,000 6,000 2,000 G
Required L
Calculate the overheads to be apportioned to the five cost centres. (In this example, you should assume O
that the depreciation costs for machinery have to be apportioned on a fair basis. In practice,
depreciation costs are usually allocated directly to the cost centre using the machinery.) B
ANSWER
A
Basis of L
Mainten- apportion-
Total A B Assembly Canteen ance ment
Indirect wages
$
78,560
$
8,586
$
9,190
$
15,674
$
29,650
$
15,460 Actual B
Consumable
materials 16,900 6,400 8,700 1,200 600 – Actual
O
Rent and rates
Insurance
16,700
2,400
3,711
533
4,453
640
5,567
800
2,227
320
742
107
Area
Area
X
Power 8,600 4,730 3,440 258 – 172 Usage .
Heat and light 3,400 756 907 1,133 453 151 Area
Depreciation 40,200 20,100 17,900 2,200 – – Value C
166,760 44,816 45,230 26,832 33,250 16,632
O
Workings
M
(1) Rent and rates, insurance, heat and light
Floor area is a sensible measure to use as the basis for apportionment.
Proportion Share of Share of Share of
Area total area rent & rates insurance heat & light
Sq metres $ $ $
Machine shop A 10,000 10/45 3,711 533 756
Machine shop B 12,000 12/45 4,453 640 907
Assembly 15,000 15/45 5,567 800 1,133
Canteen 6,000 6/45 2,227 320 453
Maintenance 2,000 2/45 742 107 151
45,000 16,700 2,400 3,400
(2) Power
Share of
Percentage cost
% $
Machine shop A 55 4,730
Machine shop B 40 3,440
Assembly 3 258
Maintenance 2 172
8,600
(3) Depreciation
In the absence of specific information about the non-current assets in use in each cost centre and
the depreciation rates that are applied, this cost is shared out on the basis of the relative value of
each cost centre's machinery to the total. In practice more specific information would (or should)
be available.
A
C
C 4 Overhead apportionment – Stage 2
A The second stage of production overhead apportionment is to reapportion service centre costs between
production cost centres.
G
4.1 Reapportionment of service cost centre costs
L
The second stage of production overhead apportionment concerns the treatment of service cost centres.
O A factory is usually divided into several production cost centres and also many service cost centres.
B Service cost centres might include the stores or the canteen.
A Only the production cost centres are directly involved in the manufacture of the units. In order to be
able to add production overheads to unit costs, it is necessary to have all the overheads charged to the
L production cost centres only.
The next stage in absorption costing is therefore to apportion the overheads of service cost centres to
the production cost centres. This is sometimes called reapportionment.
B
O 4.2 Methods of reapportionment
X The reapportionment of service cost centre costs can be done by a number of methods. You only need to
know about the following two methods.
.  Direct method of reapportionment
C  Step-down method of reapportionment
O Whichever method of reapportionment is used, the basis of apportionment must be fair. A different
apportionment basis may be applied for each service cost centre. This is demonstrated in the following table.
M Service cost centre Possible basis of apportionment
Stores Number or cost value of material requisitions
Maintenance Hours of maintenance work done for each cost centre
Production planning Direct labour hours worked in each production cost centre
4.2.1 Direct method of reapportionment

The direct method of reapportionment involves apportioning the costs of each service cost centre to
production cost centres only.
This method is most easily explained by working through the following example.
4.2.2 Example: Direct method of reapportionment

Winfields Co incurred the following overhead costs.
Production cost centres Stores Maintenance
P Q cost centre cost centre
$ $ $ $
Allocated costs 6,000 4,000 1,000 2,000
Apportioned costs 2,000 1,000 1,000 500
8,000 5,000 2,000 2,500
Production cost centre P requisitioned materials to the value of $12,000. Cost centre Q requisitioned
$8,000 of materials. The maintenance cost centre provided 500 hours of work for cost centre P and
750 hours for cost centre Q.
Required
Calculate the total production overhead costs of cost centres P and Q.
A
Solution
C
Service cost centre Basis of apportionment Total cost Cost centre Cost centre
P Q C
Stores Value of requisitions
$
2,000
$
1,200
$
800 A
(W1)
Maintenance Maintenance hours (W2) 2,500 1,000 1,500
Previously allocated and apportioned costs

4,500
13,000
2,200
8,000
2,300
5,000
G
Total overhead 17,500 10,200 7,300 L
Workings O
(1) Stores cost centre overheads B
These are reapportioned as follows.
A
Total value of materials requisitioned = $12,000 + $8,000
= $20,000 L
$12,000
Reapportioned to Cost centre P =  $2,000 = $1,200
$20,000
B
Reapportioned to Cost centre Q =
$8,000
$20,000
 $2,000 = $800 O
(2) Maintenance cost centre overheads
X
These are reapportioned as follows. .
Total hours worked = 500 + 750 = 1,250 hours C
Reapportioned to Cost centre P =
500
 $2,500 = $1,000
O
1,250
M
750
Reapportioned to Cost centre Q =  $2,500 = $1,500
1,250
The total overhead has now been shared, on a fair basis, between the two production cost
centres.
QUESTION Apportionment (2)

Carrying on from the question above, the table below shows the overheads apportioned to the five cost
centres of Baldwin Co.
Machine shop Machine shop Mainten-
Total A B Assembly Canteen ance
$ $ $ $ $ $
Indirect wages 78,560 8,586 9,190 15,674 29,650 15,460
Consumable
materials 16,900 6,400 8,700 1,200 600 –
Rent and rates 16,700 3,711 4,453 5,567 2,227 742
Insurance 2,400 533 640 800 320 107
Power 8,600 4,730 3,440 258 – 172
Heat and light 3,400 756 907 1,133 453 151
Depreciation 40,200 20,100 17,900 2,200 – –
166,760 44,816 45,230 26,832 33,250 16,632
A Other information:
C Total
Machine
shop A
Machine
shop B Assembly Canteen
Mainten-
ance
C Power usage – technical
estimates (%) 100 55 40 3 – 2
A Direct labour (hours) 35,000 8,000 6,200 20,800 – –
Machine usage (hours) 25,200 7,200 18,000 – – –
Area (square metres) 45,000 10,000 12,000 15,000 6,000 2,000
G Required
L Using the bases which you consider to be the most appropriate, calculate overhead totals for Baldwin
O Co's three production cost centres, Machine Shop A, Machine Shop B and Assembly.
B ANSWER
Basis of
A Mainten- appor-
L Total
$
A
$
B
$
Assembly
$
Canteen
$
ance
$
tionment
Total overheads 166,760 44,816 45,230 26,832 33,250 16,632

Reapportion (W1) – 7,600 5,890 19,760 (33,250) – Dir labour
B Reapportion (W2) – 4,752 11,880 – – (16,632) Mac usage
Totals 166,760 57,168 63,000 46,592 – –
O Workings
X (1) Canteen overheads
. Total direct labour hours = 35,000
C Machine shop A =
8,000
 $33,250 = $7,600
O 35,000
M Machine shop B =
6,200
35,000
 $33,250 = $5,890
20,800
Assembly =  $33,250 = $19,760
35,000
(2) Maintenance overheads

Total machine hours = 25,200
7,200
Machine shop A =  $16,632 = $4,752
25,200
18,000
Machine shop B =  $16,632 = $11,880
25,200
The total overhead has now been shared, on a fair basis, between the three production cost
centres.
The direct method of reapportionment is simple, but it ignores the fact that there may be inter-service
cost centre work occurring, for example, the stores department may do work for the maintenance
department and vice versa.
4.2.3 Step-down method of reapportionment

The step-down method of reapportionment recognises the inter-service cost centre work. This method
apportions the costs of service cost centres to other cost centres but once a service cost centre’s costs
have been apportioned, no subsequent costs are apportioned to it.
A
This method works as follows (where there are two service cost centres). The same principle is applied if
there are more than two service cost centres. C
C
Step 1 Reapportion one of the service cost centre's overheads to all of the other centres which
make use of its services (production and service). A
Step 2 Reapportion the overheads of the remaining service cost centre to the production cost
centres only. The other service cost centre is ignored. G
L
4.2.4 Example: Step-down method of reapportionment
O
A company has two production cost centres and two service cost centres (stores and maintenance). The
following information about activity in a recent costing period is available. B
Production cost centres Stores Maintenance A
1 2 cost centre cost centre
Overhead costs $10,030 $8,970 $10,000 $8,000 L
Value of material requisitions $30,000 $50,000 – $20,000
Maintenance hours used 8,000 1,000 1,000 –
The stores and maintenance cost centres do work for each other as shown in the table below B
Production cost centres Stores Maintenance O
Stores work done (100%) 30% 50% – 20% X
Maintenance work done (100%) 80% 10% 10% –
.
Required
Using the information given above, re-apportion the service cost centre overhead costs using the step-
C
down method of apportionment, starting with the stores cost centre. O
Solution M
$ $ $ $
Overhead costs 10,030 8,970 10,000 8,000
Apportion stores (30%/50%/20%) 3,000 5,000 (10,000) 2,000
– 10,000
Apportion maintenance (8/9/1/9) 8,889 1,111 – (10,000)
21,919 15,081 – –
Note. Maintenance costs are not apportioned to the stores cost centre because the stores costs have
already been apportioned.
If the first apportionment had been the maintenance cost centre, then the overheads of $8,000 would
have been apportioned as follows.
$ $ $ $
Overhead costs 10,030 8,970 10,000 8,000
Apportion maintenance
(80%/10%/10%) 6,400 800 800 (8,000)
10,800 –
Apportion stores (3/8/5/8) 4,050 6,750 (10,800)
20,480 16,520 – –
Note. Notice how the final results differ, depending upon whether the stores cost centre or the
maintenance cost centre is apportioned first.
If one service cost centre, compared with the other(s), has higher overhead costs and carries out a
A bigger proportion of work for the other service cost centre(s), then the overheads of this service centre
should be reapportioned first.
C
C QUESTION Reapportionment
A Elm Co has two service cost centres serving two production cost centres. Overhead costs allocated and
apportioned to each cost centre are as follows..
Production 1 Production 2 Service 1 Service 2
G $
97,428
$
84,947
$
9,384
$
15,823
L Service 1 cost centre is expected to work a total of 40,000 hours for the other cost centres, divided as
O follows.
Hours
B Production 1 20,000
Production 2 15,000
A Service 2 5,000
L Service 2 cost centre is expected to work a total of 12,000 hours for the other cost centres, divided as
follows.
Hours
B Production 1
Production 2
3,000
8,000
O Service 1 1,000
X Required
The finance director has asked you to reapportion the costs of the two service cost centres using the
. direct method of apportionment.
C
ANSWER
O Direct apportionment method Production 1 Production 2 Service 1 Service 2
M $
97,428
$
84,947
$
9,384
$
15,823
Apportion Service 1 costs (20:15) 5,362 4,022 (9,384) –
102,790 88,969 – 15,823
Apportion Service 2 costs (3:8) 4,315 11,508 – (15,823)
107,105 100,477 – –
QUESTION Step-down method

When you show the finance director how you have reapportioned the costs of the two service cost centres, he
says 'Did I say that we used the direct method? Well, I meant to say the step-down method.
Required
Prove to the finance director that you know how to use the step-down method. (Note. Apportion the
overheads of service cost centre 1 first.)
ANSWER
Step-down method Production 1 Production 2 Service 1 Service 2
$ $ $ $
97,428 84,947 9,384 15,823
Apportion Service 1 costs (20:15:5) 4,692 3,519 (9,384) 1,173
102,120 88,466 – 16,996
Apportion Service 2 costs (3:8) 4,635
106,755
12,361
100,827
–
–
(16,996)
–
A
C
C
5 Absorption of overheads A
Once all of the production overheads have been apportioned to the production cost centres an overhead
absorption rate is determined with which to absorb or include the overhead into the cost of each unit of
production.
G
L
The final stage of the process now that all of the production overheads have been allocated and
apportioned to the production cost centres is to find an absorption rate with which to absorb or include O
the overhead into the cost of each unit of production. This is done by finding a basis for absorption
which will generally tend to be based upon the activity of the department.
B
5.1 Example: absorption of overheads
A
Powertool Co needs to calculate the absorption rates for its assembly cost centre and its finishing cost L
centre. The assembly cost centre is a largely machine based cost centre whereas the finishing cost
centre is largely labour based. The management of Powertool Co have decided that the assembly cost
centre overheads should be absorbed on the basis of machine hours and that the finishing cost centre B
overheads should be absorbed on the basis of labour hours.
O
The machine hours in the assembly cost centre are 100,000 whereas the labour hours for the finishing
cost centre are 20,000. The overheads for the assembly cost centre are $145,876 and the overheads X
for the finishing cost centre are $75,624.
.
What is the overhead absorption rate for each cost centre?
C
Solution O
The overhead absorption rate is as follows:
M
$145,876
Assembly =$1.46 per machine hour
100,000
$75,624
Finishing = $3.78 per labour hour
20,000
QUESTION Overhead absorption rate

A business has two production cost centres, manufacturing and packaging. The overheads and other
details for these cost centres are as follows:
Manufacturing Packaging
Overhead $154,000 $89,000
Labour hours 110,000 68,000
Machine hours 35,000 60,000
Management have decided that the overheads are to be absorbed on the basis of labour hours in the
manufacturing cost centre and on the basis of machine hours in the packaging cost centre.
What is the overhead absorption rate per hour in each cost centre (to the nearest cent)?
Manufacturing Packaging
A $1.40 $1.31
B $1.40 $1.48
A C $4.40 $1.31
D $4.40 $1.48
C
C ANSWER
A Answer B
$154,000
Manufacturing = = $1.40 per labour hour
110,000
G
$89,000
L Packaging =
60,000
= $1.48 per machine hour
O
B The overhead absorption rate is then used to cost each product depending upon how many relevant
A hours each product takes in each production cost centre.

For each product that is produced in the two cost centres a certain amount of overhead will be included
L in the cost of the product based upon the number of hours that the product spends in each production
cost centre.
B 5.2 Example: product costs

O Continuing the example from above, one of the products of the Powertool Co is the Powerpuff. This
product has direct material costs of $14.30 per unit and direct labour costs of $16.50 per unit. Each
X unit of the Powerpuff spends 6 machine hours in the assembly cost centre and 3 labour hours in the
. finishing cost centre. The absorption rates calculated above are as follows.
Assembly $1.46 per machine hour
C
Finishing $3.78 per labour hour
O What is the full unit cost of production of the Powerpuff?
M
Solution
$
Direct materials 14.30
Direct labour 16.50
Assembly overhead (6 hours  $1.46) 8.76
Finishing overhead (3 hours  $3.78) 11.34
Full production cost per unit 50.90
QUESTION Total overhead per product

A business has two production departments, assembly and polishing. One of the products made in these
departments is the Stun. Details for these departments and the Stun are as follows.
Assembly Polishing
Overhead $94,800 $74,800
Labour hours 20,000 40,000
Machine hours 60,000 15,000
Stun – labour hours per unit 3 hours 5 hours
Stun – machine hours per unit 4 hours 2 hours
Overheads in the assembly department are to be absorbed on the basis of machine hours and in the
polishing department on the basis of labour hours.
How much overhead in total would be included in the cost of a Stun?
A $3.45
B $8.48 A
C $10.06
D $15.67 C
C
ANSWER
Answer D
A
$94,800
Assembly overhead absorption rate =
60,000
= $1.58 per machine hour
G
Polishing overhead absorption rate =
$74,800
= $1.87 per labour hour
L
40,000
$ O
Overhead to be absorbed
Assembly $1.58 x 4 hours 6.32
B
Polishing $1.87 x 5 hours 9.35 A
Total overhead 15.67
L
5.3 Possible bases of absorption B

The most common absorption bases are as follows.
O


A rate per machine hour
A rate per direct labour hour X
 A percentage of direct labour cost .
 A percentage of direct materials cost
 A percentage of total direct cost (prime cost) C


A rate per unit
A percentage of factory cost (for administration overhead)
O
 A percentage of sales value or factory cost (for selling and distribution overhead) M
The most appropriate basis for production overhead depends largely on the organisation concerned. As
with apportionment it is a matter of being fair.
Many factories tend to use the direct labour hour rate or machine hour rate in preference to a rate
based on a percentage of direct materials cost, wages or prime cost.
A machine hour rate would be used in cost centres where production is controlled or dictated by
machines. A direct labour hour basis is more appropriate in a labour intensive environment.
EXAM FOCUS POINT
Only labour hour and machine hour production overhead absorption methods are examinable in this
paper.
So:
Overhead absorption rate based = Total overheads for the cost centre/Total machine hours
on machine hours
Overhead absorption rate based = Total overheads for the cost centre/Total direct labour hours
on direct labour hours
5.4 The arbitrary nature of absorption costing

A It should be obvious to you that, even if a company is trying to be 'fair', there is a great lack of precision
C about the way an absorption base is chosen.
This arbitrariness is one of the main criticisms of absorption costing, and if absorption costing is to be
C used then it is important that the methods used are kept under regular review. Changes in working
A conditions should, if necessary, lead to changes in the way in which work is accounted for.
For example, a labour intensive cost centre may become mechanised. If a direct labour hour rate of
absorption had been used previous to the mechanisation, it would probably now be more appropriate to
G change to the use of a machine hour rate.
L
O 6 Predetermined overhead absorption rates
B A predetermined overhead absorption rate, which is calculated using figures from the budget, is often
A used.
L In practice, the absorption rate used is usually a predetermined overhead absorption rate, which is
calculated using figures from the budget.
This predetermined overhead absorption rate is a sort of expected cost since it is based on figures
B representing what is supposed to happen (that is, figures from the budget). Using the predetermined
overhead absorption rate, the actual cost of production can be established as follows.
O
X
.
C
O
M ACTUAL HOURS ×
PREDETERMINED
RATE (BASED ON
BUDGETED FIGURES)
Using a predetermined overhead absorption rate means that the actual cost of production includes an
element of cost which is based on a budgeted rate.
6.1 Calculating and using a predetermined overhead absorption rate

A predetermined overhead absorption rate for the forthcoming accounting period is calculated and used
as follows.
Step 1 Estimate the overhead likely to be incurred during the coming period.
Step 2 Estimate the activity level for the period. This could be total hours, units, or direct
costs or whatever measure of activity upon which the overhead absorption rates are to
be based.
Step 3 Divide the estimated overhead by the budgeted activity level. This produces the
predetermined overhead absorption rate.
Predetermined overhead absorption rate = Total budgeted overheads for the cost
based on machine hours centre/Total budgeted machine hours
Predetermined overhead absorption rate = Total budgeted overheads for the cost
based on direct labour hours centre/Total budgeted direct labour hours
Step 4 Absorb or recover the overhead into the cost unit by multiplying the calculated
A
absorption rate by the actual activity: predetermined absorption rate  actual hours C
C
A
EXAM FOCUS POINT
In some questions on this topic, predetermined absorption rates have to be calculated as part of the G
question requirements. Alternatively they may be given to you to use to calculate the overheads
absorbed.
L
O
6.2 Example: Predetermined overhead absorption rates B
Channel Co makes two products, the Jersey and the Guernsey. Jerseys take 2 direct labour hours each A
to make and Guernseys take 5 direct labour hours. Channel Co has budgeted for overhead of $50,000
and direct labour hours of 100,000.
L
Required
Calculate the overhead cost per unit for Jerseys and Guernseys respectively if overheads are absorbed on B
the basis of labour hours.
O
Solution X
Step 1 Estimate the overhead likely to be incurred during the coming period
.
Channel Co estimates that the total overhead will be $50,000
C
O
Step 2 Estimate the activity level for the period
M
Channel Co estimates that a total of 100,000 direct labour hours will be worked
Step 3 Divide the estimated overhead by the budgeted activity level

$50,000
Overhead absorption rate = = $0.50 per direct labour hour
100,000hrs
Step 4 Absorb the overhead into the cost unit by applying the calculated absorption rate
Jersey Guernsey
Labour hours per unit 2 5
Absorption rate per labour hour $0.50 $0.50
Overhead absorbed per unit $1 $2.50
QUESTION Overhead absorption rate

(a) If production overheads in total are expected to be $108,000 and direct labour hours are
planned to be 90,000 hours costing $5 per hour, what is the overhead absorption rate per direct
labour hour?
(b) If production overheads in total are expected to be $720,000 and direct machine hours are
planned to be 50,000 hours, what is the overhead absorption rate per machine hour?
A
ANSWER
C
Expected overheads
C (a) Overhead absorption rate =
Planned direct labour hours
A $108, 000
= $1.20 per direct labour hour
90, 000
G (b) Overhead absorption rate =

Expected overheads
L Planned machine hours
O
$720,000
= $14.40 per direct machine hour
50,000
B
A
L 6.3 Predetermined vs actual absorption rates
An actual absorption rate is based on actual overheads incurred and actual machine or direct labour
hours worked. But because actual overheads and actual hours are not known until the end of an
B accounting period, the actual absorption rate cannot be calculated until then. In effect then, the total
cost of the product cannot be determined until the end of the period as well. This is too late for
O management planning and control purposes such as product pricing, production scheduling, product
cost estimating and so on. It is also too late for routine accounting functions like invoicing.
X
In practice then, most organisations use predetermined absorption rates. The predetermined rate is set
. at the beginning of the accounting period, using budgeted overheads and budgeted machine or direct
C labour hours, so that overheads can be absorbed into actual production throughout the accounting
period. However, as actual costs and actual hours worked are almost always not the same as budgeted
O costs and budgeted hours worked, using a predetermined absorption rate can mean that not all the
actual overhead is absorbed (under absorption) or that too much overhead is absorbed (over absorption)
M into the product.
7 Over and under absorption
Under or over absorption of overheads occurs because the predetermined overhead absorption rates
are based on forecasts (estimates).
 If actual overheads are greater than absorbed overheads, then overheads are under absorbed.
 If actual overheads are less than absorbed overheads, then overheads are over absorbed.
7.1 Under/over absorption of overheads

The discrepancy between actual overheads incurred and the overheads absorbed is the under absorption
or over absorption of overhead. This under/over absorption is an inevitable feature of absorption costing
using predetermined absorption rates because the rate is predetermined from estimates of overhead
cost and the expected volume of activity. It is quite likely, therefore, that either one or both of the
estimates will not agree with what actually occurs. When this happens, under or over absorption of
overheads will arise.
A
C
7.2 Example: Under/over absorption of overheads C
The estimated overhead in a production cost centre is $80,000 and the estimated activity is 40,000
direct labour hours. The predetermined absorption rate (using a direct labour hour basis) is therefore $2 A
per direct labour hour ($80,000  40,000 direct labour hours).
Actual overheads in the period are $84,000 and 45,000 direct labour hours are worked.
G
$
Overhead incurred (actual) 84,000 L
Overhead absorbed (45,000  $2) 90,000
Over absorption of overhead 6,000 O
In this example, the cost of units produced has been charged with $6,000 more than was actually B
spent. An adjustment to reconcile the overheads charged to the actual overhead is necessary and the
over-absorbed overhead will be written off as a credit in the statement of profit or loss (income A
statement) at the end of the accounting period. L
QUESTION Overhead absorption
The actual total production overhead expenditure of Nuthatch Co, was $176,533. Its actual activity, B
and the predetermined overhead absorption rates were as follows.
Machine shop A Machine shop B Assembly
O
Direct labour hours
Machine usage hours
8,200
7,300
6,500
18,700
21,900
–
X
Predetermined overhead absorption rates $7.94 per $3.50 per $2.24 per .
machine hr machine hr direct labour hr
Required
C
Calculate the under or over absorption of overheads. O
M
ANSWER
$ $
Actual expenditure 176,533
Overhead absorbed
Machine shop A 7,300 hrs  $7.94 57,962
Machine shop B 18,700 hrs  $3.50 65,450
Assembly 21,900 hrs  $2.24 49,056
172,468
Under-absorbed overhead 4,065
EXAM FOCUS POINT
The following equation should help you to calculate the under/over absorption of overheads quickly and
easily.
ACTUAL OVERHEADS – ABSORBED OVERHEADS = POSITIVE / NEGATIVE VALUE
 If the result is NEGATIVE (N), there is OVER ABSORPTION (O)
 If the result is POSITIVE (P), there is UNDER ABSORPTION (U)
Remember NOPU!
8 Non-production overheads
A
C For internal reporting purposes and for organisations which base the selling prices of their products on
estimates of total cost, a total cost per unit of output may be required.
C For external reporting (eg statutory accounts) it is not necessary to allocate non-production overheads to
A products.
For internal reporting purposes and for organisations which base the selling price of their product on
estimates of total cost or even actual cost (such industries usually use a job costing system), a total cost
G per unit of output may be required. Builders, law firms and garages often charge for their services by
L adding a percentage profit margin to actual cost. For product pricing purposes and for internal
management reports it may therefore be appropriate to allocate non-production overheads to units of
O output.
B 8.1 Bases for apportioning

A Two possible methods of allocating such non-production overheads are as follows.
L (a) Choose a basis for the overhead absorption rate which most closely matches the non-production
overhead. However, allocation bases that are widely used by traditional costing systems such as
direct labour hours and direct machine hours are not necessarily those that are closely related to
B (b)
non-manufacturing overheads.
Use the production cost as the basis for allocating non-production costs to products.
O The overhead absorption rate is calculated as follows.
X Estimated non-production overheads
Overhead absorption rate =
. Estimated production costs
C If, for example, budgeted distribution overheads are $200,000 and budgeted production costs are
$800,000, the predetermined distribution overhead absorption rate will be 25% of production cost.
O Other bases for absorbing overheads are as follows.
M
Types of overhead Possible absorption base
Selling and marketing Sales value
Research and development Consumer cost (= production cost minus cost of direct materials) or
added value (= sales value of product minus cost of bought in
materials and services)
Distribution Sales value
Administration Full production cost
Absorption rates are usually stated as a percentage , such as a percentage of full production cost or a
percentage of sales value.
The absorption rates are predetermined, based on budgeted figures; therefore there will be some over- or
under-absorption of these overheads because actual overhead costs will differ from the amounts of cost
absorbed into the cost of sale. Or actual production unit numbers will differ from budgeted production
numbers.
8.2 Administration overheads

The administration overhead usually consists of the following.
 Executive salaries and wages/salaries of all staff in administration departments
 Office rent and rates
 Lighting
 Heating and cleaning the offices
Absorption rates for administration overheads are often stated as a percentage of full production cost. A
C
8.3 Selling and distribution overheads
Selling and distribution overheads are often considered collectively as one type of overhead but they are
C
actually quite different forms of expense. A
(a) Selling costs are incurred in order to obtain sales.
(b) Distribution costs begin as soon as the finished goods are put into the warehouse and continue
until the goods are despatched or delivered to the customer. G
Selling overhead is therefore often absorbed on the basis of sales value. L
Distribution overhead is more closely linked to production than sales and from one point of view could O
be regarded as an extra cost of production. It is, however, more usual to regard production cost as
ending on the factory floor and to deal with distribution overhead separately. It is generally absorbed on B
a percentage of production cost but special circumstances, such as size and weight of products affecting
the delivery charges, may cause a different basis of absorption to be used. A
L
8.4 Example: product costs
Continuing the previous example of the Powertool Co and the cost of the Powerpuff product. This
product has a full production cost of $50.90 per unit. B
Budgeted costs and revenue for the year were: O
Production costs for all products $600,000 X
Administration overheads $120,000
.
Sales and distribution overheads $400,000
C
Budgeted sales in total (all products) $1,600,000
Sales price of the Powerpuff: $100 per unit
O
Administration overheads are absorbed as a percentage of production cost and sales and distribution M
costs are absorbed as a percentage of sales revenue.
What is the full unit cost of sales of the Powerpuff?
Solution
Overhead absorption rate for administration overheads: $120,000/$600,000 = 20% of full production
cost.
Overhead absorption rate for sales and distribution overheads: $400,000/$1,600,000 = 25% of sales
price
$
Full production cost per unit 50.90
Administration overhead: 20%  $50.90 10.18
Sales and distribution overhead: 25%  $100
25.00
Full cost of sale per unit 86.08
In practice, an absorption costing system may be restricted to production costs only, without the
absorption of administration and sales and distribution overheads to calculate a fully absorbed cost of
sale. Instead of absorbing these overhead costs into product costs, the overheads are simply treated as a
A period charge against profit, and the actual overhead costs are included in the cost of sales.
C
C EXAM FOCUS POINT
A It is vital that you are happy with the contents of this chapter as it covers one of the most important
topics in the MA2 syllabus.
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 Overheads are the total of the indirect costs incurred in the course of making a product or providing a
service. Overheads cannot be traced directly and in full to the product or service.
 Absorption costing is a method of sharing overheads between a number of different products or services
on a fair basis. It involves allocation, apportionment and absorption.
 The main reasons for using absorption costing are for inventory valuations and establishing the
profitability of different products.
 Allocation is the process of assigning whole items of cost to cost centres. It is the first stage in the
 In the first stage of overhead apportionment, costs that cannot be allocated directly to a production cost
centre or a service cost centre (or to administration overheads or sales and distribution overheads) must
be shared on a fair basis between these cost centres. A
 The second stage of production overhead apportionment is to reapportion service centre costs between C
production cost centres.
C
 Once all of the production overheads have been apportioned to the production cost centres an overhead
absorption rate is determined with which to absorb or include the overhead into the cost of each unit of A
production.
 A predetermined overhead absorption rate, which is calculated using figures from the budget, is often
used. G
 Under or over absorption of overheads occurs because the predetermined overhead absorption rates L
are based on forecasts (estimates).
O
–
–
If actual overheads are greater than absorbed overheads, then overheads are under absorbed.
If actual overheads are less than absorbed overheads, then overheads are over absorbed. B
 For internal reporting purposes and for organisations which base the selling prices of their products on A
estimates of total cost, a total cost per unit of output may be required.
L
B
QUICK QUIZ
1 What is overhead cost allocation?

O
2 Match the following overheads with the most appropriate basis of apportionment.
Overhead Basis of apportionment

X
(a) Maintenance of equipment (1) Direct machine hours .
(b) Heat and light costs (2) Number of employees C
(c)
(d)
Canteen
Insurance of equipment
(3)
(4)
Book value of equipment
Floor area
O
3 Which of the following departments are directly involved in production?
M
Department Involved in production ()
Finished goods warehouse
Canteen
Machining department
Offices
Assembly department
4 In relation to calculating total absorption cost (full cost) or production, label the following descriptions in
the correct order as Steps 1 – 5.
Description Step
A Apportion overhead costs between cost centres
B Establish the overhead absorption rate
C Choose fair methods of apportionment
D Apply the overhead absorption rate to products
E Reapportion service cost centre costs
5 How do the direct and step-down methods of service cost centre apportionment differ?
6 A direct labour hour basis of overhead absorption is most appropriate in which of the following
environments?
A Machine-intensive
B Labour-intensive
A C When all units produced are identical
C D None of the above
C 7 Does over absorption occur when absorbed overheads are greater than or less than actual overheads?
A Greater than
Less than
G 8 Consider the following statements, regarding the reapportionment of service cost centre overheads to
production cost centres, where reciprocal services exist:
L 1 The direct method results in costs being reapportioned between service cost centres
O 2 If the direct method is used, the order in which the service cost centre overheads are
B reapportioned is irrelevant
3 The step-down method results in costs being reapportioned between service cost centres
A 4 If the step-down method is used, the order in which the service cost centre overheads are
L reapportioned is irrelevant
Which statement(s) is/are correct?
B A
B
1, 2 and 4
1, 3 and 4
O C 2 only
X D 2 and 3
.
C
O
M
1 The process whereby whole cost items are charged direct to a cost unit or cost centre.
2 (a) (1) or (3), or possibly allocate costs of maintenance directly to cost centres on the basis of time
sheets/maintenance work done
(b) (4)
(c) (2)
(d) (3)
3
Department Involved in production ()

Finished goods warehouse
Canteen A
Machining department
Offices

C
Assembly department  C
4 A = 2 A
B = 4
C = 1
D
E
=
=
5
3
G
L
5 The direct method is generally used when inter-service department work is not taken into account, ie
the costs of each service cost centre are apportioned to production cost centres only. The step-down O
method involves the following.
B
 Apportioning one of the service cost centre's overheads to the cost centres using its services
(production and service). A
 Apportioning the overheads of the remaining service cost centre to the production cost centres L
only.
6 B
B
7  Greater than
O
8 D
X
Now try ... .
C
Number
O
Q44
M
Q45
Q46
Q47
Q48
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
C H A P T E R
A
The previous chapter explained the processes used in
absorption costing to measure the cost of output. This Marginal costing and C
chapter describes marginal costing, which is an C
alternative costing technique. Marginal costing is a much
simpler technique than absorption costing, because fixed
absorption costing A
overhead costs are treated as an expense in the period
they are incurred and are simply written off against
profit.
G
However the profit reported by marginal costing will
usually differ from the profit reported in a system of L
O
absorption costing, because of the different methods of
measuring inventory values. This chapter explains not
only the process of marginal costing, but also how to
reconcile the differences in reported profit using
B
absorption and marginal costing. A
L
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
1 Marginal costing C2 (a)

2 The principles of marginal costing C2 (a)
3 Marginal costing and absorption costing and the calculation of profit C2 (b), (c), (d)
4 Reconciling the profit figures given by the two methods C2 (e)
5 Marginal costing versus absorption costing – which is better? C2 (f)

2 Marginal costing
(a) Explain and illustrate the concept of contribution S
(b) Prepare profit statements using the marginal costing method S
(c) Prepare profit statements using the absorption costing S
method
(d) Compare and contract the use of absorption and marginal K
costing for period profit reporting and inventory valuation
(e) Reconcile the profits reported by absorption and marginal S
costing
(f) Explain the usefulness of profit and contribution information K
respectively
A
C
C
A 1 Marginal costing
G Marginal costing is an alternative method of costing to absorption costing. In marginal costing, only
variable costs are charged as a cost of sale and a contribution is calculated which is sales revenue
L minus the variable cost of sales.
O 1.1 Marginal cost

B Marginal cost is the cost of a unit of a product or service which would be avoided if that unit were not
A produced or provided.
L
The marginal production cost per unit of an item usually consists of the following.
 Direct materials
B  Direct labour
O  Variable production overheads
X Direct labour costs might be excluded from marginal costs when the work force is a given number of
employees on a fixed wage or salary. Even so, it is not uncommon for direct labour to be treated as a
. variable cost, even when employees are paid a basic wage for a fixed working week. If in doubt, you
should treat direct labour as a variable cost unless given clear indications to the contrary.
C
O 1.2 Contribution
M Contribution is the difference between sales value and the marginal cost of sales.
Contribution is of fundamental importance in marginal costing, and the term 'contribution' is really short
for 'contribution towards covering fixed overheads and making a profit'.
CHAPTER 11 // MARGINAL COSTING AND ABSORPTION COSTING
2 The principles of marginal costing
2.1 Principle 1
Period fixed costs are the same for any volume of sales and production (provided that the level of
activity is within the 'relevant range'). Therefore, by selling an extra item of product or service the
following will happen.
 Revenue will increase by the sales value of the item sold
 Costs will increase by the variable cost per unit
 Profit will increase by the amount of contribution earned from the extra item
2.2 Principle 2
Profit measurement should be based on an analysis of total contribution. Since fixed costs relate to a
period of time, and do not change with increases or decreases in sales volume, it is misleading to charge A
units of sale with a share of fixed costs. Absorption costing is therefore misleading, and it is more
appropriate to deduct fixed costs from total contribution for the period to derive a profit figure. C
2.3 Principle 3
C
When a unit of product is made, the extra costs incurred in its manufacture are the variable production
A
costs. Fixed costs are unaffected, and no extra fixed costs are incurred when output is increased. It is
therefore argued that the valuation of closing inventories should be at variable production cost (direct
materials, direct labour, direct expenses (if any) and variable production overhead) because these are G
the only costs properly attributable to the product.
L
Before explaining marginal costing principles any further, it will be helpful to look at a numerical
example. O
B
2.4 Example: Marginal costing principles
Bain Painkillers Co makes a drug called 'Relief', which has a variable production cost of $6 per unit and
A
a sales price of $10 per unit. At the beginning of June 20X1, there were no opening inventories and L
production during the month was 20,000 units. Fixed costs for the month were $45,000 (production,
administration, sales and distribution). There were no variable non-production costs.
Required B
Calculate the contribution and profit for June 20X1, using marginal costing principles, if sales were as O
follows.
(a) 10,000 Reliefs
X
(b) 15,000 Reliefs .
(c) 20,000 Reliefs
C
Solution O
The first stage in the profit calculation must be to identify the variable cost of sales, and then the
contribution. Fixed costs are deducted from the total contribution to derive the profit. All closing
M
inventories are valued at marginal production cost ($6 per unit).
10,000 Reliefs 15,000 Reliefs 20,000 Reliefs

$ $ $ $ $ $
Sales (at $10) 100,000 150,000 200,000
Opening inventory 0 0 0
Variable production cost 120,000 120,000 20,000
120,000 120,000 20,000
Less value of closing
inventory (at marginal cost) 60,000 30,000 -
Variable cost of sales 60,000 90,000 120,000
Contribution 40,000 60,000 80,000
Less fixed costs 45,000 45,000 45,000
Profit/(loss) (5,000) 15,000 35,000
Profit/(loss) per unit $(0. $1 $1.75
Contribution per unit $4 $4 $4
The conclusions which may be drawn from this example are as follows.
A (a) The profit per unit varies at differing levels of sales, because the average fixed overhead cost per
C (b)
unit changes with the volume of output and sales.
The contribution per unit is constant at all levels of output and sales. Total contribution, which is
C the contribution per unit multiplied by the number of units sold, increases in direct proportion to
the volume of sales.
A (c) Since the contribution per unit does not change, the most effective way of calculating the
expected profit at any level of output and sales would be as follows.
(i) First calculate the total contribution.
G (ii) Then deduct fixed costs as a period charge in order to find the profit.
L (d) In our example the expected profit from the sale of 17,000 Reliefs would be as follows.
$
O Total contribution (17,000  $4)
Less fixed costs
68,000
45,000
B Profit 23,000
A 2.5 Summary
L (a) If total contribution exceeds fixed costs, a profit is made.
(b) If total contribution exactly equals fixed costs, no profit and no loss is made. This is known as
B the breakeven point.
O (c) If total contribution is less than fixed costs, there will be a loss.
X QUESTION Marginal costing principles
. Wong Co makes two products, the Ping and the Pong. Information relating to each of these products for
August 20X1 is as follows.
C Ping Pong
Opening inventory nil nil
O Production (units) 15,000 6,000
M Sales (units)
Sales price per unit
10,000
$$20
5,000
$30
Unit costs $ $
Direct materials 8 14
Direct labour 4 2
Variable production overhead 2 1
Variable sales overhead 2 3
Fixed costs for the month $
Production costs 40,000
Administration costs 15,000
Sales and distribution costs 25,000
Required
(a) Using marginal costing principles, calculate the profit in August 20X1.
(b) Calculate the profit if sales had been 15,000 units of Ping and 6,000 units of Pong.
ANSWER
(a) $
Contribution from Pings (unit production = $20 – $(8 + 4 + 2 + 2) = $4 × 40,000
10,000)
Contribution from Pongs (unit production = $30 – $(14 + 2 + 1 + 3) = $10 × 50,000
5,000)
Total contribution 90,000
Fixed costs for the period ($40,000 + $15,000 + $25,000) 80,000
Profit 10,000
(b) At a higher volume of sales, profit would be as follows.

$ A
Contribution from sales of 15,000 Pings (× $4)
Contribution from sales of 6,000 Pongs (× $10)
60,000
60,000 C
Total contribution
Less fixed costs
120,000
80,000
C
Profit 40,000 A
G
3 Marginal costing and absorption costing and the calculation of L
profit O
3.1 Introduction B
A
In marginal costing, fixed production costs are treated as period costs and are written off as they are
incurred. In absorption costing, fixed production costs are absorbed into the cost of units and are L
carried forward in inventory to be charged against sales for the next period. Inventory values using
absorption costing are therefore greater than those calculated using marginal costing.
Marginal costing as a cost accounting system is significantly different from absorption costing. It is an
B
alternative method of accounting for costs and profit, which rejects the principles of absorbing fixed O
overheads into unit costs.
X
Marginal costing Absorption costing
.
Closing inventories are valued at marginal Closing inventories are valued at full production
production cost. cost. C
Fixed costs are period costs. Fixed costs are absorbed into unit costs. O
Production cost of sales does not include a Production cost of sales does include a share of M
share of fixed overheads. fixed overheads (see note below).
Note. The share of fixed overheads included in cost of sales are partly from the previous period (in
opening inventory values). Some of the fixed overheads from the current period will be excluded by being
carried forward in closing inventory values.
In marginal costing, it is necessary to identify the following.
 Variable costs
 Contribution
 Fixed costs
In absorption costing (sometimes known as full costing), it is not necessary to distinguish variable costs
from fixed costs.
3.2 Example: Marginal and absorption costing compared

Look back at the information contained in the question entitled Marginal costing principles. Suppose
that the budgeted production for August 20X1 was 15,000 units of Ping and 6,000 units of Pong, and
production overhead is absorbed through the use of absorption costing using direct labour hours. The
Ping requires two direct labour hours per unit and the Pong requires one direct labour hour per unit.
Assume the fixed costs and variable overheads referred to in the question are the budgeted and actual
overheads.
Required
Calculate the profit if production was as budgeted, and sales were as follows.
A (a)
(b)
10,000 units of Ping and 5,000 units of Pong
15,000 units of Ping and 6,000 units of Pong
C Administration, sales and distribution costs should be charged as a period cost against profit.
C Solution
A Budgeted production overhead is calculated as follows.
$
Fixed 40,000
G Variable: Pings (15,000  $2) 30,000
L Total
Pongs (6,000  $1) 6,000
76,000
O The production overhead absorption rate would be calculated as follows.
B Budgeted production overhead $76,000
= = $2.1111 per direct labour hour
A Budgeted direct labour hours (15,000 ×2)+6,000
L (a) If sales are 10,000 units of Ping and 5,000 units of Pong, profit would be as follows.
Absorption costing
Pings Pongs Total
$ $ $
B Costs of production
O Direct materials
Direct labour
120,000
60,000
84,000
12,000
204,000
72,000
X Overhead ($2.1111 × direct
labour hours)
63,333 12,667 76,000
. 243,333 108,667 352,000

Less closing inventories (1/3) 81,111 (1/6) 18,111 99,222
C Production cost of sales 162,222 90,556 252,778
O Administration costs
Sales and distribution costs
15,000
M Variable
Fixed
35,000
25,000
Total cost of sales 327,778
Sales 200,000 150,000 350,000
Profit 22,222
Note. There is no under/over absorption of overhead, since actual production is the same as
budgeted production and budgeted and actual overheads are also equal.
The profit derived using absorption costing techniques is different from the profit ($10,000) using
marginal costing techniques at this volume of sales (see earlier question).
(b) If production and sales are exactly the same, (15,000 units of Ping and 6,000 units of Pong)
profit would be $40,000.
$
Sales (300,000 + 180,000) 480,000
Cost of sales (352,000* + 15,000 + 48,000 + 25,000) 440,000
Profit 40,000
* No closing inventory if sales and production are equal.

This is the same as the profit calculated by marginal costing techniques in the earlier question.
3.3 Marginal costing versus absorption costing

Variable costs
(a) In marginal costing, it is necessary to identify the following. Contribution
Fixed costs
(b) In absorption costing it is not necessary to distinguish variable costs from fixed costs. A
(c) Marginal costing and absorption costing are different techniques for assessing profit in a period. C
(d) If there are changes in inventories during a period, so that opening inventory volumes are C
different to closing inventory volumes, marginal costing and absorption costing give different
results for profit obtained. A
(e) If the opening and closing inventory volumes are the same, marginal costing and absorption
costing will give the same profit figure. This is because the total cost of sales during the period
would be the same, no matter how calculated. G
L
3.4 The long-run effect on profit
In the long run, total profit for a company will be the same whether marginal costing or absorption
O
costing is used. Different accounting conventions merely affect the profit of individual accounting B
periods.
A
3.4.1 Example: Comparison of total profits L
To illustrate this point, let us suppose that a company makes and sells a single product. At the
beginning of period 1, there are no opening inventories of the product, for which the variable production
cost is $4 and the sales price $6 per unit. Fixed costs are $2,000 per period, of which $1,500 are fixed
production costs.
B
Period 1 Period 2
O
Sales
Production
1,200 units
1,500 units
1,800 units
1,500 units
X
There are no variable non-production costs.
.
Required C
Determine the profit in each period using the following methods of costing. O
(a) Absorption costing. Assume output is 1,500 units per period. M
(b) Marginal costing.
Solution
It is important to notice that although production and sales volumes in each period are different (and
therefore the profit for each period by absorption costing will be different from the profit by marginal
costing), over the full period, total production equals sales volume, the total cost of sales is the same,
and therefore the profit is the same by either method of accounting.
(a) Absorption costing

$1,500
The absorption rate for fixed production overhead is = $1 per unit.
1,500 units
Total unit cost for inventory valuation = $4 + $1 = $5

Period 1 Period 2 Total
$ $ $ $ $ $
Sales 7,200 10,800 18,000
A Production costs
Variable 6,000 6,000 12,000
C Fixed 1,500 1,500 3,000
7,500 7,500 15,000
C Add opening inventory b/f – 1,500
7,500 9,000
A Less closing inventory c/f
(300 × $5) 1,500 – –
Production cost of sales 6,000 9,000 15,000
G Other costs
Total cost of sales
500
6,500
500
9,500
1,000
16,000
L Unadjusted profit 700 1,300 2,000
(Under-)/over-absorbed overhead – – –
O Profit 700 1,300 2,000
B (b) Marginal costing

Period 1 Period 2 Total
A $ $ $ $ $ $
L Sales
Variable production cost 6,000
7,200
6,000
10,800
12,000
18,000
Add opening inventory b/f – 1,200

6,000 7,200
B Less closing inventory c/f
(300 × $4) 1,200 – –
O Variable production cost
of sales 4,800 7,200 12,000
X Contribution 2,400 3,600 6,000
. Fixed costs
Profit
2,000
400
2,000
1,600
4,000
2,000
C Notes
O (a) The total profit over the two periods is the same for each method of costing, but the profit
M in each period is different.

(b) In absorption costing, fixed production overhead of $300 is carried forward from period 1
into period 2 in inventory values, and becomes a charge to profit in period 2. In marginal
costing all fixed costs are charged in the period they are incurred, therefore the profit in
period 1 is $300 lower and in period 2 is $300 higher than the absorption costing profit.
(c) There is no over or under absorption of overheads because production levels and overhead
expenditure were as expected.
3.4.2 Example: Comparison of total profits when there is over- or under-absorption

Any over- or under-absorption of overheads does not affect the comparison of profits between absorption
costing and marginal costing. This point is illustrated by the following example.
A company makes and sells a single product. During a budgeted period, there was no opening or closing
inventory, and all units produced in the period were sold. Budgeted and actual data are as follows:
Budgeted data:
$
Sales 800,000
Direct production costs 250,000
Budgeted production overheads 200,000
Budgeted other overheads 180,000
Actual data:
$
Sales 750,000
Direct production costs ($70,000 variable, $160,000 fixed) 230,000
Actual production overheads (all fixed costs) 220,000
Actual other overheads ($25,000 variable, $150,000 fixed) 175,000
Required A
Calculate the profit for the period using:
C
(a) marginal costing
C
(b) absorption costing, assuming that production overheads are absorbed at a predetermined
rate and as a percentage of direct production costs, and that other overhead costs are written A
off as a period charge
Solution G
(a) Marginal costing
$ $ L
Sales
Variable costs:
750,000
O
Production direct costs
Other overheads
70,000
25,000
B
Total variable cost of sales 95,000 A
Contribution 655,000
Fixed costs L
Production fixed direct costs 160,000
Fixed production overhead costs 220,000
Other fixed costs
Total fixed costs
150,000
530,000
B
Profit 125,000 O
(b) Absorption costing X
The absorption rate for production overheads is (200,000/250/000) 80% of direct production
costs.
.
$ $
750,000
C
Sales
Production costs: O
Production direct costs 230,000
Production overheads absorbed (80%  230,000) 184,000 M
Full production cost of sales (414,000)
336,000
Under-absorbed overhead (220,000 – 184,000) (36,000)
300,000
Other overhead costs (175,000)
Profit 125,000
The under-absorbed production overhead resulted in the recorded costs of production being $36,000
less than actual costs, but this is offset by the adjustment for the under-absorbed overheads. The profit
reported by absorption costing and by marginal costing is the same.
The reported profits are different, however, when there are changes in inventory levels and values,
between opening and closing inventory in the period.
4 Reconciling the profit figures given by the two methods
Reported profit figures using marginal costing or absorption costing will differ if there is any change in
the level of inventories in the period. If production is equal to sales, there will be no difference in
calculated profits using these costing methods.
4.1 Introduction
The difference in profits reported under the two costing systems is due to the different inventory
valuation methods used.
If inventory levels increase between the beginning and end of a period, absorption costing will report
the higher profit. This is because some of the fixed production overhead incurred during the period will
be carried forward in closing inventory (which reduces cost of sales) to be set against sales revenue in
A the following period instead of being written off in full against profit in the period concerned.
C If inventory levels decrease, absorption costing will report the lower profit because as well as the fixed
overhead incurred, fixed production overhead which had been carried forward in opening inventory is
C released and is also included in cost of sales.
A 4.2 Example: Reconciling profits

The profits reported under absorption costing and marginal costing for period 1 in the example in
G Paragraph 3.4.1 would be reconciled as follows.
$
L Marginal costing profit [($2  1,200) – (2,000)] 400
O Adjust for fixed production overhead in inventory:
Inventory increase of 300 units  $1 per unit 300
B Absorption costing profit 700
A
L EXAM FOCUS POINT
If you have trouble reconciling the different profits reported under absorption costing and marginal
B costing, remember the following formula.
Marginal costing profit X
O Increase/(decrease) in inventory units x fixed production
X overhead absorption rate Y
Z
Absorption costing profit
.
C
O QUESTION Profit reconciliation
M Reconcile the profits reported under the two systems for period 2 of the example in Paragraph 3.4.1
ANSWER
$
Marginal costing profit 1,600
Adjust for fixed production overhead in inventory:
Inventory decrease of 300 units  $1 per unit (300)
Absorption costing profit 1,300
QUESTION Absorption v Marginal costing

The fixed production overhead absorption rate for product X is $10 per machine hour. Each unit of
product X requires five machine hours. Inventory of product X on 1.1.X1 was 150 units and on
31.12.X1 it was 100 units. What is the difference in profit between results reported using absorption
costing and results reported using marginal costing?
A The absorption costing profit would be $2,500 less
B The absorption costing profit would be $2,500 greater
C The absorption costing profit would be $5,000 less
D The absorption costing profit would be $5,000 greater
ANSWER
A Difference in profit = change in inventory levels  fixed production overhead absorption rate per
unit = (150 – 100)  $10  5 = $2,500 lower profit, because inventory levels decreased. The
correct answer is therefore option A. A
C
C
5 Marginal costing versus absorption costing – which is better? A
Absorption costing is most often used for routine profit reporting and must be used for financial
accounting purposes. Marginal costing (contribution information) provides better management G
information for planning and decision making. L
5.1 Usefulness of profit and contribution information
O
The main advantage of contribution information (rather than profit information) is that it allows an easy
B
calculation of profit if sales increase or decrease from a certain level. A
By comparing total contribution with fixed overheads, it is possible to determine whether profits or
losses will be made at certain sales levels.
L
Profit information, on the other hand, does not lend itself to easy manipulation but note how easy it was
to calculate profits using contribution information in the question above. B
O
X
.
C
O
M
The following diagram summarises the arguments in favour of both marginal and absorption costing.
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 Marginal costing is an alternative method of costing to absorption costing. In marginal costing, only
variable costs are charged as a cost of sale and a contribution is calculated which is sales revenue
minus the variable cost of sales.
 In marginal costing, fixed production costs are treated as period costs and are written off as they are
incurred. In absorption costing, fixed production costs are absorbed into the cost of units and are
carried forward in inventory to be charged against sales for the next period. Inventory values using
absorption costing are therefore greater than those calculated using marginal costing.
 Reported profit figures using marginal costing or absorption costing will differ if there is any change in
the level of inventories in the period. If production is equal to sales, there will be no difference in
calculated profits using these costing methods.
 Absorption costing is most often used for routine profit reporting and must be used for financial
accounting purposes. Marginal costing (contribution information) provides better management
A
information for planning and decision making. C
C
A
QUICK QUIZ
1 What is a period cost in marginal costing?

2 Sales value – marginal cost of sales = ........................................
3 What is a breakeven point?
G
4 Marginal costing and absorption costing are different techniques for assessing profit in a period. If there L
are changes in inventory during a period, marginal costing and absorption costing will report different
profits.
O
Which of the following statements are true? B
I If inventory levels increase, marginal costing will report the higher profit. A
II If inventory levels decrease, marginal costing will report the lower profit. L
III If inventory levels decrease, marginal costing will report the higher profit.
IV If the opening and closing inventory volumes are the same, marginal costing and absorption
costing will report the same profit figure.
B
A All of the above O
B
C
I, II and IV
I and IV
X
D III and IV .
5 Which of the following are arguments in favour of marginal costing? Tick as appropriate. C
(a) Closing inventory is valued in accordance with accounting standards. O
(b) It is simple to operate.
M
(c) There is no under or over absorption of overheads.
(d) Fixed costs are the same regardless of activity levels.
(e) The information from this costing method may be used for decision making.
6 A product has the following costs:

$/unit
Variable production costs 4.80
Total production costs 7.50
Total variable costs 5.90
Total costs 10.00
11,400 units of the product were manufactured in a period during which 11,200 units were sold.
What is the profit difference using absorption costing rather than marginal costing?
A The profit for the period is $540 lower
B The profit for the period is $540 higher
C The profit for the period is $820 lower
D The profit for the period is $820 higher
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
1 A fixed cost.
2 Contribution.
3 It is the point at which total contribution exactly equals fixed costs, and when no profit and no loss is
made.
4 D
5 (a)
(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

6 B 200 units x ($7·50 – $4·80)/unit A
C
C
Now try ... A
Number G
Q49 L
Q50 O
Q51
B
Q52
A
Q53
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
C H A P T E R
A
The previous two chapters explained the processes used
in absorption costing and marginal costing for measuring Cost bookkeeping C
costs of output and profit. There has been no explanation
yet of how costs are recorded. For either absorption
C
costing or marginal costing systems, there has to be a A
system for recording costs – a cost book-keeping system.
There are two cost book-keeping systems, an integrated
accounts system and an interlocking accounts system. G
The difference between the two systems relates to the
connection between the cost accounting system and the L
O
financial accounting book-keeping system. Both systems
are explained in this chapter.
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
1 Accounting for costs and ledger accounting A2 (b), B1 (d), B2 (e),

(f), B3 (e)
2 Control accounts A2 (b), (d), B1 (j),
B3 (e)
3 Cost bookkeeping systems A2 (a), B3 (e), C1 (h)
4 Advantages and limitations of interlocking and integrated cost accounting A2 (a)
systems

(a) Explain the relationship between the cost/management K

accounting system and the financial accounting/management
information systems (including interlocking and integrated
bookkeeping systems)
(b) Describe the process of accounting for input costs and K
relating them to work done
(d) Explain and illustrate the use of codes in categorising and K
processing transactions (including sequential, hierarchical, block,
faceted and mnemonic coding methods)
B Cost recording
A 1 Accounting for materials
C (d) Describe and illustrate the accounting for material costs S
C (j) Explain the relationship between the materials costing K
A 2
system and the inventory control system
Accounting for labour
(e) Describe and illustrate the accounting for labour costs S

G (f) Explain the relationship between the labour costing system K
L and the payroll accounting system
3 Accounting for other expenses
O
(e) Explain the relationship between the expenses costing K
B system and the expense accounting system
A C Costing techniques
L 1 Absorption costing
(h) Describe and illustrate the accounting for production S

overhead costs, including the analysis and interpretation of
B over/under absorption
O
X
.
1 Accounting for costs and ledger accounting
C
O Cost records are a detailed breakdown of the information contained in the purchases account, the
M wages and salaries account and all the expense accounts in the nominal ledger...
1.1 Introduction
Previously, we have scrupulously avoided T accounts, debits and credits, ledgers and bookkeeping. The
cost records we have described so far are quite adequate for individual products or jobs, and it is not
essential to go beyond this.
However, unless records of totals are maintained and checks of these records are made, there is no way
of knowing whether all the costs that should have been recorded really have been recorded. The solution
to this problem is to link the cost records to the cash and credit transactions that are summarised in
the nominal ledger.
CHAPTER 12 // COST BOOKKEEPING
These are known as control accounts – they are simply summary accounts in the nominal ledger which
then feed into the financial statements – the statement of profit or loss (often referred to as the income
statement) and statement of financial position.
If you like you can think of accounting for costs as dealing with debits. Let us look at an example to
illustrate what we mean.
We shall demonstrate how a single purchase of materials works through into the final accounts. The
relevant double entries are:
$ $
(a) DEBIT Materials X
CREDIT Cash X
Being the buying of materials which are put into raw materials inventory
(b) DEBIT Work in progress X
CREDIT Materials X
Being the issue of materials to production for use in work in progress A
(c) DEBIT Finished goods X C
CREDIT Work in progress X
Being the issue of units that are now finished to finished goods inventory
C
(d) DEBIT Cost of sales X A
CREDIT Finished goods X
Being the taking of units out of finished goods inventory and selling them
G
(e) DEBIT Statement of profit or loss X
CREDIT Cost of sales X L
Being the closing off of ledger accounts and the drawing up of financial statements O
Entry (e) would only be made at the end of a period. B
1.2 Example: Basic cost accounting entries A
Fred Flintstone Co begins trading with $200 cash. $200 is initially spent on timber to make garden L
furniture. $100 worth of timber is left in store, whilst the other $100 is worked on to make garden
chairs and tables. Before long, $50 worth of timber has been converted into garden furniture and this
furniture is sold for $150. How will these events and transactions be reflected in the books? B
Solution
O
CASH ACCOUNT X
$ $
Cash - opening balance 200 Purchase of materials 200 .
Sale of finished goods 150
350
Closing balance 150
350 C
MATERIALS ACCOUNT O
Cash purchase
$
200 Transfer to WIP
$
100 M
- Closing balance 100
200 200
WORK IN PROGRESS ACCOUNT

$ $
Transfer from materials 100 Transfer to finished goods 50
- Closing balance 50
100 100
FINISHED GOODS ACCOUNT

$ $
Transfer from WIP 50 Transfer to cost of sales 50

50 50
COST OF SALES ACCOUNT

$ $
Transfer from finished goods 50 Shown in statement of profit or loss 50
50 50
SALES ACCOUNT
$ $
Shown in statement of profit or loss 150 Cash 150
150 150
FRED FLINTSTONE CO
A STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS (INCOME STATEMENT)
C Sales
$
150
C Cost of sales
Profit
50
100
A FRED FLINTSTONE CO
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION
$ $
G Cash 150
Inventories: materials 100
L WIP 50
O 150
300
B Capital: b/f
profit
200
100
A 300
L The principle, as you can see, is very straightforward. We have not included entries for labour costs or
direct expenses to keep things simple, but these are treated in the same way. Instead of amounts being
debited initially to the materials account, they would be debited to the labour costs or direct expenses
B accounts (with cash being credited). They would then be transferred to work in progress and the other
entries would be as for materials.
O (Note: the materials account may also be known as the materials inventory account or stores ledger
X control account.)
. 1.3 Accounting for indirect materials

C Direct materials are charged directly to the cost of production. Indirect materials, on the other hand, are
overhead costs and should be accounted for accordingly. The materials account records the actual costs
O of all materials, direct and indirect. The accounting entry to record the cost of indirect materials if the
M materials are kept in stores and requisitioned when required is:
DEBIT Overhead account (production, X
administration or sales and distribution
overheads account)
CREDIT Materials account X
Indirect materials relating to admin or sales and distribution may be written off to expense accounts
directly and not held in central stores.
1.4 Example: direct and indirect materials

During one month, a company incurred materials costs of $28,000. There were no opening or closing
inventories at the beginning and end of the month. Direct material costs were $20,000 (all paid for in
cash), and indirect materials costs were $1,000 for production, $5,000 for administration and $2,000
for sales and distribution. All materials are kept in stores and requisitioned when required. How will
these transactions be reflected in the books?
Solution
MATERIALS ACCOUNT
$ $
Cash purchases 28,000 Work in progress 20,000
Production overheads account 1,000
-
Admin overheads account
Sales and dist’n overheads a/c
5,000
2,000
A
28,000 28,000 C
$ $
C
Transfer from materials 20,000
20,000
A
PRODUCTION OVERHEADS ACCOUNT
Transfer from materials

$
1,000
$ G
1,000 L
ADMINISTRATION OVERHEADS ACCOUNT
$ $
O
Transfer from materials 5,000 B
5,000
A
SALES AND DIST’N OVERHEADS ACCOUNT
$ $ L
Transfer from materials 2,000
2,000
B
1.5 Accounting for labour costs
Labour costs are either direct labour or indirect labour costs. In a manufacturing company, only
O
production workers may be direct labour. The costs of all other employees are production overheads, X
administration overheads or sales and distribution overheads, depending on where the employees work.
.
Some of the costs of direct workers are also treated as production overhead costs. These include:
 The cost of any premium payments for overtime work (unless the work was done in overtime at
C
the specific request of the customer, to complete a job more quickly) O
 The cost of any idle time for direct workers M
 The cost of sick pay for direct workers.
The basic process for recording labour costs is similar to the process for recording materials costs:
(a) The wages control account acts as a sort of collecting place for net wages paid and deductions
made from gross pay. The actual gross pay for all employees is therefore debited to the wages
control account or wages and salaries control account. (The corresponding double entry is a
credit entry to Cash or the relevant Deductions from Pay account.)
(b) Wages (and salaries) are then analysed between direct and indirect costs. These costs are
debited to the work in progress account for direct labour costs, production overhead account for
indirect production labour costs, and the administration overheads or sales and distribution
overheads accounts.
WAGES CONTROL ACCOUNT

$ $
Cash and deductions (= gross X Work in progress (direct labour cost) X
wages and salaries)
Production overheads account (indirect X
production labour costs)
Admin overheads account (costs of X
admin labour)
Sales and dist’n overheads a/c (costs of X
sales and distribution labour)
$ $
Transfer from wages control X
(direct labour costs)
A PRODUCTION OVERHEADS ACCOUNT
C Transfer from wages control
$
X
$
C (indirect production labour costs)
A ADMINISTRATION OVERHEADS ACCOUNT

$ $
Transfer from wages control X
G (admin labour costs)
L SALES AND DIST’N OVERHEADS ACCOUNT

$ $
O Transfer from wages control (sales X
B and distribution labour costs)
A 1.6 Example: accounting for production labour costs

L We will use an example to briefly review the principal bookkeeping entries for wages of production
labour employees.
B The following details were extracted from a weekly payroll for 750 employees at a factory in Trinidad.
Analysis of gross pay
O Direct Indirect
workers workers Total
X $ $ $
. Ordinary time
Overtime: basic wage
36,000
8,700
22,000
5,430
58,000
14,130
C Sick pay
premium 4,350
950
2,715
500
7,065
1,450
O Idle time 3,200 – 3,200
53,200 30,645 83,845
M
Net wages paid to employees $42,605 $22,220 $64,825
Required
Prepare the wages control account for the week for these production workers.
Solution
(a) The first step is to determine which wage costs are direct and which are indirect.
There are in fact only two items of direct wages cost in this example, the ordinary time
($36,000) and the basic overtime wage ($8,700) paid to direct workers. All other payments
(including the overtime premium) are indirect wages.
(b) The net wages paid are debited to the control account, and the balance then represents the
deductions which have been made for income tax, national insurance, and so on.
WAGES CONTROL ACCOUNT
$ $
Bank: net wages paid 64,825 Work in progress - direct labour 44,700
Deductions control accounts* Production overhead control:
($83,845  $64,825) 19,020 Indirect labour 27,430
Overtime premium 7,065
Sick pay 1,450
Idle time 3,200
83,845 83,845
* In practice there would be a separate deductions control account for each type of deduction made
(for example in the UK, PAYE and National Insurance).
1.7 Dealing with overheads A

The bookkeeping entries for overheads are not as straight forward as those for materials and labour. We
shall now consider the way in which overheads are dealt with in a cost accounting system.
C
Actual overhead costs incurred are recorded as a debit entry in the overhead control account. This C
should be the production overhead control account, the administration overhead control account or the
sales and distribution overhead control account, depending on the nature of the overhead cost.
A
The corresponding credit entry should be to the materials account or materials account (for indirect
materials costs), the wages control account (for indirect labour costs) or cash account (for indirect
expenses).
G
L
For actual overhead costs incurred
(a) DEBIT Overhead control account
$
X
$ O
CREDIT Materials account X B
CREDIT Wages control account X
CREDIT Cash account (indirect expenses) X A
When an absorption costing system is used, the amount of overhead included in the cost of an item is L
absorbed at a predetermined rate. The amount absorbed is recorded by crediting the relevant overhead
account and debiting work in progress (production overhead costs absorbed) or cost of sales account (for
other overhead costs).
B
Production overhead costs absorbed
(a) DEBIT Work in progress account
$
X
$
O
CREDIT Production overheads control account X
X
Other overhead costs absorbed $ $ .
(a) DEBIT
CREDIT
Cost of sales account
Overheads control account
X
X
C
(Note: In many costing systems, administration overhead costs and sales and distribution costs are not O
charged to cost of sales at a predetermined absorption rate, but are simply recorded at actual cost. In
this case, the amount debited to cost of sales and credited to the overhead account is the actual
M
overhead costs incurred.)
As we saw in an earlier, it is highly unlikely that the actual amount and the absorbed amount will be the
same. The difference is called under- or over-absorbed overhead. This is the difference between the
amount on the debit side of the overhead account (= overhead costs incurred) and the credit side (=
overhead costs absorbed). To deal with under- or over-absorbed overheads in the cost accounting books,
we also need to have an account to collect under- or over-absorbed amounts for each type of overhead.
1.8 Example: the under-/over-absorbed overhead account

Gnocci Co absorbs production overheads at the rate of $0.50 per operating hour and administration
overheads at 20% of the production cost of sales. Actual data for one month was as follows.
Administration overheads $32,000
Production overheads $46,500
Operating hours 90,000
Production cost of sales $180,000
What entries need to be made for overheads in the ledgers?
Solution
Dr Cr
$ $
A Cash (actual overhead costs incurred)
Production overheads
46,500
C Absorbed into WIP (90,000  $0.50)
Under-absorbed overhead
45,000
1,500
C 46,500 46,500
A Cash (actual overhead costs incurred)

Administration overheads
32,000
To cost of sales (180,000  0.2) 36,000
Over-absorbed overhead 4,000
G 36,000 36,000
L Production overhead
Under-/over-absorbed overhead
1,500
O Administration overhead 4,000
Balance to statement of profit or loss 2,500
B 4,000 4,000
A Less production overhead has been absorbed than has been spent so there is under-absorbed overhead
L of $1,500. More administration overhead has been absorbed (into cost of sales, note, not into WIP) and
so there is over-absorbed overhead of $4,000. The net over-absorbed overhead of $2,500 is a credit in
the statement of profit or loss.
B 1.9 Accounting entries in a system of cost ledger accounts

O The accounting entries in a system of cost ledger accounts can be confusing and it is important to keep
in mind some general principles.
X (a) When expenditure is incurred on materials, wages or overheads, the actual amounts paid or
. payable are debited to the appropriate resources accounts. The credit entries (which in a financial
accounting ledger would be in the cash or payables accounts) are in the cost ledger control
C account. The cost ledger control account appears in the financial accounting ledger where an
O interlocking bookkeeping system is maintained (separate ledgers for financial and costing
records).
M (b) When production begins, resources are allocated to work in progress. This is recorded by
crediting the resources accounts and debiting the work in progress account. In the case of
production overheads, the amount credited to the overhead account and debited to work in
progress should be the amount of overhead absorbed. If this differs from the amount of overhead
incurred, there will be a difference on the overhead control account; this should be written off to
an 'under-/over-absorbed overhead' account. (One other point to remember is that when indirect
materials and labour are allocated to production, the entries are to credit the materials and wages
accounts and debit production overhead account.)
(c) As finished goods are produced, work in progress is reduced. This is recorded by debiting the
finished goods control account and crediting the work in progress control account.
(d) To establish the cost of goods sold, the balances on the administration overhead control account
and the selling and distribution overhead control account are transferred to cost of sales control
account. For a company with a full absorption costing system, the transfers from administration
overhead and selling and distribution overhead accounts would be the amounts absorbed, rather
than the amounts incurred. Any difference would again be written off to an 'under-/over-absorbed
overhead' account. The balance of the finished goods control account is the finished goods
inventory remaining. As goods are sold a transfer is made of the production cost of the goods
sold, from the finished goods control account to the production cost of sales account.
(e) Sales are debited to the cost ledger control account and credited to sales account.
(f) Profit is established by transferring to the cost statement of profit or loss the balances on sales
account, cost of sales account and under-/over-absorbed overhead accounts.
1.10 Accounting entries in absorption costing and marginal costing systems

The principles outlined above are illustrated for absorption costing and marginal costing systems in the
diagrams on the following pages. A
The following points should be noted: C
(a) In both diagrams the direct and indirect materials figures, and the direct and indirect labour C
figures, are extracted from the materials and wages analyses respectively.
(b) In the diagram of an absorption costing system, the debit in respect of overheads to the WIP
A
account is the absorbed overheads and is found by multiplying the total units of the basis for
absorption (labour hours, machines hours and so on) for the period by the overhead absorption
rate. For example, if 10,000 direct labour hours were booked to cost units and the overhead G
absorption rate was $2 per direct labour hour, then $20,000 would be debited to the WIP
account for overheads.
L
(c) In the diagram of the marginal costing system, only the variable overheads are debited to the O
WIP account. Fixed overheads are debited direct to the costing statement of profit or loss (income
statement).
B
(d) The final balance on the overhead account of the absorption costing system is the under- or over-
A
absorbed overhead. There will be no such balance under a marginal costing system. However, L
there may be an over or under absorption of variable production overheads.
(e) The closing balances on the WIP and finished goods accounts under absorption costing will be at
absorbed cost, but will be at marginal cost under marginal costing. B
(f) Our diagrams are highly simplified versions of the full set of cost accounts used in practice. O
X
.
C
O
M
.
L
L
X
B
A
B
A
A
C
C
C
O
O
O
G
222
Cost bookkeeping using absorption costing
STORES WIP FG IS
$ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
Credit purchases Direct materials FG
x x x x x x COS x
Cash purchases x transferred
WAGES
$ $
Cash wages Direct wages
x x x
OHDs
Prod
x Ohds x
absorbed
x
Credit expenses Selling, distribution and admin overheads

Cash expenses x
Depreciation
Balance on a/c - under- or over- absorbed overheads
x
SALES
$ $
Sales
x
x Sales
x
Balance on a/c - profit or loss for period

x
Cost bookkeeping using marginal costing
STORES WIP FG IS
Credit $ $ $ $ $ $ COS $ $
Direct materials x
x x x x x x
purchases Direct wages Marginal COS x Sales
x FG transferred Contribution x
Cash Direct expenses
x x at marginal cost c/d
purchases
WAGES Contribution x
b/d
$ $ VARIABLE OVERHEADS
Cash
x x
wages
$ $
EXPENSES V Prod x
x x
Ohds
$ $ Valued at
Credit marginal cost
x x
ble
expenses In
d
ria
Cash
Va
x ma irec
x tte
expenses ial r
s Variable other
Indirect wages
x overheads
ses
pen
Fix
x direct ex
ed
In
FIXED OVERHEADS
$ $
Fixed overheads for current period Fixed
x x x
overheads
Balance on a/c - profit or loss for period

CHAPTER 12
x
//
SALES
$ $
Sales
x
Sales
x
COST BOOKKEEPING
223
.
L
L
X
B
A
B
A
A
C
C
C
O
O
O
G
M
2 Control accounts
A control account is an account which records total cost, unlike an individual ledger account which
records individual debits and credits.
A control account is an account which records total cost. In contrast, individual ledger accounts record
individual debits and credits.
Previously, we kept things simple to avoid obscuring basic principles. For example, we have until now
assumed that if $200 of materials are purchased the only entries made will be Dr Materials, Cr Cash. In
practice, of course, this $200 might be made up of 20 different types of material, each costing $10,
and if so each type of material is likely to have its own sub-account. These sub-accounts would be
exactly like individual personal accounts in the payables' ledger or the receivables' ledger. You have
A probably guessed that we need to use control accounts to summarise the detailed transactions (such as
how the $200 of materials is made up) and to maintain the double entry in the nominal ledger.
C
 A materials account (or materials control account or stores ledger control account) records
C the total cost of invoices received for each type of material (purchases) and the total cost of each
A type of material issued to various departments (the sum of the value of all materials requisition
notes).
 A wages control account records the total cost of the payroll (plus employer's national insurance
G contributions) and the total cost of direct and indirect labour as recorded in the wages analysis
sheets and charged to each production job or process.
L  A production overhead control account is a total record of actual expenditure incurred and the
O amount absorbed into individual units, jobs or processes. Subsidiary records for actual overhead
expenditure items and cost records which show the overheads attributed to individual units or
B jobs must agree with or reconcile to the totals in the control account.
A  A work in progress control account records the total costs of direct materials, direct wages and
production overheads charged to units, jobs or processes, and the cost of finished goods which
L are completed and transferred to the distribution department. Subsidiary records of individual job
costs and so on will exist for jobs still in production and for jobs completed.
 A finished goods control account records the total cost of finished goods transferred from the
B production department to the distribution department.
O  A cost of sales control account records the total cost of the finished goods sold.
X
. The precise level of detail depends entirely upon the individual organisation. For example an
organisation that makes different products might want a hierarchy of materials accounts as follows.
C
O QUESTION Stores ledger control
M The following data relate to the materials account of Fresh Co, an air freshener manufacturer, for the
month of April 20X2.
$
Opening inventory 18,500
Closing inventory 16,100
Deliveries from suppliers 142,000
Returns to suppliers 2,300
Cost of indirect materials issued 25,200
Required
(a) Calculate the value of the issue of direct materials during April 20X2.
(b) State the double entry to record the issue of direct materials in the cost accounts.
ANSWER
(a) Since we are given no information on the issue of direct materials we need to construct a
materials account.
MATERIALS ACCOUNT
$ $
Balance b/f 18,500 Payables/cash (returns) 2,300
Payables/cash 142,000 Overhead accounts 25,200
WIP (balancing figure) 116,900
Balance c/f 16,100
160,500 160,500
The value of the issue of direct materials during April 20X2 was $116,900.
(b) The issue of direct materials would therefore be recorded as follows.
DR
CR
WIP control account
Materials account
$116,900
$116,900
A
C
C
3 Cost bookkeeping systems A
There are two main cost bookkeeping systems, interlocking systems and integrated systems.
G
3.1 Introduction L
There are two types of cost bookkeeping system, the interlocking and integrated. The main difference O
between the two systems is that interlocking systems require separate ledgers to be kept for the cost
accounting function and the financial accounting function, which means that the cost accounting profit
B
and financial accounting profit have to be reconciled. Integrated systems, on the other hand, combine A
the two functions in one set of ledger accounts.
L
Modern cost accounting systems (computerised) integrate cost accounting information and financial
accounting information and are known as integrated systems. You are much more likely to deal with
integrated systems in practice.
B
3.2 Interlocking systems O
An interlocking system is a bookkeeping system where separate ledger accounts are kept for both the X
cost accounting function and the financial accounting function. Such a system necessitates the
reconciliation of the profits produced by the separate statements of profit or loss. The cost accounts use
.
the same basic cost data (purchases, wages and so on) as the financial accounts, but then provide the C
cost analysis linking the input costs with the output of products and services.
O
M
3.2.1 How an interlocking system works
An interlocking system features two ledgers.
(a) The financial ledger contains asset, liability, revenue, expense and appropriation (eg dividend)
accounts. The trial balance of an enterprise is prepared from the financial ledger.
(b) The cost ledger is where cost information such as the build-up of work in progress is analysed in
more detail.
3.2.2 The cost ledger control account

We mentioned the cost ledger control account briefly earlier. There are certain items of cost or revenue
which are of no interest to the cost accountant because they are financial accounting items. These
include the following.
 Interest or dividends received
 Dividends paid
 Discounts allowed or received for prompt payment of invoices
Some financial accounting items are not related to costs and profits such as:
 Cash
 Payables
 Receivables
 Revenue reserves
A The items listed are not included in the separate cost accounting books, but are held in a cost ledger
control account.
C
3.2.3 Principal cost accounts in a system of interlocking accounts
C (a) The resources accounts
A  Materials control account or stores control account
 Wages (and salaries) control account
 Production overhead control account
G  Administration overhead control account
L  Selling and distribution overhead control account
O (b) Accounts which record the cost of production items from the start of production work through to
cost of sales
B  Work in progress control account
A 

Finished goods control account
Cost of sales control account
L (c) Sales account
(d) The costing statement of profit or loss (income statement)
B (e) The under-/over-absorbed overhead account
O (f) Cost ledger control account (in the cost ledger)
X 3.2.4 The financial book-keeping system

. The financial book-keeping system consists of the financial ledger (or general ledger) and this is used to
produce the financial statements for an organisation. The general ledger shows a complete record of an
C organisation’s financial transactions. It shows debits and credits and may have subsidiary ledgers which
O show the detail pertaining to each transaction.
M 3.2.5 Notional costs

In some interlocking costing systems, there may be notional costs. These are costs that are introduced
into a costing system in order to present a more realistic measure of the cost of an item. The most
common types of notional cost are notional rent and notional interest.
 Notional rent may be charged to the cost of an item when the organisation owns its own
premises, but it is considered appropriate to charge a notional commercial rent, as though the
property is rented rather than owned.
 Notional interest may be charged on the capital invested in an item, to reflect the cost of the
capital invested.
The purpose of notional costs is to make comparisons of cost between different items or different
operations more realistic and fairer.
Notional costs must be recorded in the cost accounts. The ‘actual’ notional cost is recorded as a debit
entry in the appropriate overhead account, and the corresponding credit entry is to the cost accounting
statement of profit or loss (income statement).
3.3 Example: interlocking accounts

Write up the cost ledger accounts of a manufacturing company for the latest accounting period. The
following data is relevant.
(a) There is no inventory on hand at the beginning of the period.
(b) Details of the transactions for the period received from the financial accounts department include
the following.
$
Sales 420,000
Indirect wages:
production 25,000
administration 15,000 A
sales and distribution
Materials purchased
20,000
101,000 C
Direct factory wages
153,200
46,500
C
Selling and distribution expenses 39,500 A
Administration expenses 32,000
(c) Other cost data for the period includes the following.
Stores issued to production as indirect materials $15,000 G
Stores issued to production as direct materials $77,000
Cost of finished production $270,200 L
Cost of goods sold at finished goods inventory valuation
Standard rate of production overhead absorption
$267,700
50c per operating hour O
Rate of administration overhead absorption
Rate of sales and distribution overhead absorption
20% of production cost of sales
10% of sales revenue
B
Actual operating hours worked 160,000 A
Solution L
The problem should be tackled methodically. The letters in brackets show the sequence in which the
various entries are made. Any entries without a letter are merely transfers of closing balances.
COST LEDGER CONTROL (CLC) B
$ $ O
Sales (a) 420,000 Wages control (b) 213,200
Balance c/d 51,500 Materials control (c) 101,000 X
Prod'n o'hd control (d)
S & D o'hd control (e)
46,500
39,500
.
Admin o'hd control (f)
Cost statement of profit or loss
32,000
39,300
C
471,500 471,500 O
Balance b/d 51,500 M
MATERIALS CONTROL
$ $
CLC (c) - purchases 101,000 Prod'n o'hd control (k)(indirect
materials) 15,000
WIP control (l)(issues to production) 77,000
Closing inventory c/d (balancing item) 9,000
101,000 101,000
Closing inventory b/d 9,000
WAGES CONTROL
$ $
CLC (b) 213,200 Prod'n o'hd control (g) 25,000
Admin o'hd control (h) 15,000
S & D o'hd control (j) 20,000
WIP control (m)(direct labour) 153,200
213,200 213,200
PRODUCTION OVERHEAD CONTROL

$ $
CLC (d) 46,500 WIP control (p)(160,000  50p)
Wages control (g) 25,000 (overheads absorbed) 80,000
Materials control (k) 15,000  O'hds under-absorbed 6,500
86,500 86,500
ADMINISTRATION OVERHEAD CONTROL

A $ $
CLC (f) 32,000 Cost of sales control (q)
C Wages control (h) 15,000 (20%  $267,700) 53,540
C  O'hds over-absorbed 6,540
53,540 53,540
A SELLING AND DISTRIBUTION OVERHEAD CONTROL
$ $
CLC (e) 39,500 Cost of sales control (r)(o/hds
G Wages control (j) 20,000 absorbed) (10%  $420,000) 42,000
L 59,500
 O'hds under-absorbed 17,500
59,500
O WORK IN PROGRESS CONTROL
B $ $
Materials control (l) 77,000 Finished goods control (n) 270,200
A Wages control (m) 153,200 (transfer of finished production)
L Prod'n o'hd control (p) 80,000
310,200
 Closing inventory of WIP c/d 40,000
310,200
Balance b/d 40,000
B FINISHED GOODS CONTROL

$ $
O WIP control (n) 270,200 Cost of sales control (o) 267,700
X 270,200
 Inventory of finished goods c/d 2,500
270,200
. Balance b/d 2,500
COST OF SALES CONTROL
C $ $
O Finished goods control (o)
Admin o'hd control (q)
267,700
53,540
Cost statement of profit or loss 363,240
M S & D o'hd control (r) 42,000

363,240 363,240
SALES
$ $
Cost statement of profit or loss 420,000 CLC (a) 420,000
UNDER-/OVER-ABSORBED OVERHEAD
$ $
Prod'n o'hd control 6,500 Admin o'hd control 6,540
S & D o'hd control 17,500  Cost statement of profit or loss 17,460
24,000 24,000
COST STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS (INCOME STATEMENT)

$ $
Cost of sales control 363,240 Sales 420,000
Under-/over-absorbed o'hd 17,460
CLC (profit for period) 39,300
420,000 420,000
Note how the trial balance can be extracted from the accounts.
TRIAL BALANCE
Debit Credit
$ $
Cost ledger control 51,500
Materials 9,000
Work in progress 40,000
Finished goods inventories 2,500
51,500 51,500
A
C
4 Advantages and limitations of interlocking and integrated cost
accounting systems
C
A
4.1 Interlocking systems
The main advantage of interlocking systems is that they feature two ledgers, each of which fulfil different G
purposes. Having two sets of ledgers means that it is less likely that any conflict of needs will arise. This
contrasts with integrated accounts, where one ledger is expected to fulfil two different purposes, and L
there may be conflicts between financial and cost accounting purposes, for example over valuation of
inventory.
O
The main limitations of interlocking systems are as follows. B
 Profits of separate cost and financial accounts must be reconciled A


They require more administration time
They are more costly to run
L
4.2 Integrated systems
B
The main advantage of integrated systems is the saving in administration time and costs. This is
because only one set of accounts needs to be maintained instead of two. There is also no need to O
reconcile the profits of the separate cost and financial accounts.
X
The main limitation of integrated accounts is that one set of accounts is expected to fulfil two different
purposes, the cost accounts provide internal management information and the financial accounts are .
used for external reporting. At times external reporting and internal management information may
conflict. For example, for external reporting, inventories will be valued in accordance with accounting
C
standards. Cost accountants may however prefer to value inventories at marginal cost. It is clear O
therefore that in some circumstances it is more advantageous to have two separate systems.
M
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 Cost records are a detailed breakdown of the information contained in the purchases account, the
wages and salaries account and all the expense accounts in the nominal ledger.
 A control account is an account which records total cost, unlike an individual ledger account which
records individual debits and credits.
 There are two main cost bookkeeping systems, interlocking systems and integrated systems.
A 1 What is a control account?

QUICK QUIZ
2 What are the two types of cost bookkeeping system?

C 3 Where are direct expenses and overheads collected?
C 4 List four financial accounting items which are of interest to the cost accountant.
A 5 Where are the items referred to in 4 held?
6 What are the main limitations of interlocking systems?
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
1 An account which records total cost, as opposed to individual costs (which are recorded in individual
ledger accounts).
2 Integrated and interlocking.
3 In the work in progress control account.
4  Cash
 Payables
 Receivables
 Revenue reserves
5 In the cost ledger control account.
6  Profits of separate cost and financial accounts must be reconciled


They require more administration time
They are more costly to run
A
C
Now try ... C
Attempt the questions below from the Exam Question Bank A
Number
Q54 G
Q55 L
Q56 O
Q57 B
Q58 A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
C H A P T E R
A
This chapter explains how cost units are identified and
the cost of cost units is measured in three different types Job, batch and service C
of operation. Some businesses make non-standard items C
for customers, and for each customer there is a unique
order or ‘job’: the costing system measures the cost of
costing A
each job. Some businesses make a number of different
standard products in batches – and make a batch of one
product, then a batch of a different product, and so on.
Service industries are also different: the aim of a costing
G
system for services should be to measure the cost of a L
unit of service. This chapter explains how costs are
recorded and measured in job costing, batch costing and O
B
service costing.
Absorption costing or marginal costing methods can be
applied to all three types of costing. A
L
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
1 Job costing A2 (b), (c), (f),

C3 (a), (b), (c), (d)
2 Batch costing A2 (b), (f), C3 (a), (b),
(c), (d)
3 Service costing A2 (b), C5 (a), (b), (c),
(d), (e)

(b) Describe the process of accounting for input costs and K

relating them to work done
(f) Describe the different methods of costing final outputs and S
their appropriateness to different types of business
organisation
3 Job and batch costing

A (a) Identify situations where the use of job or batch costing is K
C appropriate
(b) Calculate unit costs in job and batch costing S
C (c) Describe the control of costs in job and batch costing K
A (d) Apply cost plus pricing in job costing S
5 Service costing
G (a) Describe the characteristics of service costing K
L (b) Describe the practical problems relating to the costing of K
O (c)
services
Identify situations (cost centres and industries) where the S
B use of service costing is appropriate
A (d) Illustrate suitable cost units that may be used for a variety of
services
S
L (e) Calculate service unit costs in a variety of situations S
B
O
X 1 Job costing
.
Job costing is the costing method used where each job is separately identifiable as a cost unit.
C
O 1.1 Introduction
M In this chapter we will be looking at three important costing systems.
 Job costing
 Batch costing
 Service costing
We will be looking at another important system, that of process costing, later on.
A costing system is a system of collecting costs which is designed to suit the way that goods are
processed or manufactured or the way that services are provided.
CHAPTER 13 // JOB, BATCH AND SERVICE COSTING
Each organisation's costing system will have unique features but costing systems of organisation's in the
same line of business will have common aspects. On the other hand, organisations involved in
completely different activities, such as hospitals and car part manufacturers, will each use very different
costing systems.
1.2 Aim of job costing

The aim of job costing is simply to collect the cost information shown below.
$
Direct materials X
Direct labour X
Direct expenses X
Direct cost X
Production overhead X
Total production cost X
Administration overhead X A
Selling overhead
Cost of sales
X
X C
A profit 'mark-up' is added to the final figure and the total is the selling price of the job. C
In other words, all we are doing is looking at one way of putting together the pieces of information that A
we have studied separately so far.
1.3 What is a job? G

A job is a cost unit which consists of a single order or contract.
L
With other methods of costing it is usual to produce for inventory. Management therefore decide in
O
advance how many units of each type, size, colour, quality and so on will be produced during the B
coming period. These decisions will all be taken without taking into account the identity of the individual
customers who will eventually buy the products. A
In job costing on the other hand, production is usually carried out in accordance with the special L
requirements of each customer. It is therefore usual for each job to differ in one or more respects from
every other job, which means that a separate record must be maintained to show the details of a
particular job.
B
The work relating to a job is usually carried out within a factory or workshop and moves through
processes and operations as a continuously identifiable unit. O
X
1.4 Procedure for the performance of jobs
The normal procedure in jobbing concerns involves the following.
.
(a) The prospective customer approaches the supplier and indicates the requirements of the job. C
(b) A responsible official sees the prospective customer and agrees the precise details of the items to
be supplied, for example the quantity, quality and colour of the goods, the date of delivery and
O
any special requirements. M
(c) The estimating department of the organisation then prepares an estimate for the job. The total of
these items will represent the quoted selling price.
(d) At the appropriate time, the job will be 'loaded' on to the factory floor. This means that as soon
as all materials, labour and equipment are available and subject to the scheduling of other
orders, the job will be started.
1.5 Collection of job costs

Each job will be given a number to identify it. A separate record must be maintained to show the details
of individual jobs. The process of collecting job costs may be outlined as follows.
(a) Materials requisitions are sent to stores.
(b) The materials requisition note will be used to cost the materials issued to the job concerned, and
this cost may then be recorded on a job cost sheet.
(c) The job ticket is passed to the worker who is to perform the first operation.
(d) When the job is completed by the worker who performs the final operation, the job ticket is sent
to the cost office, where the time spent will be costed and recorded on the job cost sheet.
(e) The relevant costs of materials issued, direct labour performed and direct expenses incurred as
recorded on the job cost sheet are charged to the job account in the work in progress ledger.
(f) The job account is debited with the job's share of the factory overhead, based on the absorption
rate(s) in operation.
A (g) On completion of the job, the job account is charged with the appropriate administration, selling
C (h)
and distribution overhead, after which the total cost of the job can be ascertained.
The difference between the agreed selling price and the total actual cost will be the supplier's
C profit (or loss).
A 1.6 Job account

Here is a proforma job account, which will be one of the accounts in the work in progress control
G account.
JOB ACCOUNT
L
$ $
O Materials issued X Finished jobs X
B Direct labour
Direct expenses
X
X
A Production overhead at
predetermined rate X
L Other overheads X
X X
B 1.7 Job card

O When jobs are completed, job cards are transferred from the work in progress category to finished goods.
When delivery is made to the customer, the costs become a cost of sale.
X
.
C
O
M
1.7.1 Example: Job card
JOB CARD
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
1.8 Job costing and computerisation

Job cards exist in manual systems, but it is increasingly likely that in large organisations the job costing
system will be computerised, using accounting software specifically designed to deal with job costing
requirements.
Job costing systems may also be used to control the costs of internal service departments, eg the
maintenance department.
1.9 Example: Job costing

Pansy Co is a company that carries out jobbing work. One of the jobs carried out in May was job 2409,
to which the following information relates.
Direct material Y: 400 kilos were issued from stores at a cost of $5 per kilo.
Direct material Z: 800 kilos were issued from stores at a cost of $6 per kilo. 60 kilos were
returned to stores.
Department P: 300 labour hours were worked, of which 100 hours were overtime.
Department Q: 200 labour hours were worked, of which 100 hours were overtime.
A Overtime work is not normal in Department P, where basic pay is $6 per hour plus an overtime
premium of $1 per hour. Overtime work was done in Department Q in May because of a request by the
C customer of another job to complete his job quickly. Basic pay in Department Q is $8 per hour and
overtime premium is $1.50 per hour. Overhead is absorbed at the rate of $3 per direct labour hour in
C both departments.
A Required
(a) Calculate the direct materials cost of job 2409
(b) Calculate the direct labour cost of job 2409
G (c) Calculate the full production cost of job 2409 using absorption costing
L Solution
O (a) $
B Direct material Y (400 kilos  $5)
Direct material Z (800 – 60 kilos  $6)
2,000
4,440
A Total direct material cost 6,440
L (b) $
Department P (300 hours  $6) 1,800
Department Q (200 hours  $8) 1,600
B Total direct labour cost 3,400
Overtime premium will be charged to overhead in the case of Department P, and to the job of the
O customer who asked for overtime to be worked in the case of Department Q.
X (c) $
. Direct material cost

Direct labour cost
6,440
3,400
C Production overhead (500 hours  $3) 1,500
11,340
O
1.10 Cost plus pricing
M
Many organisations base the price of a product on simple cost plus rules which involves estimating costs
and then adding a profit margin in order to set the price.
Cost plus pricing is a method of determining the sales price by calculating the full cost of a product and
adding a percentage mark-up for profit.
The full cost may be a fully absorbed production cost only, or it may include some absorbed
administration, selling and distribution overhead (non-production overheads).
1.11 Example: Cost plus pricing

A company budgets to have a variable cost of production of $4 per unit. Fixed production costs are
$6,000 per month. A customer requests a job of 5,000 units. This will take exactly one month to
produce. The selling price is to be 40% higher than full cost.
Required
Calculate the selling price of the job using the cost plus pricing method.
Solution
Full cost per unit = variable cost + fixed cost
Total variable cost = $4 × 5,000 = $20,000
Fixed cost = $6,000 per month
Full cost = $26,000 A
Selling price =
140
 $26,000 C
100
= $36,400 C
A
EXAM FOCUS POINT
G
An exam question about job costing may ask you to determine a job price by adding a certain amount
of profit. To do this, you need to remember the following crucial formula. L
% O
Cost of job
+ profit
100
25 B
= price 125
A
Profit may be expressed either as a percentage of job cost (such as 25% 25/100 mark up) or as a
percentage of price (such as 20% (25/125) margin). L
QUESTION Job costing

B
A curtain-making business manufactures quality curtains to customers' orders. It has three production
O
departments (X, Y and Z) which have overhead absorption rates (per direct labour hour) of $12.86, X
$12.40 and $14.03 respectively.
Two pairs of curtains are to be manufactured for customers. Direct costs are as follows
.
Job TN8 Job KT2 C
Direct material $154 $108
Direct labour 20 hours dept X 16 hours dept X O
12 hours dept Y
10 hours dept Z
10 hours dept Y
14 hours dept Z M
Labour rates per hour are as follows: $3.80 (X); $3.50 (Y); $3.40 (Z)
The firm quotes prices to customers that reflect a required profit of 25% on selling price.
Required
Calculate the total cost and selling price of each job.
ANSWER
Helping hand. Note that the profit margin is given as a percentage on selling price. If profit is 25% on
selling price, this is the same as 331/3% (25/75) on cost.
Job TN8 Job KT2

$ $
Direct material 154.00 108.00
Direct labour: dept X (20  3.80) 76.00 (16  3.80) 60.80
dept Y (12  3.50) 42.00 (10  3.50) 35.00
dept Z (10  3.40) 34.00 (14  3.40) 47.60
Total direct cost 306.00 251.40
Overhead: dept X (20  12.86) 257.20 (16  12.86) 205.76
dept Y (12  12.40) 148.80 (10  12.40) 124.00
dept Z (10  14.03) 140.30 (14  14.03) 196.42
Total cost 852.30 777.58
Profit 284.10 259.19
Quoted selling price 1,136.40 1,036.77
A 2 Batch costing
C
C Batch costing is a form of specific order costing in which costs are attributed to batches of products. It
is similar to job costing in that each batch of similar articles is separately identifiable. The cost per unit
A manufactured in a batch is the total batch cost divided by the number of units in the batch.
G 2.1 Introduction
L Batch costing is used where common equipment is used to produce batches of different products for
inventory. For example, in food production and paint manufacturing.
O A batch is a cost unit which consists of a separate, readily identifiable group of product units which
B maintains its separate identity throughout the production process.
A
The procedures for costing batches are very similar to those for costing jobs.
L
The batch is treated as a separate cost unit during production and the costs are
collected as described earlier.
B
O Once the batch has been completed, the cost per unit can be calculated as the total
X batch cost divided by the number of units in the batch.
. 2.2 Example: Batch costing

C A company manufactures model cars and has the following budgeted overheads for a period.
O Department Budgeted overheads

$
Budgeted activity
M Welding
Assembly
6,000
10,000
1,500 labour hours
1,000 labour hours
Selling and administrative overheads are 20% of production cost. Production of 250 model cars type
XJS1, made as Batch 8638, incurred the following costs.
Materials $12,000
Labour 100 hours welding shop at $8/hour
200 hours assembly shop at $9/hour
The cost of hiring special X-ray equipment for testing the welds is $500.
Required
Calculate the cost per unit for Batch 8638.
Solution
The first step is to calculate the overhead absorption rate for the production departments.
$6,000
Welding = = $4 per labour hour
1,500
$10,000
Assembly = = $10 per labour hour
1,000
Total cost – Batch no 8638

$ $
Direct material 12,000
Direct labour 100  $8 = 800
200  $9 = 1,800
2,600
Direct expense 500
Prime cost 15,100 A
Overheads 100  4 = 400
2,000
C
200  10 =
2,400 C
Production cost 17,500
Selling and administrative cost (20% of production cost) 3,500 A
Total cost 21,000
$21,000
Cost per unit =
250
= $84 G
L
QUESTION Batch costing
O
Lyfsa Kitchen Units Co crafts two different sizes of standard unit and a DIY all-purpose unit for filling up
awkward spaces. The units are built in batches of around 250 (although the number varies according to B
the quality of wood purchased), and each batch is sold to NGJ Furniture Warehouses Co.
A
The costs incurred in May were as follows.
Big unit Little unit All-purpose L
Direct materials purchased $5,240 $6,710 $3,820
Direct labour
Skilled (hours) 1,580 1,700 160 B
Semi-skilled (hours) 3,160 1,900 300
O
Direct expenses $1,180 $1,700 $250
Selling price of batch $48,980 $43,125 $25,660 X
Completed at 31 May 100% 80% 25% .
The following information is available. C
All direct materials for the completion of the batches have been recorded. Skilled labour is paid $9 per O
hour, semi-skilled $7 per hour. Administration expenses total $4,400 per month and are to be allocated
to the batches on the basis of direct labour hours. Direct labour costs, direct expenses and M
administration expenses will increase in proportion to the total labour hours required to complete the
little units and the all-purpose units. On completion of the work the practice of the manufacturer is to
divide the calculated profit on each batch 20% to staff as a bonus, 80% to the company. Losses are
absorbed 100% by the company.
Required
(a) Calculate the profit or loss made by the company on big units.
(b) Project the profit or loss likely to be made by the company on little units and all-purpose units.
ANSWER
(a) Big units
$ $
Direct materials 5,240
Direct labour
Skilled 1,580 hours at $9 14,220
Semi-skilled 3,160 hours at $7 22,120
36,340
Direct expenses 1,180
Administrative expenses
4,740 hours at $0.50 (see below)* 2,370
45,130
Selling price 48,980
Calculated profit 3,850
A Divided: Staff bonus 20% 770

Profit for company 80% 3,080
C $4,400
C *Administrative expenses absorption rate =
8,800
per labour hour
A = $0.50 per labour hour

(b)
Little units All-purpose
G $ $ $ $
Direct materials 6,710 3,820
L Direct labour
O Skilled
Semi-skilled
1,700 hrs at $9
1,900 hrs at $7
15,300
13,300
160 hrs at $9
300 hrs at $7
1,440
2,100
B Direct expenses
Administration
1,700 250
A expenses: 3,600 hrs at

$0.50
1,800 460 hrs at
$0.50
230
L 32,100 4,020
Costs to
completion 20/80  32,100 8,025 75/25  4,020 12,060
B Total costs
40,125
46,835
16,080
19,900
O Selling price
Calculated
43,125 25,660
X profit/(loss) (3,710) 5,760

Divided: Staff bonus 20% – 1,152
. (Loss)/profit for company (3,710) 4,608
C Note that whilst direct labour costs, direct expenses and administration expenses increase in proportion
to the total labour hours required to complete the little units and the all-purpose units, there will be no
O further material costs to complete the batches.
M
2.3 Controlling costs in job and batch costing

One of the tasks of management is to control costs, and prevent unnecessary expenditures or
inefficiencies. Some of the methods of controlling costs are the same in any type of organisation:
economical purchasing, supervision and training of employees to maintain efficiency levels, controls over
spending limits (departmental budgets) and so on.
However there are some aspects of cost control that differ between job costing and batch costing
systems.
(a) Job costing. Although many jobs may be similar, a feature of job costing systems is that each job
is different, because each customer has different specific requirements. As a consequence:
 The materials obtained for a job may be non-standard, and there may be a tendency to
over-purchase.
 Similarly it may be difficult to estimate the time for a job with accuracy, and the total
labour cost of a job will increase with the length of time required for completion.
 There may be special overhead costs for jobbing systems, with specialist staff employed to
liaise with customers and to monitor the progress of individual jobs.
Control over costs involves asking why particular expenses are necessary, why the job is taking so
long to complete, or whether material costs are excessive, compared with the original job
estimate.
(b) Batch costing. Batch costing involves the production of a quantity of the same units. The units
produced should be standard items, and unit costs should be easier to estimate than job costs.
A
However, an important cost in batch costing is the cost of preparing for the next batch of a
product, and the cost of cleaning up after one batch has been completed. Costs of cleaning up C
and setting up for the next batch are called ‘set-up costs’. When the time between batches is
long, set-up costs may be high.
C
Set-up costs may be controlled by trying to ensure that the work is done as quickly as possible, A
but also by manufacturing batches in a suitable size. With larger batches, there will be fewer
batches produced and therefore fewer ‘set-ups’ between jobs.
G
3 Service costing L
O
Service costing can be used by companies operating in a service industry or by companies wishing to B
establish the cost of services carried out by different departments.
A
3.1 What are service organisations? L
Service organisations do not make or sell tangible goods. Profit-seeking service organisations include
accountancy firms, law firms, transport companies, banks and hotels. Almost all not-for-profit
organisations – hospitals, schools, libraries and so on – are also service organisations. B
Service costing differs from the other costing methods in the following ways. O
(a) In general, with service costing, the cost of direct materials consumed will be relatively small X
compared to the labour, direct expenses and overheads cost.
.
(b) Indirect costs tend to represent a higher proportion of total cost compared with product costing.
(c) The output of most service organisations is often intangible and it is therefore difficult to establish
C
a measurable cost unit. O
3.2 Cost units M
A particular problem with service costing is the difficulty in defining a realistic cost unit that represents a
suitable measure of the service provided. Frequently, a composite cost unit may be deemed more
appropriate if the service is a function of two activity variables.
Typical composite cost units used by companies operating in a service industry are shown below.
Service Cost unit
Road, rail and air transport services Passenger-kilometre (cost per passenger per
kilometre)
Tonne-kilometre (cost per tonne per kilometre)
Hotels Occupied room-night (cost per occupied room per

night)
Hospitals Patient-day (cost per patient per day)
Each organisation will need to ascertain the cost unit most appropriate to its activities. If a number of
organisations within an industry use a common cost unit, valuable comparisons can be made between
similar establishments. This is particularly applicable to hospitals, educational establishments and local
authorities.
A 3.3 Example: Composite cost units

C The following information is available for the Whiteley Hotel for the latest thirty day period.
C Number of rooms available per night 40
A Percentage occupancy achieved

Room servicing cost incurred
65%
$3,900
Required
G (a) Calculate the number of occupied room-nights.
L
(b) Calculate the room servicing cost per occupied room-night (to the nearest cent).
O Solution
B (a) Firstly, we need to calculate the number of occupied room-nights. We can do this as follows.
Number of occupied room-nights = 40 rooms  30 nights  65%
A = 780
L (b) In order to calculate the room servicing cost per occupied room-night we can use the following
equation.
Total room servicing cos ts
Room servicing cost per occupied room-night =
B Number of occupied room-nights
O =
$3,900
780
X = $5
. FORMULA TO LEARN
C Total costs for period
Cost per service unit =
O Number of service units in the period
M
QUESTION Cost per tonne – kilometre
Carry Co operates a small fleet of delivery vehicles. Expected costs are as follows.
Loading 1 hour per tonne loaded
Loading costs:
Labour (casual) $2 per hour
Equipment depreciation $80 per week
Supervision $80 per week
Drivers' wages (fixed) $100 per man per week
Petrol 10c per kilometre
Repairs 5c per kilometre
Depreciation $80 per week per vehicle

Supervision $120 per week
Other general expenses (fixed) $200 per week
There are two drivers and two vehicles in the fleet.
During a slack week, only six journeys were made.
Journey Tonnes carried (one way) One-way distance of journey
Kilometres
1 5 100
2 8 20
3 2 60
4 4 50
5 6 200
6 5 300
Required
Calculate the average full cost per tonne – kilometre for a week.
A
C
ANSWER C
The average full cost per tonne-kilometre for a week is $0.304
Workings
A
Variable costs
Journey 1 2 3 4 5 6 G
$ $ $ $ $ $
Loading labour 10 16 4 8 12 10 L
Petrol (both ways)
Repairs (both ways)
20
10 2
4 12
6
10
5
40
20
60
30 O
40 22 22 23 72 100
B
Total costs
$ A
Variable costs (total for journeys 1 to 6)
Loading equipment depreciation
279
80
L
Loading supervision 80
Drivers' wages 200
Vehicles depreciation 160 B
Drivers' supervision 120
Other costs 200 O
1,119
X
Journey
Tonnes
One-way distance
Kilometres Tonne-kilometres .
1
2
5
8
100
20
500
160
C
3 2 60 120 O
4 4 50 200
5 6 200 1,200 M
6 5 300 1,500
3,680
$1,119
Cost per tonne-kilometre = $0.304
3,680
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 Job costing is the costing method used where each job is separately identifiable as a cost unit.
 Batch costing is a form of specific order costing in which costs are attributed to batches of products. It
is similar to job costing in that each batch of similar articles is separately identifiable. The cost per unit
manufactured in a batch is the total batch cost divided by the number of units in the batch.
 Service costing can be used by companies operating in a service industry or by companies wishing to
establish the cost of services carried out by different departments.
A
QUICK QUIZ
C 1 Which of the following are not characteristics of job costing?

I Customer driven production
C II Complete production possible within a single accounting period
A III Homogeneous products
A I and II only
B I and III only
G C
D
II and III only
III only
L 2 The cost of a job is $100,000
O (a)
(b)
If profit is 25% of the job cost, the price of the job = $………………
If there is a 25% margin, the price of the job = $…………………
B 3 How would you calculate the cost per unit of a completed batch?
A 4 Match up the following services with their typical cost units
L Service Cost unit
Hotels Patient-day
B Education ? Meal served
O Hospitals Full-time student

Catering organisations Occupied bed-night
X
. 5 A job cost estimate includes 630 productive labour hours. In addition, it is anticipated that idle time will
C be 10% of the total hours paid for the job. The wage rate is $12 per hour.
What is the total estimated labour cost for the job?
O A $6,804
M B $7,560
C $8,316
D $8,400
6 A firm uses job costing. Details of the three jobs worked on during a period are:
Job BA Job DC Job FE

$ $ $
Opening work-in-progress 22,760 3,190 –
Direct materials in the period 4,620 11,660 14,335
Direct labour in the period 12,125 10,520 7,695
Overheads are absorbed at 40% of prime cost in each period. Jobs DC and FE remained incomplete at
the end of the period.
What is the value of the closing work-in-progress?
A $61,894
B $65,084
C $66,360
D $68,952
7 A company has a delivery vehicle, which made three journeys in one week. Costs were $13,200.
Journey 1: One-way distance = 200 kilometres, weight of load carried 5 tonnes
What was the cost per tonne-kilometre?
A $1
B $2 A
C
D
$8.80
$88
C
8 A hospital has a ward with 15 beds. During April (30 days) average bed occupancy was 80%. The costs C
of operating the ward in the month were $810,000. What was the cost per patient day for the ward
during April?
A
A $150
B $1,800 G
C $2,250
D $70,000 L
9 Which of the following would be appropriate cost units for a passenger coach company? O
(i)
(ii)
Vehicle cost per passenger kilometre
Fuel cost for each vehicle per kilometre
B
(iii) Fixed cost per kilometre A
A (i) only L
B (i) and (ii) only
C (i) and (iii) only
D (ii) and (iii) only
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
1 D
2 (a) $100,000 + (25%  $100,000) = $100,000 + $25,000 = $125,000

(b) Profit is 25 per cent of the selling price, therefore selling price should be written as 100%:
%
Selling price 100
Profit 25
Cost 75
 Price = $100,000  100/75 = $133,333.
Totalbatch cos t
3
Number of units in the batch
4 Service Cost unit
Hotels Patient-day
A Education Meal served
C Hospitals Full-time student
C Catering organisations Occupied bed-night
A 5 D (630 ÷ 0·9 hours) x $12/hour) = $8,400.

6 B Job BA is completed so can be ignored
Total costs = (11,660 + 10,520 + 14,335 + 7,695)  1.4
G = $61,894
L Closing work in progress value = 61,894 + 3,190

= $65,084
O 7 B
B Tonne kilometres = (5  200) + (8  500) + (2  800) = 6,600.
Cost per tonne-kilometre = $13,200/6,600 = $2
A One-way distance only should be used, because no weight is carried on the return journey.
L 8 C
Average number of patients per day = 80%  15 = 12
Patient days in April = 12  30 = 360
B Cost per patient day = $810,000/360 = $2,250.
O 9 B Measure (i) is appropriate for control purposes because it combines the distance travelled with
the number of passengers carried, both of which affect costs.
X Measure (ii) can be useful for control purposes because it focuses on a particular aspect of the
. cost of operating each vehicle.
C Now try ...

M Number
Q59
Q60
Q61
Q62
C H A P T E R
A
The previous chapter described how unit costs are
measured in systems of job costing, batch costing and Process costing C
service costing. This chapter looks at how unit costs are
measured in a manufacturing system where output is
C
produced in a continuous process, such as chemicals A
production and oil refining. There are several special
features of process manufacturing and process costing.
The production process may involve some loss of
materials during the process, due to evaporation or
G
unavoidable waste or loss. Another feature of process L
industries is that a process may produce not just one
product, but several different joint-products or by- O
B
products.
This chapter explains the techniques used to record costs
in a system of process costing, and in particular the A
accounting treatment of loss in process, measuring the
costs of joint products and the accounting treatment of L
by-products.
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
1 Process costing features C4 (a)

2 Losses and gains C4 (b), (c), (d)
3 Accounting for scrap C4 (e)
4 Joint products and by-products C4 (f), (g), (h), (i)
5 Accounting for by-products C4 (g), (h)
6 The further processing decision C4 (j)
PART C COSTING TECHNIQUES

4 Process costing
(a) Identify situations where the use of process costing is K

appropriate
(b) Explain and illustrate the nature of normal and abnormal S
losses/gains
(c) Calculate unit costs where losses are separated into normal S
and abnormal
(d) Prepare process accounts where losses are separated into S
normal and abnormal
(e) Account for scrap and waste S
A (f) Distinguish between joint products and by products K
C (g) Explain the accounting treatment of joint products and by-

products at the point of separation
K
C (h) Apportion joint process costs using net realisable values and S
A weight/volume of output respectively

(i) Discuss the usefulness of product cost/profit data from a K
joint process
(j) Evaluate the benefit of further processing S
G
L
O
B
1 Process costing features
A
L Process costing is a costing method used where there are continuous processes. Process costs are
attributed to the units produced in a period.
B 1.1 Introduction
O We have now looked at three cost accounting methods: job costing, batch costing, and service costing.
X In this chapter we will consider another costing method, process costing. Process costing is applied
when output consists of a continuous stream of identical units.
. We will begin from basics and look at how to account for the most simple of processes. We will then
C move on to how to account for any losses which might occur, as well as what to do with any scrapped
units which are sold.
O
M
EXAM FOCUS POINT
Process costing is frequently examined and it is very important you understand this topic.
CHAPTER 14 // PROCESS COSTING
1.2 Features of process costing

Process costing is a costing method used to determine the cost of units manufactured from a continuous
process. It is common to identify process costing with continuous production such as the following.
 Oil refining
 Brewing
 Sugar refining
 Chemical processing
Features of process costing include the following.
(a) The continuous nature of production in process costing means that it is not possible to calculate
the cost per unit of output or the cost per unit of closing inventory.
(b) There is often a loss in process due to spoilage, wastage, evaporation and so on.
(c) The output of one process becomes the input to the next until the finished product is made in the
final process.
A
(d) Output from production may be a single product, but there may also be one or more by-products C
and/or joint products.
C
A
2 Losses and gains
During a production process, a loss may occur due to wastage, spoilage, evaporation, and so on. G
 Normal loss is the loss expected during a process. It is not given a cost. L
 Abnormal loss is the extra loss resulting when actual loss is greater than normal or expected O
loss, and it is given a cost.
B
 Abnormal gain is the gain resulting when actual loss is less than the normal or expected loss,
and it is given a 'negative cost'. A
L
Since normal loss is not given a cost, the cost of producing these units is borne by the 'good' units of
output.
Abnormal loss and gain units are valued at the same unit rate as 'good' units. Abnormal events do not
B
therefore affect the cost of good production. Their costs are analysed separately in an abnormal loss or O
abnormal gain account.
X
2.1 Framework for dealing with process costing .
Process costing is centred around four key steps. The exact work done at each step will depend on the
circumstances of the question, but the approach can always be used. Don't worry about the terms used.
C
We will be looking at their meaning as we work through the chapter. O
Step 1 Determine output and losses
M
 Determine expected output
 Calculate normal loss and abnormal loss and gain
Step 2 Calculate cost per unit of output and losses

Divide the process costs by the expected output.
Step 3 Calculate total cost of output and losses

Multiply the cost per unit by the units of output and abnormal loss/gain.
Step 4 Complete accounts

 Complete the process account
 Write up the other accounts required by the question
2.2 Example: Normal loss

Suppose 2,000 units are input to a process. Normal loss is 5% of input and there are no opening or
closing inventories.
Required
Calculate the normal loss.
Solution
A Normal loss = 5%  2,000 units
C = 100 units
C 2.3 Example: Abnormal loss

A Suppose 2,000 units are input to a process. Normal loss is 5% of input and there are no opening and
closing inventories. Actual output was 1,800 units.
G Required
Calculate the abnormal loss.
L
O Solution
B Normal loss = 5%  2,000 units
= 100 units
A Actual loss = 2,000 – 1,800
L = 200 units
 Abnormal loss = Actual loss – normal loss
= 200 units – 100 units
B = 100 units
O 2.4 Example: Abnormal gain

X Suppose 2,000 units are input to a process. Normal loss is 5% of input and there are no opening or
. closing inventories. Actual output was 1,950 units.
C Required
Calculate the abnormal gain.
O
M Solution
Normal loss = 5%  2,000 units
= 100 units
Actual loss = 2,000 units – 1,950 units
= 50 units
Abnormal gain = Actual loss – normal loss
= 50 units – 100 units
= 50 units
2.5 Example: Cost per unit (Step 2)

Jingles Co operates a single manufacturing process, and during March the following processing took place.
Opening inventory nil Closing inventory nil

Units introduced 1,000 units Output 900 units
Costs incurred $4,500 Loss 100 units
Required
Determine the cost per unit in the following circumstances.
(a) Expected or normal loss is 10% of input.
(b) There is no expected loss, so that the entire loss of 100 units was unexpected.
Solution
A
Costs $4,500
(a)
Expected output(90% of 1,000)
=
900 units C
$4,500 C
Cost per unit of output = = $5
900 A
Costs incurred $4,500
(b) =
Expected output 1,000 units
G
Costs per unit = $4.50
L
2.6 Example: Total cost and process accounts (Steps 3 and 4) O
Use the information from the example above.
B
Required A
Determine the cost of output and produce the process accounts in the following circumstances. L
(a) Expected or normal loss is 10% of input.
(b) There is no expected loss, so that the entire loss of 100 units was unexpected.
Solution B
(a) Cost of output = $4,500 O
Normal loss is not given any cost, so that the process account would appear as follows. X
PROCESS ACCOUNT .
Units $ Units $
Costs incurred 1,000 4,500 Normal loss 100 0 C
Output units 900 4,500
1,000 4,500 1,000 4,500 O
It helps to enter normal loss into the process 'T' account, just to make sure that your M
memorandum columns for units are the same on the debit and the credit sides of the account.
(b) Cost of output = $4,500
The process account and abnormal loss account would look like this.
PROCESS ACCOUNT
Units $ Units $
Costs incurred 1,000 4,500 Abnormal loss 100 450
Output units 900 4,050
1,000 4,500 1,000 4,500
ABNORMAL LOSS ACCOUNT

Units $ Units $
Process account 100 450 Statement of profit or 100 450
loss
2.7 Example: Losses and gains a comprehensive example

Suppose 1,000 units at a cost of $4,500 are input to a process. Normal loss is 10% and there are no
opening or closing inventories.
Required
(a) Complete the process account and the abnormal loss/gain account if actual output was 860 units
(so that actual loss is 140 units).
A (b) Complete the process account and the abnormal loss/gain account if actual output was 920 units
C
C Solution
Before we demonstrate the use of the 'four-step framework' we will summarise the way that the losses
A are dealt with.
 Normal loss is given no share of cost
G  Abnormal loss is given a cost, which is written off to the statement of profit or loss (debit entry)
via an abnormal loss/gain account.
L  Abnormal gain is treated in the same way, except that being a gain rather than a loss, it appears
as a debit entry in the process account and a credit entry in the statement of profit or loss.
O  The cost of output is therefore based on the expected units of output, which in our example
B amount to 90% of 1,000 = 900 units
A (a) Output is 860 units
L Step 1 Determine output and losses

If actual output is 860 units and the actual loss is 140 units:
Units
B Actual loss 140
O Normal loss (10% of 1,000)

Abnormal loss
100
40
X Normal loss is 10% of input, this means expected output is 90% of input (0.9 × 1,000)
. = 900 on this case.
C Step 2 Calculate cost per unit of output and losses.

O The cost per unit of output and the cost per unit of abnormal loss are based on expected
output.
M
= = $5 per unit
Expected output 900 units

Normal loss is not assigned any cost.
$
Cost of output (860  $5) 4,300
Normal loss 0
Abnormal loss (40  $5) 200
4,500

PROCESS ACCOUNT
Units $ Units $
Cost incurred 1,000 4,500 Normal loss 100 0
Output (finished
goods a/c) 860 ( $5) 4,300
Abnormal loss 40 ( $5) 200
1,000 4,500 1,000 4,500
ABNORMAL LOSS/GAIN ACCOUNT

Units $ Units $
Process a/c 40 200 Statement of 40 200
profit or loss
(b) Output is 920 units

A
C
C
A
If actual output is 920 units and the actual loss is 80 units:
Units
Actual loss 80
Normal loss (10% of 1,000) 100
Abnormal gain 20
G
As before expected output is 900 units.
L
Step 2 Calculate cost per unit of output and losses O
The cost per unit of output and the cost per unit of abnormal gain are based on expected B
output.
A
Expected output
=
900 units
= $5 per unit L
(Whether there is abnormal loss or gain does not affect the valuation of units of output.
The figure of $5 per unit is exactly the same as in the part (a), when there were 40 units
of abnormal loss.)
B
O
$ X
Cost of output (920  $5)
Normal loss
4,600
0
.
Abnormal gain (20  $5) (100) C
4,500
O
Step 4 Complete accounts M
PROCESS ACCOUNT
Units $ Units $
Cost incurred 1,000 4,500 Normal loss 100 0
Abnormal gain a/c 20 ( $5) 100 Output 920 ( $5) 4,600
(finished goods a/c)
1,020 4,600 1,020 4,600
ABNORMAL LOSS/GAIN
Units $ Units $
Statement of profit or 20 100 Process a/c 20 100
loss
If there is a closing balance in the abnormal loss or gain account when the profit for the period is
calculated, this balance is taken to the statement of profit or loss: an abnormal gain will be a credit and
an abnormal loss will be a debit to the statement of profit or loss.
3 Accounting for scrap
Loss may have a scrap value. Revenue from scrap is treated as a reduction in costs. It is conventional
for the scrap value of normal loss to be deducted from the cost of materials before a cost per
equivalent unit is calculated.
3.1 Basic rules

Loss may have a scrap value. The following basic rules are applied in accounting for this value in the
A process accounts.
C (a) Revenue from scrap is treated, not as an addition to sales revenue, but as a reduction in costs.
C (b) The scrap value of normal loss is therefore used to reduce the material costs of the process.
A DEBIT
CREDIT
Scrap account
Process account
with the scrap value of the normal loss.
G (c) The scrap value of abnormal loss is used to reduce the cost of abnormal loss.
L DEBIT Scrap account

CREDIT Abnormal loss account
O with the scrap value of abnormal loss, which therefore reduces the write-off of cost to the
B statement of profit or loss at the end of the period.
A (d) The scrap value of abnormal gain arises because the actual units sold as scrap will be less than
the scrap value of normal loss. Because there are fewer units of scrap than expected, there will
L be less revenue from scrap as a direct consequence of the abnormal gain. The abnormal gain
account should therefore be debited with the scrap value.
DEBIT Abnormal gain account
B CREDIT Scrap account
O with the scrap value of abnormal gain.
X (e) The scrap account is completed by recording the actual cash received from the sale of scrap.
. DEBIT
CREDIT
Cash received
Scrap account
C with the cash received from the sale of the actual scrap.
O The same basic principle therefore applies that only normal losses should affect the cost of the good
output. The scrap value of normal loss only is credited to the process account. The scrap values of
M abnormal losses and gains are analysed separately in the abnormal loss or gain account.
3.2 Example: scrap value of loss

Let’s return to the example in paragraph 2.7, but assume this time that all scrap has a value of $0.90
per unit.
1,000 units at a cost of $4,500 are input to a process. Normal loss is 10% and there are no opening or
closing inventories. Scrap has a value of $0.90 per unit
Required
(a) Complete the process account and the abnormal loss/gain account if actual output was 860 units
(b) Complete the process account and the abnormal loss/gain account if actual output was 920 units
Solution
(a) Output is 860 units, normal loss is 100 units and abnormal loss is 40 units.
The cost per unit of output and the cost per unit of abnormal loss are based on:
 costs incurred minus the scrap value of normal loss (normal loss only!)
 expected output.
Costs incurred less scrap value of normal loss $4,500 - (100 x $0.90)
= = $4.90 per unit
Expected output 900 units
PROCESS ACCOUNT
Units $ Units $
Cost incurred 1,000 4,500 Normal loss 100 90 A
Output (finished goods
a/c) at $4.90 per unit 860 4,214 C
40 196
Abnormal loss at $4.90
per unit
C
1,000 4,500 1,000 4,500
A
ABNORMAL LOSS/GAIN ACCOUNT
Units $ Units $
Process a/c 40 196 Scrap a/c
Statement of profit or loss
40 36
160
G
196 L
(b) Output is 920 units, normal loss is 100 units and abnormal gain is 20 units O
The cost per unit is the same as above, $4.90 per unit.
B
PROCESS ACCOUNT
Units $ Units $ A
4,500 Normal loss
Cost incurred
Abnormal gain a/c
1,000
20 98 Output (finished goods
100
920
90
4,508
L
at $4.90 per unit a/c) at $4.90
1,020 4,598 1,020 4,598 B

Units
ABNORMAL LOSS/GAIN
$ Units $
O
Scrap a/c
Statement of profit or
20 18 Process a/c 20 98 X
loss 80 .
98
C
4 Joint products and by-products
O
M
Joint products are two or more products separated in a process, each of which has a significant value. A
by-product is an incidental product from a process which has an insignificant value compared to the
main product.
EXAM FOCUS POINT
There was an article on accounting for joint products in Student Accountant (November 2012). Make
sure you read this article.
4.1 Introduction
We have studied process costing up to the point where we have calculated, say, output of process 3 as
50,000 units costing $400,000. This is all very well so long as the process produces 50,000 identical
items, but what do we do if the next stage is to send some of the output through one kind of process
and the rest through another, resulting in two different sorts of product? The end results may be of two
basic types.
A  Joint products are two or more products which are output from the same processing operation,
but which are indistinguishable from each other (because they are the same commonly processed
C materials) up to their point of separation. Joint products have a substantial sales value (or a
substantial sales value after further, separate processing has been carried out to make them
C ready for sale).
A  A by-product is a product which is similarly produced at the same time and from the same
common process as the main product or joint products. The distinguishing feature of a by-product
is its relatively low sales value.
G
L The problem, if joint products or by-products are involved, is to split the common costs of processing
between the various end products.
O
B 4.2 Problems in accounting for joint products
A Joint products are not separately identifiable until a certain stage is reached in the processing
operations. This stage is the 'split-off point', sometimes referred to as the separation point. Costs
L incurred prior to this point of separation are common or joint costs, and these need to be apportioned
between the joint products.
B Joint products are not separately identifiable until a certain stage is reached in the processing
operations. This stage is the 'split-off point', sometimes referred to as the separation point. Costs
O incurred prior to this point of separation are common or joint costs, and these need to be apportioned in
X some manner to each of the joint products.
.
C
O
M
The problems in accounting for joint products are basically of two different sorts.
(a) How common costs should be apportioned between products, in order to put a value to closing
inventories and to the cost of sale (and profit) for each product.
(b) Whether it is more profitable to sell a joint product at one stage of processing, or to process the
product further and sell it at a later stage.
4.3 Dealing with common costs

The problem of costing for joint products concerns common costs, that is those common processing
costs shared between the units of eventual output up to their 'split-off point'. Some method needs to be
devised for sharing the common costs between the individual joint products for the following reasons.
(a) To put a value to closing inventories of each joint product.
(b) To record the costs and therefore the profit from each joint product.
(c) Perhaps to assist in pricing decisions.
Here are some examples of the common costs problem.
A
(a) How to spread the common costs of oil refining between the joint products made (petrol, C
naphtha, kerosene and so on). C
(b) How to spread the common costs of iron and steel production between sheet steel and cast iron.
A
Methods that might be used to establish a basis for apportionment for common costs to each product
are as follows.
(a) Physical measurement G
(b) Net realisable value at the split off point (sales value of end product less further processing costs
after split-off point) L
O
4.3.1 Dealing with common costs: physical measurement
With physical measurement, the common cost is apportioned to the joint products on the basis of the
B
proportion that the output of each product bears by weight or volume to the total output. An example A
of this would be the case where two products, product 1 and product 2, incur common costs to the
point of separation of $3,000 and the output of each product is 600 tons and 1,200 tons respectively. L
Joint Product 1 600 tons
Process
Cost $3,000
B
Joint Product 2 1,200 tons
O
Split-off point (costs to this point are $3,000) X
.
Product 1 sells for $4 per ton and product 2 for $2 per ton.
C
The division of the common costs ($3,000) between product 1 and product 2 could be based on the
tonnage of output. O
Product 1 Product 2 Total M
Output 600 tons + 1,200 tons 1,800 tons
 600   1,200 
Proportion of common cost    
 1,800   1,800 
$ $ $
Apportioned cost 1,000 2,000 3,000
Sales 2,400 2,400 4,800
Profit 1,400 400 1,800
Profit/sales ratio 58.3% 16.7% 37.5%
Physical measurement has the following limitations.

(a) Where the products separate during the processes into different states, for example where one
product is a gas and another is a liquid, this method is unsuitable.
(b) This method does not take into account the relative income-earning potentials of the individual
products, with the result that one product might appear very profitable and another appear to be
incurring losses.
4.3.2 Dealing with common costs: net realisable value at split-off point
The net realisable value of a joint product is its sales value minus its further processing costs after the
point of separation.
An example of this would be where three joint products are produced from a common process:
Product A: 30,000 litres
A Product B: 7,500 kg
C Product C: 15,000 kg
C The joint costs of processing up to the point of separation are $249,000.

Product C can be sold immediately after separation for $22.50 per kg. Product A needs further
A processing, at a cost of $12 per litre, before it is sold for $30 per litre. Product B also needs further
processing, at a cost of $3 per kg, before it is sold for $10.50 per kg.
Under this method the common cost is apportioned to each product in the proportion that the net
G realisable value of that product bears to the total net realisable value of all products produced from the
L process.
O Product A Product B Product C Total

B 30,000 litres 7,500 kg 15,000 kg
$ $ $ $
A Final sales value 900,000 78,750 337,500
L Further processing costs
Net realisable value
360,000
540,000
22,500
56,250
0
337,500 933,750
Pre-separation costs 144,000* 15,000 90,000 249,000

B Profit 396,000 41,250 247,500 684,750
O Profit per unit $13.20 $5.50 $16.50
X * $540,000 / $933,750 × $249,000 = $144,000
. Apportionment basis = Common costs / Net realisable value
C = $249,000 / $933,750
O = $0.267 of cost per $1 net realisable value
M 4.3.3 The usefulness of costing for joint products

Costing information from joint product costing is of limited value. The apportionment of common costs
between two or more joint products is necessary for the purpose of inventory valuation. However, joint
product costs tell us very little about product profitability.
For example, suppose that two joint products are made in a process and when common costs are
apportioned between them, one joint product shows a profit and the other shows a loss. It would be
impossible to stop making the loss-making joint product without ceasing to manufacture the profitable
joint product too, because they are made at the same time and in the same process. The only realistic
measure of profit is the combined profit from both products. For the purpose of decision-making and
cost control, the entire process must be considered, not individual products.
5 Accounting for by-products
There are a number of methods to account for by-products and the choice of method will be influenced
by the circumstances of production and ease of calculation.
The by-product has some commercial value and its accounting treatment of income is commonly as
follows.
The net realisable value of the by-product may be deducted from the cost of production of the main
product. The net realisable value is the final saleable value of the by-product minus any post-separation
costs. Any closing inventory valuation of the main product or joint products would therefore be reduced.
6 The further processing decision
A joint product should be processed further only if final sales value minus further processing costs is A
greater than sales value at the split-off point. C
The further processing decision problem is best explained by a simple example. C
6.1 Example: further processing A
Alice Co manufactures two joint products, A and B. The costs of common processing are $15,000 per
batch, and output per batch is 100 units of A and 150 units of B. The sales value of A at split-off point
is $90 per unit, and the sales value of B is $60 per unit.
G
An opportunity exists to process product A further, at an extra cost of $2,000 per batch, to produce L
product C. One unit of joint product A is sufficient to make one unit of C which has a sales value of
$120 per unit.
O
Should the company sell product A, or should it process A and sell product C?
B
A
Solution
L
Joint A Extra
process process? C
B
The problem is resolved on the basis that product C should be sold if the sales value of C minus its
B
further processing costs exceeds the sales value of A. O
$ X
Sales value of C, per batch (100  $120) 12,000
Sales value of A, per batch (100  $90) 9,000 .
Incremental revenue from further processing
Further processing cost
3,000
2,000 C
Benefit from further processing in order to sell C 1,000 per batch
O
If the further processing cost had exceeded the incremental revenue from further processing, it would
have been unprofitable to make and sell C. It is worth noting that the apportionment of joint processing
M
costs between A and B is irrelevant to the decision, because the total extra profit from making C will be
$1,000 per batch whichever method is used.
QUESTION Further processing decision

PCC Co produces two joint products, Pee and Cee, from the same process. Joint processing costs of
$150,000 are incurred up to split-off point, when 100,000 units of Pee and 50,000 units of Cee are
produced. The selling prices at split-off point are $1.25 per unit for Pee and $2.00 per unit for Cee.
The units of Pee could be processed further to produce 60,000 units of a new chemical, Peeplus, but at
an extra fixed cost of $20,000 and variable cost of 30c per unit of input. The selling price of Peeplus
would be $3.25 per unit.
Required
Ascertain whether the company should sell Pee or Peeplus.
ANSWER
The only relevant costs/incomes are those which compare selling Pee against selling Peeplus. Every
other cost is irrelevant: they will be incurred regardless of what the decision is.
Pee Peeplus
Selling price per unit $1.25 $3.25
$ $ $
Total sales 125,000 195,000
Post-separation processing costs – Fixed 20,000
– Variable 30,000 50,000
Sales minus post-separation 125,000 145,000
(further processing) costs
A
It is $20,000 more profitable to convert Pee into Peeplus.
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 Process costing is a costing method used where there are continuous processes. Process costs are
attributed to the units produced in a period.
 During a production process, a loss may occur due to wastage, spoilage, evaporation, and so on.
 Loss may have a scrap value. Revenue from scrap is treated as a reduction in costs. It is conventional
for the scrap value of normal loss to be deducted from the cost of materials before a cost per
equivalent unit is calculated.
 Joint products are two or more products separated in a process, each of which has a significant value
compared to the other. A by-product is an incidental product from a process which has an insignificant
value compared to the main product.
 Joint products are not separately identifiable until a certain stage is reached in the processing
operations. This stage is the 'split-off point', sometimes referred to as the separation point. Costs A
incurred prior to this point of separation are common or joint costs, and these need to be apportioned
between the joint products. C
 There are a number of methods to account for by-products and the choice of method will be influenced C
by the circumstances of production and ease of calculation.
A
 A joint product should be processed further only if final sales value minus further processing costs is
greater than sales value at the split-off point.
G
L
O
QUICK QUIZ
1 Process costing is centred around four key steps.
Step 1 ………………………………………………………………………………………..
B
A
Step 2 ………………………………………………………………………………………..
L
Step 3 ………………………………………………………………………………………..
B
Step 4 ………………………………………………………………………………………..
O
2 Abnormal gains result when actual loss is less than normal or expected loss.
X
True
.
False
3 During Period 1, 10,000 units of material were input to a process. Actual output was 8,500 units and
C
process costs in the period were $22,950. Normal loss is 10% of input. What was the abnormal loss or O
gain in Period 1?
A Abnormal loss 500 units
M
B Abnormal gain 500 units
C Abnormal loss 1,500 units
D Abnormal gain 1,500 units
4 Using the data in Question 3, what was the cost of finished output in Period 1?
A $19,508
B $20,534
C $21,675
D $22,950
5 During Period 2, 10,000 units of material were input to a process. Actual output was 9,400 units and
process costs were $33,840. Normal loss is 10% of input. How should abnormal gain be accounted
for?
A Debit Abnormal Gain account $1,440, Credit Process account $1,440
B Debit Process account $1,440, Credit Abnormal gain account $1,440
C Debit Abnormal Gain account $1,504, Credit Process account $1,504
D Debit Process account $1,504, Credit Abnormal gain account $1,504
 
6 Normal loss (no scrap value) Same value as good output (positive cost)
Abnormal loss ? No value
Abnormal gain Same value as good output (negative cost)
7 How is revenue from the scrap value of normal loss treated?
A As an addition to sales revenue
B As a reduction in costs of processing
A C As a bonus to employees
C D All of the above

8 What is the difference between a joint product and a by-product?
C 9 What is meant by the term 'split off' point?
A 10 Costs incurred in a process totalled $216,720 for a period. 24,000 units of finished product were
manufactured including 1,200 units which were rejected on inspection and disposed of. The level of
rejects in the period was normal. Rejects are sold for $2·00 per unit.
G What was the cost per unit for the process?
L A $8·93
O B
C
$9·03
$9·40
B D $9·51
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
1
Step 2 Calculate cost per unit of output, losses and WIP
Step 3 Calculate total cost of output, losses and WIP
2  True
3 A A
Expected normal loss = 1,000 units. Actual loss (10,000 – 8,500) = 1,500 units. Abnormal loss =
500 units.
C
4 C C
Cost per unit of expected output = $22,950/9,000 = $2.55. Cost of 8,500 units produced ( $2.55) A
= $21,675.
5 D
Cost per unit of expected output = $33,840/9,000 = $3.76. Value of 400 units of abnormal gain ( G
L

$3.76) = $1,504. The Process account is debited and the Abnormal gain account is credited.
6 Normal loss (no scrap value) Same value as good output (positive cost)
O
Abnormal loss No value
Abnormal gain Same value as good output (negative cost)
B
7 B A
8 A joint product is regarded as an important saleable item whereas a by-product is not. L
9 The split-off point (or the point of separation) is the point at which joint products become separately
identifiable in a processing operation.
B
10 C [$216,720 – (1,200 units x $2/unit)] ÷ (24,000 – 1,200 units) = $9.40
O
X
Now try ...
.
C
O
Number
Q63
M
Q64
Q65
Q66
Q67
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
A
C
part C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
Decision making .
C
O
M
PART D: DECISION MAKING
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
C H A P T E R
A
The previous chapters have described how costing
systems are used to record costs and measure costs, Cost-volume-profit C
using absorption costing or marginal costing, and the C
different cost measurement methods used in job costing,
batch costing, process costing and service costing.
(CVP) analysis A
This chapter and the two chapters that follow describe
techniques that are used to provide financial information
to management that should help them with decision-
making. This chapter explains cost-volume-profit
G
analysis, which is based on marginal costing concepts, L
O
and which can be used to measure how costs and profits
vary with the volume of sales, and so establish what
volume of sales might be needed to break even or achieve
a target level of profit.
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
1 CVP analysis and breakeven point D1 (b)

2 The contribution/sales (C/S) ratio D1 (a), (b), (c)
3 The margin of safety D1 (b), (c)
4 Breakeven arithmetic and target profits D1 (d), (e)
5 Breakeven charts and profit/volume charts D1 (f)
6 Limitations of CVP analysis D1 (f)

D Decision making
1 Cost / volume / profit analysis
(a) Calculate contribution per unit and the contribution/sales S

ratio
(b) Explain the concept of breakeven and margin of safety K
(c) Use contribution per unit and contribution/sales ratio to S

calculate breakeven point and margin of safety
(d) Analyse the effect on breakeven point and margin of safety of S
changes in selling price and costs
(e) Use contribution per unit and contribution/sales ratio to S
calculate the sales required to achieve a target profit
A (f) Interpret breakeven and profit/volume charts for a single S
product or business
C
C
A
1 CVP analysis and breakeven point
G
L Cost-volume-profit (CVP) analysis is the study of the interrelationships between costs, volume and profit
at various levels of activity.
O
B 1.1 Introduction
A The management of an organisation usually wishes to know the profit likely to be made if the aimed-for
production and sales for the year are achieved. Management may also be interested to know the
L following.
(a) The breakeven point which is the activity level at which there is neither profit nor loss.
B (b) The amount by which actual sales can fall below anticipated sales, without a loss being
incurred.
O The breakeven point (BEP) can be calculated arithmetically.
X Total fixed cos ts Contributionrequired to break even
Breakeven point = =
. Contributionper unit Contributionper unit
C = Number of units of sale required to break even.
O
M 1.2 Example: Breakeven point
Expected sales 10,000 units at $8 = $80,000
Variable cost $5 per unit
Fixed costs $21,000
Required
Compute the breakeven point.
CHAPTER 15 // COST-VOLUME-PROFIT (CVP) ANALYSIS
Solution
The contribution per unit is $(85) = $3
Contribution required to break even = fixed costs = $21,000
Breakeven point (BEP) = 21,000 ÷ 3
= 7,000 units
In revenue, BEP = (7,000  $8) = $56,000
Sales above 7,000 units will result in profit of $3 per unit of additional sales. For example, profit at
10,000 units is $9,000 [(10,000 – 7,000) ×3] and sales below 7,000 units will mean a loss of $3
per unit for each unit by which sales fall short of 7,000 units. In other words, profit will improve or
worsen by the amount of contribution per unit.
7,000 units 7,001 units
Revenue
$
56,000
$
56,008 A
Less variable costs
Contribution
35,000
21,000
35,005
21,003
C
Less fixed costs
Profit
21,000
0 (= breakeven)
21,000
3
C
A
2 The contribution/sales (C/S) ratio
G
The C/S ratio is a measure of how much contribution is earned from each $1 of sales. L
The C/S ratio is calculated as follows. O
C/S ratio =
Contribution
 100% B
Sales
A
2.1 Example: C/S ratio L
Expected sales 10,000 units @ $8 = $80,000
Variable cost $5 per unit
Fixed costs $21,000 B
Required O
Calculate the C/S ratio
X
Solution .
Contribution = Selling price – variable costs C
= $8 – $5
= $3 O
C/S ratio =
Contribution
 100%
M
Sales
$3
=  100%
$8
= 37.5%
A C/S ratio of 37.5% means that for every $1 of sales, a contribution of 37.5c is earned.
2.2 An alternative method to calculate breakeven

An alternative way of calculating the breakeven point to give an answer in terms of sales revenue is as
follows.
Re quired contribution Fixed costs

= = Sales revenue at breakeven point
C / S ratio C / S ratio
$3
In the example above, the C/S ratio is = 37.5%
$8
$21,000
Breakeven is where sales revenue equals = $56,000
37.5%
At a price of $8 per unit, this represents 7,000 units of sales.
Thus, in order to earn a total contribution of $21,000 and if contribution increases by 37.5c per $1 of
sales, sales must be:
$1
 $21,000 = $56,000
A 37.5c
C QUESTION C/S ratio

C The C/S ratio of product W is 20%. IB Co, the manufacturer of product W, wishes to make a
A contribution of $50,000 towards fixed costs. How many units of product W must be sold if the selling
price is $10 per unit?
G ANSWER
L Re quired contribution
C / S ratio
=
$50,000
20%
= $250,000
O  Number of units = $250,000  $10 = 25,000.

B
A
L 3 The margin of safety
B The margin of safety is the difference in units between the expected sales volume and the breakeven
sales volume and it is sometimes expressed as a percentage of the expected sales volume.
O
The margin of safety may also be expressed as the difference between the expected/actual sales revenue
X and breakeven sales revenue, expressed as a percentage of the expected/actual sales revenue.
. 3.1 Example: margin of safety

C Mal de Mer Co makes and sells a product which has a variable cost of $30 and which sells for $40.
O Budgeted fixed costs are $70,000 and expected sales are 8,000 units.
M Required
Calculate the breakeven point and the margin of safety.
Solution
Total fixed cos ts $70,000
(a) Breakeven point = =
Contributionper unit $(40  30)
= 7,000 units
(b) Margin of safety = 8,000  7,000 units = 1,000 units
1,000 units
which may be expressed as  100%  100% = 12½% of budget
8,000 units
(c) The margin of safety indicates to management that actual sales can fall short of budget by 1,000
units or 12½% before the breakeven point is reached and no profit at all is made.
4 Breakeven arithmetic and target profits
At the breakeven point, sales revenue = total costs and there is no profit. At the breakeven point, total
contribution = fixed costs.
4.1 Introduction
At the breakeven point, S = V + F
V = Total variable costs
F = Total fixed costs A
Subtracting V from each side of the equation, we get:
C
S  V = F, that is, total contribution = fixed costs
C
4.2 Example: Breakeven arithmetic A
Butterfingers Co makes a product which has a variable cost of $7 per unit.
Required
G
If fixed costs are $63,000 per annum, calculate the selling price per unit if the company wishes to
break even with a sales volume of 12,000 units. L
O
Solution
Contribution required to break even = $63,000
B
(= Fixed costs) A
Volume of sales = 12,000 units
$ L
Required contribution per unit (S  V) = $63,000  12,000 = 5.25
Variable cost per unit (V) = 7.00
Required sales price per unit (S) = 12.25 B
4.3 Target profits O
A similar formula may be applied where a company wishes to achieve a certain profit during a period. X
To achieve this profit, sales must cover all costs and leave the required profit.
.
The target profit is achieved when: S = V + F + P,
where P = required profit
C
Subtracting V from each side of the equation, we get:
O
S  V = F + P, so M
Total contribution required = F + P
4.4 Example: Target profits

Riding Breeches Co makes and sells a single product, for which variable costs are as follows.
$
Direct materials 10
Direct labour 8
Variable production overhead 6
24
The sales price is $30 per unit, and fixed costs per annum are $68,000. The company wishes to make
a profit of $16,000 per annum.
Required
Determine the sales required to achieve this profit.
Solution
Required contribution = fixed costs + profit = $68,000 + $16,000 = $84,000
Required sales can be calculated in one of two ways.
Re quired contribution $84,000
(a) = = 14,000 units, or $420,000 in revenue
Contribution per unit $(30  24)
Re quired contribution $84,000

(b) = = $420,000 of revenue, or 14,000 units.
A C / S ratio 20% *
C * C/S ratio =
$30  $24
$30
=
$6
$30
= 0.2 = 20%.
C
A QUESTION Target profit
Seven League Boots Co wishes to sell 14,000 units of its product, which has a variable cost of $15 to
make and sell. Fixed costs are $47,000 and the required profit is $23,000.
G Required
L Calculate the sales price per unit.
O
ANSWER
B Required contribution = fixed costs plus profit
A = $47,000 + $23,000
= $70,000
L Required sales 14,000 units
$
Required contribution per unit sold 5
B Variable cost per unit
Required sales price per unit
15
20
O
X
4.5 Decisions to change sales price or costs
.
You may come across a problem in which you will be expected to offer advice as to the effect of altering
C the selling price, variable cost per unit or fixed cost. Such problems are slight variations on basic
O breakeven arithmetic.
M 4.5.1 Example: Change in selling price

Stomer Cakes Co bake and sell a single type of cake. The variable cost of production is 15c and the
current sales price is 25c. Fixed costs are $2,600 per month, and the annual profit for the company at
current sales volume is $36,000. The volume of sales demand is constant throughout the year.
The sales manager, Ian Digestion, wishes to raise the sales price to 29c per cake, but considers that a
price rise will result in some loss of sales.
Required
Ascertain the minimum volume of sales required each month to raise the price to 29c.
Solution
The minimum volume of demand which would justify a price of 29p is one which would leave total
profit at least the same as before, ie $3,000 per month. Required profit should be converted into
required contribution, as follows.
$
Monthly fixed costs 2,600
Monthly profit, minimum required 3,000
Current monthly contribution 5,600
Contribution per unit (25c  15c) 10c
Current monthly sales 56,000 cakes
The minimum volume of sales required after the price rise will be an amount which earns a contribution
of $5,600 per month, no worse than at the moment. The contribution per cake at a sales price of 29c
would be 14c.
required contribution $5,600
Required sales =
contribution per unit
=
14c
= 40,000 cakes per month. A
C
4.5.2 Example: Change in production costs
Close Brickett Co makes a product which has a variable production cost of $8 and a variable sales cost
C
of $2 per unit. Fixed costs are $40,000 per annum, the sales price per unit is $18, and the current A
volume of output and sales is 6,000 units.
The company is considering whether to have an improved machine for production. Annual hire costs
would be $10,000 and it is expected that the variable cost of production would fall to $6 per unit. G
Required L
(a) Determine the number of units that must be produced and sold to achieve the same profit as is
currently earned, if the machine is hired.
O
(b) Calculate the annual profit with the machine if output and sales remain at 6,000 units per B
annum.
A
Solution L
The current unit contribution is $(18  (8 + 2)) = $8
(a)
Current contribution (6,000 × $8)
$
48,000 B
Less current fixed costs
Current profit
40,000
8,000
O
With the new machine fixed costs will go up by $10,000 to $50,000 per annum. The variable X
cost per unit will fall to $(6 + 2) = $8, and the contribution per unit will be $10. .
Required profit (as currently earned)
$
8,000 C
Fixed costs
Required contribution
50,000
58,000
O
Contribution per unit $10 M
Sales required to earn $8,000 profit 5,800 units
(b) If sales are 6,000 units

$ $
Sales (6,000 × $18) 108,000
Variable costs: production (6,000 × $6) 36,000
sales (6,000 × $2) 12,000
48,000
Contribution (6,000 × $10) 60,000
Less fixed costs 50,000
Profit 10,000
Alternative calculation $
Profit at 5,800 units of sale (see (a)) 8,000
Contribution from sale of extra 200 units (× $10) 2,000
Profit at 6,000 units of sale 10,000
4.6 Sales price and sales volume

A It may be clear by now that, given no change in fixed costs, total profit is maximised when the total
C contribution is at its maximum. Total contribution in turn depends on the unit contribution and on the
sales volume.
C An increase in the sales price will increase unit contribution, but sales volume is likely to fall because
A fewer customers will be prepared to pay the higher price. A decrease in sales price will reduce the unit
contribution, but sales volume may increase because the goods on offer are now cheaper. The optimum
combination of sales price and sales volume is arguably the one which maximises total contribution.
G 4.6.1 Example: Profit maximisation
L C Co has developed a new product which is about to be launched on to the market. The variable cost of
O selling the product is $12 per unit. The marketing department has estimated that at a sales price of
$20, annual demand would be 10,000 units.
B However, if the sales price is set above $20, sales demand would fall by 500 units for each 50c
A increase above $20. Similarly, if the price is set below $20, demand would increase by 500 units for
each 50c stepped reduction in price below $20.
L Required
Determine the price which would maximise C Co's profit in the next year.
B Solution
O At a price of $20 per unit, the unit contribution would be $(20  12) = $8. Each 50c increase (or
X decrease) in price would raise (or lower) the unit contribution by 50c. The total contribution is
calculated at each sales price by multiplying the unit contribution by the expected sales volume.
. Unit price Unit contribution Sales volume Total contribution
C $ $ Units $
20.00 8.00 10,000 80,000
O (a) Reduce price
M 19.50
19.00
7.50
7.00
10,500
11,000
78,750
77,000
(b) Increase price
20.50 8.50 9,500 80,750
21.00 9.00 9,000 81,000
21.50 9.50 8,500 80,750
22.00 10.00 8,000 80,000
22.50 10.50 7,500 78,750
The total contribution would be maximised, and therefore profit maximised, at a sales price of $21 per
unit, and sales demand of 9,000 units.
QUESTION Breakeven
Betty Battle Co manufactures a product which has a selling price of $20 and a variable cost of $10 per
unit. The company incurs annual fixed costs of $29,000. Annual sales demand is 9,000 units.
New production methods are under consideration, which would cause a $1,000 increase in fixed costs
and a reduction in variable cost to $9 per unit. The new production methods would result in a superior
product and would enable sales to be increased to 9,750 units per annum at a price of $21 each.
If the change in production methods were to take place, the breakeven output level would be:
A 400 units higher
B 400 units lower
C 100 units higher
D 100 units lower
ANSWER A
Current Revised Difference
$ $ C
Selling price
Variable costs
20
10
21
9 C
Contribution per unit 10 12
A
Fixed costs $29,000 $30,000
Breakeven point (units) 2,900 2,500 400 lower
Total fixed cos ts G

Breakeven point =
Contribution per unit L
Current BEP =
$29,000
= 2,900 units O
$10
B
$30,000
Revised BEP =
$12
= 2,500 units A
The correct answer is therefore B. L
B
5 Breakeven charts and profit/volume charts O
X
 The breakeven point can also be determined graphically using a breakeven chart or a
contribution breakeven chart. .
 The profit/volume (PV) chart is a variation of the breakeven chart which illustrates the C
relationship of profits to sales.
O
5.1 Breakeven charts M
The breakeven point can also be determined graphically using a breakeven chart. This is a chart which
shows approximate levels of profit or loss at different sales volume levels within a limited range.
A breakeven chart has the following axes.
 A horizontal axis showing the sales/output (in value or units)
 A vertical axis showing $ for sales revenues and costs
The following lines are drawn on the breakeven chart.

(a) The sales line
 Starts at the origin
 Ends at the point signifying expected sales
(b) The fixed costs line
 Runs parallel to the horizontal axis
 Meets the vertical axis at a point which represents total fixed costs
(c) The total costs line
 Starts where the fixed costs line meets the vertical axis
 Ends at the point which represents anticipated sales on the horizontal axis and total costs
of anticipated sales on the vertical axis
A The breakeven point is the intersection of the sales line and the total costs line.
C The distance between the breakeven point and the expected (or budgeted) sales, in units, indicates the
margin of safety.
C
A 5.1.1 Example: A breakeven chart
The budgeted annual output of a factory is 120,000 units. The annual fixed overheads amount to
$40,000 and the variable costs are 50c per unit. The sales price is $1 per unit.
G Required
L Construct a breakeven chart based on annual output up to 120,000
O Solution
B Breakeven chart (1) is shown on the following page.
A The chart is drawn as follows.
L (a) The vertical axis represents money (costs and revenue) and the horizontal axis represents the
level of activity (production and sales).
(b) The fixed costs are represented by a straight line parallel to the horizontal axis (in our example,
B at $40,000).
O (c) The variable costs are added 'on top of' fixed costs, to give total costs. It is assumed that fixed
costs are the same in total and variable costs are the same per unit at all levels of output.
X The line of costs is therefore a straight line and only two points need to be plotted and joined up.
. Perhaps the two most convenient points to plot are total costs at zero output, and total costs at the
budgeted output and sales.
C  At zero output, costs are equal to the amount of fixed costs only, $40,000, since there are no
O variable costs
M  At the budgeted output of 120,000 units, costs are $100,000.

$
Fixed costs 40,000
Variable costs 120,000 × 50c 60,000
Total costs 100,000
(d) The sales line is also drawn by plotting two points and joining them up.
 At zero sales, revenue is nil
 At the budgeted output and sales of 120,000 units, revenue is $120,000
Breakeven chart (1)

$’000
120
s
le
Budgeted profit
Sa
100
Breakeven point
80
Budgeted variable costs

os ts
al c
60 Tot
Fixed costs A
40
C
20
Margin
of safety Budgeted fixed costs
C
A
0
20 40 60 80 100 120 Units G
The breakeven point is where total costs are matched exactly by total revenue. From the chart, this L
can be seen to occur at output and sales of 80,000 units, when revenue and costs are both $80,000.
This breakeven point can be proved mathematically as: O
Required contribution ( fixed cos ts)
=
$40,000
= 80,000 units
B
Contribution per unit 50c per unit
A
The margin of safety can be seen on the chart as the difference between the budgeted level of activity
and the breakeven level.
L
Budgeted profit
The profit can be calculated at the output of 120,000 units as follows: B
Sales (120,000 units)
$
120,000
O
Variable costs 60,000 X
Contribution 60,000
Fixed costs 40,000 .
Profit 20,000
C
5.2 Example: Variations in the use of breakeven charts O
Breakeven charts can be used to show variations in the possible sales price, variable costs or fixed M
costs. Suppose that a company sells a product which has a variable cost of $2 per unit. Fixed costs are
$15,000. It has been estimated that if the sales price is set at $4.40 per unit, the expected sales
volume would be 7,500 units; whereas if the sales price is lower, at $4 per unit, the expected sales
volume would be 10,000 units.
Required
Draw a breakeven chart to show the budgeted profit, the breakeven point and the margin of safety at
each of the possible sales prices.
Solution
Workings Sales price $4.40 per unit Sales price $4 per
unit
$ $
Fixed costs 15,000 15,000
Variable costs (7,500 × $2.00) 15,000 (10,000 × $2.00) 20,000
Total costs 30,000 35,000
Budgeted revenue (7,500 × $4.40) 33,000 (10,000 × $4.00) 40,000
Expected profit 3,000 5,000
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O (a) Breakeven point A is the breakeven point at a sales price of $4.40 per unit, which is 6,250 units
or $27,500 in costs and revenues.
X Re quired contribution to break even $15,000
. (check:
Contribution per unit $2.40 per unit
= 6,250 units)
C The margin of safety (A) is 7,500 units – 6,250 units = 1,250 units or 16.7% of expected
O sales.
(b) Breakeven point B is the breakeven point at a sales price of $4 per unit which is 7,500 units or
M $30,000 in costs and revenues.
Re quired contribution to break even $15,000
(check: = 7,500 units)
Contribution per unit $2per unit
The margin of safety (B) = 10,000 units  7,500 units = 2,500 units or 25% of expected
sales.
Since a price of $4 per unit gives a higher expected profit ($5,000 compared to $3,000) and a wider
margin of safety, this price will probably be preferred even though the breakeven point is higher than at
a sales price of $4.40 per unit.
5.3 Contribution (or contribution breakeven) charts

As an alternative to drawing the fixed cost line first, it is possible to start with that for variable costs.
This is known as a contribution chart. An example is shown below using the earlier example.
Contribution chart
$’000
120
Profit
Breakeven point Contribution

Fixed
80
costs
ts
c os
Tot
al A
C
e
nu
ve
C
re
s
40
le
Sa
le c
ost
s
Margin
A
Fixed ariab
V of safety
costs
G
0
40 80 120 Units
L
One of the advantages of the contribution chart is that is shows clearly the contribution for different O
levels of production (indicated here at 120,000 units, the budgeted level of output) as the 'wedge'
shape between the sales revenue line and the variable costs line. At the breakeven point, the
B
contribution equals fixed costs exactly. At levels of output above the breakeven point, the contribution A
is larger, and not only covers fixed costs, but also leaves a profit. Below the breakeven point, the loss is
the amount by which contribution fails to cover fixed costs. L
5.4 The profit/volume (P/V) chart
The profit/volume (P/V) chart is a variation of the breakeven chart which illustrates the relationship of
B
profit to sales. O
X
A P/V chart is constructed as follows (look at the chart in the example that follows as you read the
explanation).
.
(a) 'P' is on the y axis and actually comprises not only 'profit' but contribution to profit (in monetary C
value), extending above and below the x axis with a zero point at the intersection of the two axes,
and the negative section below the x axis representing fixed costs. This means that at zero
O
production, the firm is incurring a loss equal to the fixed costs. M
(b) 'V' is on the x axis and comprises either volume of sales or value of sales (revenue).
(c) The profit-volume line is a straight line drawn with its starting point (at zero production) at the
intercept on the y axis representing the level of fixed costs, and with a gradient of
contribution/unit (or the C/S ratio if sales value is used rather than units). The P/V line will cut the
x axis at the breakeven point of sales volume. Any point on the P/V line above the x axis
represents the profit to the firm (as measured on the vertical axis) for that particular level of sales.
5.4.1 Example: P/V chart

Let us draw a P/V chart for our example. At sales of 120,000 units, total contribution will be 120,000 
$(1 – 0.5) = $60,000 and total profit will be $20,000.
A
C
C
A 5.5 The advantage of the P/V chart
The P/V chart shows clearly the effect on profit and breakeven point of any changes in selling price,
variable cost, fixed cost and/or sales demand. If the budgeted selling price of the product in our
G example is increased to $1.20, with the result that demand drops to 105,000 units despite additional
fixed costs of $10,000 being spent on advertising, we could add a line representing this situation to our
L P/V chart.
O At sales of 105,000 units, contribution will be 105,000  $(1.20 – 0.50) = $73,500 and total profit
will be $23,500 (fixed costs being $50,000).
B
A $
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
The diagram shows that if the selling price is increased, the breakeven point occurs at a lower level of
sales revenue (71,429 units instead of 80,000 units), although this is not a particularly large increase
when viewed in the context of the projected sales volume. It is also possible to see that for sales above
50,000 units, the profit achieved will be higher (and the loss achieved lower) if the price is $1.20. For
sales volumes below 50,000 units the first option will yield lower losses.
The P/V chart is the clearest way of presenting such information; two conventional breakeven charts on
one set of axes would be very confusing.
Changes in the variable cost per unit or in fixed costs at certain activity levels can also be easily
incorporated into a P/V chart. The profit or loss at each point where the cost structure changes should
be calculated and plotted on the graph so that the profit/volume line becomes a series of straight lines.
For example, suppose that in our example, at sales levels in excess of 120,000 units the variable cost
per unit increases to $0.60 (perhaps because of overtime premiums that are incurred when production
exceeds a certain level). At sales of 130,000 units, contribution would therefore be 130,000  $(1 -
0.60) = $52,000 and total profit would be $12,000.
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
6 Limitations of CVP analysis
L
Breakeven analysis is a useful technique for managers. Breakeven arithmetic can provide simple and
quick estimates. Breakeven charts provide a graphical representation of breakeven arithmetic.
Breakeven analysis has a number of limitations. B
 It can only apply to a single product or a single mix of a group of products O
 A breakeven chart may be time-consuming to prepare
 It assumes fixed costs are constant at all levels of output X


It assumes that variable costs are the same per unit at all levels of output
It assumes that sales prices are constant at all levels of output
.
 It assumes production and sales are the same (inventory levels are ignored) C
 It ignores the uncertainty in the estimates of fixed costs and variable cost per unit
O
M
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 Cost-volume- profit (CVP) is the study of the interrelationships between costs, volume and profits at
various levels of activity.
 The C/S ratio is a measure of how much contribution is earned from each $1 of sales.
 The margin of safety is the difference in units between the expected sales volume and the breakeven
sales volume. It is sometimes expressed as a percentage of the expected sales volume.
 At the breakeven point, sales revenue = total costs and there is no profit. At the breakeven point total
contribution = fixed costs.
 The breakeven point can also be determined graphically using a breakeven chart or a contribution
breakeven chart.
A  The profit/volume (PV) chart is a variation of the breakeven chart which illustrates the relationship of
profits to sales.
C
C
A
QUICK QUIZ
1 The breakeven point is the ………………….……………..……….. ……..………………………………

…………………. .
G 2 Use the following to make up three formulae which can be used to calculate the breakeven point.
L Contribution per unit

Fixed costs
O Contribution required to breakeven
B C/S ratio
A
L (a) Breakeven point (sales units) =
or
B
O (b) Breakeven point (sales revenue) =
X
. or
C
O 3 The C/S ratio is a measure of how much profit is earned from each $1 of sales.
M True
False
4 The margin of safety is the difference in units between the expected sales volume and the breakeven
sales volume. How is it sometimes expressed?
5 Profits are maximised at the breakeven point.
True
False
6 At the breakeven point, total contribution = …………………………………. .

7 The total contribution required for a target profit = ……………………………………………….. .
8 Give three uses of breakeven charts.

9 Breakeven charts show approximate levels of profit or loss at different sales volume levels within a
limited range. Which of the following are true?
I The sales line starts at the origin
II The fixed costs line runs parallel to the vertical axis
III Breakeven charts have a horizontal axis showing the sales/output (in value or units)
IV Breakeven charts have a vertical axis showing $ for revenues and costs
V The breakeven point is the intersection of the sales line and the fixed cost line
A I and II
B I and III
C I, III and IV
D I, III, IV, and V
10 On a breakeven chart, the distance between the breakeven point and the expected (or budgeted) sales,
in units, indicates the ………………………………. . A
11 5,400 units of a company’s single product were sold for a total revenue of $140,400. Fixed costs in the
period were $39,420 and net profit was $11,880.
C
What was the contribution per unit? C
A $7·30 A
B $9·50
C $16·50
D $18·70 G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
1 The breakeven point is the number of units of sale required to breakeven or the sales revenue required
to breakeven.
Fixed cos ts
2 (a) Breakeven point (sales units) =
Contribution per unit
Contribution required to breakeven

or
Fixed cos ts
(b) Breakeven point (sales revenue) =
C / S ratio
Contribution required to breakeven

or
C / S ratio
A
3 False. The C/S ratio is a measure of how much contribution is earned from each $1 of sales.
C
4 As a percentage of the budgeted sales volume.
C 5 False. At the breakeven point there is no profit.
A 6 At the breakeven point, total contribution = fixed costs
7 Fixed costs + required profit
G 8  To plan the production of a company's products
 To market a company's products
L  To give a visual display of breakeven arithmetic
O 9 C
B 10 Margin of safety
A 11 B ($39,420 + $11,880) ÷ 5,400 units = $9.50
L
Now try ...
B Attempt the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
O Number
X Q68
. Q69
Q70
C
Q71
O
Q72
M
C H A P T E R
A
Managers need to have an idea of what the financial
implications of a decision might be, and how costs and Short-term decisions C
revenues will change if a particular decision is taken.
Information for decision-making, both short-term and
C
long-term decisions, should be based on the concept of A
relevant costs.
The concept of relevant costs is very important in cost
and management accounting. This chapter explains the G
nature of relevant costs and how they are measured. It
also explains the application of relevant costs to decision- L
O
making in a particular situation, when there is limited
availability of a key resource (a ‘limiting factor’) and
management want to establish the optimal use of
resources so as to maximise profits.
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
1 Relevant costs D2 (e), (f)

2 Limiting factors D2 (a), (b), (c)
3 Make/buy-in problems D2 (d)

D Decision making
2 Factors affecting short term decision making
(a) Explain the importance of the limiting factor concept K
(b) Identify the limiting factor in given situations S
(c) Formulate and determine the optimal production solution S

when there is a single resource constraint
(d) Solve make/buy-in problems when there is a single resource S
constraint
(e) Explain the concept of relevant costs K
(f) Apply the concept of relevant costs in business decisions S

A
C
C
A 1 Relevant costs
G Relevant costs are future cash flows arising as a direct consequence of a decision.
L Relevant costs are future costs, cashflows and incremental costs.
O
1.1 Relevant costs
B A relevant cost is a cost that is incurred incrementally as a result of a possible future course of action
A that would not be incurred if the course of action is not chosen.
L
Decision making should be based on relevant costs.
B (a) Relevant costs are future incremental costs. A decision is about the future and it cannot alter
what has been done already. Costs that have been incurred in the past are totally irrelevant to
O any decision that is being made 'now'. Such costs are past costs or sunk costs.
X An example of a sunk cost is development costs which have already been incurred. Suppose that
a company has spent $250,000 in developing a new service for customers, but the marketing
. department's most recent findings are that the service might not gain customer acceptance and
could be a commercial failure. The decision whether or not to abandon the development of the
C new service would have to be taken, but the $250,000 spent so far should be ignored by the
decision makers because it is a sunk cost.
O
Costs that have been incurred include not only costs that have already been paid, but also costs
M that have been committed. A committed cost is a future cash flow that will be incurred anyway,
regardless of the decision taken now.
(b) Relevant costs are cash flows. Only cash flow information is required. This means that costs or
charges which do not reflect additional cash spending (such as depreciation and notional costs)
should be ignored for the purpose of decision making.
Other terms are sometimes used to describe relevant costs.
An opportunity cost The value of the benefit sacrificed when one course of action is chosen, in
preference to an alternative.
CHAPTER 16 // SHORT-TERM DECISIONS
Suppose for example that there are three options, A, B and C, only one of which can be chosen. The net
profit from each would be $80, $100 and $70 respectively.
Since only one option can be selected option B would be chosen because it offers the biggest benefit.
$
Profit from option B 100
Less opportunity cost (ie the benefit from the most
profitable alternative, A) 80
Differential benefit of option B 20
The decision to choose option B would not be taken simply because it offers a profit of $100, but
because it offers a differential profit of $20 in excess of the next best alternative.
EXAM FOCUS POINT

A
Unless you are given an indication to the contrary, you should assume the following.
 Variable costs will be relevant costs
C
 Fixed costs are irrelevant to a decision C
This need not be the case, however, and you should analyse variable and fixed cost data carefully. Do
not forget that 'fixed' costs may only be fixed in the short term.
A
1.2 Non-relevant variable costs G

There might be occasions when a variable cost is in fact a sunk cost (and therefore a non-relevant L
variable cost). For example, suppose that a company has some units of raw material in inventory. They
have been paid for already, and originally cost $2,000. They are now obsolete and are no longer used in O
regular production, and they have no scrap value. However, they could be used in a special job which
the company is trying to decide whether to undertake. The special job is a 'one-off' customer order, and B
would use up all these materials in inventory. A
(a) In deciding whether the job should be undertaken, the relevant cost of the materials to the
special job is nil. Their original cost of $2,000 is a sunk cost, and should be ignored in the
L
decision.
(b) However, if the materials did have a scrap value of, say, $300, then their relevant cost to the job
would be the opportunity cost of being unable to sell them for scrap, ie $300.
B
O
1.3 Attributable fixed costs
X
There might be occasions when a fixed cost is a relevant cost, and you must be aware of the distinction
between 'specific' or 'directly attributable' fixed costs, and general fixed overheads. .
Directly attributable fixed costs are those costs which, although fixed within a relevant range of activity C
level are relevant to a decision for either of the following reasons.
O
(a) They could increase if certain extra activities were undertaken. For example, it may be necessary
to employ an extra supervisor if a particular order is accepted. The extra salary would be an M
attributable fixed cost.
(b) They would decrease or be eliminated entirely if a decision were taken either to reduce the scale
of operations or shut down entirely.
General fixed overheads are those fixed overheads which will be unaffected by decisions to increase or
decrease the scale of operations, perhaps because they are an apportioned share of the fixed costs of
items which would be completely unaffected by the decisions. General fixed overheads are unlikely to be
relevant in decision making.
1.4 Absorbed overhead

Absorbed overhead is a notional accounting cost and hence should be ignored for decision-making
purposes. It is overhead incurred which may be relevant to a decision.
1.5 The relevant cost of materials

The relevant cost of raw materials is generally their current replacement cost, unless the materials have
already been purchased and would not be replaced once used. In this case the relevant cost of using
them is the higher of the following.
 Their current resale value
 The value they would obtain if they were put to an alternative use
If the materials have no resale value and no other possible use, then the relevant cost of using them for
the opportunity under consideration would be nil.
A QUESTION Relevant cost of materials

C O'Reilly Co has been approached by a customer who would like a special job to be done for him, and
C who is willing to pay $22,000 for it. The job would require the following materials.
A Material
Total units
required
Units already
in inventory
Book value of
units in
Realisable
value
Replacement
cost
inventory
$/unit $/unit $/unit
G A 1,000 0 – – 6
L B
C
1,000
1,000
600
700
2
3
2.50
2.50
5
4
O D 200 200 4 6.00 9
B Material B is used regularly by O'Reilly Co, and if units of B are required for this job, they would need to
be replaced to meet other production demand.
A Materials C and D are in inventory as the result of previous over-buying, and they have a restricted use.
L No other use could be found for material C, but the units of material D could be used in another job as
substitute for 300 units of material E, which currently costs $5 per unit (of which the company has no
units in inventory at the moment).
B Required
O Calculate the relevant costs of material for deciding whether or not to accept the contract.
X ANSWER
. (a) Material A is not yet owned. It would have to be bought in full at the replacement cost of $6 per
unit.
C (b) Material B is used regularly by the company. There are existing inventories (600 units) but if
O these are used on the contract under review a further 600 units would be bought to replace
them. Relevant costs are therefore 1,000 units at the replacement cost of $5 per unit.
M
(c) 1,000 units of material C are needed and 700 are already in inventory. If used for the contract, a
further 300 units must be bought at $4 each. The existing inventories of 700 will not be
replaced. If they are used for the contract, they could not be sold at $2.50 each. The realisable
value of these 700 units is an opportunity cost of sales revenue forgone.
(d) The required units of material D are already in inventory and will not be replaced. There is an
opportunity cost of using D in the contract because there are alternative opportunities either to
sell the existing inventories for $6 per unit ($1,200 in total) or avoid other purchases (of material
E), which would cost 300 x $5 = $1,500. Since substitution for E is more beneficial, $1,500 is
the opportunity cost.
(e) Summary of relevant costs

$
Material A (1,000  $6) 6,000
Material B (1,000  $5) 5,000
Material C (300  $4) plus (700  $2.50) 2,950
Material D 1,500
Total 15,450
1.6 The relevant cost of labour

The relevant cost of labour, in different situations, is best explained by means of an example.
1.6.1 Example: Relevant cost of labour

LW Co is currently deciding whether to undertake a new contract. 15 hours of labour will be required for A
the contract. LW Co currently produces product L, the standard cost details of which are shown below.
C
STANDARD COST CARD
PRODUCT L C
Direct materials (10kg @ $2)
$/unit
20
A
Direct labour (5 hrs @ $6) 30
50
Selling price 72 G
Contribution 22
(a) What is the relevant cost of labour if the labour must be hired from outside the organisation?
L
(b) What is the relevant cost of labour if LW Co expects to have 5 hours spare capacity? O
(c) What is the relevant cost of labour if labour is in short supply?
B
Solution A
(a) Where labour must be hired from outside the organisation, the relevant cost of labour will be the L
variable costs incurred.
Relevant cost of labour on new contract = 15 hours @ $6 = $90
(b) It is assumed that the 5 hours spare capacity will be paid anyway, and so if these 5 hours are
B
used on another contract, there is no additional cost to LW plc. O
Relevant cost of labour on new contract
$
X
Direct labour (10 hours @ $6)
Spare capacity (5 hours @ $0)
60
0
.
60 C
(c) Contribution earned per unit of Product L produced = $22 O
If it requires 5 hours of labour to make one unit of product L, the contribution earned per labour
hour = $22/5 = $4.40.
M
Relevant cost of labour on new contract
$
Direct labour (15 hours @ $6) 90
Contribution lost by not making product L ($4.40  15 hours) 66
154
It is important that you should be able to identify the relevant costs which are appropriate to a decision.
In many cases, this is a fairly straightforward problem, but there are cases where great care should be
taken.
2 Limiting factors
A limiting factor is a factor which limits the organisation's activities. In a limiting factor situation,
contribution will be maximised by earning the biggest possible contribution per unit of limiting factor.
One of the more common decision-making problems is a situation where there are not enough resources
to meet the potential sales demand, and so a decision has to be made about what mix of products to
produce, using what resources there are as effectively as possible.
A limiting factor is a factor which limits the organisation's activities.
A limiting factor could be sales if there are sufficient production resources to meet the sales demand,
but any one of the organisation's resources (labour, materials and so on) may be insufficient to meet the
A level of production demanded.
C 2.1 Optimal production solution

C It is assumed in limiting factor analysis that management wishes to maximise profit and that profit will
be maximised when contribution is maximised (given no change in the fixed cost expenditure incurred).
A In other words, marginal costing ideas are applied.
Contribution will be maximised by earning the biggest possible contribution from each unit of limiting
factor. For example if grade A labour is the limiting factor, contribution will be maximised by earning the
G biggest contribution from each hour of grade A labour worked.
L The limiting factor decision therefore involves the determination of the contribution earned by each
different product from each unit of the limiting factor.
O The optimal production solution can be determined by following this five-step approach.
B
A Step 1 Identify the limiting factor
L Step 2 Calculate contribution per unit of output for each product
Step 3 Calculate contribution per unit of limiting factor for each product
B
O Step 4 Rank products (make product with highest contribution per unit of limiting factor first)
X Step 5 Make products in rank order until scarce resource is used up (optimal production
. solution)
C
QUESTION Limiting factor
O
LF Co makes a single product for which the cost details are as follows.
M $ per unit
Direct material ($3 per kg) 12
Direct labour ($8 per hour) 72
Production overhead 18
Total production cost 102
Demand for next period will be 20,000 units. No inventories are held and only 75,000 kg of material
and 190,000 hours of labour will be available. What will be the limiting factor next period?
A Material only
B Labour only
C Material and labour
D There will be no limiting factor next period
ANSWER
Material required = 20,000 units  ($12/$3) = 80,000 kg
Material is therefore a limiting factor, since only 75,000 kg are available. This eliminates option D.
Labour required = 20,000 units  ($72/$8) = 180,000 hours.
Labour is not a limiting factor, since 190,000 labour hours are available. This eliminates options B
and C.
Therefore the correct answer is A.
2.1.1 Example: Optimal production solution

AB Co makes two products, the Ay and the Be. Unit variable costs are as follows.
Ay Be A
Direct materials
$
1
$
3
C
Direct labour ($3 per hour) 6 3 C
Variable overhead 1 1
8 7 A
The sales price per unit is $14 per Ay and $11 per Be. During July 20X2 the available direct labour is
limited to 8,000 hours. Sales demand in July is expected to be 3,000 units for Ays and 5,000 units for
Bes. G
Required L
Determine the optimal production solution, assuming that monthly fixed costs are $20,000, and that
opening inventories of finished goods and work in progress are nil. Also calculate the profit from this
O
solution. B
Solution A
Step 1 Confirm that the limiting factor is something other than sales demand. L
Ays Bes Total
Labour hours per unit 2 hrs 1 hr
Sales demand 3,000 units 5,000 units B
Labour hours needed 6,000 hrs 5,000 hrs 11,000 hrs
Labour hours available 8,000 hrs
O
Shortfall 3,000 hrs X
Labour is the limiting factor on production.
.
Step 2 Identify the unit contribution earned by each product C
Ays
$
Bes
$ O
Sales price
Variable cost
14
8
11
7
M
Unit contribution 6 4
Step 3 Calculate the contribution per unit of limiting factor, that is per labour hour worked.
Ays Bes
$ $
Sales price 14 11
Variable cost 8 7
Unit contribution 6 4
Labour hours per unit 2 hrs 1 hr
Contribution per labour hour (= unit of limiting factor) $3 $4
Step 4 Although Ays have a higher unit contribution than Bes, two Bes can be made in the
time it takes to make one Ay. Because labour is in short supply it is more profitable to
make Bes than Ays.
Step 5 Determine the optimal production solution. Sufficient Bes will be made to meet the full
sales demand, and the remaining labour hours available will then be used to make Ays.
(a) Hours Hours Priority of
Product Demand required available manufacture
Bes 5,000 5,000 5,000 1st
Ays 3,000 6,000 3,000 (bal) 2nd
11,000 8,000
(b) Hours Contribution
Product Units needed per unit Total
$ $
A Bes 5,000 5,000 4 20,000
C Ays 1,500 3,000

8,000
6 9,000
29,000
C Less fixed costs
Profit
20,000
9,000
A
In conclusion
(a) Unit contribution is not the correct way to decide priorities. This is shown in the calculation
G following showing the effect if Ays had been ranked before Bes.
L Product Units
Hours
needed
Contribution
per unit Total
O Bes 2,000 2,000
$
4
$
8,000
B Ays 3,000 6,000
8,000
6 18,000
26,000
A Less fixed costs 20,000
Profit 6,000
L
(b) Labour hours are the scarce resource, and therefore contribution per labour hour is the correct
way to decide priorities.
B (c) The Be earns $4 contribution per labour hour, and the Ay earns $3 contribution per labour hour.
Bes therefore make more profitable use of the scarce resource, and should be manufactured first.
O An important factor to consider when making a limiting factor decision is whether the lost sales /
X dissatisfied customers whose demand has not been met will have a significant impact on future sales.
.
C 3 Make/buy-in problems
O In a make/buy-in problem with no limiting factors, the relevant costs for the decision are the differential
M costs between the two options.
3.1 Introduction
A make/buy-in problem involves a decision by an organisation about whether it should make a
product/carry out an activity with its own internal resources, or whether it should pay another
organisation to make the product/carry out the activity. Examples of make/buy-in problems would be as
follows.
(a) Whether a company should manufacture its own components, or buy the components from an
outside supplier.
(b) Whether a construction company should do some work with its own employees, or whether it
should subcontract the work to another company.
If an organisation has the freedom of choice about whether to make internally or buy externally and has
no scarce resources that put a restriction on what it can do itself, the relevant costs for the decision will
be the differential costs between the two options.
3.1.1 Example: Make/buy-in problem

Buster Co makes four components, W, X, Y and Z, for which costs in the forthcoming year are expected
to be as follows.
W X Y Z
Production (units) 1,000 2,000 4,000 3,000
Unit marginal costs $ $ $ $
Direct materials 4 5 2 4
Direct labour 8 9 4 6
Variable production overheads 2 3 1 2
14 17 7 12
Directly attributable fixed costs per annum and committed fixed costs are as follows.
A
$
Incurred as a direct consequence of making W 1,000 C
Incurred as a direct consequence of making X
Incurred as a direct consequence of making Y
5,000
6,000 C
Incurred as a direct consequence of making Z
Other fixed costs (committed)
8,000
30,000
A
50,000
A subcontractor has offered to supply units of W, X, Y and Z for $12, $21, $10 and $14 respectively.
G
Required
L
Decide whether Buster Co should make or buy-in the components.
O
Solution
B
(a) The relevant costs are the differential costs between making and buying, and they consist of
differences in unit variable costs plus differences in directly attributable fixed costs. A
Subcontracting will result in some fixed cost savings.
W X Y Z
L
$ $ $ $
Unit variable cost of making 14 17 7 12
Unit variable cost of buying 12 21 10 14 B
(2) 4 3 2
Annual requirements (units) 1,000 2,000 4,000 3,000
O
Extra variable cost of buying (per annum)
Fixed costs saved by buying
(2,000)
1,000
8,000
5,000
12,000
6,000
6,000
8,000
X
Extra total cost of buying (3,000) 3,000 6,000 (2,000) .
(b) The company would save $3,000 pa by subcontracting component W (where the purchase cost C
would be less than the marginal cost per unit to make internally) and would save $2,000 pa by
subcontracting component Z (because of the saving in fixed costs of $8,000). O
(c) In this example, relevant costs are the variable costs of in-house manufacture, the variable costs M
of subcontracted units, and the saving in fixed costs.
3.2 Other factors to consider in the make/buy-in problem

(a) If components W and Z are subcontracted, how will the company most profitably use the spare
capacity? Would the company's workforce resent the loss of work to an outside subcontractor?
(b) Would the subcontractor be reliable with delivery times, and would he supply components of the
same quality as those manufactured internally?
(c) Does the company wish to be flexible and maintain better control over operations by making
everything itself?
(d) Are the estimates of fixed cost savings reliable? In the case of Product W, buying is clearly
cheaper than making in-house. In the case of product Z, the decision to buy rather than make
would only be financially beneficial if the fixed cost savings of $8,000 could really be 'delivered'
by management.
(e) Is the buy-in price sustainable? A supplier will need to be willing and able to supply the products
at the prices used in the analysis in the long term.
3.3 Make/buy-in problems and limiting factors

In a situation where a company must subcontract work to make up a shortfall in its own production
capability, its total costs are minimised if those components/products subcontracted are those with the
lowest extra variable cost of buying per unit of limiting factor saved by buying.
3.3.1 Example: make/buy-in problems and limiting factors

A Green Co manufactures two components, the Alpha and the Beta, using the same machines for each. The
budget for the next year calls for the production and assembly of 4,000 of each component. The variable
C production cost per unit of the final product, the gamma, is as follows.
C Machine hours Variable cost

$
A 1 unit of Alpha 3 20
1 unit of Beta 2 36
Assembly 20
76
G
Only 16,000 hours of machine time will be available during the year, and a sub-contractor has quoted
L the following unit prices for supplying components: Alpha $29; Beta $40. Advise Green Co and calculate
O the total variable cost of the optimal solution.
The assembly costs are not relevant costs because they are unaffected by the make/buy-in problem.
B The units subcontracted should be those which will add least to the costs of Green Co. Since 4,000
A hours of work must be sub-contracted, the cheapest policy is to subcontract work which adds the least
extra costs (the least extra variable costs) per hour of own-time saved
L
Solution
(a) There is a shortfall in machine hours available, and some products must be sub-contracted.
B Product Units Machine hours
O Alpha
Beta
4,000
4,000
12,000
8,000
X Required 20,000
Available 16,000
. Shortfall 4,000
C (b) Alpha Beta

O Variable cost of making
$
20
$
36
M Variable cost of buying
Extra variable cost of buying
29
9
40
4
Machine hours saved by buying 3 hrs 2 hrs

Extra variable cost of buying, per hour saved $3 $2
It is cheaper to buy Betas than to buy Alphas and so the priority for making the components in-
house will be in the reverse order to the preference for buying them from a subcontractor.
(c) Hrs per unit Hrs required Cumulative

Component to make in- in total hours
house
Alpha 3 hrs 12,000 12,000
Beta 2 hrs 8,000 20,000
20,000
Hours available 16,000
Shortfall 4,000
There are enough machine hours to make all 4,000 units of Alpha and 2,000 units of Beta.
4,000 hours production of Beta must be sub-contracted. This will be the cheapest production
policy available.
(d) Number of Unit variable Total
Component Machine hours units cost variable cost
Make $ $
Alpha 12,000 4,000 20 80,000
Beta (balance) 4,000 2,000 36 72,000 A
16,000 152,000
Buy Hours saved
C
Beta (balance) 4,000 2,000 40 80,000 C
Total variable costs of 232,000
components A
Assembly costs (4,000  $20) 80,000
Total variable costs 312,000
The five-step approach can be modified for this type of problem. G
Step 1 Identify the limiting factor (if not already identified) and the resource shortfall L
O
Step 2 Calculate the differential variable costs of buying-in per unit of component
B
Step 3 Calculate the differential variable costs of buying-in per unit of limiting factor A
Step 4 Rank components
L
Step 5 Determine optimal production/buy-in solution

B
O
X
.
C
O
M
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 Relevant costs are future cash flows arising as a direct consequence of a decision.
 Relevant costs are future costs, cashflows and incremental costs.
 A limiting factor is a factor which limits the organisation's activities. In a limiting factor situation,
contribution will be maximised by earning the biggest possible contribution per unit of limiting factor.
 In a make/buy-in problem with no limiting factors, the relevant costs for the decision are the differential
costs between the two options.
A
C 1 Sunk costs are directly relevant in decision making.
C
QUICK QUIZ
True
A False
2 A limiting factor is a factor which ……………………………………………………………… .
G 3 When there is a limiting factor, what five steps are involved to determine the optimal production
solution?
L
O Step 1 ………………………………………………………………………………………………
B Step 2 ………………………………………………………………………………………………
A
L Step 3 ………………………………………………………………………………………………
Step 4 ………………………………………………………………………………………………
B Step 5 ………………………………………………………………………………………………
O
X 4 A sunk cost is:
. A
B
A cost committed to be spent in the current period
A cost which is irrelevant for decision making
C C
D
A cost connected with oil exploration in the North Sea
A cost unaffected by fluctuations in the level of activity
O
M
5 A company manufactures and sells four products. Details are as follows:

Product P Q R S
$ $ $ $
Contribution per unit 16.0 14.5 17.6 19.0
Net profit per unit 4.6 4.8 5.2 5.0
Contribution per machine hour 5.0 4.8 4.4 3.8
Net profit per machine hour 1.4 1.6 1.3 1.0
Machine hours available in the next period will not be sufficient to meet production requirements. There
are no product-specific fixed costs.
What should be the order of priority for production in order to maximise profit?
A Product P, Product Q, Product R, Product S
B Product Q, Product P, Product R, Product S
C Product R, Product S, Product Q, Product P
D Product S, Product R, Product P, Product Q A
6 A company has incurred development costs of $25,000 to date on a proposed new product. Further
costs of $18,000 would be required to complete the development of the product.
C
In deciding whether to continue with the new product development which of the following is correct C
regarding development costs? A
Sunk cost Incremental cost
A $0 $43,000
B $18,000 $25,000 G
C
D
$25,000
$43,000
$18,000
$0
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
1 False
2 Limits the organisation's activities.

3
Step 1 Identify the limiting factor
Step 2 Calculate contribution per unit for each product
Step 3 Calculate contribution per unit of limiting factor
Step 4 Rank products (make product with highest contribution per unit of limiting factor first)
A
C Step 5 Make products in rank order until scare resource is used up (optimal production plan)
C 4 B A cost which is irrelevant for decision making

A 5 A Contribution per machine hour needs to be maximised
6 C
G
Now try ...
L
B Number
A Q73
L Q74
Q75
Q76
B
Q77
O
X
.
C
O
M
C H A P T E R
A
Decision-making for the long term is similar in many
respects to short term decision making, and relevant costs
C
must be used to assess whether a proposed investment C
should go ahead or not (assuming that the decision will
be made on financial considerations only). In addition,
Capital investment A
however, the financial assessment of long-term
investments should also take into consideration the time appraisal
value of money. Investments should be expected to earn
a return, and the size of the return should be expected to
G
increase with time. Cash flow considerations may also be L
important, and a business may not want to invest in a
project where it may take a long time to earn the O
B
investment returns.
This chapter explains how long-term decisions should
take into consideration the time value of money, and A
possibly also the cash payback period. It introduces the
technique of discounted cash flow, which is extremely L
important in financial management.
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
1 Introduction to capital investment appraisal n/a

2 Interest D3 (a)
3 The principles of discounted cash flow D3 (b)
4 Annuities and perpetuities D3 (c), (e)
5 Cash flows and profits D3 (c)
6 Capital investment appraisal – net present value method D3 (d), (g)
7 Capital investment appraisal – internal rate of return (IRR) method D3 (d), (g)
8 Capital investment appraisal – payback method D3 (f), (g)

D Decision making
3 Principles of discounted cash flow
(a) Explain and illustrate the difference between simple and S

compound interest and between nominal and effective
interest rates
(b) Explain and illustrate compounding and discounting S
(c) Explain the distinction between cash flow and profit and the K
relevance of cash flow to capital investment appraisal
(d) Explain and illustrate the net present value (NPV) and internal S
rate of return (IRR) methods of discounted cash flow
(e) Calculate present value using annuity and perpetuity formulae S
A (f) Calculate payback (discounted and non-discounted) S
C (g) Interpret the results of NPV, IRR and payback calculations of S
C investment viability
G
1 Introduction to capital investment appraisal
L
O Long term investments include the purchase of buildings, machinery and equipment. Management will
B need to have estimates of the initial investment and future costs and revenues of a project in order to
make any long term decisions.
A Long term decisions generally involve looking at the options available when a company (or an
L individual) puts money into an investment.
If a company invests in a project, it will expect some sort of financial return (or more money) at some
point in the future. If the project runs for a number of years then whether or not to invest in the project
B will involve taking a long term decision.
O One of the things companies will need to consider when investing in long term projects is the time value
of money.
X Think about the following question.
. 'If I have $5 in my pocket now, how much will it be worth in four years' time?'
C This is a difficult question to answer, but we will be looking at ways in which companies use the
O concept of the time value of money when they are appraising projects and making long term decisions.
Note: When going through the rest of this chapter, where interest rates, discount rates, the rate of return
M and the cost of capital are given, these should be assumed to be per annum, unless otherwise stated.
2 Interest
Interest is the amount of money which an investment earns over time. Simple interest is interest which
is earned in equal amounts every year assuming no change in the interest rate. If interest earned also
earns interest itself in later periods, this is known as compound interest.
CHAPTER 17 // CAPITAL INVESTMENT APPRAISAL
2.1 Simple interest

 Interest is the amount of money which an investment earns over time.
 Simple interest is interest which is earned in equal amounts every year (or month), assuming no
change in the interest rate, and which is a given proportion of the original investment (the
principal).
If a sum of money is invested for a period of time, then the amount of simple interest which accrues is
equal to the number of periods  the interest rate  the amount invested. We can write this as a
formula.
The formula for simple interest is as follows.
S = P + nrP
where P = the original sum invested A
r = the interest rate (expressed as a proportion, so 10% = 0.1)
C
n = the number of periods (normally years)
C
S = the sum invested after n periods, consisting of the original capital (P) plus interest
earned (future value) A
2.1.1 Example: Simple interest
Fred invests $1,000 at 10% simple interest per annum. G
Required L
Calculate how much Fred will have after five years. O
B
Solution
Using the formula S = P + nrP
A
where P = $1,000
L
r = 10%
n = 5 B
 S = $1,000 + (5  0.1  $1,000) = $1,500 O
2.2 Compound interest X
Interest is normally calculated by means of compounding. .
If a sum of money is invested and the interest earned each period is added to the investment, then the C
interest earned in earlier periods will also earn interest in later periods.
O
2.2.1 Example: Compound interest M
Suppose that Fred invests $2,000 at 10% interest per annum. After one year, the original principal plus
interest will amount to $2,200.
$
Original investment 2,000
Interest in the first year (10%) 200
Total investment at the end of one year 2,200
(a) After two years the total investment will be $2,420.

$
Investment at end of one year 2,200
Interest in the second year (10%) 220
Total investment at the end of two years 2,420
The second year interest of $220 represents 10% of the original investment, and 10% of the
interest earned in the first year.
(b) Similarly, after three years, the total investment will be $2,662.
$
Investment at the end of two years 2,420
Interest in the third year (10%) 242
Total investment at the end of three years 2,662
Instead of performing the calculations shown above, we could have used the following formula.
n
The basic formula for compound interest is S = P(1 + r)
where P = the original sum invested
r = the interest rate, expressed as a proportion (so 5% = 0.05)
n = the number of periods (normally years)
S = the sum invested after n periods (future value)
You will need a scientific calculator with a power button ( x , y x or x y )
A Using the formula for compound interest, S = P(1 + r)
n
C where P = $2,000
C r
n
=
=
10% = 0.1
3
A
3
S = $2,000  1.10
= $2,000  1.331
= $2,662
G The interest earned over three years is $662, which is the same answer that was calculated in the
example above.
L If today's date is 31 May 20X3, note the following timings of cash flows.
O  Time 0 = now (31 May 20X3)
B  Time 1 = one year's time (31 May 20X4)
 Time 2 = two year's time (31 May 20X5)
A
L QUESTION Compound interest
If Fred invests $5,000 now (28 February 20X3) how much will his investment be worth:
(a) On 28 February 20X6, if the interest rate is 20% per annum?
B (b) On 28 February 20X7, if the interest rate is 15% per annum?
O (c) On 28 February 20X6, if the interest rate is 6% per annum?
X ANSWER
. (a)
3
At 28 February 20X6, n = 3, $5,000  1.20 = $8,640
C
4
(b) At 28 February 20X7, n = 4, $5,000  1.15 = $8,745.03
3
(c) At 28 February 20X6, n = 3, $5,000  1.06 = $5,955.08
O
M
2.3 Nominal interest rates
In the previous examples, interest has been calculated annually, but this isn't always the case. Interest
may be compounded daily, weekly, monthly or quarterly.
Most interest rates are expressed as per annum figures even when the interest is compounded over
periods of less than one year. In such cases, the given interest rate is called a nominal rate. We can,
however, work out the effective rate. It is this effective rate (shortened to one decimal place) which is
quoted in advertisements as the annual percentage rate (APR), sometimes called the compound annual
rate (CAR).
EXAM FOCUS POINT
Students often become seriously confused about the various rates of interest.
 The NOMINAL RATE is the interest rate expressed as a per annum figure, even though interest
may be compounded over periods of less than one year. For example, 5% interest payable every
six months is expressed as 10% pa nominal.
 The EFFECTIVE RATE is the adjusted nominal rate expressed as a per annum figure. For
example, if a bank offers customers 10% per annum nominal rate, with interest payable every
six months, this is an effective rate of 10.25% pa (see 2.5 below).
2.4 Effective interest rates

The equivalent annual rate of interest, when interest is compounded at shorter intervals, is known as an
A
effective annual rate of interest. C
FORMULA TO LEARN C
12
Effective Interest Rate  [(1  r) n  1] or [(1  r)
365
y
 1]
A
where r is the rate of interest for each time period
n is the number of months in the time period G
y is the number of days in the time period.
L
O
2.4.1 Example: Effective interest rates
Calculate the effective annual rate of interest of:
B
(a) 1.5% per month, compound A
(b)
(c)
4.5% per quarter, compound
9% per half year, compound
L
Solution
B
(a) (1.015)12 – 1 = 0.1956 = 19.56%
(b) (1.045)4 – 1 = 0.1925 = 19.25% O
(c) (1.09)2 – 1 = 0.1881 = 18.81%
X
2.5 Example: Nominal and effective rates of interest .
A building society may offer investors 10% per annum interest payable half-yearly. If the 10% is a C
nominal rate of interest, the building society would in fact pay 5% every six months, compounded so
that the effective annual rate of interest would be O
[(1.05)2 – 1] = 0.1025 = 10.25% per annum. M
Similarly, if a bank offers depositors a nominal 12% per annum, with interest payable quarterly, the
effective rate of interest would be 3% compound every three months, which is
[(1.03)4 – 1] = 0.1255 = 12.55% per annum.
An important point to note is that the more frequent the compounding, the greater the effective annual
rate of interest. For example a nominal interest rate of interest may be 18%, but this could mean
interest at 1.5% every month, interest at 4.5% every three months, interest at 9% every six months or
interest at 18% every year. The effective annual interest rate when interest is compounded at 1.5%
each month is 19.56%. This is more than the effective annual interest rate when interest is
compounded at 4.5% every three months (19.25%), which is more than the effective annual rate for
interest at 9% every six months (18.8%) and interest payable annually at 18%.
QUESTION Effective rates

Calculate the effective annual rate of interest of
(a) 15% nominal per annum compounded quarterly
(b) 24% nominal per annum compounded monthly
ANSWER
(a) 15% per annum (nominal rate) is 3.75% per quarter. The effective annual rate of interest is
4
[1.0375 – 1] = 0.1587 = 15.87%
(b) 24% per annum (nominal rate) is 2% per month. The effective annual rate of interest is
12
[1.02 – 1] = 0.2682 = 26.82%
A
C 3 The principles of discounted cash flow
C
A  The basic principle of discounting involves calculating the present value of an investment (ie the
value of an investment today at time 0).
 The term present value means the cash equivalent now of a sum to be received or to be paid in
G the future.
L The basic principle of discounting is that if we wish to have $S in n years' time, we need to invest a
O certain sum now (year 0) at an interest rate of r% in order to obtain the required sum of money in the
future. In day-to-day terms, we could say that if we wish to have $1,000 in five years' time, how much
B would we need to invest now at an interest rate of 4%?
A 3.1 Compounding
L Suppose that a company has $10,000 to invest, and wants to earn a return of 10% (compound
interest) on its investments. This means that if the $10,000 could be invested at 10%, the value of the
investment with interest would build up as follows.
B (a) After 1 year $10,000  (1.10) = $11,000
2
(b) After 2 years $10,000  (1.10) = $12,100
O (c)
3
After 3 years $10,000  (1.10) = $13,310 and so on.
X This is compounding. The formula for the future value of an investment plus accumulated interest after
. n time periods is:

n
FV = PV × (1 + r)
C where FV is the future value of the investment with interest
O PV is the initial or 'present' value of the investment
r is the compound rate of return per time period, expressed as a proportion
M (so 10% = 0.10, 5% = 0.05 and so on)
n is the number of time periods.
3.2 Discounting
Discounting starts with the future value, and converts a future value to a present value. For example, if a
company expects to earn a (compound) rate of return of 10% on its investments, how much would it
need to invest now to have the following investments?
(a) $11,000 after 1 year
(b) $12,100 after 2 years
(c) $13,310 after 3 years
The answer is $10,000 in each case, and we can calculate it by discounting. The discounting formula
to calculate the present value of a future sum of money at the end of n time periods is:
1
PV  FV
(1  r)n
1
(a) After 1 year, $11,000   $10,000
1.10
1
(b) After 2 years, $12,100   $10,000
1.102
1
(c) After 3 years, $13,310   $10,000
1.103
Discounting can be applied to both money receivable and also to money payable at a future date. By
discounting all payments and receipts from a capital investment to a present value, they can be A
compared on a common basis at a value which takes account of when the various cash flows will take
place. C
3.3 Present values
C
The term 'present value' simply means the cash equivalent now of a sum to be received or to be paid in
A
the future.
The discounting formula is
G
PV = FV 
1
(1  r)n
L
where FV is the future value of the investment with interest O
PV is the present value (PV) of that sum B
r
n
is the rate of return, expressed as a proportion
is the number of time periods (usually years)
A
The rate r is sometimes called the cost of capital. L
Note that this equation is just a rearrangement of the compounding formula.
3.3.1 Example: Present values B

(a) Calculate the present value of $60,000 received at the end of year 6, if interest rates are 15% O
(b)
per annum.
Calculate the present value of $100,000 received at the end of year 5, if interest rates are 6%
X
per annum. .
Solution C
1 O
The discounting formula, PV = FV  is required.
1  r 
n
M
(a) FV = $60,000
n = 6
r = 0.15
1
PV = 60,000 
1.156
= 60,000  0.432
= $25,920
(b) FV = $100,000
n = 5
r = 0.06
1
PV = 100,000 
1.065
= 100,000  0.747
= $74,700
3.4 Present value tables

Now that you understand the principles of discounting and you are able to calculate present values, you
will be happy to hear that you do not need to remember the formula for discounting.
Refer to the present value tables in the Appendix to this Text.
The use of present value tables is best explained by means of an example.
3.4.1 Example: Present value tables

(a) Using tables, calculate the present value of $60,000 at year 6, if interest rates are 15% per
A annum.
C (b) Using tables, calculate the present value of $100,000 at year 5, if interest rates are 6% per
annum.
C
A Solution
(a) Looking at the present value tables, look along the row n = 6 (year 6) and down column r =
15% (interest rates are 15% per annum). The required discount rate is 0.432.
G The present value of $60,000 at year 6, when interest rates are 15% is therefore:
L $60,000  0.432 = $25,920
O (b) Looking at the present value tables, look along the row n = 5 (year 5) and down column r = 6%
(interest rates are 6% per annum). The required discount rate is 0.747.
B The present value of $100,000 at year 5, when interest rates are 6% is therefore:
A $100,000  0.747 = $74,700
L Do either of these present values look familiar? Well, both of them should be as they are the
same present values that we calculated in the previous example using the discounting formula!
B QUESTION Present values

O Today's date is 30 April 20X3. If Fred wishes to have $16,000 saved by 30 April 20X8, how much
X should he invest if interest rates are 5%? Use the present value tables on page 291.
. ANSWER
C 30 April 20X3 = Now
O 30 April 20X4 = time period 5
M n =5
r = 5%
Present value = $16,000  discount rate (where n = 5 and r = 5%)
= $16,000  0.784
= $12,544
4 Annuities and perpetuities
 An annuity is a constant sum of money received or paid each year for a given number of years.
 A perpetuity is an annuity which lasts forever
4.1 Annuities
An annuity is a constant sum of money received or paid each year for a given number of years.
For example, the present value of a three year annuity of $100 which begins in one year's time when
interest rates are 5% is calculated as follows.
Time Cash flow Discount factor Present value
1
$
100
5%
0.952
$
95.20
A
2 100 0.907 90.70 C
3 100 0.864 86.40
2.723 272.30 C
There is a rather long and complicated formula which can be used to calculate the present value of an A
annuity. Fortunately there are also annuity tables which calculate all of the annuity factors that you
might ever need for Paper MA2. These are included at the end of this Interactive Text.
In order to calculate the present value of a constant sum of money, we can multiply the annual cash G
flow by the sum of the discount factors for the relevant years. These total factors are known as
cumulative present value factors or annuity factors. L
In the example above this is $100 × 2.723 = $272.30 which is the present value already calculated. O
Present value of an annuity = annuity  annuity factor B
A
4.1.1 Example: Annuity tables L
What is the annuity factor (cumulative present value factor) of $1 per annum for five years at 11%
interest?
B
Solution O
Refer to the annuity tables at the back of this Interactive Text.
X
Read across to the column headed 11% (r = 11%) and down to period 5 (n = 5). The annuity factor =
3.696. .
Now look back at the present value tables and look in the column n = 11%. The cumulative present C
value rates for n = 1 to 5 = 0.901 + 0.812 + 0.731 + 0.659 + 0.593 = 3.696. Can you see now
why these annuity tables are also called cumulative present value tables?
O
M
4.1.2 Example: Present value of an annuity
Fred has to make an annual payment of $1,000 to a car hire company each year from 30 June 20X3
to30 June 20X8.
Required
Calculate the present value of Fred's total payments if today's date is 1 July 20X2. Use a discount rate of
7%.
Solution
The first payment will be in one year's time ie time 1.
There will be six annual payments.
Annuity factor (where n = 6, r = 7%) = 4.767
Present value of payments = $1,000  annuity factor
= $1,000  4.767
= $4,767
4.2 Perpetuities
A perpetuity is an annuity which lasts forever.
annuity
The present value of a perpetuity =
A interest rate *
C *expressed as a proportion eg 20% = 0.2
C
A 4.2.1 Example: A perpetuity
Fred is to receive $35,000 per annum in perpetuity starting in one year's time. If the annual rate of
interest is 9% what is the present value of this perpetuity?
G
Solution
L
annuity
O PV =
int erest rate
B  PV =
$35,000
A 0.09
L = $388,889
5 Cash flows and profits

B
O To be successful in business, organisations must make profits. Profits are needed in order to pay
X dividends to shareholders and to allow partners to make drawings.
. If an organisation makes a loss, the value of the business falls and if there are long-term losses, the
business may eventually collapse.
C Net profit measures how much the capital of an organisation has increased over a period of time. Profit
O is calculated by applying the matching concept, that is to say by matching the costs incurred with the
sales revenue generated during a period.
M
5.1 The importance of cash
In addition to being profitable, an organisation needs to have enough cash in order to pay for the
following.
 Goods and services
 Capital investment (plant, machinery and so on)
 Labour costs
 Other expenses (rent, rates, taxation and so on)
 Dividends
Net cash flow measures the difference in the payments leaving an organisation's bank account and the
receipts that are paid into the bank account.
5.2 Net profit and net cash flow

Reasons why net profit and net cash flow differ are mainly due to timing differences.
(a) Purchase of non-current assets
Suppose an asset is purchased for $20,000 and depreciation is charged at 10% of the original
cost.
 Cash payment during the year = $20,000 (and this does not affect the statement of profit
or loss)
 Depreciation charge = 10% × $20,000 = $2,000. This is charged to the statement of
profit or loss and will reduce overall profits
(b) Sale of non-current assets
When an asset is sold there is usually a profit or loss on sale. Suppose an asset with a net book
value of $15,000 is sold for $11,000, giving rise to a loss on disposal of $4,000.
 Increase in cash flow during the year = $11,000 sale proceeds. There will be no effect on
A
the statement of profit or loss C
 Loss on sale of non-current assets = $4,000. This will be recorded in the firm's statement
of profit or loss and will reduce overall profits C
(c) Matching receipts from receivables and sales invoices raised A
If goods are sold on credit, the cash receipts will be the same as the value of the sales (ignoring
early settlement discounts and bad debts). However, receipts may occur in a different period as a
result of the timing of payments. G
(d) Matching payments to payables and cost of sales L
If materials are bought on credit, the cash payments to suppliers will be the same as the value of O
materials purchased. Again the payments may be in different periods due to timing. Materials
purchase are matched against sales in a particular period to calculate profit, demonstrating that B
profit and cash flow will differ in a particular period.
A
5.3 Cash flow in capital investment appraisal L
In a capital investment appraisal situation, the driver of long-term value is cash flow. In particular the
timing and amount of cash received or paid is used in the evaluation rather than an assessment of profit
(or loss) which is a short-term measure often used to assess value.
B
O
EXAM FOCUS POINT X
It is very important that you fully understand the difference between cash and profit. The key .
differences are covered by points (a) and (b) above. Points (c) and (d) are relevant to the examination
of short-term differences such as cash budgeting/forecasting. C
O
M
6 Capital investment appraisal – net present value method
 Discounted cash flow involves discounting future cash flows from a project in order to decide
whether the project will earn a satisfactory rate of return.
 The two main discounted cash flow methods are the net present value (NPV) method and the
internal rate of return (IRR) method.
Discounted cash flow methods can be used to appraise capital investment projects.
Discounted cash flow (DCF) involves the application of discounting arithmetic to the estimated future
cash flows (receipts and expenditures) from a capital investment project in order to decide whether the
project is expected to earn a satisfactory rate of return.
The two main discounted cash flow methods are as follows.
 The net present value (NPV) method
 The internal rate of return (IRR) method
6.1 The net present value (NPV) method

The net present value (NPV) method calculates the present values of all items of income and
expenditure related to an investment at a given rate of return, and then calculates a net total. If it is
positive, the investment is considered to be acceptable. If it is negative, the investment is considered to
be unacceptable.
A 6.2 The cost of capital

C The cost of capital has two aspects to it.
C (a) It is the cost of funds that a company raises and uses.
A (b) The return that investors expect to be paid for putting funds into the company. It is therefore the
minimum return that a company should make from its own investments, to earn the cash flows
out of which investors can be paid their return.
G The cost of capital can therefore be measured by studying the returns required by investors, and used to
derive a discount rate for discounted cash flow analysis and investment appraisal.
L 6.2.1 Example: The net present value of a project
O Dog Co is considering whether to spend $5,000 on an item of equipment which will last for two years.
B The excess of cash received over cash expenditure from the equipment would be $3,000 in the first year
and $4,000 in the second year.
A Required
L Calculate the net present value of the investment in the equipment at a discount rate of 15%.
Solution
B In this example, an outlay of $5,000 now promises a net cash inflow of $3,000 during the first year
O and $4,000 during the second year. It is a convention in DCF, however, that cash flows spread over a
year are assumed to occur at the end of the year, so that the cash flows of the project are as follows.
X The initial cost occurs at time 0, now, and therefore the discount factor is 1.00 as $5,000 is the
. present value of the expenditure now.
$
C Year 0 (now) (5,000)
O Year 1 (at the end of the year)
Year 2 (at the end of the year)
3,000
4,000
M A net present value statement is drawn up as follows.
Year Cash flow Discount factor Present value
$ 15% $
0 (5,000) 1.000 (5,000)
1 3,000 0.870 2,610
2 4,000 0.756 3,024
Net present value + 634
The project has a positive net present value, so it is acceptable.
6.3 The timing of cash flows

Note that annuity tables and the formulae both assume that the first payment or receipt is a year from
now. Always check examination and assessment questions for when the first payment falls.
For example, if there are five equal annual payments starting now, and the interest rate is 8%, we
should use a factor of 1 (for today's payment) + 3.312 (for the other four payments) = 4.312.
6.4 Cash v profit

Remember that it is cash flow figures that must be included in your calculations. If depreciation has
been deducted to arrive at a profit figure, it must be added back to give the net cash inflow.
QUESTION NPV (1)

Daisy Co is considering whether to make an investment costing $28,000 which would earn a profit of
$2,400 per annum for each of the next five years, after charging depreciation at the straight-line rate A
over five years, to a residual value of $0.
Required
C
What is the net present value of the investment at a cost of capital of 11%? C
A
ANSWER
Year Profit Depreciation Cash flow Discount factor Present value
$ 11% $ G
0 (28,000) 1.000 (28,000)
1 2,400 5,600 8,000 0.901 7,208 L
2
3
2,400
2,400
5,600
5,600
8,000
8,000
0.812
0.731
6,496
5,848 O
4
5
2,400 5,600 8,000
8,000
0.659
0.593
5,272
4,744
B
2,400 5,600
NPV 1,568 A
Working L
Cash flow = $2,400 profit per annum + $5,600 depreciation per annum* = $8,000 per annum
* Depreciation = $28,000/5 years = $5,600 per annum.
B
The important point to note is that depreciation is a non-cash expense. The actual cash spending occurs
in Year 0, when the investment is made.
O
X
Alternatively, you could treat the cash inflows of $8,000 for five years as an annuity.
Cash flow Discount factor Present value
.
Year
$ 11% $ C
0 (28,000) 1.000 (28,000)
1-5 8,000 3.696 29,568 O
1,568
M
QUESTION NPV (2)

Mostly Co is considering a project which would cost $50,000 now and yield $9,000 per annum every
year in perpetuity, starting a year from now. The cost of capital is 15%.
Required
Calculate the net present value of the project.
ANSWER
Year Cash flow Discount factor Present value
$ 15% $
0 (50,000) 1.0 (50,000)
1- 9,000 1/0.15 60,000
NPV 10,000
The net present value of the project is $10,000.
6.5 What does a net present value mean?

The net present value is a measure of the value in terms of ‘today’s money’ of the net benefits from a
proposed investment. The discount rate is the rate of return that will be sufficient to cover the cost of the
A organisation’s capital.
If an investment with a positive NPV goes ahead it will add value to the organisation, because the value
C of its net returns will be more than are needed to satisfy the providers of capital to the organisation.
C In theory, the value of the organisation should increase by the amount of the NPV if the investment goes
A ahead.
7 Capital investment appraisal – internal rate of return (IRR)

G method
L
O The IRR method determines the rate of interest (internal rate of return) at which the NPV = 0. The
internal rate of return is therefore the rate of return on an investment.
B
A The internal rate of return (IRR) method of evaluating investments is an alternative to the NPV method.
The NPV method of discounted cash flow determines whether an investment earns a positive or a
L negative NPV when discounted at a given rate of interest. If the NPV is zero (that is, the present values
of costs and benefits are equal) the return from the project would be exactly the rate used for
discounting.
B The IRR method of discounted cash flow is a method which determines the rate of interest (the
internal rate of return) at which the NPV is 0. The internal rate of return is therefore the rate of return on
O an investment.
X
. The IRR method will indicate that a project is viable if the IRR exceeds the minimum acceptable rate of
return. Thus if the company expects a minimum return of, say, 15%, a project would be viable if its IRR
C is more than 15%.
O 7.1 Example: The IRR method over one year

M If $500 is invested today and generates $600 in one year's time, the internal rate of return (r) can be
calculated as follows.
PV of cost = PV of benefits
600
500 =
(1  r)
500 (1 + r) = 600
600
1+r = = 1.2
500
r = 0.2 = 20%
The arithmetic for calculating the IRR is more complicated for investments and cash flows extending
over a period of time longer than one year. An approximate IRR can be calculated using either a
graphical method or by a technique known as the interpolation method.
7.2 Graphical approach

A useful way to estimate the IRR of a project is to find the project's NPV at a number of discount rates
and sketch a graph of NPV against discount rate. You can then use the sketch to estimate the discount
rate at which the NPV is equal to zero (the point where the curve cuts the discount rate (horizontal)
axis).
7.2.1 Example: graphical approach

A project might have the following NPVs at the following discount rates.
Discount rate NPV
%
5
$
5,300
A
10 400 C
15 (1,700)
20 (2,900) C
This could be sketched on a graph as follows.
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
Point A O
X
.
C
O
M
Reading from the graph, the IRR can be estimated as 11% (ie point A at which the curve cross the
horizontal axis)
The graphical approach is a useful way of illustrating how the NPV of a project changes as the discount
rate used varies.
7.3 The interpolation method

Using the interpolation method, the IRR is calculated by first of all finding the NPV at each of two
interest rates. Ideally, one interest rate should give a small positive NPV and the other a small negative
NPV.
The IRR would then be somewhere between these two interest rates: above the rate where the NPV is
positive, but below the rate where the NPV is negative. However, it is possible to use two positive values
or two negative values to extrapolate the IRR.
The IRR, where the NPV is zero, can be calculated as follows.
 NPVA 
IRR = a% +   (b  a) %
 NPVA - NPVB 
where a is one interest rate
b is the other interest rate
NPVA is the NPV at rate a
NPVB is the NPV at rate b
Using the information from the graphical approach example above.

A a = 10%
b = 15%
C NPVA = $400
C NPVB = $(1,700)
400
IRR = 10% +  15  10  %
A  400  1,700 
= 10% + 0.95%
= 10.95%
G
QUESTION IRR
L
The net present value of an investment at 16% is + $50,000 and at 20% is + $10,000. The internal
O rate of return of this investment (to the nearest whole number) is:
B A 19%
B 20%
A C 21%
L D 22%
ANSWER
B The IRR in this example is greater than 20% because the NPV is still positive when discounted at 20%
per annum. It can be estimated using extrapolation, rather than interpolation. The techniques are
O similar.
X IRR

= a% + 
NPVB 
 (a  b) %
.  NPVA - NPVB 
C Where a
b
=
=
20%
16%
O NPVA
NPVB
=
=
NPV at rate a = $50,000
NPV at rate b = $10,000
M  $10,000   $50,000 
IRR = 20% +   (20  16) % or = 16% +   (20  16)
 $50,000  10,000   $50,000  10,000 
= 20% + 1% = 16% + 5%
= 21% = 21%
The correct answer is therefore C.
QUESTION IRR
The net present value of an investment at 18% is – $14,000 and at 14% is – $5,000. The internal
rate of return of this investment (to the nearest whole number) is:
A 13%
B 12%
C 11%
D 10%
ANSWER
The IRR in this example is less than 14% because the NPV is still negative when discounted at 14% per
annum. It can be estimated using extrapolation.
 NPVA 
IRR = a% -   (b  a) %
 NPVB  NPV A  A
Where a
b
=
=
14%
18%
C
NPVA = NPV at rate a = - $5,000 C
NPVB = NPV at rate b = - $14,000
A
 $5,000   $14,000 
IRR = 14% –   (18  14) % or = 18% –   (18  14)
 $14,000  $5,000   $14,000  $5,000 
= 14% – 2.2%
= 11.8%.
= 18% – 6.2%
= 11.8%
G
Rounding to the nearest % is sensible given the uncertainty generally about estimating cash flows L
several years ahead and given also the use of annual intervals in discounting. O
The correct answer is therefore B.
B
A
7.4 The interpolation method, constant annual cash flows and annuity L
factors
When the cash flows from a project are a constant amount each year, the IRR can be calculated
(approximately) using the interpolation method and annuity factors. (Annuity factors are the value of $1 B
per annum at a discount rate of x% for each year from year 1 to year n.) O
An example will be used to illustrate the technique.
X
QUESTION IRR .
An investment will cost $75,000 and is expected to provide a cash return of $20,000 each year for the C
next six years. What is the IRR of the investment?
The present value of $1 per annum at 14% for years 1 – 6 = $3.889
O
The present value of $1 per annum at 16% for years 1 – 6 = $3.685 M
ANSWER
When the NPV of the investment is $0, the cumulative discount factor for $20,000 each year from year
1 to year 6 = $75,000/$20,000 = 3.750.
The NPV at a discount rate of 14% would be positive, because the annuity factor at 14% (3.889) is
higher than 3.750.
The NPV at a discount rate of 16% would be negative, because the annuity factor at 16% (3.685) is
lower than 3.750.
The IRR can be calculated using the following formula, which is based on interpolation:
 CDFa  CDFirr 
IRR = a% +   (b-a) %
 CDFa  CDFb 
where a is the lower discount rate
b is the higher discount rate
CDFa is the cumulative discount factor (annuity factor) at the lower discount rate
CDFb is the cumulative discount factor (annuity factor) at the higher discount rate
CDFirr is the cumulative discount factor (annuity factor) where the NPV = 0.
Applying this formula:
 3.889  3.750 
IRR = 14% +   (16  14) %
A  3.889  3.685 
C = 14% + [0.139/0.204] 2%
C = 15.36%.
A Note: The calculation of the IRR in this example has used the interpolation method. In practice, the
exact IRR could be obtained using a mathematical calculator.
G
L 7.5 What does the IRR of an investment mean?
O It was explained previously that in theory, the value of an organisation should increase by the NPV of
the investments that it undertakes (assuming that only investments with a positive NPV are selected).
B The IRR of an investment is a measure of the return that the investment is expected to achieve. If the
IRR is more than the organisation’s cost of capital, the investment should go ahead.
A However unlike the NPV of investments, the IRR does not provide a measure of how much value the
L investment will create. A project with an NPV of + $1 million and an IRR of 15%is more valuable than
a project with a NPV of + $100,000 and an IRR of 25%. The project with the higher NPV will create
more value (by $900,000), even though it has a lower IRR.
B
O EXAM FOCUS POINT
X You will need to learn the IRR formula so that you can calculate the IRR if required.
.
C
O 8 Capital investment appraisal – payback method
M The payback period is the time that is required for the cash inflows from a capital investment project to
equal the cash outflows.
8.1 What is the payback period?

The payback period is the time that is required for the total of the cash inflows of a capital investment
project to equal the total of the cash outflows.
Before the payback period can be calculated, management must have details of the following.
 The initial cash outflow for the project under consideration
 Estimates of any future cash inflows or savings
8.2 Example: Payback method

Ruby Co is considering a new project which will require an initial investment $60,000. The estimated
profits before depreciation are as follows.
Year Estimated net cash inflows
$
1 20,000
2 30,000
3 40,000
4 50,000
5 60,000
The payback period is calculated by considering the cumulative estimated profits before depreciation.
Estimated net Cumulative net
Year cash inflows cash inflows
$ $
1 20,000 20,000 A
2 30,000 50,000
3 40,000 90,000 C
4
5
50,000
60,000
140,000
200,000 C
The investment of $60,000 is paid back in year 3. If the cash flows accrue evenly throughout the year, A
we can calculate the payback period as follows.
At the end of year 2, $50,000 of the cash invested has been paid back, leaving $10,000 outstanding.
The net cash inflow in year 3 is $40,000.
G
The point at which the $60,000 investment has been paid back is:
L
2 years + ($10,000/$40,000  12 months) = 2 years and 3 months O
If, on the other hand, the cash flows are received at the end of the year then the payback period would B
be 3 years.
A
8.3 Using the payback period to appraise capital investment projects L
There are two ways in which the payback period can be used to appraise projects.
(a) If two or more mutually exclusive projects are under consideration, the usual decision is to accept
the project with the shortest payback period.
B
(b) If the management of a company have a payback period limit, then only projects with payback O
periods which are less than this limit would be considered for investment. X
8.4 Example: Project appraisal – payback method .
Suppose Ruby Co has a payback period limit of two years, and is considering investing in one of the C
following projects, both of which require an initial investment of $400,000. Cashflows accrue evenly
throughout the year. O
Year
Project A
Cash inflow Year
Project B
Cash inflow
M
$ $
1 100,000 1 200,000
2 200,000 2 180,000
3 100,000 3 120,000
4 150,000 4 100,000
5 150,000 5 100,000
Required
Which project is acceptable from the point of view of the payback period?
Solution
Firstly, we need to calculate the payback periods for Projects A and B.
Project A
Year Cash inflow Cumulative cash inflow
$ $
1 100,000 100,000
2 200,000 300,000
3 100,000 400,000
4 150,000 550,000
5 150,000 700,000
Project A has a payback period of 3 years.
Project B
Year Cash inflow Cumulative cash inflow
A 1
$
200,000
$
200,000
C 2 180,000 380,000
3 120,000 500,000
C 4 100,000 600,000
5 100,000 700,000
A Project B has a payback period of between 2 and 3 years.
Payback period = 2 years + ($20,000/$120,000  12 months)
G = 2 years + 2 months
L Since Ruby Co has a payback period limit of two years, neither project should be invested in (as both
payback periods are greater than two years). If, however, Ruby Co did not have a payback limit, or it
O was three years or longer, it should invest in Project B because it has the shorter payback period of the
two projects.
B
A QUESTION IRR
L A company is considering a project to purchase an item of equipment costing $900,000. This would be
depreciated over six years to a residual value of $0, using the straight line method. The expected
additional profit from using the equipment in each of the six years would be:
B Year 1 $40,000
O Year 2 $80,000
Year 3 $100,000
X Year 4 $150,000
. Year 5 $100,000
C Year 6 $40,000
O What is the expected payback period, assuming that cash flows accrue at an even rate during each
year?
M A 3 years 3 months
B 3 years 4 months
C 3 years 8 months
D 3 years 9 months
ANSWER
Annual depreciation will be $900,000/6 years = $150,000.
Year Annual cash inflows Cumulative cash inflows
$ $
0 (900,000) (900,000)
1 190,000 (710,000)
2 230,000 (480,000)
3 250,000 (230,000)
300,000 70,000
(There is no need to calculate cumulative cash flows after Year 3.)
Payback = 3 years + (230,000/300,000)  12 months
= 3 years 9 months.
The correct answer is D. A
C
8.5 What does payback mean? C
The payback for an investment is a measure of how long it will take to recover the initial cash spending A
on an investment. If an organisation has cash flow difficulties, payback may be an important
consideration. Similarly, payback may be a way of avoiding investments in projects where the expected
cash flows are difficult to estimate reliably, especially more than a few years into the future. G
However, payback does not measure the value of an investment, or the expected return on investment
that it will provide. It ignores all cash flows and returns after payback has been achieved.
L
Payback is often used as an initial step in appraising a project. However, a project should not be O
evaluated on the basis of payback alone. If a project passes the 'payback test' ie if it has a payback
period that is less than the payback period limit of the company then it should be evaluated further with
B
a more sophisticated project appraisal technique (such as the NPV or IRR methods). A
8.6 Discounted payback L
Payback can be combined with DCF, and a discounted payback period calculated.
The discounted payback period is the time it will take before a project's cumulative NPV turns from B
being negative to being positive.
O
X
For example if we have a cost of capital of 10% and a project with the cash flows shown below, we can
calculate a discounted payback period. .
Discount Present Cumulative
Year Cash flow factor value NPV C
0
$
(100,000)
10%
1.000
$
(100,000)
$
(100,000) O
1
2
30,000
50,000
0.909
0.826
27,270
41,300
(72,730)
(31,430)
M
3 40,000 0.751 30,040 (1,390)
4 30,000 0.683 20,490 19,100
5 20,000 0.621 12,420 31,520
NPV = 31,520
The discounted payback period is early in year 4.
A company can set a target discounted payback period, and choose not to undertake any projects with a
discounted payback period in excess of a certain number of years, say five years.
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 Long term investments include the purchase of buildings, machinery and equipment. Management will
need to have estimates of the initial investment and future costs and revenues of a project in order to
make any long term decisions.
 Interest is the amount of money which an investment earns over time. Simple interest is interest which
is earned in equal amounts every year assuming no change in the interest rate. If interest earned also
earns interest itself in later periods, this is known as compound interest.
 The basic principle of discounting involves calculating the present value of an investment (ie the value
of an investment today at time 0).
 The term present value means the amount of money which must be invested now (for a number of
years) in order to earn a future sum (at a given rate of interest).
A  An annuity is a constant sum of money received or paid each year for a given number of years.
C  A perpetuity is an annuity which lasts forever.
C  To be successful in business, organisations must make profits. Profits are needed in order to pay
dividends to shareholders and allow partners to make drawings.
A
 Discounted cash flow involves discounting future cash flows from a project in order to decide whether
the project will earn a satisfactory rate of return.
G  The two main discounted cash flow methods are the net present value (NPV) method and the internal
rate of return (IRR) method.
L
 The net present value (NPV) method calculates the present values of all items of income and
O expenditure related to an investment at a given rate of return, and then calculates a net total. If it is
B positive, the investment is considered to be acceptable. If it is negative, the investment is considered to

be unacceptable.
A  The IRR method determines the rate of interest (internal rate of return) at which the NPV = 0. The
L internal rate of return is therefore the rate of return on an investment.
 The payback period is the time that is required for the cash inflows from a capital investment project to
B
O
1 What does the term present value mean?
X
QUICK QUIZ
2 An annuity is a sum of money received every year.

. True
C
False
O
3 What is a perpetuity?
M 4 What are the two usual methods of capital expenditure appraisal using discounted cash flow methods?
5 What is the payback period?
6 A company is proposing to launch a new product. Incremental net cash inflows of $36,000 per annum
for five years are expected, starting at Time 1.
An existing machine, with a net book value of $85,000, would be used to manufacture the new
product. The machine could otherwise be sold now, Time 0, for $60,000. The machine, if used for the
manufacture of the new product, would be depreciated on a straight-line basis over five years, starting at
Time 1.
What are the relevant amounts that should be used, at Time 0 and Time 1, in the discounted cash flow
appraisal of the project?
Time 0 Time 1
A $0 $19,000
B $0 $24,000
C ($60,000) $36,000
D ($85,000) $36,000
7 What is the present value, at a discount rate of 12% of a cash inflow of $80,000?
(a) at the end of Year 6
(b) at the beginning of year 6?
8 A project would have a NPV of + $34,400 at a discount rate of 8% and an NPV of - $10,250 at a
discount rate of 11%. Using interpolation, what is the approximate IRR?
9 An investment project has net present values as follows:
Discount rate 11% per annum: net present value $35,170 positive A
Discount rate 15% per annum: net present value $6,040 positive.
What is the best estimate of the internal rate of return?
C
A 14·5% C
B
C
15·8%
19·5%
A
D 19·8%
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
1 The amount of money which must be invested now for n years at an interest rate of r% to give a future
sum of money at the time it will be due.
2  False
It is a constant sum of money received or paid each year for a given number of years.
3 An annuity which lasts forever.
4 The net present value (NPV) method
The internal rate of return (IRR) method
5 The payback period is the time that is required for the cash inflows of a capital investment project to
A 6 C
C 7 (a) $80,000  1/1.126 = $80,000  0.50663 = $40,530.
C (b) The beginning of Year 6 is the end of Year 5.
A $80,000  1/1.125 = $80,000  0.56743 = $45,394.
 NPVa 
8 IRR = a % +   b  a   %
 NPVa  NPVb
G 
= 8% + [34,400/34,400 - - 10,250]  (11 – 8)%
L = 8% + [34,400/44,650] 3%
= 8% + 2.3%
O = 10.3%
B 

NPVa 
 b  a  
NPV  NPV
A 9 B IRR = a % +  a b  %
L 
= 11% + 

35,170
35,170  6,040

 (15  11) %

= 11% + 4.8%
B = 15.8%
O Now try ...

X Attempt the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
. Number
C Q78
O Q79
M Q80
Q81
Q82
A
C
part C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
Cash management .
C
O
M
PART E: CASH MANAGEMENT
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
C H A P T E R
A
Previous chapters have described how costs and profits
are measured, and how estimates of cost are used to Cash and cash flows C
provide information for decision-making. This is the first
of several chapters on cash management, which is a
C
completely different aspect of the management of A
finances.
It explains the nature of cash inflows and outflows, and
how the cycle of cash inflows and outflows is related to G
the working capital cycle of purchasing, payments for
purchases, sales and receipts from sales. L
It also explains the important differences between net
cash flows and profitability. A business may be
O
profitable, but could fail because of a shortage of cash (or B
liquidity). This is why cash flows must be managed, as
well as profitability. A
L
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
1 Introduction E1 (a)
2 The cash flow cycle E1 (d), (e)
3 Types of cash transaction E1 (b)
4 Profits and cash flow E1 (c), (e)
5 Cash accounting and accruals accounting E1 (c), (e)
6 Cash flow management and liquidity management E1 (e)

E Cash management
1 Nature of cash and cash flow
(a) Define cash and cash flow K
(b) Outline the various sources of cash receipts and payments K

(including regular/exceptional revenue/capital receipts and
payments, and drawings)
(c) Describe the relationship between cash flow accounting and K
accruals accounting
(d) Distinguish between the cash flow pattern of different types S
of organisations
(e) Explain the importance of cash flow management and its K
A impact on liquidity and company survival (note: calculation of
ratios is not required)
C
C
A
1 Introduction
G You will have encountered the difference between cash and accruals accounting in your previous studies
L for financial accounting, but the distinction is important in this exam as well.
O This chapter provides an introduction to cash and credit management. You need to appreciate the links
B between them, and in particular how the key objectives of liquidity, profitability and security influence
management.
A You also need to understand how different types of cash flows have different patterns. Some cashflows will
L be regular, but others will be less frequent, or unpredictable, and these can have a major influence on an
organisation's cash position.
 For management accounting purposes cash includes petty cash, bank account balances and
B marketable securities. It also includes the un-used portion of any overdraft facility.
O  Cash flow is the movement of funds into and out of a business. It is the cycle of cash inflows
and outflows that determine a business’ solvency.
X
.
C 2 The cash flow cycle
O A business which fails to make profits will go under in the long term. However, a business which runs
M out of cash, even for a couple of months, will fail, despite the fact that it is basically profitable.
You will probably already have learned about cash and credit, for example in earlier studies. For Paper
MA2 Managing Costs and Finances however, you need to have familiarity with the planning aspects of
cash and credit, and how cash and credit are inter-related.
Performance Objective 10 requires you to determine and maintain appropriate levels of cash and
working capital. The knowledge you will gain in this chapter (along with that you will gain from
Chapter 19 on cash and treasury management) will help you to demonstrate your competence in this
area.
CHAPTER 18 // CASH AND CASH FLOWS
A business which fails to make profits will go under in the long term. However, a business which runs
out of cash, even for a couple of months, will fail, despite the fact that it is basically profitable. Why?
2.1 Example: David Co

David Co, a small business, has won a contract worth $1m from Goliath, which will be paid in equal
annual instalments of $200,000 over five years at the end of each year. David Co has a maximum bank
overdraft of $200,000. The work on the contract is completed at the end of year 2: a total of $750,000
was incurred on expenses, $200,000 in year 1 and $550,000 in year 2. The cash position of David Co
over these five years as a result of this contract is as follows.
Year 1 2 3 4 5
$ $ $ $ $
Brought forward (surplus/
overdraft) – – (200,000) (150,000) 50,000
Received from Goliath 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000
Payments to suppliers
Cash surplus/(overdraft)
(200,000)
–
(400,000)
(200,000)
(150,000)
(150,000)
–
50,000
–
250,000
A
Accounts payable outstanding 150,000 –
C
We can see that at the end of year 2, David Co is in trouble. C
(a) David Co has run up the maximum overdraft, but some suppliers have to wait over a year – until A
the end of year 3 – in order to get paid. Many will be unwilling to wait that long. Suppliers will
refuse to supply goods until they are paid for previous supplies. This will prevent the business
functioning at all. David Co cannot pay its bills on time, and suppliers can start legal proceedings G
for the business to be wound up.
(b) If the bank overdraft lasts for long enough, the bank may take a similar view, although the
L
overdraft will have been paid off by the end of year 4. Employees who are not paid can sue for O
breach of contract. They might also find alternative employment. The bank may worry about the
length of exposure. B
Although the contract is profitable, cash outflows and inflows are differently timed. David Co could have A
avoided this demise if it had planned things differently.
L
(a) David Co could have negotiated improved payment terms with Goliath. For example, annual
instalments of $275,000 at the end of year 1 and year 2, followed by instalments of $150,000
at the end of years 3, 4 and 5. This would have enabled the company to ‘match’ receipts against
payments to suppliers whilst utilising the overdraft facility, to ensure that all suppliers were paid B
on a timely basis. O
1 2 3 4 5
Year
$ $ $ $ $ X
Brought forward (surplus/
overdraft) – 75,000 (200,000) (50,000) 100,000
.
Received from Goliath
Payments to suppliers
275,000
(200,000)
275,000
(550,000)
150,000
–
150,000
–
150,000
–
C
Cash surplus/(overdraft) 75,000 (200,000) (50,000) 100,000 250,000 O
Accounts payable
outstanding
– – – – – M
(b) David Co could also have attempted to negotiate improved credit terms with suppliers based on
the agreed timing of receipts from Goliath.
2.2 Working capital

Working capital is the difference between a firm's current assets and current liabilities. These are assets
or liabilities which are, or can be turned into, cash.
The management of cash, receivables and payables is essentially a cycle, a flow of funds in and out of
the business.
Working capital is the net difference between current assets (mainly inventory, receivables and cash)
and current liabilities (such as payables and a bank overdraft).
(a) Current assets are items which are either cash already, or which will soon lead to the receipt of
cash. Inventories will be sold to customers and create receivables; and customers will soon pay in
cash for their purchases.
(b) Current liabilities are items which will soon have to be paid for with cash. Payables will have to
A be paid and bank overdrafts are usually regarded as short-term borrowing which may need to be
repaid fairly quickly (or on demand, ie immediately). In statements of financial position, the word
C 'current' is applied to inventories, receivables, short-term investments and cash (current assets)
and amounts due for payment within one year's time (current liabilities).
C
A
2.3 The working capital cycle
G The working capital cycle measures the period of time between cash outflows for materials and cash
inflows from customers.
L The working capital cycle measures the period of time between the time cash is paid out for raw
O materials and the time cash is received in from customers for goods sold.
B (a) A firm buys raw materials, probably on credit.
A (b) It holds the raw materials for some time in stores before being issued to the production
department and turned into an item of finished goods.
L (c) The finished goods might be kept in a warehouse for some time before they are eventually sold to
customers.
B (d) By this time, the firm will probably have paid for the raw materials purchased.
(e) If customers buy the goods on credit, it will be some time before the cash from the sales is
O eventually received.
X RAW
. MATERIALS
C PAYABLES
O WORK IN
Payments
for supplies
M PROGRESS
CASH CYCLE
OR
OPERATING CASH
CYCLE
FINISHED
GOODS
Received for
goods sold
PROFIT IN RECEIVABLES
2.3.1 Example: working capital cycle

Suppose that a firm buys raw materials on 1½ months' credit, holds them in store for 1 month and then
issues them to the production department. The production cycle is very short, but finished goods are
held for 1 month before they are sold. Customers take two months' credit. The working capital cycle
would be:
Months
Raw materials inventory turnover period 1.0
Less: credit taken from suppliers (1.5)
Finished goods inventory turnover period 1.0
Receivables' payments period 2.0
Working capital cycle 2.5
There would be a gap of 21/2 months between paying cash for raw materials and receiving cash
(including profits) from customers.
Suppose the firm purchases its raw materials on 1 January. The sequence of events would then be:
A
Purchase of raw materials
Date
1 Jan C
Issue of materials to production (one month after purchase)
Payment made to suppliers (1½ months after purchase)
1 Feb
15 Feb
C
Sale of finished goods (one month after production begins) 1 Mar A
Receipt of cash from customers (two months after sale) 1 May
The working capital cycle is the period of 2½ months from 15 February, when payment is made to
suppliers, until 1 May, when cash is received from customers. G
2.4 Different types of business L
Different types of business have their own working capital cycle characteristics. O
In a retailing business, most sales are for cash or by credit card and debit card, and the company B
therefore receives most of its cash income at the time of sale. Large supermarket chains which sell
goods within a few days of purchase might not pay their suppliers until after the goods have been sold
A
and the cash received. L
In a manufacturing business, many sales will be on credit, as will many purchases. The working capital
cycle will therefore be more conventional, with payments preceding receipts.
B
EXAM FOCUS POINT
O
X
In later chapters we shall also discuss ways in which businesses can reduce various components of the
working capital cycle – something that is frequently tested in exams. .
C
3 Types of cash transaction
O
M
Cash transactions can be capital or revenue, exceptional or unexceptional and regular or irregular.
Previously, we concentrated on working capital, in other words cash or near-cash aspects of a

business's trading operations. There are many types of cash transaction. They differ in their purpose,
form and frequency.
(a) Capital and revenue items

(i) Capital items generally relate to the long-term functioning of the business, such as raising
money from shareholders, or acquiring non-current assets.
(ii) Revenue items generally relate to day-to-day operations, as in the operating cycle,
including other matters such as overdraft interest.
(b) Exceptional and unexceptional items
(i) Exceptional items are unusual. For example the costs of closing down part of a business.
(ii) Unexceptional items include everything else. You have to be careful using this distinction,
as the phrase 'exceptional item' has a precise meaning in the preparation of a company's
financial statements.
(c) Regular and irregular items
A (i) Regular items occur at predictable intervals. Such intervals might be frequent such as the
payment of wages every week or month, or relatively infrequent, such as the payment of
C dividends twice a year.
C (ii) Irregular items do not occur at regular intervals eg purchase of new machinery, disaster
recovery expenses.
A
3.1 Cash outflows
G Cash outflows can occur for a number of reasons. Here are some examples.
(a) Payments to:
L (i) Suppliers for goods purchased
O (ii) Employees for wages and bonuses
B This is revenue expenditure.
A (b) Payments to government for taxes owing. The payment of corporation tax may be an annual
disbursement.
L (c) Payments to suppliers of finance:
(i) Dividends to shareholders
B (ii)
(iii)
Interest to debentureholders, bondholders, banks
Drawings by sole traders or partners
O The regularity of these payments will vary. Dividends are normally paid twice a year.
X (d) Payments to cover the purchase cost of non-current assets, such as buildings and equipment.
. These are capital payments in that they are purchased for long-term use in the business. They
may be irregular.
C (e) Payments to acquire investments:
O (i) New businesses or takeovers of companies (capital)
M (ii) Short-term financial instruments to use surplus cash to turn a quick profit
(f) Purchases of foreign currency for trading overseas.
3.2 Cash inflows

Cash inflows also come in many kinds.
(a) Cash received for sales
(i) Immediately from cash customers
(ii) From customers for sales made on credit
These are revenue receipts.
(b) Long-term grants from government institutions or from the European Commission. The use of
such 'exceptional' receipts will depend on the terms of the grant.
(c) Cash received from providers of finance:
(i) Equity share capital invested in the business
(ii) Long-term loans provided by banks and other financial institutions.
These are capital receipts, as they are for long-term investment in the business. Only rarely do
companies raise share capital.
(d) Cash received from:
(i) Sale of non-current assets after their useful life
(ii) The liquidation (ie conversion into cash) of short-term investments
4 Profits and cash flow

A
Accounts showing trading profits are not the same as statements of cash flow. C
A company can make losses but still have a net cash income from trading. A company can also make C
profits but have a net cash deficit on its trading operations. A
4.1 Differences between trading profits and cash flows
We considered some of the differences between trading profits and cash flows earlier in your studies. G
The main differences are summarised below.
L
(a) Cash may be obtained from a transaction which has nothing to do with profit or loss. For
example, an issue of shares or loan stock for cash has no effect on profit but is obviously a source O
of cash. Similarly, an increase in bank overdraft provides a source of cash for payments, but it is
not reported in the statement of profit or loss (income statement). B
(b) Cash may be paid for the purchase of non-current assets. The charge in the statement of profit A
or loss is depreciation, which is only a part of an asset's cost, and which is not included in the
cash statement as it is not a movement of cash.
L
(c) When a non-current asset is sold there is a profit or loss on sale equal to the difference between
the sale proceeds and the 'net book value' of the asset in the statement of financial position at the
time it is sold.
B
(d) Profit is sales minus the cost of sales. Operational cash flow is the difference between cash O
received and cash paid from trading. Cash received differs from sales because of changes in the
amount of receivables. Cash paid differs from the cost of sales because of changes in the amount
X
of inventory and payables. Operational cash flow therefore differs from profit. .
The statement of profit or loss reports the total value of sales in a year. If goods are sold on
credit, the cash receipts will differ from the value of sales as customers will pay after the year
C
end. O
$
Customers owing money at the start of the year X M
Sales during the year X
Total money due from customers X
Less customers owing money at the end of the year (X)
Cash receipts from customers during the year X
Similarly, the statement of profit or loss reports the cost of goods sold during the year, but some
goods are purchased on credit, and some remain in store over the year end.
The relationship between the cost of materials in the materials cost of sales and cash payments
for materials purchased is as follows:
$
Cost of sales X
Closing inventory at the end of the year X
X
Opening inventory at the start of the year (X)
Purchases during the year Y
Payments still owing to suppliers at the start of the year X
Purchases during the year Y
X
$
Less payments still owing to suppliers at the end of the year (X)
Equals cash payments to suppliers during the year X
A You therefore need to watch out carefully for timing differences between sales being made and cash
C being received, and purchases/expenditure and cash payments.
Suppose that a company buys and resells products. Gross profit from trading and operational cash flows
C from trading can be compared as follows.
A Profit
Sales – Cost of sales = Profit
G Operational cash flow

Cash in – Cash out = Operational cash flow
L Notes
O Cash in = Sales + Opening receivables – Closing receivables
Purchases = Cost of sales + Closing inventory – Opening inventory
B Cash out = Purchases + Opening payables – Closing payables
A QUESTION Operational cash flow

L Assume that Beta achieved sales turnover in a particular year of $200,000 and the cost of sales was
$170,000. Inventories were $12,000, payables $11,000 and receivables $15,000 at the start of the
year. At the end of the year, inventories were $21,000, payables were $14,000 and receivables
B $24,000. Find out the profits and the operational cash flow resulting from the year's trading.
O
ANSWER
X Operational
. Profits
$
cash flow
$
C Sales 200,000 200,000
Opening receivables ( received in year) 15,000
O Closing receivables (outstanding at year end) (24,000)
M Cash in 191,000
Cost of sales 170,000 170,000
Closing inventory (bought, but not yet used, in year) 21,000
Opening inventory (used, but not bought, in year) (12,000)
Purchases in year 179,000
Opening payables ( paid in year) 11,000
Closing payables (outstanding at year end) (14,000)
Cash out 176,000
Profit/operational cash flow 30,000 15,000
Reconciliation
$ $
Profit 30,000
Less increase in receivables (9,000)
Less increase in inventory (9,000)
Plus increase in payables 3,000 (15,000)
Operational cash inflow 15,000
EXAM FOCUS POINT
Don't try to memorise whether you need to add or subtract receivables, payables or inventories as this
will lead to mistakes in the exam. Rather, try to understand the purpose of what you are doing and it
will come naturally to you in the exam.
A
C
4.2 Negative cash flows C
A company that trades profitably should earn cash surpluses, at least in the longer term. However, a
profitable company can also suffer from negative cash flows.
A
(a) It might spend cash on non-current asset purchases and extra working capital investments.
(b) It might use cash to pay for business acquisitions. G
(c) High inflation rates might force a company to increase its funding of business assets in money L
terms, even when there is no real growth in the business.
O
(d) Dividends might exceed cash surpluses for the year. In recession, for example, profits fall but
there will be pressure from shareholders to maintain or increase the dividend. Furthermore, the B
terms of funding arrangements such as business loans may require the company to pay out large
sums in interest.
A
(e) Debt repayments may mean that a profitable company has a negative cash flow. L
The difference between profit and cash flow has important implications.
(a) If a company is profitable but short of cash, one reason could be an increase in the other B
elements of working capital. If a company were to seek credit from a bank to finance the growth
in working capital, the bank might ask the management whether operational cash flows could be O
improved by squeezing working capital, and:
X
(i) Reducing receivables
(ii) Reducing inventories, or .
(iii) Taking more credit from suppliers
C
Better control over working capital could remove the need to borrow.
O
(b) If a company is making losses, it could try to maintain a positive operational cash flow by taking
more credit (ie by increasing its payables and so reducing working capital). M
4.2.1 Negative operational cash flows: implications
Negative cash flows from operations would normally be an indicator of financial distress, unless the
company is in a period of rapid (and profitable) growth and is having to invest heavily in additional
working capital (inventories and receivables). If a company has negative cash flows from operations for
at least two of the previous three years, it will probably be safe to conclude that its financial position is
deteriorating significantly.
5 Cash accounting and accruals accounting
Cash budgets are not prepared according to the accruals concept, which tries to ensure income and
expenditure are matched. Instead they are prepared on a cash (receipts and payments) basis.
The distinction between profits and cash flow has been a theme of this chapter so far, but it is best to
state it boldly. You must understand the principle, which is applied in nearly all businesses' accounts,
that accounts are not prepared on a cash basis but on an accruals (or earnings) basis. That is, a sale or
purchase is dealt with in the year in which it is made, even if cash changes hands in a later year.
Revenue must be matched against the costs incurred in earning it.
Most businesses, even if they do not sell on credit, make purchases on credit. If cash accounting is
used, then accounts do not present a true picture of the business's activities in any given period.
A 5.1 Example: accruals concept

C Brenda has a business importing and selling model Corgi dogs. In May 20X7 she makes the following
purchases and sales.
C Invoice date Numbers bought/sold Amount Date paid
A Purchases
7.5.X7 20
$
100 1.6.X7
Sales
G 8.5.X7
12.5.X7
4
6
40
60
1.6.X7
1.6.X7
L 23.5.X7 10 100 1.7.X7
O What is Brenda's profit for May?
B Solution
A Cash basis
$
L Revenue
Purchases
0
0
Profit/Loss 0
Accruals basis
B Sales ($40 + $60 + $100) 200
O Purchases
Profit
(100)
100
X Obviously, the accruals basis gives a 'truer' picture than the cash basis. Brenda has no cash to show for
. her efforts until June but her customers are legally bound to pay her and she is legally bound to pay for
her purchases.
C The accruals concept states that, in computing profit, revenue earned must be matched against the
O expenditure incurred in earning it. This is illustrated in the example of Brenda; profit of $100 was
computed by matching the revenue ($200) earned from the sale of 20 Corgis against the cost ($100) of
M acquiring them.
If, however, Brenda had only sold 18 Corgis, it would have been incorrect to charge her statement of
profit or loss with the cost of 20 Corgis, as she still has two Corgis in stock. If she intends to sell them in
June she is likely to make a profit on the sale. Therefore, only the purchase cost of 18 Corgis ($90)
should be matched with her sales revenue, leaving her with a profit of $90.
Her statement of financial position would therefore look like this.

$
Current assets
Inventory (at cost, ie 2 × $5) 10
Receivables (18 × $10) 180
190
Equity
Retained earnings 90
Current liabilities
Payables 100
190
In this example, the concepts of going concern and accruals are linked. Because the business is
assumed to be a going concern it is possible to carry forward the cost of the unsold Corgis as a charge
against profits of the next period.
If Brenda decided to give up selling Corgis, then the going concern concept would no longer apply and A
the value of the two Corgis in the statement of financial position would be a break-up valuation rather
than cost. Similarly, if the two unsold Corgis were now unlikely to be sold at more than their cost of $5 C
each (say, because of damage or a fall in demand) then they should be recorded on the balance sheet at
their net realisable value (ie the likely eventual sales price less any expenses to be incurred to make C
them saleable, eg paint) rather than cost. A
5.1.1 The accruals concept defined
The accruals basis of accounting is described the IASB's Framework for the Preparation and G
Presentation of Financial Statements.
L
'Financial Statements are prepared on the accrual basis of accounting. Under this basis the effects of
transactions and other events are recognised when they occur (and not as cash or its equivalent is O
received or paid) and they are recorded in the accounting records and reported in the financial
statements of the periods to which they relate.' B
A
Company legislation gives legal recognition to the accruals concept, stating that: 'all income and charges L
relating to the financial year to which the accounts relate shall be taken into account, without regard to
the date of receipt or payment.' This has the effect, as we have seen, of requiring businesses to take
account of sales and purchases when made, rather than when paid for, and also to carry unsold stock
forward in the statement of financial position rather than to deduct its cost from profit for the period.
B
O
5.1.2 Relevance of accruals basis of accounting
The accruals basis of accounting is a way of letting investors know how much profit a business has
X
made by matching income and expenditure. It has no relevance whatsoever to day to day cash .
management.
C
5.2 The importance of cash flow information O
Survival in business depends on the ability to generate cash. Cash flow information directs attention M
towards this critical issue.
Advantages of cash flow accounting being employed in financial reporting are as follows.
(a) Potential lenders will be more interested in an entity's ability to repay them than in its
profitability.
(b) Cash flow reporting satisfies the needs of other financial report users better:
(i) For management, it provides the sort of information on which decisions should be taken:
(in management accounting, 'relevant costs' to a decision are future cash flows);
traditional profit accounting does not help with decision-making
(ii) For shareholders and auditors, cash flow accounting can provide a satisfactory basis for
stewardship accounting
(c) Cash flow forecasts are easier to prepare, as well as more useful, than profit forecasts.
6 Cash flow management and liquidity management
Cash flow management involves ensuring that the organisation has sufficient cash to meet its
obligations to settle liabilities when payment becomes due. It involves careful management of working
capital.
Organisations should be able to settle their liabilities when these become due for payment. Failure to
pay suppliers on time could lead to their refusal to grant credit terms in the future. Banks expect to
receive interest and capital repayments on time from their borrowers, and may take action against
A borrowers who are in default.
C Cash flow management involves monitoring cash flows (inflows and outflows) to ensure that there will
be sufficient cash to meet payment obligations when they fall due, or to take measures in advance to
C obtain the cash that will be needed (for example by negotiating a bank overdraft facility). This aspect of
A cash flow management is also known as liquidity management.

Cash flow problems can occur when an organisation has excessive amounts of working capital, in
particular excessive inventories and trade receivables.
G (a) Inventories have to be paid for, and the larger the amount of inventories, the more cash is tied
up. An increase in inventory will reduce cash flows.
L
(b) Trade receivables are amounts of money owed to the organisation. Cash inflows are delayed by
O giving credit to customers and giving them time to pay.
B (c) Payments to suppliers take cash out of the business. Paying creditors earlier than necessary, or
failing to negotiate favourable credit terms from suppliers, means that cash payments occur
A sooner than they need to. This affects cash flows and liquidity.
L An organisation should monitor its working capital cycle – its investment in inventory and trade
receivables, and the credit that it takes from suppliers – to ensure that cash flows into the business
reasonably quickly and that:
B  The time between acquiring materials or incurring payments to make finished goods (less the
O credit period taken from suppliers) and

 The time that cash is eventually received from customers after the goods have been sold is kept
X to a reasonable level and is not excessively long.
. Customers should not be allowed to take more credit than agreed in their credit terms. If they are late
making payments, measures should be taken to chase payments – by sending written or telephone
C reminders, and so on. An organisation should monitor its trade receivables closely, to identify late payers
O and take action. Inventory should not be allowed to become more than is necessary for efficient
operations.
M
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 You will have encountered the difference between cash and accruals accounting in your previous studies
for financial accounting, but the distinction is important in this exam as well.
 A business which fails to make profits will go under in the long term. However, a business which runs
out of cash, even for a couple of months, will fail, despite the fact that it is basically profitable.
 Working capital is the difference between a firm's current assets and current liabilities. These are assets
or liabilities which are, or can be turned into, cash.
 The working capital cycle measures the period of time between cash outflows for materials and cash
inflows from customers.
 Cash transactions can be capital or revenue, exceptional or unexceptional and regular or irregular.
 Accounts showing trading profits are not the same as statements of cash flow. A
 Cash budgets are not prepared according to the accruals concept, which tries to ensure income and
expenditure are matched. Instead they are prepared on a cash (receipts and payments) basis.
C
 Cash flow management or liquidity management includes the management of inventory levels, trade
C
receivables and trade payables, to ensure that the working capital cycle (or operating cycle) does not
become too long.
A
G
L
QUICK QUIZ
1 Which of the following is not an element of working capital?

A Inventories C Trade payables O
B Cash D Non-current assets
B
2 What period of time is measured by the working capital cycle?
A
3 The difference between capital and revenue flows is that capital flows relate to the long-term functioning
of the business; revenue flows relate to day-to-day operations. L
True
False B
4 Why are profits and cash flows different? O
5 Name the three main focuses of cash and credit management. X
6 The ……………………………. is the matching of revenues and costs to the period to which they relate. .
7 Payments to suppliers of finance include: C
(i)
(ii)
Dividends
Interest
(iii)
(iv)
Repayments of trade credit
Drawings
O
A (i) and (ii) only C (i), (ii) and (iv) only M
B (ii) and (iii) only D (ii), (iii) and (iv) only
1 D Working capital is current assets less current liabilities.

2 The time between payment of cash for raw materials and receipt of cash from customers.
3 True. Capital relates to the long-term, revenue the short-term.
4 Profits are calculated using various non-cash items, whereas cash flows include receipts and payments
and relate to activities that happened in other periods.
5 Profitability, liquidity and security/safety.
6 The accruals concept is the matching of revenues and costs to the period to which they relate.
7 C Dividends, interest and drawings are examples of payments to suppliers of finance. Payments to
trade suppliers are not.
A
C
C
A
Now try ...
G Attempt the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
L Number
O Q83
B Q84
A Q85
L Q86
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
C H A P T E R
A
This fairly short chapter continues with the explanation of
cash management within a business or public sector Cash and treasury C
organisation. It outlines the functions of a treasury C
department and describes techniques of cash handling.
There is also some assessment of how cash management,
management A
and in particular cash balances and borrowing, may be
affected by changes in the economic or financial
environment. G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
1 Treasury management E2 (a)

2 Cash handling procedures E2 (b)
3 The economic and financial environment E2 (d)

E Cash management
2 Cash management
(a) Outline the basic treasury functions K
(b) Describe cash handling procedures K
(d) Describe how trends in the economic and financial K

environment can affect management of cash balances
A 1 Treasury management
C
Treasury management in a modern enterprise covers various areas, and in a large business may be a
C centralised function.
A Treasury management can be defined as 'the corporate handing of all financial matters, the generation
of external and internal funds for business, the management of currencies and cash flows, and the
complex strategies, policies and procedures of corporate finance' (Association of Corporate Treasurers).
G
L Large companies rely heavily on the financial and currency markets. These markets are volatile, with
O interest rates and foreign exchange rates changing continually and by significant amounts. To manage
cash (funds) and currency efficiently, many large companies have set up a separate treasury
B department.
A 1.1 The role of the treasurer

L The Association of Corporate Treasurers has listed the experience it will require from its student
members before they are eligible for full membership of the Association. This list of required experience
gives a good indication of the core roles of treasurership.
B (a) Corporate financial objectives
O (i) Financial aims and strategies
X (ii)
(iii)
Financial and treasury policies
Financial and treasury systems
. (b) Liquidity management
C (i) Working capital and money transmission management
O (ii)
(iii)
Banking relationships and arrangements
Money management
M Cash management and liquidity management involve making sure that the organisation has the
liquid funds it needs and invests any surplus funds, even for very short terms. In cash-rich
companies, the treasurer will be heavily involved in the investment of surplus funds to earn a
good yield until they are required again for another purpose. A good relationship with one or more
banks is desirable.
(c) Funding management
(i) Funding policies and procedures
(ii) Sources of funds
(iii) Types of funds
The treasurer needs to know where funds are obtainable; for how long; at what interest rate;
whether security would be required or not and whether interest rates would be fixed or variable.
CHAPTER 19 // CASH AND TREASURY MANAGEMENT
(d) Currency management

(i) Exposure policies and procedures
(ii) Exchange dealing, including futures and options
(iii) International monetary economics and exchange regulations
A company (such as a multinational) which is involved in international transactions faces the
possibility of exposure to foreign exchange risk: the values of assets and liabilities denominated in
one currency will change with fluctuations in the exchange rate against another.
(e) Corporate finance
Corporate finance is concerned with matters such as:
(i) Raising share capital
(ii) Its form (ordinary or preference, or different classes of ordinary shares)
(iii) Obtaining a stock exchange listing, dividend policy
(iv) Financial information for management
(v) Mergers A
(vi)
(vii)
Acquisitions
Business sales
C
(f) Related subjects C
(i) Corporate taxation (domestic and foreign tax) A
(ii) Risk management (swaps, options) and insurance
(iii) Pension fund investment management
G
2 Cash handling procedures L
O
Cash handling procedures should prevent fraud or theft.
B
2.1 Objectives A
The most important objectives of cash handling procedures relating to cash receipts and payments are: L
 All monies received are recorded
 All monies received are banked B


Cash and cheques are safeguarded against loss or theft
All payments are authorised, made to the correct recipients and recorded O
 Payments are not made twice for the same liability X
Segregation of duties is particularly important here. The person responsible for receiving and recording .
cash when it arrives in the post should not be the same as the person responsible for banking it. Ideally
the cash book should be written up by a further staff member, and a fourth staff member should C
reconcile the various records of amounts received. O
Records of cash are obviously also at the heart of a company's accounting records; therefore if these
accounting records are to fulfil legal requirements, cash must be recorded promptly.
M
2.2 Key procedures
Cash handling procedures relating to receipts include:
 Proper post-opening arrangements
 Prompt recording
 Prompt banking
 Reconciliation of records of cash received and banked
The following detailed matters should be considered.
2.2.1 Cash at bank and in hand – receipts

Segregation of duties between the various functions listed below is particularly important.
Recording of receipts by post
 Safeguards to prevent interception of mail between receipt and opening

 Appointment of responsible person to supervise mail
 Protection of cash and cheques (restrictive crossing)
 Amounts received listed when post opened
 Post stamped with date of receipt
Recording of cash sales and collections
 Restrictions on receipt of cash (by cashiers only, or by salesmen etc)

 Evidencing of receipt of cash
A – Serially numbered receipt forms
C – Cash registers incorporating sealed till rolls
C  Clearance of cash offices and registers

 Agreement of cash collections with till rolls
A  Agreement of cash collections with bankings and cash and sales records
 Investigation of cash shortages and surpluses
G General controls over recording
L  Prompt maintenance of records (cash books, ledger accounts)
O  Limitation of duties of receiving cashiers
B  Holiday arrangements
A  Giving and recording of receipts
L – Retained copies
– Serially numbered receipts books
– Custody of receipt books
B – Comparisons with cash book records and bank paying in slips
O Banking
X  Daily bankings
 Make-up and comparison of paying-in slips against initial receipt records and cash book
.  Banking of receipts intact/control of disbursements
C Safeguarding of cash and bank accounts
O  Restrictions on opening new bank accounts
M  Limitations on cash floats held

 Restrictions on payments out of cash received
 Restrictions on access to cash registers and offices
 Independent checks on cash floats
 Surprise cash counts
 Custody of cash outside office hours
 Custody over supply and issue of cheques
 Preparation of cheques restricted (person responsible should be separate from purchase ledger)
Safeguarding of cash and bank accounts
 Safeguards over mechanically signed cheques/cheques carrying printed signatures

 Restrictions on issue of blank or bearer cheques
 Safeguarding of IOUs, cash in transit
 Insurance arrangements
 Bank reconciliations
– Issue of bank statements
– Frequency of reconciliations by independent person
– Reconciliation procedures
– Treatment of longstanding unpresented cheques
– Stop payment notice on unpresented cheques
– Sequence of cheque numbers is confirmed as complete
– Comparison of reconciliation with cash books A
C
2.2.2 Cash at bank and in hand – payments
C
Cash handling procedures over payments include: A
 Restriction of access to cash and cheques
 Procedures for preparation and authorisation of payments
G
The arrangements for controlling payments will depend to a great extent on the nature of business
transacted, the volume of payments involved and the size of the company. L
The cashier should generally not be concerned with keeping or writing-up books of account other than O
those recording disbursements nor should he have access to, or be responsible for the custody of,
securities, title deeds or negotiable instruments belonging to the company. B
The person responsible for preparing cheques or traders' credit lists should not himself be a cheque A
signatory. Cheque signatories in turn should not be responsible for recording payments.
L
Cheque payments
 Cheque requisitions
– Appropriate supporting documentation B
–
–
Approval by appropriate staff
Presentation to cheque signatories
O
– Cancellation (crossing/recording cheque number) X
 Authority to sign cheques .
–
–
Signatories should not also approve cheque requisitions
Limitations on authority to specific amounts
C
– Number of signatories (all cheques/larger cheques require more than one signature) O
– Prohibitions over signing of blank cheques
M
 Prompt despatch of signed cheques
 Obtaining of paid cheques from banks
 Payments recorded promptly in cash book and ledger
Cash payments
 Authorisation of expenditure
 Cancellation of vouchers to ensure cannot be paid
 Limits on disbursements
 Rules on cash advances to employees, IOUs and cheque cashing
Also, remember that segregation of duties is a very important objective throughout the cash system.
3 The economic and financial environment
Trends in the economic and financial environment can affect management of cash balances.
Trends in the economic and financial environment can affect management of cash balances.
(a) The economic environment refers to economic conditions, and in particular the rate of growth or
decline in a national economy or the global economy. Economies go through periods of high
growth, lower growth and sometimes negative growth (recession).
(b) Major factors in the financial environment are the level of interest rates and the relative ease or
difficulty in borrowing or raising capital.
When the growth rate in the economy is slowing down, or when the economy is entering a period of
recession, profitability will fall for many businesses, and some may start to incur losses. When economic
A conditions are unfavourable, interest rates will often fall and be relatively low. Businesses may therefore:
 Try to preserve their cash, and build up cash balances, in the expectation that the money will
C soon be needed.
C  Be reluctant to borrow.
A A different attitude to cash balances may be prevalent when the economy is in a period of high growth.
Business managers may be very confident about the future prospects for their business, and they may be
much more willing to invest and take risks. In doing this, they may be prepared to operate with
G relatively low cash balances and to borrow from their bank in order to invest for growth.
L In a period of growth, some successful businesses should generate large net cash inflows, and build up
their cash balances. Interest rates tend to increase when the economy is expanding rapidly, and if a
O large cash balance builds up, a company may be willing to invest it short term, perhaps anticipating an
opportunity to use their cash to make an acquisition.
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 Treasury management in a modern enterprise covers various areas, and in a large business may be a
centralised function.
 Cash handling procedures should prevent fraud or theft.
 Cash handling procedures relating to receipts include:

– Proper post-opening arrangements
– Prompt recording
– Prompt banking
– Reconciliation of records of cash received and banked
 Cash handling procedures over payments include:
–
–
Restriction of access to cash and cheques
Procedures for preparation and authorisation of payments.
A
 Trends in the economic and financial environment can affect management of cash balances. C
C
A
QUICK QUIZ
1 Under what headings do the functions of a treasurer fall?

2 Which of the following are functions carried out by a treasury department? G
(1)
(2)
Negotiating arrangements with bankers
Dealing in foreign exchange
L
(3) Preparing the corporate budget and business plan O
(4) Involvement in business acquisitions and sales
B
A 1 and 2 only
B 3 and 4 only A
C
D
1, 2 and 4 only
All of the above L
3 List three key cash handling procedures.
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
1 The main categories are: corporate financial objectives; liquidity management; funding management;
currency management; corporate finance.

2 C While the treasury department will be involved in the preparation of the cash budget, it is
unlikely to have a major role in the wider budgeting and planning process.
3 Key cash handling procedures include:
 Segregation of duties
 Physical security
 Accountability
 Bank reconciliations
A
C
C
A Now try ...
G
Number
L
Q87
O Q88
B Q89
A Q90
L Q91
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
C H A P T E R
A
An important part of cash management is cash
forecasting or cash budgeting, to establish whether the Forecasting cash flows C
organisation will have the cash that it needs to carry on in
business.
C
Cash forecasts may be used to identify any shortage or A
surplus of cash that will occur in the future, so that
measures can be taken to obtain cash from other sources
to cover any expected shortage (or to cut back on G
spending or defer planned major expenditures), or to
invest cash for the period of time that a surplus is L
O
expected to continue.
This chapter describes how cash budgets are prepared
and used for planning and control purposes, and how B
statistical techniques such as indexing for inflation may
be used to prepare cash forecasts. A
L
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
1 Introduction E3 (a)
2 The purpose of cash budgets and forecasts E3 (a)
3 Cash budgets in receipts and payments format E3 (c)
4 Control and corrective action E3 (d)
5 Cash budgeting with inflation E3 (b)
6 Time series analysis E3 (b)
7 Finding the trend E3 (b)
8 Finding the seasonal variations E3 (b)
9 Using time series analysis in cash budgeting E3 (b)

E Cash management
3 Cash budgets
(a) Explain the objectives of cash budgeting K
(b) Explain and illustrate statistical techniques used in cash S

forecasting including moving averages and allowance for
inflation
(c) Prepare a cash budget/forecast S
(d) Explain and illustrate how a cash budget can be used as a S

mechanism for monitoring and control
A
C
C 1 Introduction
A
The main purpose of preparing cash budgets is to forecast whether there are likely to be cash shortages
or large surpluses.
G Don't however spend all your time on the mechanics of budget preparation. The main purpose of
L preparing budgets is to measure whether there are likely to be cash shortages (or large surpluses). When
looking at a cash flow forecast, you need to recognise if the business is likely to have problems, and
O recommend what can be done to rectify them.
B
A EXAM FOCUS POINT
L Preparing cash budgets is a vital skill for the exam. Practise as often as you can.
B
O 2 The purpose of cash budgets and forecasts
X
Cash flow forecasts provide an early warning of liquidity problems and funding needs.
.
C Cash forecasting is vital to ensure that sufficient funds will be available when they are needed to sustain
the activities of an enterprise, at an acceptable cost.
O Forecasts provide an early warning of liquidity problems, by estimating:
M  How much cash is required
 When it is required
 How long it is required for
 Whether it will be available from anticipated sources
A company must know when it might need to borrow and for how long, not just what amount of funding
could be required.
Banks have increasingly insisted that customers provide cash forecasts (or a business plan that includes
a cash forecast) as a precondition of lending. A newly established company wishing to open a bank
account will also normally be asked to supply a business plan. The cash and sales forecasts will also
allow the bank to monitor the progress of the new company, and control its lending more effectively.
CHAPTER 20 // FORECASTING CASH FLOWS
2.1 Deficiencies
Any forecast deficiency of cash will have to be funded.
(a) Borrowing. If borrowing arrangements are not already secured, a source of funds will have to be
found. If a company cannot fund its cash deficits it could be wound up.
(b) The firm can make arrangements to sell any short-term financial investments to raise cash.
(c) The firm can delay payments to suppliers, or pull in payments from customers. This is sometimes
known as leading and lagging.
Because cash forecasts cannot be entirely accurate, companies should have contingency funding,
available from a surplus cash balance and liquid investments, or from a bank facility. The approximate
size of contingency margin will vary from company to company, according to the cyclical nature of the
business and the approach of its cash planners.
Forecasting gives management time to arrange its funding. If planned in advance, instead of a panic A
measure to avert a cash crisis, a company can more easily choose when to borrow, and will probably
obtain a lower interest rate. C
C
2.2 Forecasting cash surpluses
A
Many cash-generative businesses are less reliant on high quality cash forecasts. If a cash surplus is
forecast, having an idea of both its size and how long it will exist could help decide how best to invest it.
In some cases, the amount of interest earned from surplus cash could be significant for the company's G
earnings. The company might then need a forecast of its interest earnings in order to indicate its
prospective earnings per share to stock market analysts and institutional investors. L
O
QUESTION Changes affecting cash flow
Give examples of unforeseen changes which may affect cash flow patterns
B
A
ANSWER L
Your list might have included some of the following:
(a) A change in the general economic environment – an economic recession will cause a slump in
trade B
(b) A new product, launched by a competitor, which takes business away from a company's O
traditional and established product lines
X
(c) New cost-saving product technology, which forces the company to invest in the new technology
to remain competitive .
(d) Moves by competitors which have to be countered (for example a price reduction or a sales C
O
promotion)
(e) Changes in consumer preferences, resulting in a fall in demand
(f) Government action against certain trade practices or against trade with a country that a company
M
has dealings with
(g) Strikes or other industrial action
(h) Natural disasters, such as floods or fire damage, which curtail an organisation's activities
2.3 Receipts and payments forecasts
Cash budgets and forecasts can be used for control reporting. A forecast can be prepared of cash
receipts and payments, and net cash flows. This is known as a cash flow based forecast.
A cash budget is a detailed forecast of cash receipts, payments and balances over a planning period. It
is formally adopted as part of the business plan or master budget for the period.
Cash flow based forecasts (receipts and payments) are forecasts of the amount and timing of cash
receipts and payments, net cash flows and changes in cash balances, for each time period covered by
the forecast. Cash flow based forecasts include cash budgets up to a year or so ahead and short-term
forecasts of just a few days.
A cash budget (or cash flow budget) is a detailed forecast of expected cash receipts, payments and
balances over a budget period.
A
C The cash budget is formally adopted as a planning target for the budget period. It is part of the annual
C master budget. It is usually prepared by taking a profits budget for the period and adjusting the figures
for sales, and costs of sales, into cash flows (receipts and payments).
A In companies that use cash flow reporting for control purposes, there will probably be:
 A cash budget divided into monthly or quarterly periods
G 

A statement comparing actual cash flows against the monthly or quarterly budget
A revised cash forecast
L  A statement comparing actual cash flows against a revised forecast
O 2.3.1 Revised and rolling forecasts

B Revised forecasts should be prepared to keep forecasts relevant and up-to-date. Examples would be a
A revised three-month forecast every month for the next three-month period, or a revised forecast each
month or each quarter up to the end of the annual budget period.
L A rolling forecast is a forecast that is continually updated. A rolling forecast can be a 12-month forecast
which is updated at the end of every month, with a further month added to the end of the forecast
period and with figures for the intervening 11 months revised if necessary.
B Cash flow control with budgets and revised forecasts
O Prepare revised
X forecast RF2 for
month 3, month 4, etc.
. Prepare budget for
Compare actual cash
flows against budget
C month 1, month 2, etc and revised forecast RF1
O
M Month 0 Month 1 Month 2 Month 3
Prepare revised Prepare revised

forecast RF1 for forecast RF3 for
month 2, month 3, etc. month 4, month 5, etc.
Compare actual cash Compare actual cash
flows against budget flows against budget
and rolling forecast RF2
2.4 Guidelines on preparing a forecast

The cash flow forecast should be broken down into the shortest time periods for which reasonably
accurate information can be assembled.
(a) For short-term cash forecasts of up to one month or so, weekly periods are appropriate. In the
very short term, up to one week or so, daily cash forecasts may be requested.
(b) For longer-term cash forecasts, periods of a month, a quarter or longer will be suitable. The more
distant the time horizon becomes, the longer the forecasted periods should be.
Even fairly predictable items of income and spending (eg salary payments, and tax/national insurance
deductions) cannot usually be forecast with total accuracy. Any forecast should therefore include a clear
statement of the assumptions on which the figures are based. With clearly-stated assumptions, a
forecast can be tested for reasonableness.
3 Cash budgets in receipts and payments format A

C
Cash budgets are prepared by taking operational budgets and converting them into forecasts as to when
receipts and payments occur. The forecast should indicate the highest and lowest cash balance in a
C
period as well as the balance at the end. A
A cash budget (or cash flow budget) is prepared from budgets and capital funding and spending
programmes. A budget normally covers one year, and is divided into shorter time periods of a month or
a quarter. G
A cash budget is prepared by taking the budgets for sales, costs of sales and profit, and converting the L
income and expenditure items in these budgets into cash flows by allowing for credit periods,
prepayments, accruals and so on. Adjustments are then made for: O
 Cash flow items not appearing in the statement of profit or loss (income statement), or B
 Items in the statement of profit or loss which do not have a cash effect
A
Broad guidelines to the preparation of a cash budget is shown below.
L
Step 1 Sort out cash receipts from customers.
 Establish budgeted sales month by month
B
 Establish the credit period(s) taken by customers
 From these, calculate when the budgeted sales revenue will be received as cash
O
 Deduct any discount allowed for early payment
X
 Deduct any allowance for bad debts .
 Establish when the outstanding receivables at the start of the budget period will C
be collected
O
Step 2 Establish whether any other cash income will be received, and when. Put these sundry M
items of cash receipts into the budget.
Step 3 Review existing funding arrangements such as bank overdrafts and loans. Ensure that
the repayment of debt is included in the budget.
Step 4 Sort out cash payments to suppliers.

 Establish purchase quantities each month
 Establish the credit period(s) taken from suppliers
 From these, calculate when the cash payments to suppliers will be made
 Establish when the outstanding payables at the start of the budget period will be
paid
Step 5 Establish other cash payments in the month.

These will include:
 Payments of wages and salaries
 Payments for sundry expenses
A  Other one-off expenditures, such as non-current asset purchases, tax payments
C  Dividend or interest payments
C Items of cost not involving cash payments (eg depreciation) must be excluded.
Payments should be scheduled into the month when they will actually occur. For
A example, rental costs of $120,000 per annum might be charged to the statement of
profit or loss at $10,000 per month. The cash budget should identify in which month or
months the $120,000 will actually be paid. Watch out for changes to certain figures
during the period covered by the question.
G
L Step 6 Set out the cash budget month by month. A commonly used general layout is as
follows.
O Receipts X
B Less payments
Net cash flow in month
(X)
X
A Closing cash balance X or (X)
X
L
The closing cash balance in one month becomes the opening cash balance the next month.
B 3.1 Time periods and overdraft size

O Forecasts are divided into time periods. Dividing the forecast period into daily flows, weekly flows or
X monthly flows should coincide as closely as possible with significant cash flow events, to provide
management with information about the high or low points for cash balances. In other words, as well as
. predicting the month end surplus or overdraft, the maximum overdraft during the month should also be
predicted.
C
O 3.2 Example: timing of cash flows
M Oak Tree Villa Co operates a retail business. Purchases are sold at cost plus 331/3%. Or put another
way, purchases are 75% of sales.
(a) Budgeted sales Labour costs Expenses incurred
$ $ $
January 40,000 3,000 4,000
February 60,000 3,000 6,000
March 160,000 5,000 7,000
April 120,000 4,000 7,000
(b) It is management policy to have sufficient inventory in hand at the end of each month to meet
sales demand in the next half month.
(c) Suppliers for materials and expenses are paid in the month after the purchases are made or the
expenses incurred. Labour is paid in full by the end of each month.
(d) Expenses include a monthly depreciation charge of $2,000.

(e) (i) 75% of sales are for cash.
(ii) 25% of sales are on one month's interest-free credit.
(f) The company will buy equipment for cash costing $18,000 in February and will pay a dividend
of $20,000 in March. The opening cash balance at 1 February is $1,000.
Required
(a) A statement of profit or loss (income statement) for February and March
(b) A cash budget for February and March
Solution
(a) Statement of profit or loss (Income statement)
February March Total
Revenue
$ $
60,000
$ $
160,000
$ $
220,000
A
Cost of Sales C
(75% of revenue) 45,000 120,000 165,000
Gross Profit 15,000 40,000 55,000 C
Less: labour 3,000 5,000 8,000
expenses 6,000 7,000 13,000 A
9,000 12,000 21,000
6,000 28,000 34,000
(b) Workings G
(i) Receipts L
$
In February 75% of Feb revenue (75% × $60,000) 45,000 O
+25% of Jan revenue (25% × $40,000) 10,000
55,000 B
In March 75% of Mar revenue (75% × $160,000) 120,000 A
+25% of Feb revenue (25% × $60,000) 15,000
135,000 L
(ii) Purchases Purchases
Purchases:
in January
$
in February
$
B
For Jan sales (50% of 15,000 O
$30,000)
For Feb sales (50% of 22,500 (50% of $45,000) 22,500 X
$45,000)
For March sales – (50% of $120,000) 60,000 .
37,500 82,500
C
These purchases are paid for in February and March.
O
(iii) Expenses: cash expenses in January ($4,000 – $2,000) and February ($6,000 –
$2,000) are paid for in February and March respectively. Depreciation is not a cash item. M
Cash budget
February March Total
$ $ $
Receipt from sales 55,000 135,000 190,000
Payments
Payables 37,500 82,500 120,000
Expenses creditors 2,000 4,000 6,000
Labour 3,000 5,000 8,000
Equipment purchase 18,000 – 18,000
Dividend – 20,000 20,000
Total payments 60,500 111,500 172,000
Receipts less payments (5,500) 23,500 18,000
Opening cash balance b/f 1,000 (4,500)* 1,000
Closing cash balance c/f (4,500)* 19,000 19,000
* The cash balance at the end of February is carried forward as the opening cash balance for
A March.
C Notes
1 The profit in February and March does mean that there is sufficient cash to operate the
C business as planned.
A 2 Steps should be taken either to ensure that an overdraft facility is available for the cash
shortage at the end of February, or to defer certain payments so that the overdraft is
avoided.
G
3.3 Example: receivables and payables
L
For example, suppose that a statement of financial position as at 31 December 20X4 shows that a
O company has the following receivables and payables.
B $
Receivables 150,000
A Payables 60,000
L You are informed of the following.
(a) Customers are allowed two months to pay.
(b) 1½ months' credit is taken from suppliers.
B (c) Sales and materials purchases were both made at an even monthly rate in 20X4.
O Required
X Determine in which months of 20X5 the customers will eventually pay and the suppliers will be paid.
. Solution
C (a) Since customers take two months to pay, the $150,000 of receivables in the statement of
financial position represent credit sales in November and December 20X4, who will pay in
O January and February 20X5 respectively. Since sales in 20X4 were at an equal monthly rate, the
M cash budget should plan for receipts of $75,000 each month in January and February from the
customers in the opening statement of financial position.
(b) Similarly, since suppliers are paid after 1½ months, payments will be made in January and the
first half of February 20X5, which means that budgeted payments will be as follows.
$
In January (purchases in second half of November and
first half of December 20X4) 40,000
In February (purchases in second half of December 20X4) 20,000
Total payables in the statement of financial position 60,000
Payables represent 1½ months' purchases. Since sales and purchases are made evenly, $60,000
represents $20,000 per half month.
3.4 Example: a month-by-month cash budget in detail

Now you have some idea as to the underlying principles, let us put these to work. From the following
information which relates to George and Zola Co you are required to prepare a month by month cash
budget for the second half of 20X5 and to append such brief comments as you consider might be
helpful to management.
(a) The company's only product, a calfskin vest, sells at $40 and has a variable cost of $26 made up
as follows.
$
Materials 20
Labour 4
Variable overheads 2
(b) Fixed costs of $6,000 per month are paid on the 28th of each month.
(c) Quantities sold/to be sold on credit
May June July Aug Sept Oct Nov Dec A
1,000 1,200 1,400 1,600 1,800 2,000 2,200 2,600 C
(d) Production quantities
C
June July Aug Sept Oct Nov Dec
May
1,200 1,400 1,600 2,000 2,400 2,600 2,400 2,200 A
(e) Cash sales at a discount of 5% are expected to average 100 units a month.
(f) Customers are expected to settle their accounts by the end of the second month following sale. G
(g) Suppliers of material are paid two months after the material is used in production. L
(h) Wages are paid in the same month as they are incurred.
O
(i) 70% of the variable overhead is paid in the month of production, the remainder in the following
month. B
(j) Corporation tax of $18,000 is to be paid in October. A
(k) A new delivery vehicle was bought in June, the cost of which, $8,000 is to be paid in August. L
The old vehicle was sold for $600, the buyer undertaking to pay in July.
(l) The company is expected to be $3,000 overdrawn at the bank at 30 June 20X5. The overdraft is
charged at 2% per month on any brought forward balance. B
(m) The opening and closing inventories of raw materials, work in progress and finished goods are O
budgeted to be the same.
X
.
C
O
M
Solution
CASH BUDGET FOR 1 JULY TO 31 DECEMBER 20X5
July Aug Sept Oct Nov Dec Total
$ $ $ $ $ $ $
Receipts
Credit sales 40,000 48,000 56,000 64,000 72,000 80,000 360,000
Cash sales 3,800 3,800 3,800 3,800 3,800 3,800 22,800
Sale of vehicles 600 600
44,400 51,800 59,800 67,800 75,800 83,800 383,400
Payments
Materials 24,000 28,000 32,000 40,000 48,000 52,000 224,000
Labour 6,400 8,000 9,600 10,400 9,600 8,800 52,800
Variable overhead (W1) 3,080 3,760 4,560 5,080 4,920 4,520 25,920
Fixed costs 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 36,000
Overdraft interest (W2) 60 2 83 145
A Corporation tax 18,000 18,000
C Purchase of vehicle
39,540
8,000
53,760 52,162 79,480 68,603 71,320
8,000
364,865
C Excess of receipts
over payments 4,860 (1,960) 7,638 (11,680) 7,197 12,480 18,535
A Balance b/f (3,000) 1,860 (100) 7,538 (4,142) 3,055 (3,000)
Balance c/f 1,860 (100) 7,538 (4,142) 3,055 15,535 15,535
Workings
G (1) Variable overhead
L June July Aug Sept Oct Nov Dec
O Variable overhead
$ $ $ $ $ $ $
B production cost 2,800 3,200 4,000 4,800 5,200 4,800 4,400
A 70% paid in month

30% in following
2,240 2,800 3,360 3,640 3,360 3,080
L month 840
3,080
960
3,760
1,200
4,560
1,440
5,080
1,560
4,920
1,440
4,520
(2) Overdraft interest
B (2% on b/f) 60 2 83
O Comments
(a) There will be a small overdraft at the end of August but a much larger one at the end of October.
X It may be possible to delay payments to suppliers for longer than two months or to reduce
. purchases of materials or reduce the volume of production by running down existing inventory
levels.
C (b) If neither of these courses is possible, the company may need to negotiate extended overdraft
O facilities with its bank.
M (c) The cash deficit is only temporary and by the end of December there will be a comfortable
surplus. The use to which this cash will be put should ideally be planned in advance.
4 Control and corrective action
As a part of short-term planning, budgeting should be seen in the context of the overall business plan.
This will include a long-term financial plan for the enterprise.
A forecast is of no use unless actual outcome is compared with the forecast so that corrective action can
be taken. An objective of cash flow control is to achieve net cash flows or cash balances that satisfy a
target or budget that management has set. The cash flow target could be to avoid borrowing, or to keep
the amount borrowed within a specified overdraft limit. Targets could also be imposed on a company by
a bank.
4.1 Uncertainties in forecast cash flows

Why might a forecast differ from the actual flows? A
(a) Poor forecasting techniques
C
(b) Unpredictable events or developments, eg:
C
(i) Loss of a major customer
(ii) Insolvency of a major customer who owes the company money A
(iii) Changes in interest rates
(iv) Inflation, which may affect various costs and revenues differently
G
4.2 Cash flow control reports
L
Cash flow control reports should be prepared regularly for managers with responsibility for cash
receipts, payments and balances. O
(a) In many companies, reports could be restricted to the treasury department or financial B
controller's department. Reporting can be informal, perhaps a daily check on cleared funds in the
company's bank accounts. A
(b) Reports can also be distributed more widely, to operational managers as well as to treasurers and L
financial controllers. Widespread reporting of cash flows will only be useful, however, if
operational managers are conscious of a responsibility to control their cash flows as well as their
costs and profits. B
Control reports could be prepared for operational cash flows. The frequency, format and structure of a
control report can be designed to suit management requirements, but the purpose of the report should
O
be to compare either: X


Actual cash flows against a budget or target (as illustrated below), or
A current forecast of cash flows against an original budget or target
.
Reports could be discussed at monthly management meetings (or board meetings) and managers asked
C
to explain differences or variances that exceed a certain control limit (perhaps a percentage of the O
budgeted cash flow figure).
In the example below, the managers responsible could be asked to explain the high payments for
M
teaching costs in March ($106,000 or 27% above the budget amount) and advertising ($28,000 or
33% above budget). The financial controller or director might be asked to comment on the company's
borrowing limits, and whether these are now expected to be sufficient.
CASH FLOW CONTROL REPORT
Alpha Language Schools: UK Division

Month: March
Currency: USD ($'000)
Month Cumulative: year to date
*Budget Actual Difference *Budget Actual Difference
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
Cash receipts
Tuition 1,100 1,150 50 2,900 2,980 80
Books 70 25 (45) 210 155 (55)
Cassettes 340 355 15 650 692 42
Sale of non-current assets 0 24 24 30 24 (6)
Other income 15 7 (8) 45 44 (1)
1,525 1,561 36 3,835 3,895 60
A Cash payments
Staff costs: teaching 390 496 106 1,000 1,270 270
C Staff costs management
Book purchases
250
60
248
32
(2)
(28)
650
155
624
81
(26)
(74)
C Materials printing 25 28 3 65 62 (3)
Origination 15 19 4 40 35 (5)
A Commissions 60 61 1 155 158 3
Advertising 85 113 28 210 275 65
Marketing expenses 72 69 (3) 185 170 (15)
G Travel and entertaining
Equipment
216
60
235
72
19
12
520
150
499
144
(21)
(6)
L Establishment
Office expenses
150
42
146
37
(4)
(5)
450
100
435
96
(15)
(4)
O Other payments 30 24 (6) 75 72 (3)
1,455 1,580 125 3,755 3,921 166
B Net cash flow 70 (19) (89) 80 (26) (106)
A Opening cash 22 5 (17) 12 12 –
balance
L Closing cash balance 92 (14) (106) 92 (14) (106)
Of course, the difference in previous periods might have led to a revised forecast, and it might be this
B revised forecast that is used for control purposes.
O 4.3 Cash flow problems

X Cash flow problems can arise in various ways.
. (a) Making losses
C If a business is continually making losses, it will eventually have cash flow problems.
O (b) Inflation
M In a period of inflation, a business needs ever-increasing amounts of cash just to replace used-up
and worn-out assets. A business can be making a profit in historical cost accounting terms, but
still not be receiving enough cash to buy the replacement assets it needs.
(c) Growth
When a business is growing, it needs to acquire more non-current assets, and to support higher
amounts of inventories and receivables. These additional assets must be paid for somehow.
(d) Seasonal business
When a business has seasonal or cyclical sales, it may have cash flow difficulties at certain times
of the year, when (i) cash inflows are low, but (ii) cash outflows are high, perhaps because the
business is building up its inventories for the next period of high sales.
(e) One-off items of expenditure

There might occasionally be a single non-recurring item of expenditure that creates a cash flow
problem, such as:
(i) The repayment of loan capital on maturity of the debt
(ii) The purchase of an exceptionally expensive item, for example, freehold property
4.4 Corrective action

Cash deficits can arise out of basic trading factors underlying the business such as falling sales or
increasing costs. Clearly, the way to deal with these items is to take normal business measures,
rectifying the fall in sales by marketing activities or, if this cannot be achieved, by cutting costs.
4.4.1 Controlling the working capital cycle: short-term deficiencies

Cash deficits can also arise out of the business's management of the working capital cycle and from
timing differences. A
(a) Short-term borrowing from the bank is only a temporary measure. The bank might convert an C
overdraft into a long-term loan, or perhaps agree to new overdraft limits.
C
(b) Sale of short-term investments could provide liquidity.
(c) Raising share capital is expensive and should be generally used for long-term investment, not
A
short-term cash management.
(d) The nature and timing of discretionary flows might alter. G
(e) Different sources of finance (such as leasing) might alter.
L
(f) Inventory levels could also decrease to reduce the amount of money that is 'tied up' in their
production cost. O
(g) The technique of leading and lagging. Effectively this means shortening the working capital cycle, by: B
(i) Obtaining money from customers as soon as possible, in other words reducing the A
collection period
(ii) Taking as much credit as possible, delaying payment until there is less need for borrowing
L
from the bank
4.5 Example: leading and lagging

B
Assume that Gilbert Gosayne Co sells Nullas. Each Nulla costs $50 to make and is sold for $100. The O
bank has refused an overdraft to Gilbert Gosayne. Creditors are normally paid at the end of Month 1; the
Nullas are sold on the 15th of Month 2. Payment is received on the first day of Month 4.
X
(a) Under this system we have the following forecast.
.
Inflows Outflows Balance C
Month 1 (end)
$
–
$
50
$
(50) O
Month 2
Month 3 (end) 100
– –
–
(50)
50
M
In other words the cash cycle means that the firm is in deficit for all of Months 2 and 3. As the
bank has refused an overdraft, the creditors will not be paid.
(b) If, however, Gilbert Gosayne Co persuades its creditors to wait for two weeks until the 15th of
Month 2 and offers a settlement discount of $5 to customers to induce them to pay on the 15th
of Month 2, the situation is transformed.
Inflows Outflows Balance
$ $ $
Month 1 – – –
Month 2 95 50 45
Month 3 – – 45
In practice, however, a firm's customers and suppliers might be 'leading and lagging' themselves.
(a) Suppliers can object to their customers taking extra credit; and it can also harm their businesses,
thus jeopardising their ability to make future supplies. The customer also loses the possibility of
taking advantage of trade discounts.
(b) Customers might refuse to pay early, despite the inducement of a discount.
A firm might be in a position to choose which of its suppliers should be paid now rather than later.
Certain suppliers have to be paid early, if they are powerful. The bank is a powerful creditor; it is worth
keeping the bank happy even if the firm loses out on a few trade discounts in the process.
4.6 Longer-term methods of easing cash shortages

Shortening the operating cycle is helpful in dealing with short-term deficiencies and saving interest
costs, but it is not necessarily a long-term solution to the business's funding problems. A shorter
operating cycle time will reduce the amount of cash that a company needs to invest in its operating
A activities.
C The steps that are usually taken by a company when a need for cash arises can be summarised as
follows.
C (a) Postponing capital expenditure
A Some capital expenditure items are more important and urgent than others.
(i) It might be imprudent to postpone expenditure on non-current assets which are needed for
the development and growth of the business.
G
(ii) On the other hand, some capital expenditures are routine and might be postponable
L without serious consequences. The routine replacement of motor vehicles is an example.
O If a company's policy is to replace company cars every two years, but the company is
facing a cash shortage, it might decide to replace cars every three years.
B (b) Accelerating cash inflows which would otherwise be expected in a later period
A The most obvious way of bringing forward cash inflows would be to offer tighter terms to
customers, in order to obtain earlier payment. Often, this policy will result in a loss of goodwill
L and can cause problems. There will also be very little scope for speeding up payments when the
credit period currently allowed to customers is no more than the norm for the industry. It might
be possible to encourage customers to pay more quickly by offering discounts for earlier payment.
B (c) Reversing past investment decisions by selling assets previously acquired
O Some assets are less crucial to a business than others and so, if cash flow problems are severe,
X the option of selling investments or property might have to be considered.
(d) Negotiating a reduction in cash outflows, so as to postpone or even reduce payments
.
There are several ways in which this could be done.
C (i) Longer credit periods might be negotiated with suppliers. However, if the credit period
O allowed is already generous, suppliers might be very reluctant to extend credit even
further.
M (ii) Loan repayments could be rescheduled by agreement with a bank.
(iii) A deferral of the payment of corporation tax could be agreed with the tax authority.
(iv) Dividend payments could be reduced. Dividend payments are discretionary cash outflows,
although a company's directors might be constrained by shareholders' expectations.
EXAM FOCUS POINT
A typical question on cash forecasts might ask you to explain how an organisation might deal with a
predicted cash shortfall.
4.7 Quality control of forecasts

When actual results differ from budget, it can be tempting to conclude that plans never work out in
practice. However, as planning is a vital management activity, and if actual results differ from the plan,
it is important to find out whether the planning processes can be improved.
Accuracy of cash flow forecasts can be enhanced by:
(a) Reviewing actual cash flows against the forecasts, learning from past mistakes, and
(b) Preparing updated rolling forecasts or revised forecasts, where useful, to replace earlier, less
reliable forecasts
A constant monthly amount for receipts and payments will often indicate either sloppy cash forecasting
practice, or a high degree of uncertainty in the forecast, since it is rare for a specific receivables and
payables to remain unchanged except when there is a formal arrangement.
As a financial year progresses, the actual cash flows for the past months could show large variances
from budget, but a rolling forecast indicates that the original budget for the end-of-year cash balance A
will still be achieved. This could occur if the rolling forecast has been prepared by adjusting the forecast
for the unexpired months of the year, in order to keep the annual budget (on paper at least) for the end- C
of-year cash position. Where this occurs, suspicion must arise that the rolling forecast has been
prepared with little thought.
C
Unchanged figures over a number of months of revised forecast submissions are also an indication of a
A
weak forecasting system. It could be that business expectations have not changed; however there are
few businesses that do not fluctuate with market conditions. A more likely explanation is that the rolling
cash forecast has been prepared by copying the figures from the previous forecast or that a new revised G
forecast has not been prepared at all.
L
O
5 Cash budgeting with inflation
B
5.1 Index numbers A
An index is a measure over a period of time of the average changes in prices of items or a group of L
items.
If a business achieves an increase in revenue of 10% in monetary (cash) terms over a year, this result
becomes less impressive if we are told that there was general price inflation of 15% over the year. The
B
business is now selling less at the new higher prices. O
When results of a business are being compared over a period of time for internal management purposes, X
managers of the business should agree and use an appropriate method of allowing for changing price
levels. The usual method is to use a series of index numbers. .
An index is a measure, over a period of time, of the average changes in the values (prices or quantities) C
of a group of items. O
M
An index may be a price index or a quantity index.
(a) A price index measures the change in the money value of a group of items over a period of time.
Perhaps the most well-known price index in the UK is the Retail Prices Index (RPI) which
measures changes in the costs of items of expenditure of the average household, and which used
to be called the 'cost of living' index.
(b) A quantity index measures the change in the non-monetary values of a group of items over a
period of time. A well-known example is a productivity index, which measures changes in the
productivity of various departments or groups of workers.
As we shall see, a suitable price index provides a method of allowing for changing price levels when
comparing costs or revenues over time.
5.2 Index points

'Points' measure the difference in the index value in one year with the value in another year.
Points measure changes in an index because they provide an easy method of arithmetic. The alternative
is to use percentages, because indices are based on percentages.
5.3 The base period, or base year

Index numbers are normally expressed as percentages, taking the value for a base date as 100. The
choice of a base date or base year is not significant, except that it should normally be 'representative' –
that is preferably not one in which there were abnormally high or low prices for any items in the 'basket
of goods' making up the index.
5.4 Example: Calculation of an index

A Suppose revenue for a company over the last five years were as follows.
C Year Revenue
$’000
C 20X5
20X6
35
42
A 20X7
20X8
40
45
20X9 50
G The managing director decided that he wanted to set up a revenue index (ie an index which measures
how revenue has done from year to year), using 20X5 as the base year. The $35,000 of revenue in
L 20X5 is given the index 100%. What are the indices for the other years?
O Solution
B If $35,000 = 100%, then:
A 42,000
20X6 $42,000 =  100% = 120%
L 35,000
The same calculation can be applied to other figures, and the table showing sales for the last five years
can be completed, taking 20X5 as the base year.
B Year Revenue Index
O 20X5
$’000
35 100
X 20X6 42 120
20X7 40 114
. 20X8 45 129
20X9 50 143
C
O 5.5 Indices in practice
M In practice, indices generally consist of more than one item. For example, suppose that the cost of living
index is calculated from only three commodities: bread, tea and caviar, and that the prices for 20X1 and
20X5 were as follows.
20X1 20X5
Bread 20c a loaf 40c a loaf
Tea 25c a packet 30c a packet
Caviar 450c an 405c an
ounce ounce
Note that the prices above are in different units, and there is no indication of the relative importance of
each item. In formulating index numbers, these aspects can be overcome by weighting. To determine
the weighting, we need information about the relative importance of each item.
For the purpose of internal management reporting, results recorded over a number of periods can be
adjusted using an appropriate price index to convert the figures from money terms to 'real' terms.
5.5.1 The use of index numbers in cash forecasting and budgeting

How are index numbers useful in cash budgeting and forecasting? The person preparing the cash
budget is not particularly interested in prices in 'real terms': instead, it is the exact monetary amount
that he or she is interested in.
Index numbers are still useful, however.
(a) We can use index numbers to predict future cash inflows. For example, if 500,000 units will be
sold in three or four month’s time, an estimate of future monetary prices gives some idea of the
amount of sales in cash.
(b) Similarly, with cash outflows, an estimated future price index can suggest the likely size of cash
payments.
A
(c) Their use in forecasting can also suggest a need for increased borrowing limits, which might be
fixed in monetary terms. C
Where inflation is very high, the value of financial assets, such as debt, declines. C
(a) Companies will try and collect their debts even more quickly, so that the cash can be reinvested. A
(b) Delaying payments to suppliers reduces the underlying value of the debt.
(c) A company's forecasts become out of date very quickly.
G
(d) Interest rates might be very high, in the short term, and so a treasurer will invest cash on short-
term deposit. L
Different items, such as capital items, costs of various kinds, and revenues, are likely to be subject to O
differing rates of inflation, and different indices may therefore be appropriate for different items.
B
QUESTION RPI A
Explain the general principles and methods involved in the compilation and construction of the UK L
General Index of Retail Prices (RPI) under the following headings: base year; weights; items included;
data collection; calculation.
B
ANSWER
(a) Base year. Currently the base date for the RPI is January 1987, which was given an index of
O
100. The index for later months is then given in terms of the January 1987 level. For example X
the index for November 1999 is 166.7, indicating that prices in November 1999 were on
average 66.7% higher than in January 1987. .
(b) Weights. The weights used in calculating the RPI are designed to reflect the relative importance C
of the different sorts of expenditure of households.
O
(c) Items included. The items included in the calculation of the index are designed to be a
representative selection of goods and services bought in the UK. Items are combined in sections, M
which in turn are combined in groups.
(d) Data collection. The collection of data on prices is carried out for each of the items monthly.
Officials visit a sample of shops, geographically spread across the UK, to record the prices
actually being charged.
(e) Calculation. The first step to calculate the RPI for a month is to calculate each of the price
relatives (being the ratio of the current price for one item to the price at the base date). These
price relatives are then weighted using the weights explained in (b) to give each of the section
indices. The section indices are in turn combined using section weights to give the group indices.
The group indices are combined to give the final RPI figure for the month.
QUESTION Index and budgets

You are assisting with the work on a maintenance department's budget for the next quarter of 20X4. The
maintenance department's budget for the current quarter (just ending) is $200,000.
A base weighted index for the next quarter stands at 103.5, compared to 100 for this quarter, for the
price of input quantities.
On the basis of the index, what will the budget be for the next quarter?
A $193,000 C $207,000
B $200,000 D $270,000
ANSWER
C The index suggests prices will increase by 3.5%. This produces a budget of $200,000  1.035
= $207,000.
A
C
C 6 Time series analysis
A
When preparing a cash budget a number of figures must be estimated. These include sales, purchases,
wages, overheads and exceptional receipts or payments. One method of estimating sales and costs
G figures is to look at the past and determine any pattern there might be in these figures over time in
L order to estimate the likely future figures.
O One method of analysing past or historic figures is to use the technique of time series analysis.
B 6.1 Time series

A A time series is a series of figures or values recorded over time.
L There are four components to a time series: trend, seasonal variations, cyclical variations and random
variations.
B A time series is a series of figures or values recorded over time.
O
X The following are examples of time series.
(a) Output at a factory each day for the last month
. (b) Monthly sales over the last two years
C (c)
(d)
Total annual costs for the last ten years
Retail Prices Index each month for the last ten years
O (e) The number of people employed by a company each year for the last 20 years
M A graph of a time series is called a historigram. (Note the 'ri'; this is not the same as a histogram.) For
example, consider the following time series.
Year Sales
$'000
1 20
2 21
3 24
4 23
5 27
6 30
7 28
The historigram is as follows.
The horizontal axis is always chosen to represent time, and the vertical axis represents the values of the
data recorded.
There are several features of a time series which it may be necessary to analyse in order to prepare
forecasts.
(a) A trend
A
(b) Seasonal variations or fluctuations
C
(c) Cycles, or cyclical variations C
(d) Non-recurring, random variations. These may be caused by unforeseen circumstances, such as a A
change in the government of the country, a war, the collapse of a company, technological change
or a fire.
6.2 The trend

G
L
A trend of a series of figures in a time series is the way in which the figures are moving in general
despite various fluctuations caused by seasonality. O
The trend is the underlying long-term movement over time in the values of the data recorded.
B
A
In the following examples of time series, there are three types of trend. L
Output per Number of
Year labour hour Cost per unit employees
Units $ B
4
5
30
24
1.00
1.08
100
103 O
6
7
26
22
1.20
1.15
96
102
X
8
9
21
17
1.18
1.25
103
98
.
(A) (B) (C) C
(a) In time series (A) there is a downward trend in the output per labour hour. Output per labour
hour did not fall every year, because it went up between years 5 and 6, but the long-term
O
movement is clearly a downward one. M
(b) In time series (B) there is an upward trend in the cost per unit. Although unit costs went down in
year 7 from a higher level in year 6, the basic movement over time is one of rising costs.
(c) In time series (C) there is no clear movement up or down, and the number of employees
remained fairly constant around 100. The trend is therefore a static, or level one.
6.3 Seasonal variations

Seasonal variations are short-term fluctuations in recorded values, due to different circumstances
which affect results at different times of the year, on different days of the week, at different times of day,
or whatever.
Here are two examples of seasonal variations.

(a) Sales of ice cream will be higher in summer than winter.
(b) The telephone network may be heavily used at certain times of the day (such as mid-morning
and mid-afternoon and much less used at other times (such as in the middle of the night).
QUESTION Seasonal variations

Can you think of some more examples of seasonal variations?
ANSWER
Here are some suggestions.
(a) Sales of overcoats will be higher in autumn than in spring.
(b) Shops might expect higher sales shortly before Christmas, or in their winter and summer sales.
A (c) Sales might be higher on Friday and Saturday than on Monday.
C
C 'Seasonal' is a term which may appear to refer to the seasons of the year, but its meaning in time series
analysis is somewhat broader, as the examples given above show.
A
6.4 Example: a trend and seasonal variations
The number of customers served by a company of travel agents over the past four years is shown in the
G following historigram.
L
O
B
A
L
B
O In this example, there would appear to be large seasonal fluctuations in demand, but there is also a
basic upward trend.
X
. 6.5 Cyclical variations
C Cyclical variations are fluctuations which take place over a longer time period than seasonal variations.
It may take several years to complete the cycle. For example the sales of fashion items such as flared
O trousers could be said to be cyclical. The last cycle took approximately 30 years (mid 1960s to mid
1990s) to complete.
M
7 Finding the trend
One method of finding the trend is by the use of moving averages. A moving average is an average value
that is revised as new information is received.
Remember that when finding the moving average of an even number of results, a second moving
average has to be calculated so that trend values can relate to specific actual figures.
The moving average method of cash forecasting is relatively simple. The most recent observations are
used to compute an average which is continually updated as new information becomes available.
Look at these monthly sales figures.
Sales
Year 6 $'000
August 0.02 A
September 0.04
October 0.04 C
November
December
3.20
14.60 C
It looks as though the business is expanding rapidly – and so it is, in a way. But when you know that A
the business is a Christmas card manufacturer, then you see immediately that the January sales will no
doubt slump right back down again.
It is obvious that the business will do better in the Christmas season than at any other time – that is the G
seasonal variation with which the statistician has to contend. Using the monthly figures, how can he tell
whether or not the business is doing well overall – whether there is a rising sales trend over time other than L
the short-term rise over Christmas?
O
One possibility is to compare figures with the equivalent figures of a year ago. However, many things
can happen over a period of twelve months to make such a comparison misleading – for example, new B
products might now be manufactured and prices will probably have changed.
A
In fact, there are a number of ways of overcoming this problem of distinguishing trend from seasonal
variations. One such method is called moving averages. This method attempts to remove seasonal (or L
cyclical) variations from a time series by a process of averaging so as to leave a set of figures
representing the trend.
B
7.1 Finding the trend by moving averages O
A moving average is an average of the results of a fixed number of periods. Since it is an average of
several time periods, it is related to the mid-point of the overall period. X
.
7.2 Example: moving averages
C
Year Sales
Units O
20X0 390
20X1 380 M
20X2 460
20X3 450
20X4 470
20X5 440
20X6 500
Required
Take a moving average of the annual sales over a period of three years.
Solution
(a) Average sales in the three year period 20X0 – 20X2 were
 390+380+460  1,230
  = = 410
 3  3
This average relates to the middle year of the period, 20X1.
(b) Similarly, average sales in the three year period 20X1 – 20X3 were
 380+460+450  1,290
  = = 430
 3  3
This average relates to the middle year of the period, 20X2.
(c) The average sales can also be found for the periods 20X2 – 20X4, 20X3 – 20X5 and 20X4 –
A 20X6, to give the following.

Moving total of Moving average of
C Year
20X0
Sales
390
3 years' sales 3 year's sales ( 3)
C 20X1 380 1,230 410

20X2 460 1,290 430
A 20X3 450 1,380 460
20X4 470 1,360 453
20X5 440 1,410 470
G 20X6 500
Note the following points.
L (i) The moving average series has five figures relating to the years from 20X1 to 20X5. The
O original series had seven figures for the years from 20X0 to 20X6.
B (ii) There is an upward trend in sales, which is more noticeable from the series of moving
averages than from the original series of actual sales each year.
A
L 7.3 Moving averages of an even number of results
In the previous example, moving averages were taken of the results in an odd number of time periods,
and the average then related to the mid-point of the overall period.
B If a moving average were taken of results in an even number of time periods, the basic technique would
O be the same, but the mid-point of the overall period would not relate to a single period. For example,
suppose an average were taken of the following four results.
X
Spring 120
. Summer 90
Autumn 180 average 115
C Winter 70
O The average would relate to the mid-point of the period, between summer and autumn.
M The trend line average figures need to relate to a particular time period; otherwise, seasonal variations
cannot be calculated. To overcome this difficulty, we take a moving average of the moving average. An
example will illustrate this technique.
7.4 Example: moving averages over an even number of periods

Calculate a moving average trend line of the following results of Linden Ltd.
Year Quarter Volume of sales
'000 units
20X5 1 600
2 840
3 420
4 720
20X6 1 640
2 860
3 420
4 740
20X7 1 670
2
3
900
430
A
4 760 C
Solution C
A moving average of four will be used, since the volume of sales would appear to depend on the season A
of the year, and each year has four quarterly results. The moving average of four does not relate to any
specific period of time; therefore a second moving average of two will be calculated on the first moving
average trend line. G
Moving
total of 4
Moving
average of 4
Mid-point of
2 moving
L
Year Quarter
Actual volume
of sales
quarters'
sales
quarters'
sales
averages
Trend line
O
'000 units '000 units '000 units '000 units B
(A) (B) (B  4) (C)
20X5 1 600 A
2
3
840
420 2,580 645.0 650.00 L
4 720 2,620 655.0 657.50
20X6 1 640 2,640 660.0 660.00
2 860 2,640 660.0 662.50 B
3 420 2,660 665.0 668.75
4 740 2,690 672.5 677.50 O
20X7 1 670 2,730 682.5 683.75
2 900 2,740 685.0 687.50 X
3
4
430
760
2,760 690.0
.
By taking a mid point (a moving average of two) of the original moving averages, we can relate the C
results to specific quarters (from the third quarter of 20X5 to the second quarter of 20X7).
O
QUESTION Trend in sales M
What can you say about the trend in sales of Linden Ltd above?
ANSWER
The trend in sales is upward.
7.5 Moving averages on graphs

One way of displaying the trend clearly is to show it by plotting the moving average on a graph.
7.5.1 Example: moving averages on graphs

Actual sales of Slap-It-On suntan lotion for 20X5 and 20X6 were as follows.
Sales
$'000 $'000
20X5 20X6
January 100 110
February 120 130
March 200 220
April 200 210
May 240 230
A June 250 240
July 210 250
C August 210 300
September 200 150
C October 110 110
A November
December
90
50
80
40
1,980 2,070
G Required
Calculate the trend in the suntan lotion sales and display it on a graph. (Hint. Calculate an annual
L moving total.)
O Solution
B Moving
average
A 20X6 Sales Moving total (trend)
L January
$'000
110
$'000
1,990
$'000
165.83
February 130 2,000 166.67
March 220 2,020 168.33
B April 210 2,030 169.17
May 230 2,020 168.33
O June 240 2,010 167.50
July 250 2,050 170.83
X August 300 2,140 178.33
. September
October
150
110
2,090
2,090
174.17
174.17
C November
December
80
40
2,080
2,070
173.33
172.50
O There is one very important point not immediately obvious from the above table, and that is to do with
M the time periods covered by the moving total and moving average.
(a) The moving total, as we have seen, is the total for the previous twelve months. The figure of
$1,990, for instance, represents total sales from February 20X5 to January 20X6.
(b) The moving average is the average monthly sales over the previous twelve months. The figure of
$165.83, for instance, represents average monthly sales for each month during the period
February 20X5 to January 20X6.
When plotting a moving average on a graph, it is therefore important to remember that the points should
be located at the mid-point of the period to which they apply. For example, the figure of $165.83
(moving average at end of January 20X6) relates to the 12 months ending January 20X6 and so it must
be plotted in the middle of that period (31 July 20X5).
The moving data on suntan lotion sales could be drawn on a graph as follows.
$
A
C
C
A
G
L
Points to note about this graph are as follows. O
(a) The annual moving average can only be plotted from July 20X5 to May 20X6 as we have no data B
prior to January 20X5 or after December 20X6.
(b) The moving average has the effect of smoothing out the seasonal fluctuations in the ordinary
A
sales graph (which is the reason why moving averages are used in the first place). L
8 Finding the seasonal variations B

Seasonal variations are the difference between actual and trend figures (additive model), or the actual
O
figures expressed as a proportion of the tend (multiplicative model). X
An average of the seasonal variations for each time period within the cycle must be determined and then
adjusted so that the total of the seasonal variations sums to zero.
.
C
Once a trend has been established, we can find the seasonal variations. There are two models which
are used in time series analysis – the additive model and the multiplicative model. O
The additive model is where each actual figure in the time series is made up as follows. M
 A=T+S
Where: A = Actual figure

T = Trend figure
S = Seasonal variation
 Therefore the seasonal variation is calculated as S = A – T
The multiplicative model is where each actual figure in the time series is made up as follows.
 A=T×S
Where: A = Actual figure

T = Trend figure
S = Seasonal variation
A
 Therefore the seasonal variation is calculated as S =
T
8.1 Additive model

A The actual and trend sales for Linden Ltd (as calculated in Example 7.4) are set out below. The
difference between the actual results for any one quarter and the trend figure for that quarter will be
C the seasonal variation for that quarter.
C Year Quarter Actual Trend Seasonal variation

A 20X5 1
2
600
840
3 420 650.00 –230.00
4 720 657.50 62.50
G 20X6 1 640 660.00 –20.00
L 2
3
860
420
662.50
668.75
197.50
–248.75
O 20X7
4
1
740
670
677.50
683.75
62.50
–13.75
B 2
3
900
430
687.50 212.50
A 4 760
L The variation between the actual result for any one particular quarter and the trend line average is not
the same from year to year, but an average of these variations can be taken.
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
B 20X5
20X6 197.50
230.00
248.75
62.50
62.50
20.00
O 20X7 13.75 212.50
Total 33.75 410.00 478.75 125.00
X Average (÷ 2) 16.875 205.00 239.375 62.50
. Our estimate of the 'seasonal' or quarterly variation is almost complete, but there is one more important
C step to take. Variations around the basic trend line should cancel each other out, and add up to zero. At
the moment, they do not. We therefore spread the total of the variations (11.25) across the four
O quarters (11.25 ÷ 4) so that the final total of the variations sum to zero.
M Estimated quarterly variations

Q1
– 16.8750
Q2
205.0000
Q3
–239.3750
Q4
62.5000
Total
11.250
Adjustment to reduce variations to 0 –2.8125 –2.8125 –2.8125 –2.8125 –11.250
Final estimates of quarterly variations –19.6875 202.1875 –242.1875 59.6875 0
These might be rounded as follows Ql: –20, Ql: 202, Ql:-242, Ql: 60, Total: 0
8.2 Multiplicative model

The method of estimating the seasonal variations in the above example was to use the differences
between the trend and actual data. This model assumes that the components of the series are
independent of each other, so that an increasing trend does not affect the seasonal variations and make
them increase as well, for example.
The alternative is to use the multiplicative model whereby each actual figure is expressed as a
proportion of the trend.
Refer back to our example, Linden Ltd taking the first two years of data only. We can use the equation
here to work out the seasonal variations. The trend is calculated in exactly the same way as before. So if
A = T × S then S = A/T and we can calculate S = A/T for the multiplicative model.
Actual Trend Seasonal percentage
Year Quarter (A) (T) (A/T)
20X5 1 600
2 840
3 420 650.00 0.646
4 720 657.50 1.095
20X6 1 640 660.00 0.970
2 860 662.50 1.298
3 420
4 740
Suppose that seasonal variations for the next four quarters are 0.628, 1.092, 0.980 and 1.309
respectively. The summary of the seasonal variations expressed in proportional terms is therefore as
follows. A
Year Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 C
% % % %
20X5 0.646 1.095 C
20X6 0.970 1.298 0.628 1.092
20X7 0.980 1.309 A
Total 1.950 2.607 1.274 2.187
Average 0.975 1.3035 0.637 1.0935
G
Instead of summing to zero, as with the additive approach, the averages should sum (in this case) to
4.0, 1.0 for each of the four quarters. They actually sum to 4.009 so 0.00225 has to be deducted L
from each one.
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 O
Average
Adjustment
0.97500
–0.00225
1.30350
–0.00225
0.63700
–0.00225
1.09350
–0.00225
B
Final estimate 0.97275 1.30125 0.63475 1.09125 A
Rounded 0.97 1.30 0.64 1.09
L
Note that the proportional model is better than the additive model when the trend is increasing or
decreasing over time. In such circumstances, seasonal variations are likely to be increasing or
decreasing too. The additive model simply adds absolute and unchanging seasonal variations to the
trend figures whereas the proportional model, by multiplying increasing or decreasing trend values by a
B
constant seasonal variation factor, takes account of changing seasonal variations. O
X
9 Using time series analysis in cash budgeting .
Time series analysis in budgeting is used in order to estimate future figures based upon the past trend
C
and seasonal variations that have been calculated. This process of using historical information to O
estimate future figures is known as extrapolation.
M
Previously, we have looked at how to calculate a trend using moving averages, and how to find seasonal
variations using both the additive and multiplicative models. Now we will consider how this information
can be used together in the cash budgeting process.
9.1 Example: Time series analysis in cash budgeting

The sales (in $'000) of swimwear by a large department store for each period of three months are as
follows.
Quarter 20X4 20X5 20X6 20X7

$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
First 8 20 40
Second 30 50 62
Third 60 80 92
Fourth 24 20 40
The management accountant wishes to use the additive model to predict sales for the last quarter of
20X7 and the first quarter of 20X8.
Solution
The requirement can be tackled in three stages.
(a) Find the centred moving average trend
4 quarter Centred Moving
Quarter moving total moving total average(÷4)
A 20X4 4
C
20X5 1 122
C 2 118 120 30
A 3 130 124 31
4 150 140 35
20X6 1 170 160 40
G 2 190 180 45
L 3
4
210
222
200
216
50
54
O 20X7 1 234 228 57
B 2
3
A The centred moving average trend is shown in the right hand column of the table.
L (b) Find the average seasonal variation for each quarter
Quarter
1 2 3 4 Total
B Year 20X5 0.00 +29.00 –15.00
O 20X6
20X7
–20.00
–17.00
+5.00 +30.00 –14.00
X Total
Average
–37.00
–18.50
+5.00
+2.50
+59.00
+29.50
–29.00
–14.50 –1
. Adjust total variation to nil +0.25 +0.25 +0.25 +0.25 +1
C Average seasonal variation –18.25 +2.75 +29.75 –14.25
O (c) Calculate predicted sales
M We might guess that the trend line is rising steadily, by (57 – 40)/4 = 4.25 per quarter in the
period 1st quarter 20X6 to 1st quarter 20X7 (57 being the prediction in 1st quarter 20X7 and
40 the prediction in 1st quarter 20X6).
Since the trend may be levelling off a little, a quarterly increase of +4 in the trend will be
assumed.
Seasonal
Trend variation Forecast
1st quarter 20X7 57
4th quarter 20X7 (+ (3  4)) 69 –14.25 54.75
1st quarter 20X8 (+ (4  4)) 73 –18.25 54.75
Rounding to the nearest thousand dollars, the forecast sales are $55,000 for each of the two
quarters.
QUESTION Forecast sales

Sales of product X each quarter for the last three years have been as follows (in thousands of units).
Trend values, found by a moving averages method, are shown in brackets.
Year 1st quarter 2nd quarter 3rd quarter 4th quarter
1 18 30 20 (18.75) 6 (19.375)
2 20 (20) 33 (20.5) 22 (21) 8 (21.5)
3 22 (22.125) 35 (22.75) 25 10
Average seasonal variations for quarters 1 to 4 are –0.1, +12.4, +1.1 and –13.4 respectively.
Required
Use the trend line and estimates of seasonal variations to forecast sales in each quarter of year 4.
ANSWER
The trend line indicates an increase of about 0.6 per quarter. This can be confirmed by calculating the A
average quarterly increase in trend line values between the third quarter of year 1 (18.75) and the
second quarter of year 3 (22.75). The average rise is
C
22.75 -18.75 4
C
7
=
7
= 0.57, say 0.6
A
Taking 0.6 as the quarterly increase in the trend, the forecast of sales for year 4, before seasonal
adjustments (the trend line forecast) would be as follows.
Year Quarter Trend line
G
3 *2nd (actual trend) 22.75, say 22.8 L
3rd 23.4
4th 24.0 O
4 1st
2nd
24.6
25.2 B
3rd
4th
25.8
26.4
A
* last known trend line value. L
(Note that you could actually plot the trend line figures on a graph, extrapolate the trend line into the
future and read off forecasts from the graph using the extrapolated trend line.)
Seasonal variations should now be incorporated to obtain the final forecast.
B
Average
O
Quarter
Trend line
forecast
seasonal
variation
Forecast of
actual sales
X
'000 units '000 units '000 units .
Year 4 1st 24.6 – 0.1 24.5
2nd 25.2 +12.4 37.6 C
3rd
4th
25.8
26.4
+ 1.1
–13.4
26.9
13.0 O
M
9.2 Problems with using time series for forecasting
Time series analysis can be a useful method of attempting to forecast future sales and cost figures.
However you should also be aware that the technique does have its limitations.
 The less historic data available the less reliable the results will be
 The further into the future we forecast the less reliable the results will be
 There is an assumption that the trend and seasonal variations from the past will continue into the
future
 Cyclical and random variations have been ignored.
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 The main purpose of preparing cash budgets is to forecast whether there are likely to be cash shortages
or large surpluses.
 Cash flow forecasts provide an early warning of liquidity problems and funding needs.
 Cash budgets and forecasts can be used for control reporting. A forecast can be prepared of cash
receipts and payments, and net cash flows. This is known as a cash flow based forecast.
 A cash budget is a detailed forecast of cash receipts, payments and balances over a planning period. It
is formally adopted as part of the business plan or master budget for the period.
 Cash budgets are prepared by taking operational budgets and converting them into forecasts as to when
receipts and payments occur. The forecast should indicate the highest and lowest cash balance in a
period as well as the balance at the end.
A  As a part of short-term planning, budgeting should be seen in the context of the overall business plan.
C This will include a long-term financial plan for the enterprise.
C  An index is a measure over a period of time of the average changes in prices of items or a group of
items.
A
 When preparing a cash budget a number of figures must be estimated. These include sales, purchases,
wages, overheads and exceptional receipts or payments. One method of estimating sales and costs
G figures is to look at the past and determine any pattern there might be in these figures over time in
order to estimate the likely future figures.
L  A time series is a series of figures or values recorded over time. There are four components of a time
O series: trend, seasonal variations, cyclical variations and random variations.
B  The trend of a series of figures in a time series is the way in which the figures are moving in general
despite various fluctuations caused by seasonality.
A  One method of finding the trend is by the use of moving averages. A moving average is an average value
L that is revised as new information is received. Remember that when finding the moving average of an
even number of results, a second moving average has to be calculated so that trend values can relate to
specific actual figures.
B  Seasonal variations are the difference between actual and trend figures (additive model), or actual
figures expressed as a proportion of trend figures (multiplicative model). An average of the seasonal
O variations for each time period within the cycle must be determined and then adjusted so that the total
X of the seasonal variations sums to zero.

 Time series analysis in budgeting is used in order to estimate future figures based upon the past trend
. and seasonal variations that have been calculated. This process of using historical information to
C estimate future figures is known as extrapolation.
O
M
QUICK QUIZ
1 What do cash forecasts estimate?

2 What might be the significance of forecast surpluses?
3 A …………………… forecast is a forecast that is continually updated.
4 Why should the assumptions in a cash forecast be clearly stated?
5 List the steps in preparing a cash flow budget.
6 How can you estimate when sales receipts will occur?
7 What is the purpose of a cash flow control report?
8 'Shortening the working capital cycle by obtaining money from customers as soon as possible, and
taking as much credit from suppliers as possible.' What technique does this describe?
9 Heavy Metal Co is preparing its cash flow forecast for the next quarter. Which of the following items
should be excluded from the calculations?
A The receipt of a bank loan that has been raised for the purpose of investment in a new rolling mill
B Depreciation of the new rolling mill
C A tax payment that relates to profits in a previous accounting period
D Disposal proceeds from the sale of the old mill
10 A company had sales of $800,000 in December, and budgeted sales are $500,000 in January and
$300,000 in February. 40% of customers pay after one month, 40% pay after two months and 20%
pay in cash. What are the budgeted cash receipts from sales for February?
11 A company budgets to purchase $500,000 in materials in April, $800,000 in May and $700,000 in
June. 10% of purchases are paid for in the month of purchase, in order to benefit from a discount of 2%
for immediate payment. One half of the remaining purchases are paid for in the following month and the A
rest are paid for after two months. What are budgeted payments to materials suppliers in June?
A $653,600
C
B $655,000 C
C $656,400
D $718,600 A
12 A company budgets that its fixed costs for next year will be $1,800,000. These include annual rental
costs, for which there are six-monthly payments of $120,000 in March and September, and
depreciation charges of 300,000. All other fixed costs occur at an even monthly rate throughout the G
year, and are paid for in the month that they occur. What are the budgeted cash payments for fixed cost
expenses in March?
L
A $215,000 O
B
C
$225,000
$245,000
B
D $270,000 A
13 Which of the following are limitations of time series analysis? L
(i) Cyclical and random variations are ignored
(ii) The further into the future we forecast, the less reliable the results will be
(iii)
(iv)
Time series data is often presented graphically
There is an assumption that the trend and seasonal variations from the past will continue into the B
future O
A
B
(i) and (iv)
(ii), (iii) and (iv)
X
C (i) and (ii) .
D (i), (ii) and (iv)
C
O
M
1 How much cash is required, when, for how long, and whether it will be available.
2 The surplus could be invested to earn interest.

3 A rolling forecast is a forecast that is continually updated.
4 It allows the forecast to be tested for reasonableness.
5 Sort out cash receipts from customers; other cash income received; cash payments to suppliers; other
cash payments; set out month-by-month cash budget.
6 Make assumptions based on past experience.
7 To help ensure that net cash flows or cash balances satisfy targets set by management.
8 Leading and lagging
A 9 B This is a non-cash item and should therefore be excluded.
C 10 (20%  $300,000) + (40%  $500,000) +(40%  $800,000) = $580,000.
C 11 A (10%  98%  $700,000) + (45%  $800,000) +(45%  $500,000) = $653,600.
A 12 B Fixed cost cash expenses each year = $1,800,000 - $300,000 = $1,500,000.

Subtract rent costs: $1,500,000 – (2  $120,000) = $1,260,000.
Cash payments each month, excluding rent = $1,260,000/12 = $105,000.
G Total cash payments for fixed costs in March = $105,000 + Rent $120,000 = $225,000.
L 13 D Time series data can be used to produce a graph with time plotted along the horizontal axis and
O figures on the vertical axis. This can give a useful visual presentation of the figures over a time
period.
B (i), (ii) and (iv) are all limitations of time series analysis.
A
L
Now try ...
O Number
X Q92
. Q93
C Q94
O Q95
M Q96
C H A P T E R
A
An organisation may have a surplus of cash. This may be
temporary, or it may be expected to last for a long time. Investing surplus funds C
In practice, cash surpluses are often temporary, and
management will eventually want to use the money to
C
invest or pay dividends or make tax payments. A
Cash in an ordinary business bank account earns no
interest, and when there is a cash surplus, management
should consider investing the money to earn some return. G
L
This chapter describes the various types of investment
that may be chosen for the investment of short term cash
surpluses.
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
1 Cash deficit and surplus cash E4 (a)

2 Budgeting for surpluses E2 (c), E4 (b)
3 Cash investments: bank deposit accounts E4 (bi)
4 Money-market deposits E4 (bii)
5 Certificates of deposit E4 (biii)
6 UK Government stock E4 (biv)
7 UK Local authority stocks E4 (bv)
8 Risk and exposure E4 (b)

E Cash management
2 Cash management
(c) Outline guidelines and legislation in relation to the K

management of cash balances in public sector organisations
4 Investing and financing
(a) Explain how surplus cash and cash deficit may arise K
(b) Explain the following types of short term investments and the K
associated risks/returns:
(i) bank deposits
(ii) money-market deposits

A (iii) certificates of deposit
C (iv) government stock
C (v) local authority stock
A
G
L 1 Cash deficit and surplus cash
O
B Companies may face situations where they have a cash deficit. In such a scenario, appropriate action
must be taken if the company is to continue to trade on a day-to-day basis.
A Companies may sometimes have cash surpluses. The surplus needs to be used in the best way, and this
L will often mean investing it.
1.1 What is a deficit?

B A cash deficit is a shortage of available funds to satisfy current obligations.
O
X A cash deficit may arise for a number of reasons.
. (a) Current funding arrangements may be insufficient. A business may need to enter into additional
C overdraft or loan agreements to access necessary funds.

(b) Seasonal factors may mean that a company has cash tied up in inventory that it is unable to sell
O due to seasonal demand. For example, an ice cream company could experience a cash deficit in
M the winter months.
(c) Companies who are reliant on one or two large customers are more likely to experience a cash
deficit if the customer does not pay for goods within the agreed payment period.
1.2 What is a surplus?

A cash surplus is a the value of cash over and above what is reqired to satisfy current obligations.
Businesses will sometimes have surplus cash because of improvements in working capital
management, sales of non-current assets, or because unexpectedly large amounts of cash have been
generated from operations.
CHAPTER 21 // INVESTING SURPLUS FUNDS
Cash surpluses may arise from seasonal factors, so that surpluses generated in good months are used to
cover shortfalls later. In this case, the management of the business needs to ensure that the surpluses
are big enough to cover the later deficits. The mere existence of a surplus in one or two months in a row
is no guarantee of liquidity in the long term.
1.2.1 Example: Surpluses

(a) Drif Co receives money every month from cash sales and from customers for credit sales of
$1,000. It makes payments, in the normal course of events of $800 a month.
In January, the company uses an overdraft facility to buy a car for $4,000.
Jan Feb March
$ $ $
Brought forward – (3,800) (3,600)
Receipts 1,000 1,000 1,000
Payments (800) (800) (800)
Car
Overdrawn balance
(4,000)
(3,800)
0
(3,600)
0
(3,400) A
The company has been left with a persistent overdraft, even though, in operating terms it makes C
a monthly surplus of $200. C
(b) Guide Co on the other hand has monthly cash receipts of $1,200 and monthly cash payments of
$1,050. The company sets up a special loan account: it borrows $5,000 to buy a car. This it
A
pays off at the rate of $80 a month.
Jan
$
Feb
$
March
$ G
Brought forward
Receipts
–
1,200
70
1,200
140
1,200
L
Payments
Car
(1,050)
(80)
(1,050)
(80)
(1,050)
(80)
O
Overdrawn balance 70 140 210 B
Which do you consider has the healthier finances? Clearly Drif Co produces an operating surplus (before A
the motor purchase) of $200 ($1,000  $800) a month, which is more than Guide ($150, ie $1,200 
$1,050). Furthermore Guide Co has a much higher net debt, the loan for the car being $5,000 as L
opposed to $4,000.
B
Yet, in effect the financing arrangements each has chosen has turned the tables. Drif Co is relying on
normal overdraft finance which will be repayable on demand. Its normal operating surplus of receipts
from cash sales and credit customers, over payments to suppliers and other creditors has been
completely swamped by the long-term financing of a car.
O
On the other hand, Guide Co, by arranging a separate term loan, which is more secure from Guide Co's X
point of view, is able to run an operating surplus of $70 a month. It has effectively separated an
operating surplus arising out of month to month business expenses from its cash requirements for
.
capital investment (in the car), a financial inflow. C
This goes to show therefore that: O
(a)
(b)
A 'surplus' can sometimes be created by the way in which financial information is presented.
It is often necessary to distinguish different kinds of cash transaction (eg capital payments).
M
(c) Different types of debt have different risks for the company attached to them.
2 Budgeting for surpluses
A company has a variety of opportunities for using its cash surpluses, but the choice of obtaining a
return is determined by considerations of profitability, liquidity and safety.
2.1 What should be done with a cash surplus?

In asking what a business should do with a cash surplus, we should ask why a business needs cash.
The economist JM Keynes identified three reasons.
(a) Firstly, a business needs cash to meet its regular commitments of paying its suppliers, its
employees' wages, its taxes, its annual dividends to shareholders and so on. This reason for
holding cash is called the transactions motive.
(b) Cash is also needed to create a safety buffer to cover unforeseen contingencies. He names this
A the precautionary motive. In the context of a business, this buffer may be provided by an
C overdraft facility, which has the advantage that it will cost nothing until it is actually used.
C (c) The third motive for holding cash is the speculative motive. However, most businesses do not
hold surplus cash as a speculative asset (eg in the hope that interest rates will rise).
A The cash management policy of a business will reflect its strategic position. Thus, if a company is
planning future major non-current asset purchases, or if it is planning to acquire another business, it
will consider whether any cash surplus should be retained and invested in marketable securities until it
G is needed. If a company has no plans to grow or to invest, then surplus cash not required for
transactions or precautionary purposes should be returned to shareholders.
L Surplus cash may be returned to shareholders by:
O  Increasing the usual level of the annual dividends which are paid
B  Making a one-off special dividend payment
 Using the money to buy back its own shares from some of its shareholders
A
L 2.1.1 How much cash will a business require for transactions and precautionary
purposes?
A number of mathematical cash management models have been developed to try to establish a
B theoretical basis to the idea of an optimal cash balance. Many larger companies use such models in
practice. For the medium-sized or smaller business, deciding how to manage cash balances is more
O often a matter left to the judgement and skill of the financial manager, in the light of the cashflow
forecast. Once an 'optimal' cash balance is established, the remainder of a surplus should be invested in
X marketable securities.
. 2.1.2 Investing surplus cash
C A business's management of cash should be conducted with liquidity, safety and profitability as the
O three considerations in mind. Cash is an asset of a business; if it is to be invested, and it must be
invested profitably, the investment must be secure.
M Banks provide one avenue for investment, but larger firms can invest in other forms of financial
instrument in the money markets. Types of short-term investments and the associated risks/returns are
considered within the remaining sections of this chapter.
EXAM FOCUS POINT

Specific types of investment are likely to be examined
 Bank deposits  Government stock
 Money-market deposits  Local authority stock
 Certificates of deposit
QUESTION Profitability
Compare the following two situations. Steve and Andy are both in the car repair business. Both own
equipment worth $4,000 and both owe $200 to suppliers. Steve, however, has accumulated $1,000 in
cash which is deposited in a non interest bearing current account at his bank. Andy has $100 in petty
cash.
Steve Andy
$ $
Non-current assets 4,000 4,000
Cash at bank 1,000 100
Payables (200) (200)
Net assets 4,800 3,900
Profit for the year 1,200 1,200
Which would you say is the more profitable?
ANSWER
A
Both obviously have made the same amount of profit in the year in question. In absolute terms they are
C
equal. C
However, if we examine more closely, we find that the relative performance of Steve and Andy differs. A
Steve Andy
Profit $1,200 $1,200
Net assets $4,800 $3,900 G
% 25 30.7 L
In other words, Andy is making the same amount out of more limited resources. Steve could have easily O
increased his profit if he had invested his spare cash and earned interest on it.
B
A
2.2 Guidelines for investing L
Any business will normally have a number of guidelines as to how the funds are invested. A firm will try
and maximise the return for an acceptable level of risk. What is acceptable depends on the preferences
of the firm in question. B
There is generally held to be a relationship between risk and return. Generally speaking, a higher return
involves a higher risk. A risk of an investment is its propensity to fluctuate in value.
O
(a) Shares. The price of shares on the stock market can 'go down as well as up'. For example, on
X
Day 1 you might have paid $100 for shares which on Day 2 had fallen in value to $90, whereas
on Day 3 their value might have increased to $120.
.
(b) Deposit. The amount of money you deposit in your bank account will not change, ie $100 will
C
still be $100, and there will be an amount of accrued interest. O
To maintain liquidity, it is often company policy that the surplus funds should be invested in financial
instruments which are easily converted into cash; in effect, enough of the surplus funds should be
M
invested to maintain liquidity. Some investments are much more liquid than others – one that is highly
liquid will generally attract a lower return.
There have been a number of reported incidents where a firm's corporate treasury department took too
many risks with the firm's funds, investing them in risky financial instruments to gain a profit. These
went sour, and firms have been left with large losses, arising solely out of treasury operations, with little
relevance to the firm's main business.
Another consideration is the maturity (length or duration) of the investment. A longer maturity will
generally provide a higher return.
Guidelines can cover issues such as the following.

(a) Surplus funds can only be invested in specified types of investment (eg no equity shares).
(b) All investments must be convertible into cash within a set number of days.
(c) Investments should be ranked: surplus funds to be invested in higher risk instruments when only
a sufficiency has been invested in lower risk items (so that there is always a cushion of safety).
(d) If a firm invests in certain financial instruments, a credit rating should be obtained. Credit rating
agencies, discussed in a later chapter, issue gradings according to risk.
2.3 Legal restrictions on investments

The type of investments an organisation can make is restricted by law in certain special cases:
(a) Where public (ie taxpayers') money is invested by a public sector (central or local government)
institution
A (b) Where the money is invested by a company on behalf of personal investors in cases such as
C pension schemes
C (c) In the case of trusts
A 2.4 Investment by public sector organisations

Public sector organisations are subject to various rules affecting the ways in which they can handle
G cash, and how they can invest any surplus funds that they have.
One example of legislation is the Approved Investment Regulations which govern the investment policy
L of local authorities. These regulations ensure that local authorities choose investments that give safe
O and easy access to cash rather than high interest. This used to mean that authorities were restricted to
government securities and high-street bank and building societies. Recent changes in the rules have
B also allowed authorities access to a deposit facility run by the treasury and commercially run money
market funds with the highest level of creditworthiness.
A
L 3 Cash investments: bank deposit accounts
B Surplus funds can be deposited in interest bearing accounts offered by banks, finance houses or
building societies. Generally speaking:
O  These are for a fixed period of time.
X  Withdrawal may not be permitted, or may result in a penalty.
 The principal does not decline in monetary value.
.
C Before looking at different forms of cash investment, let us be clear on the point about comparing rates
of interest.
O (a) If interest on an account is paid more frequently than annually, the annual return is higher than
M available from an account paying interest at the same rate at the end of each year. This is
because some interest can be earned in the year on the interest which is paid before the end of
the year.
(b) A comparison can be made between such accounts by calculating the compound annual rate of
interest (CAR).
If x% interest is paid n times per year, then the compound annual rate of interest is given by the
following.
 x
n

CAR =  1    1  100
 n 
 
For example, Account A offers 5.3% gross payable annually, while Account B offers 5.25% gross,
payable quarterly. The CAR for B is:
 4 
 1  0.0525   1  100  5.35%
 4  
 
This is higher than the annual return on Account A.
Interest rates on cash investments may or may not vary, depending on the terms of
the account.
3.1 High street bank deposits

All of the retail 'High Street' banks offer a wide range of different types of interest earning account, the
variety having increased in recent years in competition with the building societies. The main clearers and
many building societies also pay interest on some types of current account.
For someone who wishes to invest a small sum for a short period, deposit account facilities are available
A
from the banks. However, the interest rate is relatively low, and many of these accounts are now being C
discontinued.
C
High interest deposit accounts and high interest cheque accounts. If you have a larger amount of
money to invest, you can place the money in a high interest account. Access is usually still immediate, A
but the rate of interest offered will be higher.
Option deposits. These arrangements are for predetermined periods of time ranging from 2 to 7 years
with minimum deposits. The interest rates, which may be linked to base rates, reflect the longer term G
nature of the arrangement and the corresponding lack of withdrawal facilities before the expiry of the
agreed term. For businesses, these might be of limited relevance.
L
O
3.2 Finance company deposits
B
All of the larger finance companies will accept cash deposits for varying periods from 7 days upwards.
Most of them insist on a minimum deposit but they do pay a higher rate of interest than for basic bank A
deposits. Finance companies are involved in lending of above average risk.
L
QUESTION Risk and return
Lending by finance companies is of above average risk. What level of return would you expect from B
depositing money with a finance company?
O
A A slightly lower return than average
B An average return X
C
D
A slightly higher return than average
A significantly higher return than average
.
C
ANSWER
O
C A slightly higher return than offered by a bank: risk and reward are related.
M
3.3 Building societies deposits

The Building Societies Act 1986 in the UK allowed building societies to compete with banks over a
much wider range of activities than they used to, and increasingly the societies are offering cheque or
credit card facilities. Like the banks, the building societies have developed a wide range of different
investment facilities, which are mainly for non-corporate investors.
3.4 Risks and returns

Bank deposits are considered to be low risk. The investor’s initial capital is secure and the company can
not receive back less than it puts in. For this reason, interest rates are not attractive to companies that
regularly have surplus cash as returns are low.
4 Money-market deposits
Money-market deposit accounts are either fixed term or notice accounts. The customer agrees to deposit
money either for a fixed period, or a notice period and the money is then invested in stocks and bonds...
A money-market deposit account (MMDA) is a deposit account offered by a bank which invests in
stocks and bonds. The bank pays the depositor interest based on current interest rates in the money
A markets.
C
C 4.1 A background to money-market deposits
A Money-market deposit accounts are either fixed term or notice accounts which pay interest based on
current interest rates in the money markets. The customer agrees to deposit money either for a fixed
period, or a notice period. These accounts typically pay a higher rate of interest and require a higher
minimum balance.
G
L 4.2 Risks and returns
O Money-market deposits can offer a reasonable return. Investments in money-market notice accounts are
typically liquid meaning that funds can usually be withdrawn within a few business days. Investors can
B also take advantage of rising interest rates by keeping funds in an investment that will adjust to the
money markets.
A There are a number of risks associated with money-market deposits. Most MMDAs require the depositor
L to deposit a minimum amount. In most cases, this minimum amount is above $50,000.
Money-market deposit rates are variable. In other words, companies do not know how much they will
earn on their investment from month to month.
B There may be restrictions on the number of transactions that can be made in a month.
O A final risk with money-market deposits is due to inflation. Because money-market deposits are
X considered to be safer than other investments like stocks, long term average returns on money-market
deposits tends to be less than long term average returns on riskier investments. Over long periods of
. time, inflation can eat away at returns.
C
O 5 Certificates of deposit
M A certificate of deposit is a certificate indicating that a sum of money has been deposited with a bank
and will be repaid at a later date. As CDs can be bought and sold, they are a liquid type of investment.
A certificate of deposit (CD) is a negotiable instrument in bearer form. In other words, it is a certificate
which can be bought and sold. Title belongs to the holder and ownership is transferred by physical
delivery from buyer to seller.
Certificates of deposit (CDs) are issued by an institution (bank or building society), certifying that a
specified sum has been deposited with the issuing institution, to be repaid on a specific date. The term
may be as short as seven days, or as long as five years. Most are for a term of six months.
Since CDs are negotiable, if the holder of a CD cannot wait until the end of the term of the deposit and
wants cash immediately, the CD can be sold. The certificates of deposit market is one of the London
money markets, and there is no difficulty for a CD holder to sell if the wish to do so arises.

The appeal of a CD is that it offers an attractive rate of interest, and can be easily sold. CDs are sold on
the market at a discount which reflects prevailing interest rates.
The document recognises the obligation of the amount to the bearer (with or without interest) at a future
date. The holder of a certificate is therefore entitled to the money on deposit, usually with interest, on
the stated date. Payment is obtained by presenting the CD on the appropriate date to a recognised bank
(which will in turn present the CD for payment to the bank or building society that issued it).
CDs have one major advantage over a money-market fixed deposit with the same bank or building
society, namely liquidity. Unlike a money market fixed deposit which cannot be terminated until it
matures, CDs can be liquidated at any time at the prevailing market rate.
A
There is a large and active secondary market in bank and building society CDs. Hence they are an ideal
way to invest funds in the short term while retaining the flexibility to convert into cash at short notice if C
the need arises. C
Buyers of CDs in the secondary market are banks and other companies or institutions wishing to invest
at money market rates. They are attracted by the competitive rates of interest on a CD, the
A
comparatively low credit risk (of the bank failing to repay the deposit with interest at maturity) and the
continuing liquidity of CDs, which can be resold any number of times before maturity.
G
6 UK Government stock L
O
Gilts are securities issued by the UK government. B
The term gilts is short for 'gilt-edged securities' and refers to marketable British Government securities. A
These stocks, although small in number (around 100), dominate the fixed interest market. Most gilts
have a face value of £100, at which the government promises to buy the gilt back on a specific future L
date.
B
The Financial Times classifies gilts as follows.
(a) Shorts – lives up to five years.
O
(b) Mediums – lives from five to fifteen years.
X
(c) Longs – lives of more than fifteen years. .
(d) Undated stocks. Issued many years ago these are sometimes known as irredeemable or one-way C
option stocks. These include War Loan 31/2 %, Conversion Loan 31/2 %, Consolidated Stock 21/2
%. Each has certain other peculiarities. O
(e) Index-linked stocks. M
By 'life' is meant the number of years before the issuer repays the principal amount.
6.1 Fixed interest gilts

Most gilts are fixed interest, and their prices and yields follow the principles outlined above. There are
some other types of gilt, outlined below.
6.2 Index-linked stocks

There are various index-linked Treasury stocks in issue. Both the interest and the eventual redemption
value are linked to inflation.
The half yearly interest payment is calculated on the basis of the value of the Retail Prices Index eight
months before the interest payment date. Thus if a 2% index-linked stock was issued 8 months after the
index had stood at 100 and the index stood at 150 eight months before a particular interest payment
date, then the interest payable would be:
150
Interest payable = ½   2% = 1.5%
100
The ½ is needed as the interest is payable half-yearly. The redemption value is similarly indexed.
These gilts offer a guaranteed real return equal to the coupon rate. Many investment fund managers
would have considered such a return highly satisfactory over the last fifteen years.

Government stocks are about as safe an investment as you can get. There is no risk of default and their
A
relatively short maturity means that the prices are relatively stable. Whilst interest can be fixed (fixed
interest gilts), returns are ultimately low.
C
C 7 UK Local authority stocks
A
Local authority stocks may be issued by any size of authority from County Councils to Borough Councils.
G We have already mentioned that it is possible for investors to deposit their money with local authorities.
In addition to these investments there are a very large number of marketable local authority securities.
L Stocks may be issued by any size of authority from County Councils to Borough Councils.
O Some of the local authority stocks are issued with long lives and there are several one way option stocks
and even a handful of genuinely irredeemable stocks.
B
A
Local authority stocks may, in most respects, be considered as being very similar to British Government
L Stocks. The main differences are that:
(a) The security of a local authority is not considered quite as good as that of the central
B government, and
(b) The market in most of the stocks is much thinner (ie. there are not many transactions) than for
O gilts, since the amounts involved are smaller and the stocks tend to be held by just a few
X institutions
As a result of the points listed above, the return on local authority stocks tends to be rather higher than
. on gilts.
C In addition to the longer term loan stocks, many local authorities issue bonds which are redeemable
O after one or two years. These are commonly known as yearlings.
M
8 Risk and exposure
The relative attractiveness of any of these investments derives from their return and the risk.
Diversification across a range of separate investments can reduce risk for the investor.
All investments possess some degree of risk. In some cases this may be very small indeed.
(a) Those investments with the lowest risk are, perhaps, fixed interest National Savings plans. Any
chance that the British government might default on the payment of interest or capital is
exceedingly remote. For all practical purposes, such investments are risk-free in money terms.
There is, however, a real risk that both income and capital values may be eroded by inflation.
(b) At the other extreme many forms of investment are highly speculative. Indeed some tactics such
as selling shares you do not own, have a theoretically unlimited downside potential.
8.1 Effects of risk

We have considered the risks and returns relating to short-term investments in the previous sections.
Risk may be considered in terms of its effect on income, capital or both.
(a) Income only
For most cash investments there is virtually no risk that the capital invested will not be repaid.
Also while there may be little doubt that the interest will be paid, those cash investments which
carry a variable rate of interest also carry the risk that the rate will fall in line with conditions
prevailing in the market.
(b) Capital only
With an investment in gilts or other 'undoubted' marketable fixed interest stocks, there is always a
risk of a capital loss if prices fall, even though the payment of interest may be considered
completely secure.
A
(c) Capital and income C
For many investments both income and capital are at risk. Often a loss of income will precede a
loss of capital. A company may reduce its ordinary share dividend, precipitating a fall in the share
C
price. A
Risk may be caused by general factors, or by factors specific to an individual security or sector.
(a) General factors
All investments are affected, to some extent, by changes in the political and economic climate.
G
(b) Inflation L
A fall in the value of money may affect both income and capital. Cash and other non-equity O
investments are particularly susceptible, although the high yield may provide some
compensation. B
(c) Special factors A
The results of an individual company will be affected not only by general economic conditions but
also by: L
(i) Its type of products or services
(ii)
(iii)
Its competitive position within the industry
Management factors
B
O
8.2 The relationship between risk and return
X
The return expected by an investor will depend on the level of risk. The higher the risk, the higher the
required return. This can be illustrated as in the diagram below. .
C
O
M
Marketable UK securities can be ranked in order of increasing risk and increasing expected return.
 Government stocks Low risk
 Local authority stocks
 Other 'public' corporation stocks
 Company mortgage loan stocks
 Other secured loans
 Unsecured loans
 Convertible loan stocks
 Preference shares
 Equities High risk
The riskiness of certificates of deposit varies with the creditworthiness of the issuers. They are riskier
than government (and probably local government) securities, but less risky than shares.
What combination of risk and return is appropriate? Given that an investor is faced with a range of
investments with differing risk/return combinations, what sort of investment should he choose? This is
A very difficult question to answer. Whilst most investors are risk-averse (they prefer less risk to more risk,
C given the same return), the intensity of that aversion varies between individuals. Some are quite happy
to take a bit of a gamble in the hope of achieving a higher return.
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 Companies may face situations where they have a cash deficit. In such a scenario, appropriate action
must be taken if the company is to continue to trade on a day-to-day basis.
 Companies may sometimes have cash surpluses. The surplus needs to be used in the best way, and this
will often mean investing it.
 A company has a variety of opportunities for using its cash surpluses, but the choice of obtaining a
return is determined by considerations of profitability, liquidity and safety.
 Surplus funds can be deposited in interest bearing accounts offered by banks, finance houses or
building societies. Generally speaking:
– These are for a fixed period of time.
– Withdrawal may not be permitted, or may result in a penalty.
– The principal does not decline in monetary value. A
 Money-market deposit accounts are either fixed term or notice accounts. The customer agrees to deposit C
money either for a fixed period, or a notice period and the money is then invested in stocks and bonds.
C
 A certificate of deposit is a certificate indicating that a sum of money has been deposited with a bank
and will be repaid at a later date. As CDs can be bought and sold, they are a liquid type of investment. A
 Gilts are securities issued by the UK government.
 Local authority stocks may be issued by any size of authority from County Councils to Borough Councils. G
 The relative attractiveness of any of these investments derives from their return and the risk.
Diversification across a range of separate investments can reduce risk for the investor.
L
O
B
A
QUICK QUIZ
1 Which of the following UK securities is considered the least risky?

A Government securities C Convertible loan notes L
B Secured loans D Preference shares
2 What are gilts?
B
3 What is meant by a yearling?
4 What advantage does a certificate of deposit have over a time deposit?
O
A Profitability C Security
X
B Maturity D Liquidity .
5 What factors affect the riskiness of investments?
C
6 Local authority stocks are considered riskier than equities.
O
True
M
False
1 A Government securities are considered to be the least risky.

2 Marketable British Government securities.

3 A local authority bond redeemable after one or two years.
4 D A CD can be liquidated at any time at the prevailing market rate.
5 (a) Market sentiment about the general political and economic climate.
(b) The rate of inflation, and the future outlook for inflation.
(c) Factors relating to the products, competitive position and management of the enterprise.
6 False.
A
C
C
A
Now try ...
G Attempt the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
L Number
O Q97
B Q98
A Q99
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
C H A P T E R
A
For many businesses, banks are an important source of
cash to meet operational cash flow needs and also a Raising finance from a C
source of finance for medium-term investments. C
Banks will only lend money when they are satisfied that
they will be repaid with interest. There is risk for the
bank A
banks, and banks will assess the risk before deciding
whether to agree to lend, and what the interest rate
should be. G
L
This chapter describes the lending criteria that
management should consider when they ask for bank
finance, and compares the main forms of bank lending,
overdrafts, revolving credit and loans.
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
SYLLABUS O
M
1 Introduction E4 (c)
2 Budgeting for borrowings E4 (c)
3 The bank/customer relationship E4 (c)
4 Banks' criteria for lending E4 (c)
5 Overdrafts and revolving credit facilities E4 (c)
6 Medium and long-term loans E4 (c)
7 Overdrafts and loans compared E4 (c)

E Cash management
4 Investing and financing
(c) Explain different ways of raising finance from a bank and the K
basic terms and conditions associated with each financing
1 Introduction
A Short and medium term finance may come from a variety of sources. It is important to decide which is
most appropriate for a given situation.
C
C In this chapter we shall be looking at how businesses obtain money for their short and medium-term
needs.
A The bank is a key provider of finance. We therefore concentrate on the attitude the bank might take to
requests for funds and the most important features of bank overdraft and loan financing. Comparison of
overdraft and loan financing will be very important for exam purposes.
G As well as understanding what finance a bank can provide, you also need to know about the legal
L relationship between a bank and its customers.
O Remember when you're reading this chapter, that as well as describing what finance sources are
available, you need to consider their suitability. You must therefore be aware of the advantages and
B disadvantages, and with these in mind, be able to recommend the best source of finance in a specific
set of circumstances.
A Like other chapters, we look at the UK as exemplar of other systems around the world.
L
2 Budgeting for borrowings
B
O Companies often have to rely on bank finance; the right type of finance should be obtained.
X As far as borrowing is concerned, there are three aspects to the maintenance of liquidity.
. (a) The firm needs enough money to function operationally, pay salaries, suppliers and so on. Of
course, eventually it will receive funds from customers, but the length of the cash cycle can mean
C reliance on overdraft finance at times.
O (b) The firm also needs to minimise the risk that some of its sources of finance will be removed from
it.
M (c) The firm also needs to provide against the contingency of any sudden movements in cash.
Contingency measures can take the form of special arrangements with the bank, insurance
policies and so on.
Some of these needs are more pressing than others.
(a) Working capital. Working capital is often financed by overdraft – this is a result of lagged
payments and receipts as discussed earlier and the willingness of businesses to offer credit.
(b) Long-term finance is used for major investments. Capital expenditure is easier to put off than,
say, wages in a crisis, but a long-term failure to invest can damage the business and reduce its
capacity.
CHAPTER 22 // RAISING FINANCE FROM A BANK
(c) Thirdly, the borrowing might be required to finance assets overseas, in which case the currency
of the borrowing might be important.
Bank borrowing can be obtained in the following ways.
 Overdraft. A company, through its current account, can borrow money on a short-term basis up
to a certain amount. Overdrafts are repayable on demand.
 Term loan. The customer borrows a fixed amount and pays it back with interest over a period or
at the end of it.
 Committed facility. The bank undertakes to make a stipulated amount available to a borrower,
on demand.
 A revolving facility is a facility that is renewed after a set period. Once the customer has repaid
the amount, the customer can borrow again.
 Uncommitted facility. The bank, if it feels like it, can lend the borrower a specified sum. The
only purpose of this is that all the paperwork has been done up front. The bank has no obligation A
to lend.
C
 Banker's acceptance facilities. This relates to bills of exchange that a bank agrees to accept.
Bills of exchange, when accepted, are a legal obligation to make a payment. A bank may agree to C
accept bills drawn on it by the creditors of a customer, and it then undertakes to make the
payment of the bill on behalf of the customer. The customer must then repay the bank (with
A
interest/charges). Bank bills are often used in foreign trade, when foreign suppliers will agree to
payment by means of a bank bill arrangement, when they are not prepared to give trade credit to
the buyer. G
L
O
3 The bank/customer relationship B
Several types of contractual relationship may exist between bank and customer.
A
L
3.1 Debtor/creditor relationship
The customer deposits his money with the bank. These funds go into the customer's account and can be
withdrawn at any time. The bank is the debtor (for the money owed to the customer) and the customer
B
is the creditor. However, there are circumstances where this relationship can be reversed. If a customer O
borrows from a bank, for example if the customer’s account is overdrawn, then the customer owes
money to the bank and is a debtor of the bank. X
.
3.2 Mortgagor/mortgagee relationship
This relationship can come into being when the bank asks a customer to secure a loan by a charge or
C
mortgage over assets such as property. If the customer defaults, and fails to pay interest or repay the O
loan capital when payment is due, the bank may have the right to take control of the secured asset(s),
and possibly sell them off in order to repay the money it is owed. When a loan is secured, the borrower M
is the mortgagor, giving security for the loan, while the bank is the mortgagee, lending on the basis of
the security provided.
3.3 Fiduciary relationship

If one of the parties in a relationship based on trust is in an influential position, then that person could
exert undue influence to make the other party enter into a contract. The law therefore expects the
'superior' party in the relationship to act in good faith. It is said to be a fiduciary relationship. The law
expects banks to act with utmost good faith, particularly where the bank is advising the customer.
3.4 Maintaining a good relationship with the bank

The Treasury department of a firm should maintain appropriate relationships with the firm's bank (or
banks, if the firm maintains more than one bank account). Maintaining a good relationship involves the
following.
(a) Maintaining the value of any security which is pledged to secure a loan
(b) Informing the bank as to the progress of the business, especially its demands for cash (Forecasts
of expected future cash flow are often required for credit to be advanced.)
(c) Only using the overdraft for appropriate financial needs and within authorised limits
4 Banks' criteria for lending

A The principles of good lending (called the canons of lending) guide a bank's decision about whether or
C not to lend money. The bank wishes to ensure that the borrower will be able to make the scheduled
repayments, in full and within the required period of time.
C
A If the bank makes a loan which is not repaid, a bank's profits suffer in a number of ways.
 The expected interest from the loan is not earned.
 The amount advanced and not recoverable is written off as a bad debt.
G  The costs of administering the account are much increased.
 There are legal costs in chasing the debt.
L
O 4.1 Lending criteria
B When a business is trying to borrow from a bank, it is useful to think about what factors will influence
the lending decision of the bank.
A A bank's decision whether or not to lend will be based on several factors. These may be remembered by
L the mnemonic is CAMPARI.
Character of the customer
Ability to borrow and repay
B Margin of profit
Purpose of the borrowing
O Amount of the borrowing
Repayment terms
X Insurance against the possibility of non-payment
.
C EXAM FOCUS POINT
O Lending criteria are a popular exam topic. Ensure that you remember the ‘CAMPARI’ mnemonic.
M
4.1.1 Character of the borrower
A bank will be more willing to lend to a customer whose character it trusts, because of the long-
established history of the borrower, or the character of its top managers. The character of the borrower
can be established and judged.
(a) The borrower's past record with the bank is examined.
(b) Personal interviews are mainly used for business lending.
(c) Personal lending is more often credit scored (by computer).
(d) In the case of a company, the bank may look at key ratios which indicate the company's
performance.
4.1.2 Ability to borrow and repay

A bank will usually expect repayment of a business loan (or an overdraft to a business customer) from
the normal operational cash flows of the business. If the net cash flows of a borrower are considered
insufficient to meet the interest payments and capital repayments, the bank will usually not lend, even
when there is good security for the loan. The bank will look at a business customer's financial
performance as an indication of future trends. Hopefully the loan will be invested in such a way as to
generate profit.
Re-investment of retained profits is a sign of the owner's faith in the business. (In other words, the
owner does not take out all profits as dividends or drawings.)
Bankers scour financial statements for signs of: low/declining profitability; increased dependence on
borrowing; overtrading; inadequate control over working capital; sudden provisions or allowances;
delays.
Although a bank will use published accounts and management accounts, it will not lend solely on that
basis: in other words the viability of the loan itself will be assessed. A
A business wanting to borrow from a bank should be able to provide believable cash flow forecasts or
profit forecasts that demonstrate its ability to repay the borrowed money.
C
C
4.1.3 Margin of profit
A
Remember, banks want to lend money to make money! The rate of interest that is charged will depend
on the assessment of risk by the bank. The basic ruler is that if a bank is prepared to lend money, it will
charge a higher rate of interest on loans or overdrafts that it considers to be more risky.
G
(a) Fixed rates
The lending policies of most banks stipulate different rates for different purposes to customers.
L
(b) Discretionary rates O
The bank will decide on the return which it requires from the lending. A loan for a risky venture
(such as a new business) will be offered at a higher rate of interest, so as to compensate the
B
bank for the risk it takes that the lending will not be repaid, than a loan perceived to be of low A
risk.
L
4.1.4 Purpose of the borrowing
The borrower must specify the purpose of the borrowing, and the bank must be satisfied that the
purpose of borrowing is satisfactory. Loans for certain purposes will normally not be granted at all. Some
B
will be granted only on certain conditions. O
(a) Illegal loans
X
A loan which is for an illegal purpose such as drug smuggling obviously must be refused.
(b) Lending to finance working capital .
Lending money (usually on overdraft) to finance some of the working capital of a business is quite C
normal. However when the intended purpose of an advance is to finance a big increase in
inventory or receivables, the bank will consider the liquidity of the business, and whether the O
customer will need more and more financial assistance from the bank as time goes on. M
(c) Loans for new business ventures
A loan to set up a new business venture should be viewed in the context that all new ventures are
risky; while many do succeed a considerable number of them fail to make profits and survive.
The purpose of the loan will also help to determine the nature of the lending and its term. For example if
a company needs to borrow in order to have cash to meet its day-to-day operational needs, the bank
may be prepared to offer an overdraft facility, but not a medium-term loan.
4.1.5 Amount of the borrowing

The lending proposition must state exactly how much the customer wants to borrow. This might seem
self-evident, but there are two important points to consider.
(a) The banker will check that the borrower is not asking for too much, or more than is needed for
the particular purpose. This is especially important with requests for an overdraft facility. Clearly
this consideration is linked in with the borrower’s ability to repay.
(b) The banker checks that the borrower has not asked for less than it really needs. Otherwise the
bank may later have to lend more, purely to safeguard the original advance.
The bank's lending policy will indicate limits on the amount of certain loans and the amount which must
be paid 'up front' by the borrower. For example, a bank may be willing to lend $2 million to help a
company buy new premises, but only if the customer will contribute $1 million of its own money
towards the full cost of $3 million.
A 4.1.6 Repayment terms

C The likelihood that the advance will be repaid is the most important requirement for a loan. A bank
should not lend money to a person or business who has not got the resources to repay it with interest,
C even if it also has security for the loan. Security for the loan gives the lender the right to take certain
A assets if the borrower defaults. Security is only a safety net, to be called upon only in the event of an
unfortunate and unexpected inability to repay.
The timescale for repayment is very important. Overdrafts are technically repayable on demand (though
G it is rare for a bank to insist on this without first having discussed a different timescale for repayment).
Other loans might be payable in instalments, especially medium-term loans to acquire assets.
L
4.1.7 Insurance against the possibility of non-payment
O If a bank needs to take insurance against the possibility that the loan will not be repaid (in the form of
B security, such as title deeds or a life policy) then the loan should not be made – as stated above,
security is only a safety net.
A
L 4.2 Security for lending
The security for a loan should have the following characteristics.
B (a) Easy to take
O The bank will want to have, or to obtain easily, title to the secured property so that it may be sold
and the loan repaid.
X (b) Easy to value
. The security should have an identifiable value which:
C (i) Is stable or increasing, and
O (ii) Fully covers the lending plus a margin
You can see this most clearly when banks and building societies refuse to lend more than, say,
M 95% of the value of a house. It has (at the time of lending) a margin of safety of 5%.
(c) Easy to realise
The ideal security is one which can readily be sold and converted to cash. Banks prefer readily
realisable security because:
(i) The administrative costs are thereby kept to a minimum.
(ii) There is less danger of deterioration (say, of premises) between the time of default and
that of realisation.
(iii) A quick pay-off reduces the length of time over which interest accrues on the unpaid
advance.
For business borrowers, security may take the form of a fixed charge over specific assets of the borrower,
or a ‘floating charge’ over all its assets.
4.3 Personal guarantees

A business is a separate entity from the person who owns it for accounting purposes. It is also a
principle of company law that in most cases the liability of shareholders for the debts of a company is
limited to the capital they contributed. The debts of a business clearly include bank loans and
overdrafts. However, in practice, it is often the case that, in its search for security, the bank will ensure
that a business loan is supported by a personal guarantee from the owner of the business. Such
requirements are therefore mainly a concern of smaller or medium sized businesses, largely run by their
owners.
For example, Mr Badger is Managing Director of Setts Co. Setts Co has an overdraft arrangement with
the bank, but Mr Badger has to give a personal guarantee of the overdraft. This means that if Setts Co
fails to pay its debt to the bank, the bank can call in the guarantee, and Mr Badger will have to pay the
debt out of his own resources.
A
C
QUESTION Loan application
C
Grog Co is a wholesaler, selling alcoholic beverages to shopkeepers for resale to the general public. Grog
Co has a large warehouse at Ponders End, North London. Its cash cycle is such that most of the time it A
makes a cash surplus but recently a number of thefts and unexplained account movements have
reduced the size of the surplus. The managing director, Lil Drop, has recently decided that she wants to
move house. Rather than take out a mortgage, she suggests to the bank that the company borrows G
money, on overdraft, to buy her a house. She will personally guarantee the loan, although at the
moment her only asset she can pledge as security is a port wine making firm in Portugal, which she L
inherited from a great aunt: other members of the family are suing her for a share. What chance do you
think Grog Co has of obtaining the loan?
O
B
ANSWER A
The banker will pour himself a glass of CAMPARI, as it were, and say no. Lil Grog can pledge no
security, and the purpose of the loan is not for business reasons. Furthermore, Grog Co's ability to repay L
looks increasingly in doubt.
B
O
5 Overdrafts and revolving credit facilities
X
Overdrafts are subject to an agreed limit, and are repayable on demand. The customer has a flexible .
means of short-term borrowing. An overdraft is best considered as support for normal working capital. A
customer's account can be expected to swing between surplus and overdraft. Banks will look cautiously
C
at overdrafts which are used to purchase non-current assets. O
Where payments from a current account exceed income to the account for a temporary period, the bank M
finances the deficit by means of an overdraft. It is very much a form of short-term lending, available to
both personal and business customers.
5.1 Overdraft considerations

Factors associated with an overdraft are as follows.
(a) Amount
The debit amount should not exceed a certain limit agreed between the bank and the borrower,
usually with reference to known income.
(b) Margin
Interest is charged on the amount overdrawn, usually as a margin over base rate. Interest is
calculated on the daily amount overdrawn and is charged to the account quarterly. A fee may
also be levied where the bank has agreed a large facility with the customer, even where this
facility is not fully used.
(c) Purpose
Overdrafts are usually required to cover short-term deficits: for instance, many people run short at
the end of each month before their salaries are paid in.
(d) Repayment
Overdrafts are technically repayable on demand and it is usual in the facility letter to make this
plain to the customer.
(e) Security
A Depending on the size of the facility open to the customer, security may be required by the bank.
C (f) Benefits
The borrower has a flexible means of short term borrowing; the bank has to accept the
C fluctuation in the account.
A By providing an overdraft facility to a customer, the bank is committing itself to provide an overdraft to
the customer whenever the customer wants it, up to the agreed limit.
G 5.1.1 The cost of an overdraft facility
L The bank will charge interest on the lending, but only to the extent that the customer uses the facility
and goes into overdraft. If the customer does not go into overdraft, the bank cannot charge interest.
O However the bank will usually charge a commitment fee when a customer is granted an overdraft facility
B or an increase in his overdraft facility. This is a fee for granting an overdraft facility and agreeing to
provide the customer with funds if and whenever he needs them. It may be set at a percentage amount
A of the total overdraft facility.
L 5.2 Overdrafts and the working capital cycle

Many businesses require their bank to provide financial assistance for normal trading over the working
B capital cycle.
For example, suppose that a business has the following working capital cycle.
O $ $
X Inventories and receivables 10,000
Bank overdraft 1,000
. Payables 3,000
4,000
C Working capital 6,000
O It now buys inventories costing $2,500 for cash, using its overdraft. Working capital remains the same,
M $6,000, although the bank's financial stake has risen from $1,000 to $3,500.
$ $
Inventories and receivables 12,500
Bank overdraft 3,500
Payables 3,000
6,500
Working capital 6,000
A bank overdraft provides support for normal trading finance. In this example, finance for normal trading
rises from $(10,000  3,000) = $7,000 to $(12,500  3,000) = $9,500 and the bank's contribution
rises from $1,000 out of $7,000 to $3,500 out of $9,500.
A feature of bank lending to support normal trading finance is that the amount of the overdraft required
at any time will depend on the cash flows of the business – the timing of receipts and payments,
seasonal variations in trade patterns and so on. The purpose of the overdraft is to bridge the gap
between cash payments and cash receipts.
When a business customer has an overdraft facility, and the account is always in overdraft, then it has a
solid core (or hard core) instead of swing. For example, suppose that the account of Blunderbuss Co has
the following record for the previous year:
Average Debit
balance Range turnover
Quarter to $ $ $ $
31 March 20X5 40,000 debit 70,000 debit – 20,000 debit 600,000
30 June 20X5 50,000 debit 80,000 debit – 25,000 debit 500,000
30 September 20X5 75,000 debit 105,000 debit – 50,000 debit 700,000
31 December 20X5 80,000 debit 110,000 debit – 60,000 debit 550,000
These figures show that the account has been permanently in overdraft, and the hard core of the
A
overdraft has been rising steeply over the course of the year. C
If the hard core element of the overdraft appears to be becoming a long-term feature of the business, the
bank might wish, after discussions with the customer, to convert the hard core of the overdraft into a
C
medium-term loan, thus giving formal recognition to its more permanent nature. Otherwise annual A
reductions in the hard core of an overdraft would typically be a requirement of the bank.
5.3 The purpose of an advance for day-to-day trading G

The purpose of a bank overdraft for normal day-to-day trading is to help with the financing of current
assets. However, there are a number of different reasons why a business might need an overdraft
L
facility. Only some of these reasons will be sound and acceptable to a bank. O
Borrowing by a business will either increase the assets of the business; or decrease its liabilities. B
5.4 Increasing business assets A
If borrowing is to increase the business assets, a bank will first check whether the purpose is to acquire L
more non-current assets or more current assets. There is nothing wrong with asking a bank for financial
assistance with the purchase of non-current assets. But borrowing to purchase a non-current asset
reduces the liquidity of the business, and might even make it illiquid. B
An overdraft facility for day-to-day trading should therefore be:
O
 Either to increase total current assets
 Or to reduce other current liabilities X
.
5.5 Increasing total current assets
A request for an overdraft facility to increase total current assets can be pinpointed more exactly, to a
C
wish by the company: O
 To increase its inventory levels M
 To increase its overall receivables
 To increase its overall sales turnover
The underlying guide to a bank's attitude to lending (in addition to avoiding risk) is whether the finance
will be temporary (and 'swinging') or longer term.
There might be a number of reasons for a business increasing its inventory levels without increasing its
total sales.
(a) The business might have received a large, firm order from a customer, and must produce goods
to order before the customer will pay for them. The need for finance is only temporary, and a
bank overdraft would be suitable.
(b) The business might wish to build up inventories in anticipation of a seasonal peak demand. Again
the business will need temporary finance to support the cost of the inventories, and again, an
overdraft would be a suitable form of finance.
(c) The business might want to make a speculative purchase of inventories – for example to take
advantage of an opportunity to purchase a consignment of raw materials at a favourable price.
Provided that the 'speculative' nature of the inventory build-up is not unacceptably risky, and
provided that the build-up is temporary, an overdraft would again be a suitable form of finance.
(d) The business might be building up its inventory levels permanently, without increasing its sales
turnover. In such a situation, there would be a danger that some inventories are becoming
slow-moving or unsaleable through deteriorating quality or obsolescence. A build-up of inventory
also implies a need for a review of finance facilities, and an overdraft may not be suitable.
Reasons for a business wanting to increase its total receivables without increasing its sales turnover
might be:
A (a) A loss of efficiency in the credit control, invoicing and debt collection procedures of the business,
or
C (b) The inability of existing customers to pay without being allowed more credit
C In both cases, the bank will be cautious about agreeing to an increased overdraft facility. Delays in
A invoicing should be eliminated by the business; however, if more credit must be allowed to maintain
sales, a bank might agree to an overdraft facility for this purpose.
When a business increases its sales turnover, it will almost certainly have to increase its investment in
G inventories and receivables. It will probably be able to obtain more credit from suppliers, but the balance
of the extra finance required will have to be provided out of extra proprietors' capital or other lending. A
L danger with business expansion is overtrading, and a bank will be wary of requests to support ambitious
O expansion schemes.
B 5.6 Using an overdraft to reduce other current liabilities

A A bank might be asked to provide an overdraft facility to enable a business to pay its tax bills, or to
reduce its volume of payables. The payment of tax might be VAT (generally every quarter) or year end
L corporation tax. An overdraft facility to help a business to pay tax when it falls due is a 'legitimate' and
acceptable purpose for an overdraft, although the bank might wish to know why the business had not
set funds aside to pay the tax. A bank should be able to expect that the overdraft would soon be paid off
B out of profits from future trading.
O An extension to an overdraft in order to pay suppliers must be for the purpose of reducing the overall
average volume of payables, which in turn implies a significant change in the trade credit position of the
X business, all other things being equal. Why might such a reduction in total payables be required?
. (a) To take advantage of attractive purchase discounts offered by suppliers for early settlement of
debts. This should be an acceptable purpose for an extra overdraft to a bank, because taking the
C discount would reduce the costs and so increase the profits of the business.
O (b) To pay suppliers who are pressing for payment. A bank will deal cautiously with such a request.
It might be because the supplier is desperate for money. If the business customer is getting into
M difficulties, and is falling behind with paying his debts, a bank would take the view that agreeing
to an increased overdraft would simply mean taking over debts that might one day never be paid,
and so may not agree to such a proposition.
5.7 Revolving credit facility

A revolving credit facility is similar in many ways to a bank overdraft facility. The borrower agrees a
maximum borrowing limit, and can borrow up to this limit. If a company has a revolving credit facility
with a limit of $5 million, and it then borrows $2 million, it can borrow a further $3 million. If the
company repays $500,000 of the borrowed $2 million, it can now borrow a further $3.5 million.
The main differences between an overdraft facility and a revolving credit facility are that:
(a) The borrowing limit is usually much higher for a revolving credit facility than for a bank overdraft,
and a bank may therefore agree to provide revolving credit only to a large and well-established
business.
(b) The revolving credit facility is for an agreed period of time (and may be renewed when it expires).
In contrast an overdraft facility can be withdrawn at any time, at the option of the bank.
(c) With a revolving credit facility the bank charges interest on the amount borrowed and there is a
facility fee or commitment fee charge on the amount of the facility that has not been borrowed.
6 Medium and long-term loans
A term loan is drawn in full at the beginning of the loan period and repaid at a specified time or in
defined instalments. Term loans are offered with a variety of repayment schedules. Often, the interest
A
and capital repayments are predetermined. The term of the loan will be determined by the useful life of C
the asset purchased, the lending policies of the bank, and the outcome of any negotiations between the
borrower and the bank. C
Interest payments on a loan are based on the full amount borrowed. The loan is repayable not later than A
the date agreed in the loan agreement; or if the borrower breaks a 'loan covenant' at an earlier date.
6.1 The uses of loans G

There are certain features about medium-term lending on loan account that make it different from L
lending on overdraft.
O
(a) The borrower knows what it will be expected to pay back at regular intervals and the bank can
also predict its future income with more certainty (depending on whether the interest rate is fixed B
or floating).
A
(b) Once the loan is agreed, the term of the loan must be adhered to, provided that the borrower
does not fall behind with its repayments. The amount borrowed (or outstanding amount yet to be L
repaid) is not repayable on demand by the bank.
(c) Bank loans may be for a period of several years, whereas overdraft facilities are usually
renegotiated regularly, perhaps every year. B
(d) Because the bank will be committing its funds to a borrower for a number of years, it may wish O
to insist on building certain written safeguards into the loan agreement, to prevent the borrower
from becoming over-extended with his borrowing during the course of the loan. The most
X
important safeguard is security. Many medium-term loans are secured against assets of the .
borrower, whereas overdrafts are normally unsecured.
(e) The interest rate on a bank loan may be fixed, whereas overdrafts are always charged at a
C
variable rate of interest, so that the interest rate rises or falls with changes in the bank’s base O
lending rate.
M
6.2 The term of the loan
The term of the loan will depend on four factors.
(a) The length of the loan, which should not exceed the useful life of the asset to be purchased,
because the customer will presumably expect to repay the loan whilst he is still enjoying the use
of the asset and any profits it might be earning
(b) The internal guidelines of the individual bank
(c) Government regulations, if any, on the maximum term for certain types of lending
(d) Negotiations between borrower and bank, which involve the opinion of the borrower about what
term of loan it would like, and the bank's judgement about what term it is prepared to offer.
6.3 Loan repayment profiles

Loans can be repaid in three ways.
(a) Bullet
The borrower does not repay any of the loan principal until the end of the loan period. The
principal is then repaid in full. For example, if a five-year loan of $100,000 has a bullet
repayment profile, the loan principal outstanding will be the full $100,000 to the end of the loan
period.
(b) Balloon
Some of the loan principal is repaid during the term of the loan. At maturity, however, there is
still a substantial proportion of loan principal outstanding, which is then repaid.
(c) Amortising or straight repayment loan
The loan principal is repaid gradually over the term of the loan. Loan repayments at regular
A intervals (usually every month, quarter or six months) consist of interest and a repayment of some
C of the principal. With the final loan payment, the principal outstanding falls to zero. Mortgage
repayment loans operate on this principle.
C A borrower should try to negotiate repayment terms that match the net cash flows that it expects to
receive from using and investing the borrowed money. The key principle should be (as for the lending
A bank) that the borrower should be able to repay borrowing from the cash flows that the borrowed money
generates.
G 6.4 Loan interest

L The interest on a loan will either be paid back in fixed instalments with the capital as above; or be
O calculated at the set rate at the end of the balance period so that the bulk of the interest is paid early on
(as in a repayment mortgage) or equally throughout the loan.
B The interest rate on a loan can be:
A (a) Fixed throughout the period of the loan
L (b) Variable, depending on interest rates obtainable in the money markets (variable rates are usually
arranged as a specified number of percentage points above either base rate or the London
Inter-Bank Offered Rate (LIBOR)
B In addition to the interest payable, a firm might have to pay:
O  An arrangement fee to the bank, for considering the loan application

X 
Legal costs
Commitment fees
.
QUESTION
C Interest rate
What factors will a lender use to determine the interest rate charged to the borrower?
O
M ANSWER
There are seven criteria used to determine the interest charge.
(a) The level of risk involved. Overdrafts tend to have higher rates than loans because there is
uncertainty over the length of time the facility is required and when the debt will be repaid.
(b) The level of interest rates in the economy. Lenders rarely charge interest rates lower than the
Bank of England base rate as this is the level of return they could receive elsewhere.
(c) The status of the borrower. Borrowers with poor credit histories are often charged a higher rate of
interest.
(d) Any security offered by the borrower. Securing the loan on assets reduces the interest charge as
the lender will take the asset as payment should the borrower default on the loan.
(e) The amount of the loan. Many lenders charge higher rates of interest when the loan advance is high
as the repayments put a further financial burden on the borrower, increasing the risk of default.
(f) The purpose of the loan. Loans to finance working capital may attract different rates then those
to finance new ventures due to the different perceived risk.
(g) The duration of the loan. Loans over longer periods tend to be viewed as more risky as there is a
longer time span available for a borrower to default.
6.5 Loan covenants

Taking out a loan often entails certain obligations for the borrower over and above repaying the loan on
demand. These obligations are called covenants.
(a) Positive covenants require a borrower to do something, for example:
(i) Provide the bank with its annual financial statements
(ii) Submit certificates that the company is keeping to the loan agreement A
(iii) Provide management accounts
C
(b) Negative or restrictive covenants are promises by a borrower not to do something, eg the
company pledges not to borrow more money until the current loan is repaid. C
(c) Quantitative covenants set limitations on the borrower's financial position. For example, the A
company might agree that its total borrowings shall not exceed 100% of shareholders' funds.
G
7 Overdrafts and loans compared
L
There are a number of factors to consider when deciding whether an overdraft or loan is more O
appropriate as the method of borrowing.
B
A borrower may ask the bank for an overdraft facility when the bank would wish to suggest a loan
instead; alternatively, a borrower may ask for a loan when an overdraft would be more appropriate.
A
(a) In most cases, when a business borrower wants finance to help with 'day to day' trading and
L
cash flow needs, an overdraft is the appropriate method of financing. Cash needs fluctuate from
day-to-day and season-to-season, and a business may need to borrow at some times of the day
or week but not at others. The borrower should not be short of cash all the time, and should B
expect to be in credit on some days, but in need of an overdraft on others.
O
(b) When a borrower wants to borrow from a bank for only a short period of time, even for the
purchase of a major non-current asset such as an item of plant or machinery, an overdraft facility X
might be more suitable than a loan, because the borrower will stop paying interest as soon as its
account goes into credit. This situation is probably fairly uncommon in practice.
.
(c) When a borrower wants to borrow from a bank, but cannot see his way to repaying the bank C
except over the course of a few years, the medium-term nature of the financing is best catered for
by the provision of a loan rather than an overdraft facility.
O
M
7.1 Advantages of an overdraft over a loan
(a) The customer only pays interest when he is overdrawn.
(b) The bank has the flexibility to review the customer's overdraft facility periodically, and perhaps
agree to additional facilities, or insist on a reduction in the facility.
(c) An overdraft can do the same job as a medium-term loan: a facility can simply be renewed every
time it comes up for review.
Bear in mind, however, that overdrafts are normally repayable on demand.
7.2 Advantages of a medium-term loan for longer term lending

(a) Both the borrower and the bank know exactly what the repayments of the loan will be and how
much interest is payable, and when. This makes planning (budgeting) simpler for the borrower.
(b) The borrower does not have to worry about the bank deciding to reduce or withdraw an overdraft
facility before it is in a position to repay what is owed. There is an element of 'security' or 'peace
of mind' in being able to arrange a loan for an agreed term.
(c) Medium-term loans normally carry a facility letter setting out the precise terms of the agreement.
However, a mix of overdrafts and loans might be suggested in some cases. Consider a case where a
business asks for a loan, perhaps to purchase a shop with a stock of goods included. The bank might
wish to suggest a loan to help with the purchase of the shop, but that goods ought to be financed by an
overdraft facility.
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
CHAPTER ROUNDUP
 Short and medium term finance may come from a variety of sources. It is important to decide which is
most appropriate for a given situation.
 Companies often have to rely on bank finance; the right type of finance should be obtained.
 Several types of contractual relationship may exist between bank and customer.
 The principles of good lending (called the canons of lending) guide a bank's decision about whether or
not to lend money. The bank wishes to ensure that the borrower will be able to make the scheduled
repayments, in full and within the required period of time.
 Overdrafts are subject to an agreed limit, and are repayable on demand. The customer has a flexible
means of short-term borrowing. An overdraft is best considered as support for normal working capital. A
customer's account can be expected to swing between surplus and overdraft. Banks will look cautiously
at overdrafts which are used to purchase non-current assets. A
 A term loan is drawn in full at the beginning of the loan period and repaid at a specified time or in C
defined instalments. Term loans are offered with a variety of repayment schedules. Often, the interest
and capital repayments are predetermined. The term of the loan will be determined by the useful life of C
the asset purchased, the lending policies of the bank, and the outcome of any negotiations between the
borrower and the bank.
A
 There are a number of factors to consider when deciding whether an overdraft or loan is more
appropriate as the method of borrowing. G
L
O
QUICK QUIZ
1 Banks act as a link between borrowers and savers. What is this role called?
B
A Financial intervention C Financial intermediation
B Financial interposition D Financial interlineation A
2 A bank's loan to a customer is secured by a charge on the customer's house. Who is the mortgagor and L
who is the mortgagee?
3 What is a fiduciary relationship?
4 List three rights and three duties of a banker. B
5 A ………………… is a loan for a fixed amount for a specified period. O
6 In the following mnemonic, concerning a bank's decision to lend (the ‘canons of good lending’), what X
does each of the letters stand for?
C ……………………………… A ………………………………
.
A ……………………………… R ……………………………… C
M ……………………………… I ………………………………
P ……………………………… O
7 How is the loan principal repaid in the case of a bullet repayment loan? M
A At the start of the loan period C By equal instalments during the loan period
B By instalments that increase in value D At the end of the loan period
1 C Financial intermediation.
2 The customer is the mortgagor and the bank is the mortgagee.

3 A relationship based on trust in which the superior party must act in good faith.
4 Examples of rights include: to levy reasonable charges and commissions; to use customer's money in a
legal and morally acceptable way; and to be repaid overdrawn balances on demand. Examples of duties
include: to honour customer's cheques; to receive customers' funds; to comply with customers'
instructions; and to provide statements in a reasonable time.
5 A term loan is a loan for a fixed amount for a specified period.
6 Character of the customer
A Margin of profit
C Amount
Repayment terms
C Insurance against possible repayment.
A 7 D At the end of the loan period.
G
L
Now try ...
O
A Number
Q100
L
Q101
Q102
B
Q103
O
Q104
X
.
C
O
M
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
Mathematical tables .
C
O
M
MATHEMATICAL TABLES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
// MATHEMATICAL TABLES
PRESENT VALUE TABLE

Present value of $1 ie (1+r)-n
where r = interest rate,
n = number of periods until payment
Periods Discount rates (r)
(n) 1% 2% 3% 4% 5% 6% 7% 8% 9% 10%
1 0.990 0.980 0.971 0.962 0.952 0.943 0.935 0.926 0.917 0.909
2 0.980 0.961 0.943 0.925 0.907 0.890 0.873 0.857 0.842 0.826
3 0.971 0.942 0.915 0.889 0.864 0.840 0.816 0.794 0.772 0.751
4 0.961 0.924 0.888 0.855 0.823 0.792 0.763 0.735 0.708 0.683
5
6
0.951
0.942
0.906
0.888
0.863
0.837
0.822
0.790
0.784
0.746
0.747
0.705
0.713
0.666
0.681
0.630
0.650
0.596
0.621
0.564 A
7
8
0.933
0.923
0.871
0.853
0.813
0.789
0.760
0.731
0.711
0.677
0.665
0.627
0.623
0.582
0.583
0.540
0.547
0.502
0.513
0.467 C
9
10
0.914
0.905
0.837
0.820
0.766
0.744
0.703
0.676
0.645
0.614
0.592
0.558
0.544
0.508
0.500
0.463
0.460
0.422
0.424
0.386
C
11
12
0.896
0.887
0.804
0.788
0.722
0.701
0.650
0.625
0.585
0.557
0.527
0.497
0.475
0.444
0.429
0.397
0.388
0.356
0.350
0.319
A
13 0.879 0.773 0.681 0.601 0.530 0.469 0.415 0.368 0.326 0.290
14 0.870 0.758 0.661 0.577 0.505 0.442 0.388 0.340 0.299 0.263
15 0.861 0.743 0.642 0.555 0.481 0.417 0.362 0.315 0.275 0.239 G
L
(n)
1
11%
0.901
12%
0.893
13%
0.885
14%
0.877
15%
0.870
16%
0.862
17%
0.855
18%
0.847
19%
0.840
20%
0.833
O
2 0.812 0.797 0.783 0.769 0.756 0.743 0.731 0.718 0.706 0.694 B
3 0.731 0.712 0.693 0.675 0.658 0.641 0.624 0.609 0.593 0.579
4 0.659 0.636 0.613 0.592 0.572 0.552 0.534 0.516 0.499 0.482 A
5 0.593 0.567 0.543 0.519 0.497 0.476 0.456 0.437 0.419 0.402
6 0.535 0.507 0.480 0.456 0.432 0.410 0.390 0.370 0.352 0.335 L
7 0.482 0.452 0.425 0.400 0.376 0.354 0.333 0.314 0.296 0.279
8 0.434 0.404 0.376 0.351 0.327 0.305 0.285 0.266 0.249 0.233
9
10
0.391
0.352
0.361
0.322
0.333
0.295
0.308
0.270
0.284
0.247
0.263
0.227
0.243
0.208
0.225
0.191
0.209
0.176
0.194
0.162 B
11
12
0.317
0.286
0.287
0.257
0.261
0.231
0.237
0.208
0.215
0.187
0.195
0.168
0.178
0.152
0.162
0.137
0.148
0.124
0.135
0.112 O
13
14
0.258
0.232
0.229
0.205
0.204
0.181
0.182
0.160
0.163
0.141
0.145
0.125
0.130
0.111
0.116
0.099
0.104
0.088
0.093
0.078
X
15 0.209 0.183 0.160 0.140 0.123 0.108 0.095 0.084 0.074 0.065 .
C
O
M
MATHEMATICAL TABLES
ANNUITY TABLE
1  ( 1  r)  n
Present value of an annuity of 1 ie .
r
where r = interest rate,
n = number of periods
Periods Discount rates (r)
(n) 1% 2% 3% 4% 5% 6% 7% 8% 9% 10%
1 0.990 0.980 0.971 0.962 0.952 0.943 0.935 0.926 0.917 0.909
2 1.970 1.942 1.913 1.886 1.859 1.833 1.808 1.783 1.759 1.736
3 2.941 2.884 2.829 2.775 2.723 2.673 2.624 2.577 2.531 2.487
A 4 3.902 3.808 3.717 3.630 3.546 3.465 3.387 3.312 3.240 3.170
5 4.853 4.713 4.580 4.452 4.329 4.212 4.100 3.993 3.890 3.791
C 6 5.795 5.601 5.417 5.242 5.076 4.917 4.767 4.623 4.486 4.355
7 6.728 6.472 6.230 6.002 5.786 5.582 5.389 5.206 5.033 4.868
C 8 7.652 7.325 7.020 6.733 6.463 6.210 5.971 5.747 5.535 5.335
A 9
10
8.566
9.471
8.162
8.983
7.786
8.530
7.435
8.111
7.108
7.722
6.802
7.360
6.515
7.024
6.247
6.710
5.995
6.418
5.759
6.145
11 10.368 9.787 9.253 8.760 8.306 7.887 7.499 7.139 6.805 6.495
12 11.255 10.575 9.954 9.385 8.863 8.384 7.943 7.536 7.161 6.814
G 13
14
12.134
13.004
11.348 10.635
12.106 11.296
9.986
10.563
9.394
9.899
8.853
9.295
8.358
8.745
7.904
8.244
7.487
7.786
7.103
7.367
L 15 13.865 12.849 11.938 11.118 10.380 9.712 9.108 8.559 8.061 7.606
O
B (n)
1
11%
0.901
12%
0.893
13%
0.885
14%
0.877
15%
0.870
16%
0.862
17%
0.855
18%
0.847
19%
0.840
20%
0.833
A 2 1.713 1.690 1.668 1.647 1.626 1.605 1.585 1.566 1.547 1.528
3 2.444 2.402 2.361 2.322 2.283 2.246 2.210 2.174 2.140 2.106
L 4 3.102 3.037 2.974 2.914 2.855 2.798 2.743 2.690 2.639 2.589
5 3.696 3.605 3.517 3.433 3.352 3.274 3.199 3.127 3.058 2.991
6 4.231 4.111 3.998 3.889 3.784 3.685 3.589 3.498 3.410 3.326
B 7
8
4.712
5.146
4.564
4.968
4.423
4.799
4.288
4.639
4.160
4.487
4.039
4.344
3.922
4.207
3.812
4.078
3.706
3.954
3.605
3.837
O 9
10
5.537
5.889
5.328
5.650
5.132
5.426
4.946
5.216
4.772
5.019
4.607
4.833
4.451
4.659
4.303
4.494
4.163
4.339
4.031
4.192
X 11 6.207 5.938 5.687 5.453 5.234 5.029 4.836 4.656 4.486 4.327
12 6.492 6.194 5.918 5.660 5.421 5.197 4.988 4.793 4.611 4.439
. 13 6.750 6.424 6.122 5.842 5.583 5.342 5.118 4.910 4.715 4.533
C 14
15
6.982
7.191
6.628
6.811
6.302
6.462
6.002
6.142
5.724
5.847
5.468
5.575
5.229
5.324
5.008
5.092
4.802
4.876
4.611
4.675
O
M
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
Practice question and answer bank
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
PRACTICE QUESTION AND ANSWER BANK
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
PRACTICE QUESTION BANK
1 Management information
1 Which of the following statements is NOT true?
A Management accounts detail the performance of an organisation over a defined period and
the state of affairs at the end of that period
B There is no legal requirement to prepare management accounts
C The format of management accounts is entirely at management discretion
D Management accounts are both an historical record and a future planning tool
(2 marks)
2 Which of the following statements is NOT correct?

A Financial accounting information can be used for internal reporting purposes
B Routine information can be used to make decisions regarding both the long term and the A
short term C
C Management accounting provides information relevant to decision making, planning,
control and evaluation of performances
C
D Cost accounting can be used to provide inventory valuations for internal reporting only A
(2 marks)
3 Which of the following are characteristics of good information? G

(i) It is highly detailed L
(ii) It is accurate O
(iii) It is relevant B
(iv) It is highly summarised
A
A (i), (ii) and (iii) only
L
B (ii) and (iii) only
C (ii), (iii) and (iv) only
D (i), (ii) and (iv) only B
(2 marks) O
4 Which of the following is the best description of management control?
X
A Formulating ways to proceed .
B
C
Choosing between various alternatives
Monitoring something so as to keep it on course
C
D Ensuring subordinates are motivated to achieve organisational objectives O
(2 marks)
M
5 Which TWO of the following describe a cost centre?
A A unit of product or service in relation to which costs are ascertained
B An amount of expenditure attributable to an activity
C A production or service location, function, activity or item of equipment for which costs
are accumulated
D A centre for which an individual manager is responsible
(2 marks)
2 The role of information technology

6 Which of the following is an output device?
A Screen
B Keyboard
C CPU
D Disk
(2 marks)
7 A method of input which involves a machine that is able to read characters by using lasers to
detect the shape of those characters is known as
A MICR
B OCR
A C
D
OMR
CPU
C (2 marks)
C 8 Which of the following factors may affect the choice of computer output medium?
A (i) Whether a hard copy of the output is required
(ii) Whether the output requires further computer processing
(iii) Whether a large volume of output is to be used for reference purposes
G A (i) and (ii) only
L B
C
(i) and (ii) only
(ii) and (ii) only
O D All three factors
B (2 marks)
A 9 Data input has three stages. One of these is the origination of data. Select from the choices
below the TWO which correctly describe the other two stages.
L
A Translation of data
B Transcription of data
B C
D
Inputting of data
Formatting of data
O (2 marks)
X 10 Which of the following choices does the following describe? ‘A physically small external storage
. device usually connected via a USB port.’
C A
B
DVD
CD-ROM
O C Memory stick
D Zip disk
M (2 marks)
11 A company calculates the prices of jobs by adding overheads to the prime cost and adding 25%
to total costs as a profit margin. Job number H123 was sold for $7,500 and incurred overheads
of $3,000. What was the prime cost of the job?
A $2,625
B $3,000
C $6,000
D $6,625
(2 marks)
12 Prime cost is:

A all costs incurred in manufacturing a product
B the total of direct costs
C the material cost of a product A
D the cost of operating a department
(2 marks) C
13 Which TWO of the following costs are part of the prime cost for a manufacturing company?
C
A Cost of transporting raw materials from the supplier's premises A
B Wages of factory workers engaged in machine maintenance
C Depreciation of lorries used for deliveries to customers
D Hire of machinery for a particular production job G
(2 marks)
L
14 Which TWO of the following are indirect costs? O
A The depreciation of maintenance equipment B
B The overtime premium incurred at the specific request of a customer
C The hire of a tool for a specific job A
D The cost of a supervisor’s wages on a production line
L
(2 marks)
4 Cost behaviour B
15 Variable costs are conventionally deemed to O
A be constant per unit of output X
B
C
vary per unit of output as production volume changes
be constant in total when production volume changes
.
D vary, in total, from period to period when production is constant C
(2 marks)
O
M
16 The following is a graph of cost against level of activity
To which one of the following costs does the graph correspond?

A Electricity bills made up of a standing charge and a variable charge
B Bonus payment to employees when production reaches a certain level
A C Salesman's commission payable per unit up to a maximum amount of commission
D Bulk discounts on purchases, the discount being given on all units purchased
C (2 marks)
C 17 A production worker is paid a salary of $650 per month, plus an extra 5 cents for each unit
A produced during the month. This labour cost is best described as:
A A variable cost
B A fixed cost
G C A step cost
L D A semi-variable cost
(2 marks)
O
18 B Co has recorded the following data in the two most recent periods.
B
Total costs Volume of
A of production production
$ Units
L 27,000 1,400
36,600 2,200
B What is the BEST estimate of the company's fixed costs per period? $
O (2 marks)
X 19 The following table relates to different levels of production of the alpha. The variable cost of
producing an alpha is $12.50. Fixed costs are $12,500.
. 1 alpha 10 alphas
C Total variable cost
$
12.50
$
125.00
O Total fixed cost 5,000 5,000
M At each production level do variable costs per unit vary and do fixed costs per unit vary?
Variable -YES Fixed -YES
5 alphas
10 alphas
(2 marks)

20 Which is the correct description of a flexed budget?
A A budget that can be changed according to circumstances
B A budget that is adjusted according to actual activity
C A budget that is open to negotiation
D A budget that is used for planning purposes only
(2 marks)
21 The following statements relate to the application of feedback and feedforward control:
1. Feedback and feedforward are both applied in budgetary planning and control.
2. Feedback is used in the analysis of variances.
3. Feedforward enables budgeted data for a period to be amended for the next period.
4. Feedforward relates to the setting of performance standards A
Which of the above statements are true?
C
A 1 and 2 only
B 3 and 4 only C
C
D
1, 2 and 4 only
1, 3 and 4 only
A
(2 marks)
22 A product has a budgeted direct material cost of $5 per unit. In a specific period the production
G
information was: L
Budget
Actual
9,000 units
8,800 units
O
$44,380 was incurred on direct materials for the period‘s production B
What was the direct material variance, comparing actual with the flexed budget? $
A
(2 marks)
L
23 The budgeted sales of SM Ltd were 800 units at a selling price of $20. The actual sales were
775 units at a total sales revenue of $17,050. What is the activity variance? $ B
(2 marks) O
24 Which of the following would help to explain a favourable direct material usage variance?
X
(i) The material purchased was of a higher quality than standard.
.
(ii)
(iii)
Losses due to evaporation were less than expected.
Activity levels were lower than budget therefore less material was used.
C
A All of them
O
B (i) and (ii) only M
C (ii) and (iii) only
D (i) and (iii) only
(2 marks)
6 Reporting management information

25 Which of the following are qualities of good management information?
(i) Relevance
(ii) Comparability
(iiii) Consistency
(iv) Understandability
A (i) and (ii) only
B (ii) and (iv) only
C (ii), (iii) and (iv) only
D (i) and (iv) only
(2 marks)
26 When communicating information, which of the following determine the choice of method used?
A 1. Comparative cost
C 2. Degree of confidentiality
3. Speed of delivery
C
A 1 only
A B 3 only
C 1 and 2 only
D 1, 2 and 3
G (2 marks)
L 27 In relation to effective communication of management information, which of the following

O statements is false?
B A An ad hoc report can be less concise than one that is regularly produced because its
purpose is less clear.
A B Management reports should avoid swamping the reader with too much detail.
L C The use of visuals can enhance the clarity of the report and therefore make it easier to
understand.
D An executive summary, giving the main points of the report, both saves the time of the
B managers and makes the report more understandable.
O (2 marks)
X 28 Different managers will require different information in order to facilitate decision-making

depending on the nature of the organisation and individual responsibilities.
.
Which of the following is least likely to be true?
C A Senior management will be interested in the financial statements, probably on a monthly
O basis to help make strategic decisions
M B The human resources manager will require information on absenteeism analysed by

department and reason for absence
C A factory supervisor will want details of order enquiries taken by the sales team each day
in order to help plan production levels
D A sales manager will want a weekly report of orders achieved by each sales team to help
assess their effectiveness
(2 marks)
29 You are working in the finance department of a company. A colleague from the sales department
has requested some accounting information that the sales department does not normally receive.
They assure you that the head of the finance department is aware of the request. What should
you do?
A Give them access to the information
B Print out the information and give it to them
C Ignore the request
D Refer the matter to the head of finance
(2 marks)
7 Materials
30 In a period of continual price inflation for material purchases
A the LIFO method will produce lower profits than the FIFO method, and lower closing
inventory values A
B the LIFO method will produce lower profits than the FIFO method, and higher closing inventory C
values
C the FIFO method will produce lower profits than the LIFO method, and lower closing
C
inventory values A
D the FIFO method will produce lower profits than the LIFO method, and higher closing inventory
values
(2 marks) G
31 A wholesaler buys and resells a range of items, one of which is the Kay. Each Kay is resold for
L
$3 per unit and opening inventory for June was 400 units valued at $1.80 per unit. The
wholesaler purchased a further 600 units on 10 June for $2.10 per unit, and sold 800 units on
O
25 June. What gross profit would be recorded for the sale of Kays during June, using the FIFO B
and the LIFO method of inventory valuation? Select TWO choices from the options given, ONE for
each valuation method. A
FIFO gross profit LIFO gross profit L
A $780
B $840
C
D
$780
$1,620
B
(2 marks) O
32 A wholesaler had opening inventory of 300 units of product Emm valued at $20 per unit at the X
beginning of January. The following receipts and sales were recorded during January.
Date 2 Jan 12 Jan 21 Jan 29 Jan
.
Receipts 400 C
Sales 250 200 75
The purchase cost of receipts was $22 per unit. Using a periodic weighted average method of
O
valuation, calculate the value of closing inventory at the end of January. $ M
(2 marks)
33 600 units of component J, valued at a price of $6.20, were in inventory on 1 May. The following
receipts and issues were recorded during May.
3 May Received 800 units @ $6.88 per unit
13 May Received 700 units @ $7.24 per unit
25 May Issued 1,700 units
Using the LIFO method, the total value of the issues on 25 May was $ .
(2 marks)
34 XYZ Co had an opening inventory value of $352 (275 units valued at $1.28 each) on 1 April.
The following receipts and issues were recorded during April.
8 April Receipts 600 units $1.20 per unit
15 April Receipts 400 units $1.36 per unit
30 April Issues 900 units
Using the FIFO method, the total value of the issues on 30 April is $
(2 marks)
8 Labour
35 Gross wages incurred in department 1 in June were $54,000. The wages analysis shows the
following summary breakdown of the gross pay.
Paid to Paid to
A direct labour indirect labour
$ $
C Ordinary time 10,074 11,900
C
Overtime: basic pay 2,176 3,500
premium 544 875
A Shift allowance
Sick pay
1,080
552
1,360
300
14,426 17,935
G What is the direct wages cost for department 1 in June? $
L (2 marks)
O 36 Which TWO of the following would be classed as indirect labour?

B A A coach driver in a transport company
A
B Machine operators in a milk bottling plant
C A maintenance assistant in a factory maintenance department
L D On-call plumbers in a factory
(2 marks)
B 37 Which of the following is included on a daily timesheet completed by an employee?
O A Time spent on a job for the entire job

B Number of pieces of work produced
X C Hours worked on each job
. D Cost of the job

(2 marks)
C
O 38 Triple Co pays overtime at time and a quarter. Jo's basic hours are 9 to 5 with an hour for lunch,
but one particular Friday she worked until six o'clock. She is paid a basic wage of $10 per hour.
M How much did she earn on the Friday in question as overtime premium?
$
(2 marks)
39 An employee is paid $12.50 per piecework hour produced. In a 35 hour week he produces the
following output.
Piecework time allowed
per unit
3 units of product A 3.75 hours
5 units of product B 11.00 hours
Required
Calculate the employee's pay for the week. $
(2 marks)
9 Expenses
40 Which one of the following statements correctly describes capital items? A
A
B
Items which relate to the long-term running of the business.
Items which relate to the day-to-day running of the business.
C
C Items which are part of the business' working capital. C
D Items which are unusual, for example costs of closing down part of the business.
(2 marks) A
41 The management accounts of TopCo show the following expenses for May 20Y0.
G
Expense Cost
Renault van $20,000 L
Sign-painting of company name, logo and telephone number
on van
$500
O
Diesel for van
New clutch for the van
$800
$1,500
B
What is the total capital expenditure for the month? Enter your answer in the box. $ A
(2 marks) L
42 Two assets are purchased for $8,000 each. Asset A is depreciated over four years using the
straight line method and Asset B is depreciated at the rate of 25% per annum on the reducing
balance method.
B
What is the value of each asset after four years? Tick the correct box for each choice. O
X
Value of asset after four years
$2,531 $NIL .
Asset A C
Asset B O
(2 marks) M
43 Complete the sentence selecting one of the choices given below. ____ is the process by which
indirect expenses are charged to a cost centre.
A Recharging
B Recording
C Allocation
D Coding
(2 marks)
10 Overheads and absorption costing

44 Edison has the following data relating to overheads.
Budget Actual
Fixed overheads $15,000 $14,000
Direct labour hours 20,000 19,500
Overheads are absorbed on the basis of labour hours.
Which of the following statements is true?
A Overheads will be under absorbed by $1,000 due to the lower than expected expenditure.
B Overheads will be under absorbed by $1,000 due to the unexpected decrease in labour
hours.
C Overheads will be under absorbed by $625 due to lower than expected expenditure and
lower than expected labour hours.
A D Overheads will be over absorbed by $625 due to lower than expected labour hours more
C than offset by lower than expected expenditure
(2 marks)
C
A 45 Overhead apportionment is used to:
A Charge whole items of costs to cost centres
B Charge cost units with an appropriate share of overheads
G C
D
Charge whole items of costs to cost units
Spread common costs over cost centres
L (2 marks)
O 46 Data for cost centre Y for the latest period was as follows.
B Budgeted direct labour hours 12,300
A Actual direct labour hours

Production overhead absorption rate
11,970
$2.60 per direct labour hour
L Production overhead under absorbed $5,670
The actual production overhead incurred during the period was: $
B (2 marks)
O 47 Which TWO of the following statements about overhead absorption rates are true?
X A
B
They are predetermined in advance for each period
They are used to charge overheads to products
. C They are based on actual data for each period
D They are used to control overhead costs
C (2 marks)
O 48 A company absorbs overheads on the basis of machine hours. In a period, actual machine hours
M were $8,974, actual overheads were $198,600 and there was over absorption of $25,750.
The budgeted overhead absorption rate was $ per machine hour (to the nearest $).
(2 marks)
11 Marginal costing and absorption costing

49 When comparing the profits reported under absorption costing and marginal costing during a
period when the level of inventory increased:
A Absorption costing profits will be higher and closing inventory valuations lower than those
under marginal costing.
B Absorption costing profits will be higher and closing inventory valuations higher than those
under marginal costing.
C Marginal costing profits will be higher and closing inventory valuations lower than those
under absorption costing.
D Marginal costing profits will be higher and closing inventory valuations higher than those
under absorption costing.
(2 marks)
50 Summary results for H Co for June are shown below. A

Sales revenue
$'000
820
Units
C
Variable production costs
Variable selling costs
300
105
C
Fixed production costs 180 A
Fixed selling costs 110
Production in March 1,000
G
Opening inventory 0
Closing inventory 150
Using marginal costing, the profit for June was L
A
B
$170,000
$185,750
O
C $197,000 B
D $229,250
(2 marks)
A
L
51 A product has the following costs:
$/unit
Variable production costs 9.60 B
Total production costs 15.00
Total variable costs 11.80 O
Total costs 20.00
X
14,400 units of the product were manufactured in a period during which 14,200 units were
sold. .
What is the profit difference using absorption costing rather than marginal costing? $
C
(2 marks)
O
52 Complete the sentence selecting the correct entry from the choices below.
M
………… is the difference between sales value and the marginal cost of sales.
A Marginal cost
B Variable cost
C Fixed cost
D Contribution
(2 marks)
53 Marginal costing as a cost accounting system is significantly different from absorption costing.
How are fixed costs treated under each costing system?
Period costs Unit costs
Marginal costing
Absorption costing
(2 marks)
12 Cost bookkeeping
54 Which of the following descriptions correctly describes a control account?
A An account for pooling costs before they are recharged
B Contra to cash
A C An account which records total cost as opposed to individual costs
D A type of suspense account
C (2 marks)
C
55 There are two main cost bookkeeping systems used in business, integrated and interlocking
A systems.
For each system identify a correct feature of that system.
Integrated Interlocking
G Keeps one set of ledger accounts
L Inventory may be valued differently in the financial accounts
O (2 marks)
B
56 A company operates an integrated accounting system. The accounting entries for the issue to
A production of indirect materials from inventory would be:
L Debit Credit
A Work in progress account Stores control account
B Stores control account Overhead control account
B C
D
Overhead control account
Cost of sales account
Stores control account
Stores control account
O (2 marks)
X 57 Delboy Co occupies a single factory location. In its cost accounts, it uses an absorption costing
. system. 60% of the building is taken up by the production divisions, with the remainder of the
space taken up by general administration (30%) and marketing (10%). The rental cost for the
C premises in the year just ended was $30,000.
O Which one of the following bookkeeping entries would have been recorded in the company's
integrated cost/financial accounts for the period?
M A Debit Rent account $18,000
Credit Production overhead control account $18,000
B Debit Cash $30,000
Credit Rent account $30,000
C Debit Production overhead control account $18,000
D Debit Production overhead control account $30,000
(2 marks)
58 The production control account for R Co at the end of the period looks like this.
PRODUCTION OVERHEAD CONTROL ACCOUNT
$ $
Stores control 57,000 Work in progress 1,012,000
Wages control 451,000 Statement of profit or loss (Income 21,000
statement)
Expense payable 525,000
1,033,000 1,033,000
Which TWO of the following statements are correct?
A Indirect material issued from inventory was $57,000

B Overhead absorbed during the period was $525,000
C Overhead for the period was over absorbed by $21,000
D Indirect wages costs incurred were $451,000
(2 marks)
A
C
13 Job, batch and service costing
59 Which of the following are characteristics of service costing?
C
(i) High levels of indirect costs as a proportion of total service costs
A
(ii) Output which includes by-products and joint-products
(iii) The work is relatively long in duration
(iv) Use of composite cost units G
A All of the above L
B None of the above
C (i) only O
D (i) and (iv) only
(2 marks)
B
60 Which of the following organisations should NOT be advised to use service costing?
A
A Hotel
L
B Distribution service
C Clothing manufacturer
D Training firm B
(2 marks)
O
61 Which of the following is a feature of job costing? X
A
B
Associated with continuous production of large volumes of low-cost items
Establishes the costs of services rendered
.
C Production is carried out in accordance with the wishes of the customer C
D Costs are aggregated and divided by units produced
(2 marks) O
62 Which of the following would be appropriate performance measures for a transport business? M
(i) Cost per tonne-kilometre
(ii) Fixed cost per kilometre
(iii) Maintenance cost of each vehicle per kilometre
A All of the above
B (i) only
C (i) and (ii) only
D (i) and (iii) only
(2 marks)
14 Process costing
63 In a particular process, the input for the period was 2,000 units. There were no inventories at the
beginning or end of the process. Normal loss is 5 per cent of input. In which TWO of the
following circumstances is there an abnormal gain?
A Actual output = 1,800 units
B Actual output = 1,890 units
C Actual output = 1,950 units
D Actual output = 2,000 units
(2 marks)
64 Which TWO of the following statements in connection with process costing are correct?
A A loss expected during the normal course of operations, for unavoidable reasons, is
A abnormal loss.
C B An unexpected loss is an abnormal loss.

C An abnormal loss arises if the actual loss is greater than the expected loss.
C D A normal loss is never less than actual loss.
A (2 marks)
65 A company makes a product, which passes through a single process.

G Details of the process for the last period are as follows:
L Materials 2,000 kg at 20c per kg
O Labour
$280
200% of labour
B Normal losses are 10% of input in the process, and without further processing any losses can be
A sold as scrap for 8c per kg.
The output for the period was 1,680 kg from the process.
L
There was no work in progress at the beginning or end of the period.
The value credited to the process account for the scrap value of the normal loss for the period
B will be $ (to the nearest $)
O (2 marks)
X 66 Information for two processes is as follows:
. Process Normal loss as % of Input (litres) Output (litres)
C input
Mixing 5% 50,000 48,500
O
Filtering 6% 85,000 79,000
M For each process was there an abnormal loss or an abnormal gain?
Abnormal Abnormal
loss gain
Mixing
Filtering
(2 marks)
67 Costs incurred in a process totalled $514,800 for a period. 60,000 units of finished product
were manufactured including 3,000 units which were rejected on inspection and disposed of.
The level of rejects in the period was normal. Rejects are sold for $5.00 per unit.
What was the cost per unit for the process?
A $8.33
B $8.77
C $8.98
D $9.51
(2 marks)
15 Cost-volume-profit (CVP) analysis

68 A company makes a single product and incurs fixed costs of $12,000 per month. Variable cost
per unit is $2 and each unit sells for $6. Monthly sales demand is 7,000 units. The breakeven A
point in terms of monthly sales units is:
C
A 2,000 units
B 3,000 units C
C 4,000 units
D 6,000 units A
(2 marks)
69 A company manufactures a single product for which cost and selling price data are as follows. G
Selling price per unit $4.80 L
Variable cost per unit $3.20
Fixed costs per month $38,400 O
Budgeted monthly sales 30,000 units
The margin of safety, expressed as a percentage of budgeted monthly sales, is (to the nearest
B
whole number): % A
(2 marks) L
70
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
In the above breakeven chart, the contribution at level of activity x can be read as:
A distance B
B distance D
C distance C
D distance A
(2 marks)
71
In the above profit-volume chart, the contribution at level of activity L can be read as:
A A distance D
B distance A
C C distance B
C D distance C
(2 marks)
A
72 A single product business has the following results for a period.
$
G Sales revenue 93,760 (@$20 per unit)
Less variable costs 70,320
L Contribution 23,440
Less fixed costs 9,792
O Net profit 13,648
B What is the breakeven point in units?
A (2 marks)
L
16 Short-term decisions
B 73 Which one of the following best describes opportunity cost?
O A The cost of taking up a business opportunity

B The cost of not taking up a business opportunity
X C The benefit gained by taking up a business opportunity
. D The benefit lost by taking up one business opportunity in favour of another
(2 marks)
C
O 74 Which TWO of the following are relevant costs for decision making?
A A sunk cost
M B A committed cost
C A differential cost
D A future cost
(2 marks)
75 Ess Co manufactures four products but next month there is likely to be a shortage of labour. The
following information is available.
Q R S T
$ $ $ $
Contribution per unit 16.00 14.50 17.60 19.00
Net profit per unit 4.60 4.80 5.20 5.00
Contribution per labour hour 5.00 4.80 4.40 3.80
Net profit per labour hour 1.40 1.60 1.30 1.00
What order should the products be made in, in order to maximise profits?
A Q,R,S,T
B R,Q,S,T
C S,T,R,Q
D T,S,Q,R
(2 marks) A
76 A company uses limiting factor analysis to calculate an optimal production plan given a scarce C
resource.
C
The following applies to the three products of the company:
Product I II III
A
$ $ $
Direct materials (at $2.40/kg) 14.40 9.60 6.00
Direct labour (at $4/hour) 16.00 10.00 4.00 G
Variable overheads ($0.80/hour) 3.20 2.00 0.80
33.60 21.60 10.80 L
Maximum demand (units)
Optimal production plan
2,000
2,000
4,000
1,500
4,000
4,000 O
How many kg of material were available for use in production? B
A 15,750 kg A
B
C
28,000 kg
30,000 kg L
D 38,000 kg
(2 marks)
B
77 Transco has incurred research and development costs of $32,000 to date on a proposed new
product. Further costs of $8,000 would be required to complete the development of the product.
O
In deciding whether to continue with the new product development which of the following is X
correct regarding development costs? .
A
Sunk cost
$0
Incremental cost
$40,000
C
B $8,000 $32,000 O
C $32,000 $8,000
D $40,000 $0 M
(2 marks)
17 Capital investment appraisal

78 What is the present value of $5,000 in perpetuity at a discount rate of 10%?
A $500
B $5,500
C $4,545
D $50,000
(2 marks)
79 Which of the following is a disadvantage of the payback method of investment appraisal?

A It tends to maximise financial and business risk.
B It is a fairly complex technique and not easy to understand.
C It cannot be used when there are limited funds available.
D It doesn’t account for the cost of capital in making investment decisions.
A (2 marks)
C 80 A company is considering investing in a manufacturing project that would have a three-year life
C span. The investment would involve an immediate cash outflow of $50,000. In each of the three
years, 4,000 units would be produced and sold. The contribution per unit, based on current
A prices, is $5. The company has an annual cost of capital of 8%.
Year Discount factor

G 8%
L 0
1
1.000
0.926
O 2
3
0.857
0.794
B
A Calculate the net present value of the project $
L (2 marks)
81 A company is considering investing $100,000 now to receive five annual sums of $25,000,
B commencing in a year’s time. The company has a cost of capital of 10%. The annuity factor for
10% over 5 years is 3.791.
O Calculate the net present value of the investment $ $
X (2 marks)
. 82 Top Co’s accountant has worked out the following NPVs for an investment in machinery. Use the
C data below to work out the internal rate of return for the investment.
O NPV at 5% $350
NPV at 10% $(1,750)
M %
(2 marks)
18 Cash and cash flows

83 The following extracts are available from Peter Co's Statement of Financial Position.
$
Non-current assets 100,000
Inventory 12,000
Receivables 8,000
Payables 2,500
Overdraft 17,500
Long-term bank loan 75,000
Calculate Peter Co's working capital.
A Zero
B $25,000
C $40,000
D $100,000 A
(2 marks) C
84 The trainee accountant of Good Co has prepared the following cash flow. C
Sales
$
325,000
A
Opening receivables (23,500)
Closing receivables 17,500
Bank loan received 125,000 G
Cash in 444,000
L
Purchases
Opening payables
193,500
27,000 O
Closing payables
Depreciation
(12,500)
(26,000)
B
Cash out 182,000 A
Cash flow 262,000 L
Has the trainee calculated the cash flow correctly?
A
B
Yes, the total of $262,000 is correct
No, the total cash flow should be $137,000
B
C No, the total cash flow should be $248,000 O
D No, the total cash flow should be $277,000
(2 marks)
X
.
85 Which one of the following is not classed as working capital?
A Overdraft
C
B Bank loan O
C Payables
D Inventory M
(2 marks)
86 Cash transactions can be capital or revenue, regular or irregular, exceptional or unexceptional.

Which of the following describes exceptional items?
A Relates to the long-term functioning of the business
B Unusual costs such as closure of part of the business
C Does not occur at regular intervals
D Capitalised in the accounts
(2 marks)
19 Cash and treasury management

87 Treasury management involves a wide range of activities under five basic functions. The following
two activities fall under which function?
(i) Raising share capital
(ii) Dividend policy
A Liquidity management
B Funding management
C Corporate finance
D Other activities of the treasurer
(2 marks)
88 Which TWO of the following are important procedures to follow when handling cash receipts?
A A
B
Ensuring prompt banking of cash
Ensuring restriction of access to cash and cheques
C C Ensuring proper procedures are in place for authorisation
D Ensuring cash received and banked is reconciled
C (2 marks)
A
89 Trends in the economy can affect how businesses manage their cash.
When the economy is going through a period of high growth, a different attitude to cash balances
G is likely than when the economy is in recession.
L For each choice, recession or high growth, select the likely attitude businesses will take toward
managing their cash balances.
O Build up Run down
B Cash balances Cash balances
A Recession
L High growth
(2 marks)
B 90 The segregation of duties is particularly important when handling cash. Cashiers are responsible
for which of the following duties relating to the receipt of cash?
O A Receiving and recording cash when it arrives in the post
X B Banking the cash
C Writing up the cash book
. D Doing a reconciliation of the records of various amounts received
C (2 marks)
O 91 Cheque signatories are authorised to sign cheques. Which of the following activities should they
M
be responsible for?
A Approving cheque requisitions
B Recording payments
C Preparing cheques
D Abiding by the limitation on authority to sign cheques up to a certain amount
(2 marks)
20 Forecasting cash flows

92 Which of the following is NOT a valid reason for using forecasts as an early warning of liquidity
problems.
A For estimating how much cash is required
B For estimating the cost of borrowing for funds needed
C For estimating when cash is required
D For estimating whether the funds will be available from anticipated sources
(2 marks)
93 A company has the following receivables and payables according to its statement of financial
position at 31 December 20X9.
$
Receivables
Payables
375,000
150,000 A
Customers are allowed two months to pay. Sales were made at an even monthly rate in 20X9. C
What are the planned receipts from customers in January 20YO?
C
$
(2 marks) A
94 Cash flow forecasts may differ from actual cash flows for a variety of reasons. Which of the
following is NOT a reason why this might happen? G
A
B
A change in the cost of capital
Changes in interest rates
L
C Inflation which may affect costs and revenues differently O
D Poor forecasting techniques
(2 marks) B
95 A company has the following receivables and payables according to its statement of financial
A
position at 31 December 20X9. L
$
Receivables
Payables
375,000
150,000 B
Suppliers give 1 ½ months credit. Materials were purchased at an even monthly rate in 20X9. O
What are the planned payments to suppliers in January 20Y0?
X
A $50,000 .
B $75,000
C $100,000 C
D $250,000
(2 marks) O
96 Suppose revenues for a company over the last five years were as follows.
M
Year Revenue
$’000
20X5 87.50
20X6 105.00
20X7 100.00
20X8 112.50
20X9 125.00
The company accountant decided that she wanted to set up a revenue index using 20X5 as the base
year. The $87,500 of revenue in 20X5 is given the index 100%. What is the index for 20X9? %
(2 marks)
21 Investing surplus funds

97 What are government bonds otherwise known as?
A Certificates of deposit
B Bills
C Gilts
D Commercial paper
(2 marks)
98 According to Keynes, what is the only motive for holding cash that will alter the demand for
money as a result of changes to interest rates?
A Transactions motive
B Precautionary motive
C Speculative motive
A D Inflationary motive
C (2 marks)
C 99 There is generally believed to be a relationship between risk and return. Generally a higher risk
A earns a higher return. For the following two examples, indicate whether the investment can lose
value (its initial value goes down) or not.
G Lose Not lose

value value
L Deposit account at a bank
O Ordinary shares
B (2 marks)
A
22 Raising finance from a bank
L
100 Which TWO of the following factors apply to term loans.
A Repayment is on demand
B B The length of the loan which should not exceed the useful life of the asset to be bought
C The internal guidelines of the lender
O D Interest is calculated as a margin over base rate daily and charged quarterly
X (2 marks)
. 101 A customer has TWO main duties in relation to a bank. Select the correct answers from the
C choices given.
O A To use care and skill in their actions

B To be confidential in their dealings
M C To exercise care ( a duty of care)
D To advise the bank of any known forgeries (advice of forgery)
(2 marks)
102 A bank’s decision on whether to lend is based on seven factors. There is a handy mnemonic for
these. Select the correct answer from the choices given.
A CARPARK
B CAMPARI
C CLAMPED
D CALZONE
(2 marks)
103 Loans may be repaid in three ways. One of these is amortising over the term of the loan. What
are the other two ways. Select the correct TWO from the choices given.
A Bullet
B Dart
C Balloon
D Termination
(2 marks)
104 Complete the sentence with the correct type of covenant. ____ covenants require a borrower to
do something for instance provide management accounts. Select your answer from the choices
given below.
A Positive
B Negative
C Restrictive
D Quantitative
(2 marks)
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
PRACTICE ANSWER BANK
1 Management information
1 A Financial accounts (not management accounts) detail the performance of an organisation
over a defined period and the state of affairs at the end of that period. Management
accounts are used to aid management record, plan and control the organisation's activities
and to help the decision-making process.
2 D Cost accounting can be used to provide inventory valuations for external reporting also.
3 B Good information should be accurate and relevant. If the information is highly detailed,
this may be too detailed for the user's needs so as to become 'irrelevant'. Similarly,
information which is highly summarised may be insufficient for the user's needs. The
information is then incomplete.
4 C Monitoring something so as to keep it on course is the best description of control. Option
A refers to planning and option B refers to decision-making. Option D describes assisting A
in employee motivation.
C
5 C,D Option C is the correct definition of a cost centre. Cost centres are also known as
responsibility centres and so Option D is also correct. C
Option A is the definition of a cost unit. A
Option B describes the cost of an activity or cost centre.
G
2 The role of information technology L
6 A A screen is an output device. O
A keyboard is an input device. B
The CPU performs the processing function. A
A disk is a storage device.
L
7 B MICR is the recognition of characters by a machine that reads special formatted
characters printed in magnetic ink.
OMR involves marking a pre-printed source document which is then read by a device B
which translates the marks on the document into machine code.
O
CPU is the central processing unit.
Option B is therefore correct.
X
8 D All three factors affect the choice of computer output medium.
.
9 B,C Transcription and inputting of data. Transcription is where data is put onto paper suitable C
for keying in by operators. Data input is by various means including direct entry using a
keyboard.
O
10 C A memory stick or pen drive is a small external storage device that can be connected to a M
computer through a USB drive.
11 B Selling price of a job $7,500
Less profit margin (25/125) $1,500
Total cost of job $6,000
Less overhead $3,000
Prime cost $3,000
12 B Prime cost is the total of direct material, direct labour and direct expenses. Therefore the
correct answer is B.
Option A describes total production cost, including absorbed production overhead. Option
C is only a part of prime cost. Option D is an overhead or indirect cost.
13 A, D Option A is a part of the cost of direct materials. Option D is a direct expense as the hire
of equipment for a particular job.
Option B is a production overhead. Option C is a selling and distribution expense.
14 A, D Depreciation is an indirect cost because it does not relate directly to the number of units
produced. A supervisor’s wages cannot be traced to an individual production job.
Items B and C can be traced directly to specific cost units therefore they are direct
expenses.
A 4 Cost behaviour
C
15 A Variable costs are conventionally deemed to increase or decrease in direct proportion to
C changes in output. Therefore the correct answer is A. Descriptions B and D imply a
A changing unit rate, which does not comply with this convention. Description C relates to a
fixed cost.
16 A The depicted cost has a basic fixed element which is payable even at zero activity. A
G variable element is then added at a constant rate as activity increases. Therefore the
correct answer is A.
L Graphs for the other options would look like this.
O
B
A
L
B 17 D The salary is part fixed ($650 per month) and part variable (5 cents per unit). Therefore
it is a semi-variable cost and answer D is correct.
O If you chose options A or B you were considering only part of the cost.
X Option C, a step cost, involves a cost which remains constant up to a certain level and
. then increases to a new, higher, constant fixed cost.
C 18 $10,200
O High output
Units
2,200
$
36,600
M Low output
Variable cost of
1,400
800
27,000
9,600
Variable cost per unit $9,600/$800 = $12 per unit

Fixed costs = $36,600 – ($12 × 2,200) = $10,200
19
Variable -YES Fixed -YES
5 alphas 
10 alphas 

20 B A flexible budget is adjusted to actual activity levels.
21 A Feedforward does not relate to the setting of performance standards or enable
budgeted data to be amended for the next period.
22 $380 A
$
8,800 units should have cost 44,000
But did cost 44,380
380 Adverse
23 $550 A A
C
Units
Budgeted sales volume 800 C
Actual sales volume 775
Activity variance in units 25 (A) A
 Budgeted sales price per unit  $20
24 B Statement (i) is consistent with a favourable direct material usage variance, because G
higher quality material may lead to lower wastage. L
Statement (ii) is consistent with a favourable direct material usage variance, because
lower losses would reduce material usage. O
Statement (iii) is not consistent with a favourable direct material usage variance. If B
activity levels were lower than budget this would not affect the materials used per
unit of production. The usage variance would be calculated based on the standard
A
usage for the actual output. L
6 Reporting management information B

25 D Management information should be relevant and understandable. O
26 D All three items are important. X
27 A The purpose of an ad hoc report should be agreed upfront which will make the .
purpose clear.
C
28 C Production should be based on sales orders not sales enquiries.
O
29 D The matter should be referred to your superior, in this case the head of finance.
M
7 Materials
30 A With LIFO, if newer inventories cost more to buy from suppliers than older inventories, the
costs of material issued and used will be higher. It follows that the cost of sales will be
higher and the profit lower.
Closing inventories with LIFO will be priced at the purchase price of earlier items that
were received into inventory. In a period of rising prices, this means that closing
inventories will be valued at old, out-of-date and lower prices. Therefore the correct
answer is A.
If you chose option B you were correct about the profits but your reasoning concerning the
inventory values was wrong.
31 B,C
FIFO LIFO
$ $ $ $
Sales value $3 × 800 2,400 2,400
Less cost of sales:
400 × $1.80 720
400 × $2.10 840
1,560
600 × $2.10 1,260
200 × $1.80 360
1,620
Gross profit 840 780
If you selected option A you have interchanged the LIFO and FIFO calculations.
A Option D shows the correct figures for cost of sales, but the question asked for the gross
C profit for each method.
C 32 $3,811
Units $
A Opening inventory 300  $20 300 6,000
Issue on 2 Jan 250  $20 (250) (5,000)
50 1,000
G Receipt on 12 Jan 400
450
8,800
9,800
L Issues on 21 Jan and 29 Jan
(5,989)
(9,800/450)  (200 + 75) (275)
O 175 3,811
B 33 Using the LIFO method, the total value of the issues on 25 May was $11,812
A Date of issue Quantity issued units Valuation units $
L 25 May 1,700 700  $7.24
800  $6.88
5,068
5,504
200  $6.20 1,240
11,812
B
34 Using the FIFO method, the total value of the issues on 30 April is $ 1,106
O
Date Receipts Issues Balance
X Units Units $
. 1 April
8 April 600
275 @ $1.28
600 @ $1.20
352
720
C 15 April 400 400 @ $1.36 544
1,616
O 30 April 900 $
275 @ $1.28 = 352
M 600 @ $1.20 = 720
25 @ $1.36 = 34
1,106
8 Labour
35 $12,250
The only direct costs are the wages paid to direct workers for ordinary time, plus the
basic pay for overtime.
$10,074 + $2,176 = $12,250.
You need to include the basic pay for overtime of direct workers, which is always
classified as a direct labour cost. The overtime premium and shift allowances are usually
treated as indirect costs. However, if overtime and shiftwork are incurred specifically for a
particular cost unit, then they are classified as direct costs of that cost unit. There is no
mention of such a situation here. Sick pay is classified as an indirect labour cost.
36 C,D The maintenance assistant is not working directly on the organisation's output but is
performing an indirect task. The plumbers are part of the facilities staff looking after the A
factory so they would also be indirect labour. The other two options describe tasks that
involve working directly on the output.
C
37 C Hours worked on each job. Choices A and B refer to job cards and piecework tickets. D is C
the cost of the job rather than the hours spent on the job. A
38 $2.50
$ G
Basic pay (8  $10) 80.00
Overtime premium (1/4  $10) 2.50 L
82.50
O
For costing purposes all of the hours worked, whether in basic time or outside it, are
costed at the basic rate. The premium is the extra amount paid on top of the basic rate for B
the hours worked over and above the basic hours. The overtime premium is thus $2.50.
This is an important point because overtime premium is usually treated as an indirect
A
cost. L
39 $828.13
Piecework hours produced are as follows. B

Product A 3  3.75 hours 11.25 hours O
Product B 5  11 hours 55.00 hours
Total piecework hours 66.25 hours X
Therefore employee's pay = 66.25hrs  $12.50 = $828.13 for the week. .
C
9 Expenses O
40 A Capital items relate to the long-term running of the business, such as the purchase of M
non-current assets. Items that relate to the day-to-day running of the business or which
are included in the business' working capital are revenue items. Unusual items are
correctly known as exceptional items.
41 $20,500
Capital expenditure relates to the purchase of non-current assets and the improvement in
their capacity to earn. Revenue expenditure arises for the purpose of the trade or to
maintain the earning capacity of existing assets.
42 Value of asset after four years

$2,531 $NIL
Asset A 
Asset B 
Asset A (straight line) Asset B (reducing balance)

Statement of Statement of Statement of Statement of
financial profit or loss financial profit or loss
position charge position charge
balance balance
$ $ $ $
Capital cost 8,000 8,000
Year 1 charge (2,000) 2,000 (2,000) 2,000
c/f 6,000 6,000
A Year 2 charge (2,000) 2,000 1,500 1,500
C c/f
Year 3 charge
4,000
(2,000) 2,000
4,500
(1,125) 1,125
C c/f
Year 4 charge
2,000
(2,000) 2,000
3,375
(844) 844
A Value after four years - 2,531
43 C Allocation is the process by which indirect expenses are charged to a cost centre. Indirect
expenses are initially allocated to the appropriate cost centres before they are apportioned
G further.
L
O 10 Overheads and absorption costing
B 44 D $
A Overhead absorbed =
$15,000
× 19,500
14,625
20,000
L Overhead incurred 14,000
Over-absorbed overhead 625
Statement A is untrue because lower expenditure is more likely to lead to over absorption,
B unless there is a corresponding reduction in the actual labour hours.
O Statement B is incorrect because the decrease in labour hours in isolation would have
resulted in an under absorption of $375 (500 hours × $0.75 per hour).
X
If you selected statement C you performed the calculations correctly but misinterpreted the
. result as an under absorption.
C 45 D Spread common costs over cost centres
O Overhead apportionment involves sharing overhead costs as fairly as possible over a

number of cost centres. Apportionment is used when it is not possible to allocate the
M whole cost to a single cost centre.
46 The actual production overhead incurred during the period was $ 36,792
$
Production overhead absorbed (11,970 hours  $2.60) 31,122
Production overhead under absorbed 5,670
Production overhead incurred 36,792
47 A, B Overhead absorption rates are determined in advance for each period, usually based on
budgeted data. Therefore statement A is correct and statement C is incorrect. Overhead
absorption rates are used in the final stage of overhead analysis, to absorb overheads into
product costs.
Therefore statement B is correct. Statement D is not correct because overheads are

controlled using budgets and other management information.
48 The budgeted overhead absorption rate was $ 25 per machine hour (to the nearest $).
$
Actual overheads incurred 198,600
Over-absorbed overhead 25,750
Actual overheads absorbed 224,350
Actual overheads absorbed

= Amount absorbed per machine hour
Actual machine hours
224,350/8,974 = $25 per machine hour
11 Marginal costing and absorption costing A

49 B Closing inventory valuation under absorption costing will always be higher than under C
marginal costing because of the absorption of fixed overheads into closing inventory
values. C
The profit under absorption costing will be greater because the fixed overhead being A
carried forward in closing inventory is greater than the fixed overhead being written off in
opening inventory.
50 A Using marginal costing, the profit in June was: G
820,000 L
$ $
Sales revenue
Less: variable production costs [$300,000 – ( 150 ) × $300,000)] (255,000) O
565,000 B
1,000
Less: fixed production costs

variable selling costs
180,000
105,000
A
fixed selling costs 110,000
(395,000)
L
170,000
51 $1,080 B
200 units x ($15.00 – $9.60)/unit O
52 D Contribution is the difference between sales value and the marginal cost of sales. X
53 Period costs Unit costs .
Marginal costing  C
Absorption costing  O
M
12 Cost bookkeeping
54 C An account which records total cost as opposed to individual costs.
55
Integrated Interlocking
Keeps one set of ledger accounts 
Inventory may be valued differently in the financial accounts 
56 C The cost of indirect materials issued is credited to the stores account and 'collected' in the
overhead control account pending its absorption into work in progress. Therefore the
correct answer is C.
Option A represents the entries for the issue to production of direct materials.
If you selected option B you identified the correct accounts but your entries were
reversed.
Option D is not correct. The issue of materials should not be charged direct to cost of
sales. The cost of materials issued should first be analysed as direct or indirect and
charged to work in progress or the overhead control account accordingly.
57 C The rent account for the period would look like this.
RENT ACCOUNT
$ $
Cash 30,000 Production overhead 18,000
Admin overhead 9,000
A Marketing overhead 3,000
C 30,000 30,000
C The debit balance in the rent account is analysed between the various functional
classifications of overhead. Therefore the correct answer is C.
A Option A uses the correct accounts but the entries are reversed. Option B is the reverse of
the entries that would be used to record the original rent payment. Option D uses the
correct accounts but only 60% of overhead should be charged to production.
G 58 A, D Statement A is correct. The cost of indirect material issued is 'collected' in the overhead
L control account pending absorption into work in progress.
O Statement B is incorrect. The overhead cost incurred was $525,000. The overhead
absorbed into work in progress during the period was $1,012,000.
B Statement C is incorrect. The $21,000 is debited to statement of profit or loss (income
A statement), indicating an extra charge to compensate for the overhead under absorbed.
Statement D is correct. The indirect wage cost is 'collected' in the overhead control
L account pending absorption into work in progress.
B 13 Job, batch and service costing

O 59 D (i) and (iv) are characteristics of service costing. By-products and joint-products are
X characteristics of process costing. Work of a relatively long duration is a characteristic of
contract costing.
. 60 C All of the options would use service costing except for the clothing manufacturer who
C would be providing products not services.
O 61 C Options A and D are associated with process costing. Option B is associated with service
costing.
M 62 D Cost per tonne-kilometre (i) is appropriate for cost control purposes because it combines
the distance travelled and the load carried, both of which affect cost. The fixed cost per
kilometre (ii) is not particularly useful for control purposes because it varies with the
number of kilometres travelled. The maintenance cost of each vehicle per kilometre (iii)
can be useful for control purposes because it focuses on a particular aspect of the cost of
operating each vehicle. Therefore the correct answer is D.
14 Process costing
63 C, D Expected output = 2,000 units less normal loss (5%) 100 units = 1,900 units
In situation A there is an abnormal loss of 1,900 – 1,800 = 100 units
In situation B there is an abnormal loss of 1,900 – 1,890 = 10 units
In situation C there is an abnormal gain of 1,950 – 1,900 = 50 units
In situation D there is an abnormal gain of 2,000 – 1,900 = 100 units
64 B, C Statement A is not correct; an expected loss is a normal loss. Statement D is not correct.
A normal loss could be less than actual loss if an abnormal loss occurred.
65 The value credited to the process account for the scrap value of the normal loss for the period
will be
$ 16 (to the nearest $) A

Normal loss = 10%  input C
= 10%  2,000 kg
= 200 kg
C
When scrap has a value, normal loss is valued at the value of the scrap ie 8 cents per kg.
A
Normal loss = $0.08  200 kg
= $16 G
66 Abnormal
loss
Abnormal
gain
L
Mixing  O
Filtering  B
67 B [$514,800 – (3,000 units x $5/unit)] ÷ (60,000 – 3,000 units) = $8.77 A
L
15 Cost-volume-profit (CVP) analysis
Total fixed costs $12,000
B
68 B Breakeven point =
=
$(6-2)
= 3,000 units
O
If you selected option A you divided the fixed cost by the selling price, but remember that X
the selling price also has to cover the variable cost. Option C is the margin of safety, and if
you selected option D you seem to have divided the fixed cost by the variable cost per
.
unit. C
69 20 % O
Breakeven point =
Total fixed costs
=
$38,400
= 24,000 units
M
Contribution per unit $(4.80-3.20)
Budgeted sales 30,000 units
Margin of safety 6,000 units
Expressed as a % of budget = 6,000 × 100% = 20%

30,000
70 C Contribution at level of activity x = sales value less variable costs, which is indicated by
distance C. Distance A indicates the profit at activity x, B indicates the fixed costs and D
indicates the margin of safety in terms of sales value.
71 D Above the breakeven point, contribution = fixed costs + profit, therefore distance C
indicates the contribution at level of activity L.
Distance A indicates the profit at level of activity L, B indicates the fixed costs and D
indicates the margin of safety.
72 1,958
Total number of units = $93,760/$20 = 4,688

Contribution per unit = $23,440/4,688 = $5
Breakeven point = Fixed costs/ contribution per unit
= $9,792 / $5
= 1,958
A 16 Short-term decisions
C 73 D Opportunity cost is the benefit lost by taking up one business opportunity in favour of
C another.
A 74 C,D A differential cost is the difference in cost between two alternatives and is therefore a
relevant cost for decision making. Relevant costs are also future costs. Costs incurred in
the past are irrelevant to any decision being made now.
G 75 A Q,R,S,T
L Profit is maximised by making the products with the highest contribution per limiting
factor. The highest contribution per labour hour is given by product Q at $5.00 per hour.
O The lowest contribution per labour hour is given by product T at $3.80 per hour.
B 76 B
I II III Total
A Optimal production plan
(units)
2,000 1,500 4,000
L Kgs required per unit 6 4 2.5

Kgs material available 12,000 6,000 10,000 28,000
77 C The development costs of $32,000 are a sunk cost as they have already been incurred.
B The further costs of $8,000 are incremental costs and therefore relevant to the decision
O whether to continue.
X
17 Capital investment appraisal
.
C 78 D The present value of $5,000 in perpetuity is calculated as $5,000/0.1.
O If you selected option A, you might have calculated $5,000 × 10%.

If you selected option B, you might have calculated $5,000 × 110%.
M
If you selected option C, you might have calculated $5,000/110%.
79 D A is not a disadvantage because the fact that it tends to bias in favour of short-term
projects means that it tends to minimise both financial and business risk.
B is untrue. It is simple to calculate the simple to understand, which may be important
when management resources are limited.
C is not a disadvantage because it helps to identify those projects which generate
additional cash for investment quickly.
D is a disadvantage because the firm needs to make a minimum return to cover the cost
of raising funds and what investors are expecting as a return on their funds invested in the
company.
80 $1,540
Year Annual cash flow Discount factor PV

$ 8% $
0 (50,000) 1.000 (50,000)
1 (4,000  $5 ) 20,000 0.926 18,520
2 (4,000  $5 ) 20,000 0.857 17,140
3 (4,000  $5 ) 20,000 0.794 15,880
1,540
81 $(5,225)
$100,000 – ($25,000 x 3.791) = $(5,225)

82 5.83%
350 A
IRR = 5% + ×10-5  %
 350+1,750  C
= 5% + 0.83%
= 5.83% C
A
18 Cash and cash flows
83 A Working capital consists of current assets less current liabilities. In Peter Co's case it is
G
inventory plus receivables less payables less overdraft (12,000 + 8,000 – 2,500 – L
17,500) = zero.
O
84 C The trainee accountant has made two errors.
B
Firstly, opening receivables is cash received during the year and closing receivables is
cash owing at the end of the year. Therefore the opening figure should be added to, and A
the closing figure deducted from, cash in.
L
Secondly, depreciation is not a cash item and should be ignored from the calculation.
The correct calculation for cash in is therefore (325,000 + 23,500 – 17,500 +
125,000) = $456,000. B
The correct calculation for cash out is therefore (193,500 + 27,000 – 12,500) = O
$208,000.
Total cash flow is therefore (456,000 – 208,000) = $248,000.
X
85 B A bank loan is not classed as a current asset or liability and is therefore not a working
.
capital item. C
86 B Exceptional items are unusual. A good example is the closure of part of a business.
O
M
19 Cash and treasury management
87 C Corporate finance is concerned with raising share capital and the dividend policy of the
company. Funding management is directly concerned with the sources and types of funds
and policies and procedures relating to funds. Liquidity management covers working
capital, banking and money management. As the activities described fall into corporate
finance, other activities don’t apply.
88 A,D Cash handling procedures relating to receipts include the prompt banking of cash
received and the reconciliation between cash received and banked. The other two
activities relate to cash payments.
89 Build up Run down

Cash balances Cash balances
Recession 
High growth 
90 B Cashiers handle money and in many businesses are responsible for banking cash received.
They usually don’t perform reconciliations or write up cash books. They may receive cash
but generally their function is to bank cash.
91 D Cheque signatories are responsible for adhering to their limit on signing cheques. They are
not responsible for any of the other activities which are usually carried out by finance or
administration staff. The separate roles follow the segregation of duties.
20 Forecasting cash flows

A
C 92 B A forecast is used to work out how much cash is needed, when it is needed, for how long
and whether it will be available to borrow. However the forecast will not tell the company
C the actual cost of borrowing for the borrowing forecast.
A 93 $187,500
Since customers take two months to pay, the $375,000 of receivables in the statement of
G financial position represent credit sales from November and December 20X9. It is
assumed these customers will pay in January and February 20Y0 at an equal monthly
L rate because sales were at an equal monthly rate. The cash budget should plan for
O receipts in these two months of $187,500 each.
B
94 A A change in the cost of capital. Cash flow forecasting is not used for investment appraisal
which is when the cost of capital would be relevant. Cash budgets are used to predict
A cash shortages or surpluses.
L 95 C $100,000. As suppliers are paid after 1 ½ months, payments will be made in January
and the first half of February 20Y0. The $150,000 on the statement of financial position
represents purchases in the second half of November and all of December 20X9.
Therefore payment due in January is $150,000/3 = $50,000 x 2 = $100,000.
B
96
O 143%
X If $87,500 = 100%, then:
. 20X9 $125,000 =
125,000
87,500
 100% = 143%
C
O 21 Investing surplus funds
M
97 C Government bonds are otherwise known as gilts or gilt-edged securities.
98 C According to Keynes, only the speculative motive will alter the demand for money as a
result of changes to interest rates.
99 Lose Not lose
value value
Deposit account at a bank 
Ordinary shares 
The amount of money deposited in a bank account will not change and may earn interest.
However the value of traded shares can fluctuate depending on the stock market.
22 Raising finance from a bank

100 B,C The length of the loan, should not exceed the useful life of the asset to be purchased,
because the customer will presumably expect to repay the loan whilst he is still enjoying
the use of the asset and any profits it might be earning. Banks will have internal
guidelines for lending to customers. The other two choices apply to overdrafts.
101 C,D The customer has two main duties which are a duty of care in drawing cheques so that
fraud is not enabled, and to advise on and known forgery.
102 B CAMPARI. This is made up of the following factors.
Character of the customer A
Margin of profit C
Amount of the borrowing
C
Repayment terms A
Insurance against the possibility of non-payment
103 A,C Bullet payments are where the principal is repaid in full at the end of the term. Balloon
payments are where some of the principal is repaid during the term but the main G
proportion is repaid at the end of the term.
L
104 A Positive covenants require the borrower to do something. Negative or restrictive covenants
are a promise by the borrower NOT to do something. Quantitative covenants set O
limitations on the borrower’s financial position.
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
Index
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
INDEX
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
INDEX
Abnormal gain, 251 By-product, 258
Abnormal loss, 251

Absorption, 174 C /S ratio, 271
Absorption costing, 173, 203 CAMPARI, 398
Absorption costing and marginal costing Canons of lending, 398
compared, 201, 203 Capacity ratio, 151
Absorption of overheads, 183 Capacity utilisation ratio, 152
Accounting for scrap, 256 Capital expenditure, 156
Accruals, 336 Capital investment appraisal – internal rate of
Accruals basis of accounting, 337 return (IRR) method, 314
Accruals concept, 336, 337 Capital investment appraisal – net present
Action plans, 66 value method, 311
Activity (or volume) variance, 72, 74 Capital investment appraisal – payback
Ad hoc reports, 86, 90 method, 318
Additive model, 373 CAR (Compound Annual Rate), 304
Administration overheads, 41, 172, 191
Adoption leave, 147
Card reading devices, 31
Cash, 328, 333
A
Adverse variances, 70 Cash accounting and accruals accounting, 336 C
Advice note, 110 Cash budget, 352, 353
Allocation, 163, 174 Cash budgeting with inflation, 363 C
Amortising loan, 406
Amount of the loan, 400
Cash cycle, 330
Cash deficit, 382 A
Annual disbursement, 332 Cash flow, 328
Annual Percentage Rate (APR), 304 Cash flow based forecasts, 352
Annuity, 309
Annuity factors, 309
Cash flow budget, 352
Cash flow control reports, 359
G
Annuity tables, 309 Cash flow forecast, 65 L
Apportionment, 165, 174, 175 Cash flow problems, 360
Arbitrary nature of absorption costing, 186 Cash forecasting, 350 O
Attendance record, 139
Attributable fixed costs, 289
Cash handling procedures, 343
Cash inflows, 332 B
Automatic input devices, 30
Average inventory, 127
Cash investments, 386
Cash management models, 384
A
Cash management policy, 384 L
Banker's acceptance facilities, 397 Cash outflows, 332
Cash shortages, 350
Banks, 350 Cash surplus, 382
Banks' criteria for lending, 398 Cash v profit, 313 B
Bar charts, 92
Base period, 364
CD-R, 32
CD-ROM, 32
O
Bases of absorption, 185
Bases of apportionment, 175
CD-RW, 32
Certificate of deposit, 388
X
Basic pay, 138
Basic wage, 137
Character of the borrower, 398 .
Classification by behaviour, 43
Batch, 240
Batch costing, 17
Classification by function, 41 C
Bill of materials, 130
Clock card, 139
Code, 23 O
Bin, 120
Bonuses, 145, 146
Coding, 21
Coding of job costs, 143
M
Bookkeeping, 214 Column charts, 92
Borrowing, 351 Commercially sensitive information, 96
Breakeven analysis, 270 Committed facility, 397
Breakeven arithmetic, 273 Communication, 87
Breakeven charts, 277 Comparison with budgets, 66
Breakeven point, 270, 273 Comparisons, 64
Budget, 66 Comparisons with corresponding periods, 65
Budget holders, 76 Comparisons with forecasts, 65
Budget period, 352 Comparisons with previous periods, 65
Building Societies Act 1986, 387 Composite cost unit, 243
Building societies deposits, 387 Compound Annual Rate (CAR), 304
Bullet repayment loan, 406 Compound annual rate of interest, 386
INDEX
Compound interest, 303, 304 Depreciation charge, 157

Compounding, 306 Depreciation methods, 161
Computerised inventory files, 130 Despatch note, 110
Computerised wage system, 139 Dialogue boxes, 30
Computers, 29 Differential piecework, 146
Computers and inventory control, 129 Digital Versatile Disc (DVD), 32
Confidentiality, 96 Direct costs, 13, 16, 38, 39, 158
Contingency funding, 351 Direct expenses, 39, 158, 163
Continuous stocktaking, 123 Direct labour costs, 39, 147
Contribution, 198 Direct material, 39
Contribution breakeven charts, 281 Direct materials cost, 39
Contribution charts, 277, 281 Direct method of reapportionment, 178, 179
Contribution/sales (C/S) ratio, 271 Discounted cash flow (DCF), 312
Control, 6 Discounted payback period, 321
Control account, 224 Discounting, 306
Control cycle, 67 Discounting formula, 307
A Controllable, 77 Discretionary bonuses, 146
Controllable cost, 44 Discretionary costs, 160
C Controllable variances, 77 Distribution overhead, 41
C Controls, 343
Cost accounting, 10, 11
Dividends, 384
Document reading methods, 30
A Cost accounts, 11
Cost behaviour, 48
DVD, 32
Cost behaviour and levels of activity, 48

Cost behaviour principles, 48
Economic and financial environment, 346
G Cost bookkeeping systems, 225 Effective interest rates, 305
Efficiency of usage variance, 74
Cost centres, 15, 163
L Cost classification, 38 Efficiency ratio, 151, 152
EFTPOS, 31
O Cost codes, 19
Cost elements, 16, 17 Electronic Point of Sale (EPOS), 31
B Cost ledger control account, 226
Cost of capital, 307, 312
E-mail dangers, 90
E-mails, 90
A Cost of sales control account, 224 Employee record card, 138
EOQ (Economic Order Quantity), 127, 129
Cost per service unit, 244
L Cost plus pricing, 238 Exception reporting, 76
Cost unit, 14 Exceptional items, 332
Cost variance, 73
B Costing system, 234 Factory cost, 14
Costs in outline, 12 Favourable variances, 70
O Cost-volume-profit (CVP) analysis, 270, 283
Covenants, 407
Feedback control, 77
X Credit note, 124

Feedforward control, 77
Fiduciary relationship, 397
Cumulative present value factors, 309
. Cumulative weighted average pricing, 115
FIFO – First in, first out, 114, 115
Finance company deposits, 387
C Current assets, 330
Current liabilities, 330
Financial accounts, 10, 65
Finished good, 106
O Cyclical variations, 368 Finished goods control account, 224
Fixed costs, 16, 43, 50, 289
M Daily time sheets, 140 Flexed budget, 67, 68
Data input, 29 Flexible budgets, 67
Data processing, 28 Forecasts, 65
Data Protection Act 1998, 96
Data Protection Registrar, 97 G ilts, 389
Data subjects, 96, 97 Going concern, 337
Data users, 96, 97 Good faith, 397
Debtor/creditor relationship, 397 Goods received note, 110
Decision making process, 6 Government securities, 389
Decision making situations, 294 Group bonus schemes, 147
Decision-making, 6 Guarantees, 401
Delivery note, 110
Depreciation, 160
INDEX
Leading and lagging, 361

Hard disks, 31 Letters, 88
High interest cheque accounts, 387 LIFO – Last in, first out, 114, 116
High interest deposit accounts, 387 Limiting factor, 292
High street bank deposits, 387 Line graphs, 94
High-low method, 56 Liquidity, 389
Historigram, 366 Living individual, 96
Holding inventory, 113 Loan interest, 406
Holiday pay, 147 Local authority stocks, 390
House style, 87
Human Resources, 137
Machine hour rate, 185
Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR), 30
Icons, 30 Make/buy-in problems, 294
Idle time, 143, 152 Make/buy-in problems and limiting factors, 296
Idle time ratio, 152 Management accounting, 11
Idle time record card, 143
Incentives, 145
Management accounts, 10
Management information, 4, 8
A
Index, 363
Index numbers, 363
Management information features, 23, 25 C
Management information sources, 8
Index points, 364 Management information system, 33 C
Index-linked stocks, 389
Indirect costs, 15, 16, 40, 172
Manufacturing cost, 14
Margin of safety, 272 A
Indirect expenses, 158, 163 Marginal cost, 198
Indirect labour, 147 Marginal costing, 198, 201, 203, 209
Information technology, 28
Insurance against the possibility of
Marginal costing and absorption costing
compared, 201
G
non-payment, 400
Interest, 303, 386
Marginal costing principles, 199 L
Marginal costing versus absorption costing,
Interlocking system, 225 203 O
Internal rate of return (IRR) method – graphical
approach, 315
Mark-up, 235
Material classifications, 104 B
Internet, 97
Inventory code, 130
Materials account, 224
Materials control account, 224
A
Inventory costs, 124
Investigating variances, 76
Materials requisition note, 122 L
Materials returned note, 122
Investment centre, 15 Materials transfer note, 123
IRR, 316, 318 Maternity leave, 147
IRR method of discounted cash flow, 314 Maximum level, 126 B
Irregular items, 332 Medium and long-term loans, 405
Memo, 89 O
Job, 235 Memorandum, 89
Memory stick, 32
X
Job account, 236
Job card, 141 Minimum level, 126 .
Mixed cost, 53
Job costing, 17, 140, 235
Job costing and computerisation, 237 Money-market deposit account, 388 C
Job time, 140
Joint costs, 258, 263
Monitor, 32
Mortgagor/mortgagee relationship, 397 O
Joint products, 258 Mouse, 30
Moving averages, 369
M
Just-in-time (JIT) inventory policy, 113
Multiplicative model, 374
Keyboard, 30 N et present value (NPV) method, 312

Nominal interest rates, 304
L abour, 136 Non-controllable, 77
Labour costs, 136 Non-controllable variances, 77
Labour efficiency, 151 Non-current assets, 156
Labour hour rate, 185 Non-financial comparisons, 66
Labour turnover, 150 Non-production overheads, 190
Labour turnover rate, 150 Non-relevant variable costs, 289
Laser printers, 32 Normal loss, 251
INDEX
NPV, 312 Profit/volume (P/V) chart, 281

Profits and cash flows, 333
O bjective, 6, 66
Profit-sharing schemes, 147
Project appraisal – payback method, 319
OCR, 31 Public sector, 386
Operating cycle, 330 Pull-down menu, 30
Operation card, 141 Purchase invoice, 110
Operational cash flow, 333 Purchase order form, 108
Opportunity cost, 288 Purchase price/efficiency of usage variance, 74
Optical Character Recognition (OCR), 31 Purchase requisition form, 108
Optimal cash balance, 384 Purchasing department, 108
Optimal production, 292 Purchasing documentation, 108
Option deposits, 387 Purchasing procedures, 107
Overdraft, 397, 401
Overdraft facility, 384
Overdraft facility for day to day trading, 403 Quantity index, 363
A Overhead allocation, 164
Overhead apportionment, 175
C Overheads, 15, 18, 40, 172
Raw materials, 105
Overtime, 142, 144, 149 Reapportionment, 178
C Overtime premium, 145 Reasons for cost variances, 76
Receipts and payments format, 353
A Overtrading, 404
Reducing balance method, 161
Regular items, 332
Passwords, 97 Relevant cost, 288
G Paternity leave, 147
Payback period, 318
Relevant cost of labour, 291
Relevant cost of materials, 290
L Pen drive, 32
Periodic stocktaking, 123
Reorder level, 125
Reorder quantity, 127
O Periodic weighted average pricing, 115 Repayment terms, 400
Perpetual inventory system, 121 Replacement costs of labour turnover, 150
B Perpetuity, 310 Reports, 90
A Personal data, 96 Responsibility accounting, 43, 76, 165

Personal guarantee, 401 Responsibility centres, 15, 165
L Pie charts, 93
Piecework, 146
Retail Prices Index, 363
Retailing business, 331
Piecework ticket, 141 Return, 391
Planning, 6 Revenue centre, 15
B Precautionary motive, 384 Revenue expenditure, 156, 157
Predetermined overhead absorption rate, 186, Revenue items, 332
O 193 Revolving facility, 397
X Present value of a perpetuity, 310

Present value of an annuity, 309
Risk, 390
Role of the trainee accountant, 12
. Present value tables, 308
Present values, 307
Route cards, 142
C Preventative costs of labour turnover, 151

Price index, 363
Salaried labour, 142
O Prime cost, 39 Salary, 138
Sales revenue at breakeven point, 272
Principles of discounted cash flow, 306
M Printers, 32 Sales revenue variance, 71
Privacy, 96 Scatter diagrams, 94
Process costing, 18, 250 Scrap value, 256
Process costing features, 251 Seasonal fluctuations, 65
Process costing framework, 251 Seasonal variations, 367, 373, 374
Product costs, 184, 191 Security for a loan, 400
Production costs, 13 Selling and distribution overheads, 191
Production overhead, 40 Selling overhead, 41, 172
Production overhead control account, 224 Selling price variance, 72
Production volume ratio, 152 Semi-fixed, 53
Productivity ratio, 151 Semi-variable, 53
Profit centre, 15 Sensitive data, 97
Profit maximisation, 276 Service costing, 18, 243
INDEX
Sickness, 147 Total direct cost variance, 73

Signing-in book, 139 Total sales revenue variance, 71
Simple interest, 303 Touch screens, 31
Special dividend payment, 384 Trainee accountant, 12
Speculative motive, 384 Transactions motive, 384
Split-off point, 258, 263 Treasury management, 342, 346
Staff training, 147 Trend, 367
Standard cost, 115 Types of communication, 87
Standard reports, 90
Step costs, 51
Step down method of reapportionment, 178,
U ncommitted facility, 397
181 Under absorbed, 189
Stepped-fixed cost, 51 Under/over absorption of overheads, 189
Stock code, 122 Unexceptional items, 332
Stocktaking, 123, 124
Storage, 31 V ariable costs, 16, 43, 51, 289
Stores credit note, 124 Variance reports, 70 A
Stores debit note, 124
Stores ledger accounts, 121
Variances, 67, 70
Variances – reasons for, 76
C
Stores ledger control account, 224
Straight line method, 161
VDU, 32 C
Voice recognition, 31
Strategy, 6
Subject access provision, 97
A
W ages control account, 224
Tables, 92 Wastage control measures, 113
Weekly time sheets, 140 G
Target profits, 273
Term loan, 397
Windows, 30
Word-processed, 91 L
The further processing decision, 261
The payroll accounting system, 137
Work in progress, 106
Work in progress control account, 224
O
Time clock, 142
Time series, 366
Working capital, 330, 396
Working capital cycle, 331
B
Time series analysis, 366
Time sheet, 140
A
Time value of money, 302 Yearlings, 390 L
Time-saved bonus, 146
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
INDEX
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
NOTES
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M
FOUNDATIONS IN ACCOUNTANCY MA2 MANAGING COSTS AND FINANCES (03/16)
Review form
Name: Address:
How have you used this Interactive Text? During the past six months do you recall
(Tick one box only) seeing/receiving any of the following?
(Tick as many boxes as are relevant)
Home study (book only)
Our advertisement in ACCA Student
On a BPP in-centre course
Accountant
On a BPP online course Our advertisement in Teach Accounting
On a course with another college
Other advertisement
Other
Our brochure with a letter through the post A
Why did you decide to purchase this Interactive
Text? (Tick one box only)
ACCA E-Gain email C
Have used BPP Texts in the past
BPP email
C
Our website www.bpp.com
Recommendation by friend/colleague
Which (if any) aspects of our advertising do you
A
Recommendation by a lecturer at college
find useful?
Saw advertising (Tick as many boxes as are relevant)
Other Prices and publication dates of new editions
G
Which BPP products have you used? Information on Interactive Text content L
Text Kit i-Pass Passcards Facility to order books O
None of the above
B
Your ratings, comments and suggestions would be appreciated on the following areas
Very useful Useful Not useful
A
Introductory section (How to use this Interactive Text) L
Key terms
Examples
Questions and answers
B
Fast forwards
O
Quick quizzes X
Exam alerts .
Practice Question Bank C
Practice Answer Bank
O
Index
Structure and presentation
M
Icons
Excellent Good Adequate Poor

Overall opinion of this Interactive Text
Do you intend to continue using BPP products? Yes No

Please note any further comments and suggestions/errors on the reverse of this page.
The author of this edition can be emailed at: accaqueries@bpp.com
Please return this form to: Head of ACCA & FIA Programmes, BPP Learning Media Ltd, FREEPOST,
London, W12
FOUNDATIONS IN ACCOUNTANCY MA2 MANAGING COSTS AND FINANCES (03/16)
Review form (continued)

Please note any further comments and suggestions/errors below
A
C
C
A
G
L
O
B
A
L
B
O
X
.
C
O
M

MA2 BPP Study Text

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MA2 BPP Study Text

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MA2 BPP Study Text

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MA2 - BPP Study Text - 2017

Managing Costs and Finances

FOR EXAMS FROM 1 SEPTEMBER 2016 TO 31 AUGUST 2017

First edition November 2011 A note about copyright

O traceable sustainable sources. secondhand.

Part A Management information

Part C Costing techniques

Part D Decision making A

Part E Cash management

Helping you to pass

BPP Learning Media – ACCA Approved Content Provider

The PER alert!

Using the Syllabus and Study Guide B

Study Guide Links the chapter content with ACCA guidance.

A Fast Forward Summarises the content of main chapter headings,

B Question Gives you essential practice of techniques covered in the

C A quick test of your knowledge of the main topics in the

M Found at the back of the Interactive Text with more exam-

How to Use this Interactive Text

What MA2 is about

Brought forward knowledge

Approach to examining the syllabus

Syllabus and Study guide

The Computer Based Examination

How does CBE work?

Tackling Multiple Choice Questions

1 Management information A1 (a), (b)

Study Guide Intellectual level

1 Management information requirements

(a) Describe the purpose of management information: planning, K

(c) Describe the nature, source and importance of both financial K

L block, faceted and mnemonic coding methods)

CHAPTER 1 // MANAGEMENT INFORMATION

In order to make the pricing decision, management need information about

In order to decide which decision to make, management need cost

In order to plan production, management need information about: G

In a most basic sense, planning means formulating ways of proceeding.

Step 1 Establish an objective or identify a problem.

A  An objective is the aim or goal of an organisation.

CHAPTER 1 // MANAGEMENT INFORMATION

1.2 The qualities of good management information

Timely The information should be available when it is needed.

2.1 Internal sources of management information

CHAPTER 1 // MANAGEMENT INFORMATION

B 3.1 Financial accounts and management accounts

O (b) Management accounts are prepared for internal managers of an organisation.

C Financial accounts Management accounts

M use and detail the performance of an organisation over

CHAPTER 1 // MANAGEMENT INFORMATION

Financial accounts Management accounts

The format of published financial accounts is The format of management accounts is

Most financial accounting information is of a monetary Management accounts incorporate non- A

Performance Objective 2 requires you to make appropriate use of IT applications to communicate

4 The role of the trainee accountant

A (b) To review the costs of products.

CHAPTER 1 // MANAGEMENT INFORMATION

PEN - UNIT COST CARD

6.2 Cost units

M QUESTION Cost units